Banner Student / User Guide / 8.9

Banner Student

User Guide

Release 8.11/9.3.2

December 2016

Without limitation: Ellucian®, Banner®, Colleague®, and Luminis® are trademarks of the Ellucian group of companies that are registered in the

U.S. and certain other countries; and Ellucian Advance™, Ellucian Course Signals™, Ellucian Degree Works™, Ellucian PowerCampus™,

Ellucian® CRM Recruit , Ellucian SmartCall™, are also trademarks of the Ellucian group of companies. Other names may be trademarks of their

respective owners.

Contains confidential and proprietary information of Ellucian and its subsidiaries. Use of these materials is limited to Ellucian licensees, and is

subject to the terms and conditions of one or more written license agreements between Ellucian and the licensee in question.

In preparing and providing this publication, Ellucian is not rendering legal, accounting, or other similar professional services. Ellucian makes no

claims that an institution's use of this publication or the software for which it is provided will guarantee compliance with applicable federal or state

laws, rules, or regulations. Each organization should seek legal, accounting, and other similar professional services from competent providers of

the organization's own choosing.

Prepared by: Ellucian

4375 Fair Lakes Court

Fairfax, Virginia 22033

United States of America

Banner Student User Guide | Contents

Contents

System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Application Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Functions and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Application Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Flow Narrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Validation Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Overall System Validation Forms Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Validation Forms Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Required System Values for Validation Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Validation Forms Menu System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Validation Forms System Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Process Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Banner Student System Overview Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Communication Plan Process Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Establish Communication Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Establish Materials and Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Assign Materials to Communication Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Processing Communication Plans Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Processing Communication Plans in Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Building Communication Plans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Test Score Restrictions and Prerequisites Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Banner Student User Guide | Contents

Test Score Restrictions and Prerequisites Process Flow Narrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Block Scheduling Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Block Scheduling Process Flow Narrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Schedule25 Process Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Run Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Initial Setup of Schedule25 Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Electronic Prospects Data Load Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Concurrent Curricula Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Loading Packages/Procedures from Temporary to Production Tables (SRKPREL)

Process Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Creating Person Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Evaluating the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Inserting Recruiting Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Updating Recruiting Information - Part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Updating Recruiting Information - Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Admissions Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Admissions Process Flow Narrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

External Data Load Process Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Registration Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Registration Process Flow Narrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Student Right to Know Process Flows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Persistence Reporting Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Persistence/Sport Reporting Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Completion/Graduation Reporting Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Completion/Graduation/Sport Reporting Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Fee Assessment Process Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Rules Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Refunding Rules Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Open Learning Registration Process Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Banner Student User Guide | Contents

Section Set-up Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Data Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Overall Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Rules Use Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Rule Tables Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Return of Title IV Funds Process Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Academic History Repeat Processing Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Academic History Repeat Processing Flow Narrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Academic History End of Term Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Academic History End of Term Flow Narrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Academic History Graduation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Academic History Graduation Flow Narrative. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Graduation Application Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Electronic Gradebook Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

National Student Clearinghouse (NSC) Process Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Establish Time Status Rules and NSC Equivalencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Establish Term Control for Calculating Time Status and Academic History FICE Code

Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Calculate Time Status and Update/Insert Time Status History Records. . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Report to NSC (National Student Clearinghouse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

XML Transcript Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Course Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Course Catalog Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Building or Changing a Course Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Course Contact Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Open Learning Registration and Course Catalog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Set Up New Course for Traditional and Open Learning Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Update Existing Course for Open Learning Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Creating a Continuing Education Catalog Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Maintaining Faculty Workload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Banner Student User Guide | Contents

Building Registration Restrictions on Courses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Building Schedule Restrictions on Courses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Mutually Exclusive Courses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Repeat/Equivalent Course Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Tuition Fee Waivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Banner Course Data Extract Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Catalog Extract and Load Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Catalog Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Class Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Class Schedule Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Create Term Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Creating Instructors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Building Available Rooms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Creating Campus Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Create Future Term Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Building/Changing Course Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Meeting Time/Room Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Session Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Duplicate Section Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Create Duration Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Create Instructional Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Open Learning and Class Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Set up an Open Learning Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Update an Existing Section to be an Open Learning Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Set Up Non-Open Learning Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Set Up Section Fee Assessment, Extension, and Refunding Rules for Open Learning

Courses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Faculty Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Maintaining Section Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Reviewing Course Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Reviewing Building/Room Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Producing a Schedule of Classes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Reviewing Enrollment Counts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Schedule Contact Hours. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Section Contact Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Section Weekly Contact Hours. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Banner Student User Guide | Contents

Creating Cross List Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Schedule Module Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Create Section Contract Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Creating/Modifying Restrictions on Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Course Fee Assessment Rules by Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Tuition & Fee Analysis by Course. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Tuition Fee Waivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Reserved Seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Maintain Academic Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Maintain Attendance Accounting Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Schedule Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Block Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Auto Scheduling Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Purge Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Class Schedule Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

General Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

General Person Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Establish Person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Common Matching Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Maintaining Multiple Telephone Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Enter Biographic Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

Maintain Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

Enter Emergency Contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

Enter Medical Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

Maintain International Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

Add/Remove Holds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

Schedule Appointments/Track Contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

Support Services Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Produce List of Persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Purge Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Banner Student Interface to Banner Human Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

General Person Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Creating a Population Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Banner Student User Guide | Contents

Faculty Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Faculty Load Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Faculty Workload Rules Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Faculty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Faculty Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Faculty Contract Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Multiple Contracts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Automatic PIN Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Automated Faculty Load and Compensation Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Faculty Security Menu and Term Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Faculty Security Process Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Purge Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

Banner Student Interface to Banner Human Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

Faculty Load Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

Location Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Location Management Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Housing Room Assignment Using Building and Room Genders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Housing Module Deposits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

Housing Module Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Batch Scheduling of Housing Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

Assignment Roll Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Housing Letter Generation and Population Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Purge Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

Location Management Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

Creating a Population Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

Recruiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

Recruiting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

Add/Maintain Prospects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

Add/Maintain Test Scores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

Add/Maintain High School Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

Add/Maintain Prior College Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

Review Prospects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

Banner Student User Guide | Contents

Assign/Review Recruiter's Appointments and Visits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

Establish Source, High School, or College . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

Build Statistical Information for a Source or Background Institution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

Review Prospects and Visits by Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

Produce System-Generated Letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

Analyze Recruiting Enrollment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

Print/Delete Recruits Who Did Not Apply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Appointment Scheduling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Communication Plan Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

Electronic Prospects Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

Data Load and Match Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484

Search and Test Score Data Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

Banner Recruiter Integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615

Processing Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

Event Rules that Support Recruiter Funnel Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620

Banner Recruiter Integration Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631

Processing Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632

Crosswalk Conversion Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640

Electronic Admissions Application Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645

Data Loaded to Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654

Manage the Integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669

Extend the Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670

Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671

Recruiting Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678

Admissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679

Admissions Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679

Build Admission Credentials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679

Build Automated Decision Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680

Review Decision Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685

Create Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685

Application Preference Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685

Enter/Calculate Decision on Applicant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686

Multiple Applicant Acceptance Decisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686

Add/Maintain Test Scores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689

Banner Student User Guide | Contents

Add/Maintain High School Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689

Add/Maintain Prior College Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689

Maintain Guardian Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690

Add Student Through Quick Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690

Review Application Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690

Letter Generation—Letters, Paragraphs, and Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690

Build Curriculum Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698

Concurrent Curricula Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699

Mass Entry Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699

Study Path Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699

Duplicating An Admissions Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699

Admissions Application Set-Up Procedures for Banner Self-Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700

Procedures Used in Self-Service Admissions Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716

Routines Used in Self-Service Admissions Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718

Rule Groups Used in Self-Service Admissions Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722

Delivered Rule Groups Used in Self-Service Admissions Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723

Cross-Reference Labels Used in Self-Service Admissions Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . 733

Include Cell Phone with Self-Service Admissions Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740

Processing Self-Service Admissions Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742

Update Null SSN during Admissions Push Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746

Manually Matching, Verifying, and Pushing Electronic Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747

Quick Start Set-Up Procedures for Banner Student Self-Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753

Using Accept Admissions Offer in Self-Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759

Admissions and Curriculum Processing in Banner Self-Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764

Setting Up Curriculum Processing for Self-Service Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766

TS 189 Upload (SAR189U) of Electronic Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769

EDI Set-Up Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770

Procedures Used in EDI Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780

Routines Used in EDI Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782

Rule Groups Used in EDI Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787

Delivered Rule Groups Used in EDI Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788

Cross-Reference Labels Used in EDI Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800

Receiving EDI Applications (to Temporary Tables). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804

Processing EDI Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

Manually Matching, Verifying, and Pushing Electronic Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809

Race/Ethnicity Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812

AMCAS (American Medical College Application Service) Load Procedures Using

SRTLOAD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818

Banner Student User Guide | Contents

AMCAS Admissions Action File Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874

Selective Admissions - Communication Load and Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885

Selective Admissions - Secondary School Tracking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887

Selective Admissions - Admissions Rating/Batch Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891

Data Load and Match Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893

Selective Admissions - Search and Test Score Data Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893

Selective Admissions - Regionalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894

Selective Admissions - Process Geographic Regions, Administrators, and Ratings . . 898

Purge Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902

Admissions Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902

Creating a Population Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903

General Student . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905

General Student Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905

Review/Change Current Student Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905

Concurrent Curricula Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906

Mass Entry Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906

Study Path Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906

Athletic Compliance Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906

Student Right to Know Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923

Assign Cooperative Education Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933

Assign Education Opportunity Programs and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933

Establish Student Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933

Class Standing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933

Add/Maintain Test Scores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934

Add/Maintain High School Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934

Add/Maintain Prior College Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934

Review Student Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935

Review Veterans Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935

Cooperative Education (Co-op) Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935

Automatic PIN Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938

Purge Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939

General Student Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940

Creating a Population Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940

Banner Student User Guide | Contents

Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942

Registration Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942

Registration Tables to be Updated Each Semester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942

Concurrent Curricula Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943

Mass Entry Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943

Study Path Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943

Mainline Edit Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944

Registration Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947

Enrollment Count Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953

Create Term Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958

Set Up Registration Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958

Define Registration Statuses for Student and Course . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960

Student Registration Status and Course Registration Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960

Student Levels Versus Course Levels in Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962

Registration Course Error Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962

Build Tuition and Fees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963

Assess Additional Fees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964

Assess Tuition and Fees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965

Registration Fee Assessment Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965

Registration Fee Assessment and Open Learning Courses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029

Registration Fee Assessment and Study Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039

Registration Fee Assessment Combined Fee Assessment Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1040

Register Students . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042

Open Learning Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044

Enrollment Verification Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053

Schedule/Invoice/Statement Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060

Produce Student's Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064

Unsatisfied Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064

Produce Student's Bill. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065

View Student's Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065

Produce Course Request Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065

Produce Course Request Update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065

Produce Class Roster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065

Produce Headcount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066

View Class Roster/Enter Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066

Last Date of Attendance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066

Handle Student's Registered, Not Paid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067

Banner Student User Guide | Contents

Process Canceled Classes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067

Faculty Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067

Waitlisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072

Automated Waitlisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074

Drop Last Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101

Drop/Withdrawal Processing for Connected Courses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101

Rules and Use of the Term Control Form (SOATERM) in Repeat Processing . . . . . . . 1111

National Student Clearinghouse (NSC) Reporting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115

National Student Loan Data System (NSLDS) Student Status Confirmation Report

(SSCR) Roster File Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145

150 Percent Subsidized Stafford Usage Limit Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1158

Registration Set-Up Procedures for Banner Student Self-Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221

Display Term Date Ranges in Self-Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227

Registration Time-Ticketing in Banner Student Self-Service and Banner Voice

Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228

Setting up Third-Party Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235

Setting up Alternative PIN Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236

Student Registration Permit-Override Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239

Registration Restrictions and Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1244

Implementing Area Prerequisite Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255

Registration Prerequisite Checking using DegreeWorks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1260

Return of Title IV Funds Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1272

Student Centric Period Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283

Gainful Employment Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301

Course Program of Study Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328

Purge Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339

Setting Up Sleep/Wake Processes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340

Registration Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343

Creating a Population Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1344

Academic History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1346

Academic History Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1346

Enter Pre-Banner Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1346

Concurrent Curricula Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1346

Mass Entry Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1346

Study Path Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1347

Manual Curriculum Roll Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1347

Banner Student User Guide | Contents

Open Learning Registration and Academic History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360

Build Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360

Enter Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361

Roll Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361

Build/Change Term Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368

Change/Maintain Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369

Automated Incomplete Grade Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369

Build Academic Standing Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383

Calculate Academic Standing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383

Produce Grade Mailers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1388

Add/Change Degrees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389

National Student Clearinghouse (NSC) Degree Verification Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389

Enter/Maintain Transfer Course Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390

Add/Change Transcript Events and Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390

Enter Qualifying Papers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390

Review Academic History Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1391

Print Transcript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1391

Transcript Population Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1402

Transcript Request Purge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403

EDI Transcript Download Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1404

EDI Transcript Upload Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1409

Establishing Crosswalks to Banner Values for Incoming EDI Transcript Data (TS130) 1418

XML Transcript Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1425

Web Transcript Request Processing Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443

eTranscripts Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1447

Credits and Notations on Permanent Record. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491

Repeat/Equivalent Course Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1494

Expanded Credit Hours and GPA Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1518

Calculate GPA Using SHRCGPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1528

Calculate GPA by Student Centric Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1529

Calculate Campus GPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1529

Recalculate GPA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1531

End of Term . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1531

IPEDS Report Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1532

Academic Standing Rules Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1568

Progress Evaluation Processing and Combined Academic Standing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1570

Satisfactory Academic Progress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1574

Student Type Update Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1578

Banner Student User Guide | Contents

Electronic Gradebook - Define Sub-Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1582

Electronic Gradebook - Enter Sub-Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1588

Electronic Gradebook - View Sub-Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1589

Setting Up Sleep/Wake Processes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1590

Creating a Population Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1591

Purge Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1592

Transfer Articulation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1593

Transfer Articulation Validation Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1593

Transfer Articulation Institution Creation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1593

Transfer Articulation Grading Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1593

Creating the Transfer Institution Courses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1594

Creating the Transfer Institution Equivalency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1597

Transfer Course Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1598

Transfer Course Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1599

Performing Transfer Articulation for Students. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1599

Graduation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601

Graduation Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601

Self-Service Graduation Application Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609

Graduate Student Tracking Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1630

Graduate Student Tracking Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1630

Graduate Student Tracking Implementation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1635

Academic History Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640

Banner Student System Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642

Banner Student System Management Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642

Value-Based Security and Personally Identifiable Information Security Using Fine-

Grained Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642

Banner Student Elevate Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1698

Using Elevate and Banner with FGAC and VBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1700

Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1736

Interfaces Used With Banner Student . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1736

Banner Accounts Receivable Interface to Banner Finance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1736

Banner Student User Guide | Contents

Banner Accounts Receivable Interface to Banner Financial Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1736

Banner Student Interface to Banner Advancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1736

Banner Student Interface to Banner Human Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1737

Appendix: List Reports Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1742

List of Reports and Processes by Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1742

Appendix: EDI Job Aid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1743

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1743

Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1745

Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1745

Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1746

Participants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1746

Part 1: Specifying Installation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1746

Part 2: Modifying the Delivered Mappings, Interpolations, and Translations . . . . . . . . 1747

Part 3: Building the Translation File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1748

Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1749

Worksheet A: Country Codes #26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1749

Worksheet B: State/Province Codes #156 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1749

Worksheet C: High School Code Qualifier #66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1750

Worksheet D: College Code Qualifier #66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1751

Worksheet E: Curriculum Code Qualifier (1 of 2) #66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1752

Worksheet E: Curriculum Code Qualifier (2 of 2) #66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1752

Worksheet Data Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1754

Worksheet 1: Explanation of Mapping Data Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1754

Flat File Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1762

Worksheets 2.10-2.62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1766

Worksheet 2.10: EDI-PAPER-COPY #641 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1766

Worksheet 2.12: EDI-SEX #1068 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1767

Worksheet 2.14: EDI-MARITAL-STAT #1067 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1768

Worksheet 2.16: EDI-ETHNICITY #1109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1769

Worksheet 2.18: EDI-CITIZ-STATUS #1066 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1770

Banner Student User Guide | Contents

Worksheet 2.20: EDI-RESIDENCY #1073 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1772

Worksheet 2.22: EDI-ENROLLED-NOW (1 of 2) #641. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1773

Worksheet 2.24: EDI-HS-CODE #67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1774

Worksheet 2.26: EDI-HS-GRAD-TYPE #641 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1775

Worksheet 2.28: EDI-PD-SCHOOL #67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1776

Worksheet 2.30: EDI-PD-CODE and EDI-DEG-CODE #1126 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1777

Worksheet 2.32: EDI-SES-CODE #1139 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1779

Worksheet 2.34: EDI-SES-STUDENT-LEVL #1131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1781

Worksheet 2.36: EDI-SES-STATUS #641 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1783

Worksheet 2.38: EDI-SUM-CREDIT-TYPE and EDI-CRS-CRED-TYPE #1141. . . . . . 1784

Worksheet 2.40: EDI-SUM-LEVEL-CODE and EDI-CRS-LVL-CODE #1142. . . . . . . . 1785

Worksheet 2.42: EDI-SUM-EXC-GPA #1073 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1786

Worksheet 2.44: EDI-SUM-GPA-MIN and EDI-SUM-GPA-MAX #740 and #741 . . . . . 1787

Worksheet 2.46: EDI-CRS-CRED-BASIS #1147 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1788

Worksheet 2.48: EDI-CRS-GRADE-QUALIFIER #1148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1789

Worksheet 2.50: EDI-CRS-RPT-CNT #1150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1790

Worksheet 2.52: EDI-DEG-HONORS #641 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1791

Worksheet 2.54: EDI-DEG-FOS-TYPE #1153 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1792

Worksheet 2.56: EDI-DEG-FOS-CODE #67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1793

Worksheet 2.58: EDI-SCH-CODE #67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1794

Worksheet 2.60: SOBSEQN SEQUENCE NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1795

Worksheet 2.62: ELECTRONIC STATUS CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1796

Appendix: Concurrent Curricula Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1798

Using Concurrent Curricula Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1798

Processing Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1798

Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1799

Details of Concurrent Curricula. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1808

Curricula Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1823

Curriculum API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1828

Conversion of Curriculum Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1840

Determining Which Curriculum Rows are Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1844

Creating and Updating Curriculum Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1848

Purging Curriculum and Field of Study Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1853

Archiving Curriculum and Field of Study Rows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1853

Banner Views Used in Concurrent Curricula Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1854

Banner Student User Guide | Contents

View Examples for Recruiting, Admissions, and Academic History Current and Active

Curriculum Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1878

View Examples for General Student Current and Active Curriculum Records . . . . . . . 1879

Using the Recruiting Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1879

Using the Admissions Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1880

Using the General Student Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1880

Using the Academic History Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1880

Banner Student Admissions Self-Service and Curriculum Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1881

Setting Up Curriculum Processing for Self-Service Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1883

Appendix: Mass Entry Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1887

Using Mass Entry Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1887

Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1887

Admissions Mass Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1892

General Student Mass Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1893

Athletic Compliance Mass Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1893

Registration Mass Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1896

Graduation Mass Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1899

Audit of Mass Entry Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1902

Batch Update Process for Mass Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1903

Purge Process for Mass Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1904

Mass Entry Column Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1904

Appendix: Study Path Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1930

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1930

Set up Study Paths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1930

Name Study Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1931

Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1933

Admissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1933

General Student . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1935

Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1938

Use Study Paths with Fee Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1942

Academic History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1952

Update Curriculum and Study Path Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1954

Banner Student User Guide | Contents

Delete Study Path Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1955

Delete Curriculum Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1956

Study Path Conversion Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1957

susgrstsp_applicant.sql (Admissions). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1957

susgrstsp_enroll.sql (Enrollment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1958

Banner Views Used with Study Path Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1959

Student Study Path Name View (SOVSPNM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1959

Student Study Path View (SGVSTSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1960

Student Study Path Name for Fee Assessment Audit View (SOVFSPN). . . . . . . . . . . 1960

Use Study Paths in Self-Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1961

Set up Study Paths in Self-Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1961

Web Pages Used with Study Paths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1962

Banner Student User Guide | System Overview

System Overview

This chapter includes the following topics:

• Banner Student application summary

• functions and features of Banner Student by module

• user guide chapter organization

• product application process flow and flow narrative

Application Summary

Banner® software products support the integrated flow of information throughout your

institution to assist you in resource management. The Banner® product suite continues

this tradition with its diverse and interrelated applications.

A flexible, comprehensive solution to the problems of student administration, the Banner

Student System sets a new standard for scheduling, registration, accounts receivable,

academic history and other functions in higher education. It delivers the information you

need to better control your administrative costs, which typically represent the largest

single expenditure in your budget.

Banner Student supports the full range of functions necessary for student administration,

including: creation of catalogs; data collection for scheduling of classes, admissions,

assignment of housing, faculty workload analysis, and registration; all accounts

receivable; and academic history and degree audit reporting.

The Banner Student System benefits many of your administrative offices. To further

maximize its data availability, the Banner Student System can be fully integrated with the

Banner Finance, Banner Human Resources, Banner Advancement, and Banner Financial

Aid systems. It is also available as a comprehensive stand-alone system.

Banner places your institution at the forefront of student information technology through its

use of Oracle®--the relational database management system from Oracle Corporation--

and SQL, the standard for database access. By combining sophisticated technology with

an architecture based on user-defined rules, Banner creates an information environment

you can tailor to meet your unique requirements--without extensive technical support.

To accommodate the individual needs and preferences of your institution, Banner is

delivered in a variety of hardware environments, including AT&T, Data General, Digital,

Hewlett-Packard, IBM, NCR, Sequent, and SUN. This flexibility enables you to use your

Banner Student System with the hardware package that is right for you.

Banner Student User Guide | System Overview

Functions and Features

The Banner Student System is made up of many interactive functions. These functions are

organized into fourteen modules:

• Course Catalog enables you to define courses to be entered in the institution's catalog.

This involves compiling of data such as course title, department, credit hours,

corequisites or prerequisites, fee information, and restrictions for the course. Start and

end terms for each course are maintained, along with text to be printed on the course

bulletin.

• Class Schedule contains the data necessary to build and print a schedule of classes,

including term attributes (dates for each session within a term), and establishing a

Course Reference Number. In addition, instructors are assigned to classes, classes are

scheduled into rooms depending on the attributes needed and available, and course

sections with user defined comments are established. The Schedule module also

provides a means of "rolling" the schedule forward to the next applicable term to

decrease the data entry process. Block scheduling is maintained in this module.

• General Person supplies the means to identify both persons and non-persons, such as

third-party accounts, in the system. Identification number, name, address, and, where

applicable, biographic information are gathered and maintained. Emergency contact,

medical, and international student information are also collected for use in other

modules. Support Services such as goals, needs, and services can also be maintained.

• Faculty Load enables you to enter and maintain information including instructional and

non-instructional assignments for a faculty member or advisor. Personnel information,

such as tenure status and sabbatical dates, is maintained in this module along with

workload and contract information.

• Location Management and Housing allows for the definition of the institution's buildings

and room facilities. In addition, the Location Management and Housing module provides

a means of assigning rooms for special events, and provides a listing of available rooms

with attributes. Dormitory, meal plan, and phone assignments, as well as assessments,

may also be maintained in this module.

• Recruiting maintains information about potential recruits such as: source, intended

majors, test scores, high school and prior college information, and outside interests. It

builds statistical information about sources and a plan for producing materials, and

allows for creation of materials to be sent to prospects.

• Admissions establishes admission records and identifies items an applicant needs to

provide to continue application processing. It calculates whether an applicant can be

automatically admitted to the institution based on user defined rules. General Student

records are automatically created once an applicant has accepted and plans to attend.

Test scores, high school, and prior college information are maintained here, along with

guardian information. The Admissions module also provides the means to allow quick

entry for automatic registration eligibility.

• General Student modifies current information for students such as changes to major,

residency, and student type. It also provides a place for entering information on career

choice, including advisor, activities, and veteran information. Student classification and

cooperative information, as well as Student Right to Know information, is maintained

here.

Banner Student User Guide | System Overview

• Registration allows for creation of enrollment information for a specific term. It defines

rules determining student and course statuses, and controlling actions to be taken at

registration, such as amounts of allowable refunds. Tuition and fees policy is built in

Registration, along with rules to be used for the fee assessment algorithm. Student

schedules and bills are produced, and class rosters are maintained. It also allows for

sections to be graded and rolled into academic history.

• Accounts Receivable establishes accounts receivable controls: detail codes identifying

charges or payments; default values, methods of payment, and how credits are handled;

and messages to print on bills. The Accounts Receivable module displays term specific

tuition, housing, meal plan, and fee charges, and calculates exemptions and contracts

for eligible students. Along with maintaining account information for non-student

accounts, payments are entered here and accounts can be reviewed and updated. This

module allows for establishing installment plans for accounts and third-party contracts.

Billing and invoicing are controlled from this module, along with collection agency

assignments. Reports can be generated detailing activity of cashiers, unpaid charges for

accounts, and account transactions.

Note: This module is contained in a separate manual called the Banner

Accounts Receivable User Guide.

• Academic History enables you to build grading policies and maintain grades. Grades

are rolled to Academic History, and the system automatically checks for repeat courses.

Academic standing is calculated using user-defined rules regarding probation and

Dean's List policies. Grade mailers are produced in this module and term GPA

information is maintained here. Degrees and honors associated with each student are

entered in this module, along with information on majors, minors, and status. Transfer

course work is recorded in the Academic History module, and an automatic transfer

articulation process is available. The transcripts are also printed from here. Graduation

information, including diploma, ceremony, ceremony attendance, and graduation dress,

is maintained here.

• Curriculum, Advising and Program Planning (CAPP) builds degree program codes

establishing appropriate majors, minors, and concentrations for degree programs. All

requirements, both general (i.e., minimum GPA, minimum hours) and course specific

(i.e., humanity or social science requirement), are built in this module. Automatic

assignation of a degree program code occurs if a student meets all the requirements for

an established degree program. Non-course requirements are approved in this module.

This module is also used to assign courses to multiple requirements, and execute

compliance verification.

Note: This module is contained in a separate manual called the Banner

Student CAPP (Curriculum, Advising and Program Planing) Handbook.

• Banner Student System Management is used for data load processing and rule creation,

as well as for person and non-person system searches. The processing and use of

Value-Based Security using Fine Grained Access Control are discussed here.

These modules can be tailored to your institution using the Banner Student System's rule-

based architecture, which permits you to define your own calculation parameters and

processing rules.

Banner Student User Guide | System Overview

Application Flow

1. The Course Catalog module defines the courses offered by your institution.

2. Information about the courses is transferred to the Schedule module, where it is used

to build the schedule of classes. In turn, Schedule passes information on to

Registration to create class rosters, to Location Management for room scheduling,

and to Faculty Load for faculty workload analysis.

3. The General Person module is used to collect identification and demographic data

about persons and non-persons. The person information is used in the Faculty Load,

Admissions, and Recruiting modules.

The Support Services module receives information from the General Person module

to create goals and needs, and to monitor services which the person may have

received.

4. The Faculty Load module is used to maintain instructional and non-instructional

information pertaining to faculty members and advisors on a term and contract basis.

Information from the General Person module must be created first and is passed into

the Faculty Load module. Once the faculty members are established, and instructional

assignments are created, the information is passed to the Schedule module and may

be used in Academic History when creating committees, as well as in the General

Student module in conjunction with assistantship data.

5. The General Person information is also passed to Recruiting, which collects and

maintains information about potential recruits, such as sources, test scores, and high

school and prior college information. Information regarding intended degree, major,

department, etc., may be passed to the Admissions module when creating application

records.

6. Data from General Person is also passed to Admissions, creating applicant records.

Admissions, after establishing admission records, then passes the applicant data to

General Student and Academic History as applicable. Admissions also allows for

Quick Entry for eligible students.

7. The General Student module provides a place for changing established data for

students, such as changes in curriculum or residency. This information can be

updated by Registration and Academic History.

8. After rooms are defined in Location Management, information from the Schedule and

General Person modules is used to build room assignments. Location Management,

in turn, passes information back to Schedule. Location Management also sends data

to the Accounts Receivable module regarding room, meal, and phone assessments.

9. The Registration module interfaces with the Schedule and General Student modules

to create attributes for terms, and maintain class rosters. This information is then

passed to the Academic History module to update the student's academic records.

10. Data from the General Person, Location Management, and Registration modules is

fed into the Accounts Receivable module. Accounts Receivable not only displays

charges for housing, meals, and fees, but also establishes installment plans for third

party contracts.

11. Academic History, as noted, is updated by General Person, Admissions, and

Registration, and in turn updates Degree Audit. Grade mailers are produced in this

module.

Banner Student User Guide | System Overview

Transfer Articulation is available from the Academic History information. Information

pertaining to courses from outside institutions and the rules associated with their

acceptance are defined in this module.

12. Curriculum, Advising and Program Planning is updated by Registration and Academic

History, and is used to create degree program codes and build requirements.

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

Validation Reference

This chapter includes the following topics:

• validation forms reference for overall forms (SO%)

• validation forms cross reference

• validation forms system required values

• validation forms menu system process flow

• validation forms system reference

Overall System Validation Forms Reference

This list references the system validation forms which are used by cross-modular

Banner® Student System functional/application forms. These cross-modular forms are

designated by the “O” for “overall system use” as the second letter of the form identifier.

Validation Form Application/Functional Form

STVACPR Acceptance Practice Code

Validation Form

SOABGTA Transfer Articulation Institution

Form

STVACST Institutional Accreditation

Status Validation Form

SOABGTA Transfer Articulation Institution

Form

STVADMR Admission Request Checklist

Code Validation Form

SOAHSCH High School Information Form

SOAPCOL Prior College Form

SOATEST Test Information Form

SOISBGI Source/Background Institution

Query-Only Form

STVADMT Admission Type Code

Validation Form

SOAIDNS Person Search Detail Form

STVATYP Address Type Code Validation

Form

SOAFOLK Guardian Information Form

SOAIDNS Person Search Detail Form

SOADDRQ Address Summary Form

STVBCHR Background Inst.

Characteristic Code Validation

Form

SOABGIY Source/Background Institution

Year Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVCALD Calendar Type Code Validation

Form

SOABGTA Transfer Articulation Institution

Form

STVCAMP Campus Code Validation Form SOACURR Curriculum Rules Form

SOAPROF Campus Code Validation Form

STVCNTY County Code Validation Form SOAFOLK Guardian Information Form

SOAHSCH High School Information Form

SOAPCOL Prior College Form

SOASBGI Source or Background

Institution Base Form

SOTCNVT Tape Code Conversion Form

STVCOLL College Code Validation Form SOACURR Curriculum Rules Form

SOAIDNS Person Search Detail Form

SOAPCOL Prior College Form

SOAPCOQ Prior College Summary Form

STVCTYP Contact Type Code Validation

Form

SOAAPPT Person Appointments/Contacts

Form

STVDEGC Degree Code Validation Form SOABGIY Source/Background Institution

Year Form

SOACURR Curriculum Rules Form

SOAIDNS Person Search Detail Form

SOAPCOL Prior College Form

SOAPCOQ Prior College Summary Form

SOTCNVT Tape Code Conversion Form

STVDPLM Diploma Type Validation Form SOABGIY Source/Background Institution

Year Form

SOAHSCH High School Information Form

STVETHN Ethnic Code Validation Form SOABGIY Source/Background Institution

Year Form

SOTCNVT Tape Code Conversion Form

STVGEOD Geographic Region Division

Code Validation Form

SOAGEOR Geographic Region Rules

Form

STVGEOR Geographic Region Code

Validation Form

SOAGEOR Geographic Region Rules

Form

Validation Form Application/Functional Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVHLDD Hold Type Code Validation

Form

SOAHOLD Hold Information Form

SOQHOLD Holds Query-Only Form

STVHLWK Highest Level of Work

Validation Form

SOABGTA Transfer Articulation Institution

Form

STVHONR Institutional Honors Code

Validation Form

SOAPCOL Prior College Form

SOAPCOQ Prior College Summary Form

STVINFC Interface Validation Form SOTCNVT Tape Code Conversion Form

STVLEVL Level Code Validation Form SOACURR Curriculum Rules Form

SOAIDNS Person Search Detail Form

STVMAJR Major, Minor, Concentration

Code Validation Form

SOACURR Curriculum Rules Form

SOAIDNS Person Search Detail Form

SOAPCOL Prior College Form

SOTCNVT Tape Code Conversion Form

STVNATN Nation Code Validation Form SOAFOLK Guardian Information Form

SOAHSCH High School Information Form

SOAPCOL Prior College Form

SOASBGI Source or Background

Institution Base Form

STVORIG Originator Code Validation

Form

SOAHOLD Hold Information Form

SOQHOLD Holds Query-Only Form

STVPRGA Program Accreditation Code

Validation Form

SOABGTA Transfer Articulation Institution

Form

STVPTRM Part of Term Code Validation

Form

SOATERM Term Control Form

STVPTYP Source Contact Person Type

Code Validation Form

SOASBGI Source or Background

Institution Base Form

STVRECR Recruiter Code Validation Form SOAAPPT Person Appointments/Contacts

Form

STVRELG Religion Code Validation Form SOTCNVT Tape Code Conversion Form

STVRELT Relationship Code Validation

Form

SOAFOLK Guardian Information Form

STVRESD Residence Code Validation

Form

SOAIDNS Person Search Detail Form

Validation Form Application/Functional Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVRSLT Appointment Result Code

Validation Form

SOAAPPT Person Appointments/Contacts

Form

STVSBGI Source/Background Institution

Code Validation Form

SOAAPPT Person Appointments/Contacts

Form

SOABGIY Source/Background Institution

Year Form

SOABGTA Transfer Articulation Institution

Form

SOAHSCH High School Information Form

SOAPCOL Prior College Form

SOASBGI Source or Background

Institution Base Form

SOISBGI Source/Background Institution

Query-Only Form

STVSBJC High School Subject Validation

Form

SOAHSCH High School Information Form

STVSTAT State Code Validation Form SOAFOLK Guardian Information Form

SOAHSCH High School Information Form

SOAIDNS Person Search Detail Form

SOAPCOL Prior College Form

SOASBGI Source or Background

Institution Base Form

SOADDRQ Address Summary Form

STVSTST Student Status Code Validation

Form

SOAIDNS Person Search Detail Form

STVSTYP Student Type Code Validation

Form

SOACTRM Continuant Terms Rule Form

SOAIDNS Person Search Detail Form

SOQCTRM Continuant Terms Query Form

STVTAAU Acceptance Authority Code

Validation Form

SOABGTA Transfer Articulation Institution

Form

STVTADM Test Score Administration Type

Code Validation Form

SOATEST Test Score Information Form

SOTCNVT Tape Code Conversion Form

STVTEAC Test Accommodation

Validation Form

SOATEST Test Score Information Form

STVTEFR Test Form Validation Form SOATEST Test Score Information Form

Validation Form Application/Functional Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVTEIN Test Instrument Validation

Form

SOATEST Test Score Information Form

STVTEPR Test Purpose Validation Form SOATEST Test Score Information Form

STVTERM Term Code Validation Form SOABGTA Transfer Articulation Institution

Form

SOACTRM Continuant Terms Rule Form

SOACURR Curriculum Rules Form

SOAIDNS Person Search Detail Form

SOATERM Term Control Form

SOQCTRM Continuant Term Query Form

SOTCNVT Tape Code Conversion Form

STVTESC Test Code Validation Form SOABGIY Source/Background Institution

Year Form

SOATEST Test Information Form

STVTLVL Transfer Level Code Validation

Form

SOABGTA Transfer Articulation Institution

Form

STVTSRC Admissions Test Score Source

Code Validation Form

SOATEST Test Information Form

Validation Form Application/Functional Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

Validation Forms Cross Reference

This list indicates which validation forms validate against other validation forms.

Validation Form Validates Against Validation Forms

STVACTC Banner Student Activity Code

Validation Form

STVACCG Activity Category Validation

Form

STVACTP Activity Type Validation Form

STVATYP Address Type Code Validation

Form

STVTELE Telephone Type Validation

Form

STVCHRT Cohort Code Validation Form STVDLEV Degree Level Code Validation

Form

STVTERM Term Code Validation Form

STVCSTS Curriculum Status Validation

Form

STVAPDC Admission Application

Decision Code Validation Form

STVDEGS Degree Status Code Validation

Form

STVSTST Student Status Code Validation

Form

STVDEGC Degree Code Validation Form STVACAT Degree Award Category Code

Validation Form

STVDLEV Degree Level Code Validation

Form

STVEMPL Employer Code Validation

Form

GTVZIPC ZIP/Postal Code Validation

Form

STVNATN Nation Code Validation Form

STVSTAT State Code Validation Form

STVETHN Ethnic Code Validation Form STVACYR Academic Year Validation Form

STVETCT IPEDS Ethnic Code Validation

Form

STVINFC Interface Validation Form STVCTYP Contact Type Code Validation

Form

STVSBGI Source/Background Institution

Code Validation Form

STVTSRC Admissions Test Score Source

Code Validation Form

STVMAJR Major, Minor, Concentration

Code Validation Form

STVCIPC CIP Code Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVSBGI Source/Background Institution

Code Validation Form

STVADMR Admissions Checklist Code

Validation Form

STVSCHD Schedule Type Code Validation

Form

GTVINSM Instructional Method Validation

Form

STVSITE Site Code Validation Form GTVZIPC ZIP/Postal Code Validation

Form

STVNATN Nation Code Validation Form

STVSTAT State Code Validation Form

STVSTAT State Code Validation Form STVSITE Site Code Validation Form

STVTERM Term Code Validation Form STVACYR Academic Year Validation

Form

STVTESC Test Code Validation Form STVADMR Admissions Checklist Code

Validation Form

STVTRMT Term Type Validation Form STVTERM Term Code Validation Form

STVVTYP Visa Type Code Validation

Form

STVADMR Admissions Checklist Code

Validation Form

STVWAPP Application Type Code

Validation Form

STVADMT Admission Type Code

Validation Form

STVLEVL Level Code Validation Form

STVSTYP Student Type Code Validation

Form

STVWLTT Web Application Customized

Letter Type Validation Form

STVELMT HTML Letter Module Validation

Form

Validation Form Validates Against Validation Forms

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

Required System Values for Validation Forms

System-required data rows in Banner Student are listed below. The list is organized

alphabetically by table name. Some Banner General tables are listed first, as the values

shown are used in Banner Student processing.

GTVLFST Learner Field of Study Type Validation Form

MAJOR Major

MINOR Minor

CONCENTRATION Concentration

GTVMTYP Meeting Type Validation Form

CLAS Classroom

GTVPRNT Printer Validation Form

SHRPESE_PRNT Printer setup for

SHRPESE

Command - Not used but required for

sleep/wake

SHRPESI_PRNT Printer setup for

SHRPESI

Command - Not used but required for

sleep/wake

GTVPROC Process Name Validation Form

WEBCCAPPDEP Web Credit Card Application Deposit

Process

WEBCCAPPFEES Web Credit Card Application Fees

Process

WEBCCENROLLDEP Web Credit Card Enrollment Deposit

WEBCCEPRTREQ Web Credit Card Enrollment

Verification Charge

WEBCCGRADAPP Web Credit Card Graduation

Application Process

WEBCCREGFEES Web Credit Card Registration Fees

Process

WEBCCTRANSREQ Web Credit Card Request Process

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

GTVSCHS Scheduling Status Code Validation Form

NSM Class needs a room assignment.

1SM Class needs a room assignment and has

a preferred first choice room indicated in

the Room Name field. This code limits

the initial pool of candidate rooms in the

assignment algorithm.

WSM Class needs a room assignment and

must be assigned with the preceding

NSM or 1SM record to the same room at

the same time (cross-listed).

RSM Class is related to the preceding NSM or

1SM record and must be assigned to the

same room but not at the same days/

time.

NXM Class needs a room assignment and can

share a room with another class whose

times overlap with it (can be doubled-

booked).

1XM Class needs a room assignment, has a

preferred first choice room indicated in

the Room Name field, and can share a

room with another class whose times

overlap with it (can be double-booked).

RXM Class is related to the previous NXM or

1XM record and must be assigned to the

same room at the same or overlapping

times.

ASM Class has a room assignment that was

made manually or in another system,

such as the student information system.

AXM Class has a room assignment that was

made manually or in another system, and

the class time span overlaps part of all of

the time span of another class assigned

to the same room (double-booking or

intentional conflict).

HSM This is a set of home cross-listed classes

pre-assigned to the same room at

identical days and times.

VSM This is a set of visitor cross-listed classes

pre-assigned to the same room at

identical days and times.

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

5SM Schedule25 assigned the class a room

during a previous run.

5XM Schedule25 assigned the class a room,

and it is double-booked with another

class.

STVACAT Degree Award Category Code Validation Form

11 Elementary School Program

12 Junior High School Program

13 High School Program

21 Post Secondary Certificate/Diploma <

one year

22 Post Secondary Certificate/Diploma >

one year and < two years

23 Associate’s Degree

24 Baccalaureate Degree (Bachelor’s)

25 Post Secondary Certificate/Diploma >

two years and < four years

41 Post-Baccalaureate Certificate

(Graduate)

42 Master's Degree

43, 32 Post-Masters’s Certificate (Intermediate

Graduate)

44 Doctoral Degree - Research/Scholarship

45, 31 Doctoral Degree - Professional Practice

46 Doctoral Degree - Other

STVACTP Activity Type Validation Form

SPRTS Sports

STVACYR Academic Year Validation Form

0000 Beginning of Time

9999 End of Time

GTVSCHS Scheduling Status Code Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVADDA Administrator Assignment Data Element Validation Form

Base Table Data Element Description

Validation

Table

GORPGEO GORPGEO_GEOD_CODE Person Geod Code STVGEOD

GORPGEO GORPGEO_GEOR_CODE Person Geor Code STVGEOR

SORHSCH GORSGEO_HSCH_GEOD_CODE HSCH SBGI Geod Code STVGEOD

SORHSCH GORSGEO_HSCH_GEOR_CODE HSCH SBGI Geor Code STVGEOR

SORPCOL GORSGEO_PCOL_GEOD_CODE PCOL SBGI Geod Code STVGEOD

SORPCOL GORSGEO_PCOL_GEOR_CODE PCOL SBGI Geor Code STVGEOR

GORVISA GORVISA_VTYP_CODE Visa - Current STVVTYP

SARAATT SARAATT_ATTS_CODE Applicant Attribute Code STVATTS

SARADAP SARADAP_ADMT_CODE App Admit Code STVADMT

SARADAP SARADAP_CAMP_CODE App Camp Code STVCAMP

SARADAP SARADAP_COLL_CODE_1 App Coll Code STVCOLL

SARADAP SARADAP_DEGC_CODE_1 App Degree Code STVDEGC

SARADAP SARADAP_DEPT_CODE App Dept Code STVDEPT

SARADAP SARADAP_FULL_PART_IND App Full/Part Time Ind N/A

SARADAP SARADAP_LEVL_CODE App Level Code STVLEVL

SARADAP SARADAP_MAJR_CODE_1 App Major Code STVMAJR

SARADAP SARADAP_PROGRAM_1 App Program SMRPRLE

SARADAP SARADAP_RESD_CODE App Residence Code STVRESD

SARADAP SARADAP_RTYP_CODE App Recruit Type Code STVRTYP

SARADAP SARADAP_STYP_CODE App Student Type Code STVSTYP

SARADAP SARADAP_TERM_CODE_ENTRY Applicant Term code STVTERM

SARADAP SARADAP_LFST_CODE_1 App 1st Curric LFST

Code

GTVLFST

SARADAP2 SARADAP_LFST_CODE_2 App 2nd Curric LFST

Code

GTVLFST

SARADAP2 SARADAP_CAMP_CODE_2 App 2nd Curric Camp

Code

STVCAMP

SARADAP2 SARADAP_COLL_CODE_2 App 2nd Curric Coll

Code

STVCOLL

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

SARADAP2 SARADAP_DEGC_CODE_2 App 2nd Curr Degree

Code

STVDEGC

SARADAP2 SARADAP_DEPT_CODE_2 App 2nd Curr Dept Code STVDEPT

SARADAP2 SARADAP_LEVL_CODE_2 App 2nd Curr Level

Code

STVLEVL

SARADAP2 SARADAP_MAJR_CODE_2 App 2nd Curr Major

Code

STVMAJR

SARADAP2 SARADAP_PROGRAM_2 App 2nd Curr Program SMRPRLE

SARCHRT SARCHRT_CHRT_CODE Applicant Cohort Code STVCHRT

SORHSCH SOBSBGI_HSCH_CITY HSCH SBGI City N/A

SORHSCH SOBSBGI_HSCH_CNTY_CODE HSCH SBGI County

Code

STVCNTY

SORHSCH SOBSBGI_HSCH_EPSC_CODE HSCH SBGI EPS Code STVEPSC

SORHSCH SOBSBGI_HSCH_STAT_CODE HSCH SBGI State Code STVSTAT

SORHSCH SOBSBGI_HSCH_ZIP HSCH SBGI ZIP Code GTVZIPC

SORPCOL SOBSBGI_PCOL_CITY PCOL SBGI City N/A

SORPCOL SOBSBGI_PCOL_CNTY_CODE PCOL SBGI County

Code

STVCNTY

SORPCOL SOBSBGI_PCOL_EPSC_CODE PCOL SBGI EPS Code STVEPSC

SORPCOL SOBSBGI_PCOL_STAT_CODE PCOL SBGI State Code STVSTAT

SORPCOL SOBSBGI_PCOL_ZIP PCOL SBGI ZIP Code GTVZIPC

SORCONT SORCONT_CTYP_CODE Contact Code STVCTYP

SORHSCH SORHSCH_SBGI_CODE HSCH SBGI Code STVSBGI

SORINTS SORINTS_INTS_CODE Interest Code STVINTS

SORPCOL SORPCOL_PCOL_CODE PCOL SBGI Code STVSBGI

SORTEST SORTEST_TEAC_CODE Test Accommodation

Code

STVTEAC

SORTEST SORTEST_TEIN_CODE Test Instrument Code STVTEIN

SORTEST SORTEST_TESC_CODE Test Score Code STVTESC

SPBPERS SPBPERS_CITZ_CODE Citizenship Code STVCITZ

SPBPERS SPBPERS_ETHN_CODE Ethnic Code STVETHN

STVADDA Administrator Assignment Data Element Validation Form

Base Table Data Element Description

Validation

Table

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

SPBPERS SPBPERS_LGCY_CODE Legacy Code STVLGCY

SPBPERS SPBPERS_SEX Gender Code N/A

SPRIDEN SPRIDEN_LAST_NAME Last Name N/A

SRBRECR SRBRECR_ADMT_CODE Recruit Admit Code STVADMT

SRBRECR SRBRECR_CAMP_CODE Recruit Camp Code STVCAMP

SRBRECR SRBRECR_COLL_CODE Recruit Coll Code STVCOLL

SRBRECR SRBRECR_DEGC_CODE Recruit Degree Code STVDEGC

SRBRECR SRBRECR_DEPT_CODE Recruit Dept Code STVDEPT

SRBRECR SRBRECR_LEVL_CODE Recruit Level Code STVLEVL

SRBRECR SRBRECR_MAJR_CODE Recruit Major Code STVMAJR

SRBRECR SRBRECR_PROGRAM_1 Recruit Program SMRPRLE

SRBRECR SRBRECR_RTYP_CODE Recruit Type Code STVRTYP

SRBRECR SRBRECR_STYP_CODE Recruit Student Type

Code

STVSTYP

SRBRECR SRBRECR_TERM_CODE Recruit Term Code STVTERM

SRBRECR SRBRECR_LFST_CODE_1 Recruit 1st Curr LFST

Code

GTVLFST

SRBRECR2 SRBRECR_LFST_CODE_2 Recruit 2nd Curr LFST

Code

GTVLFST

SRBRECR2 SRBRECR_CAMP_CODE_2 Recruit 2nd Curr Camp

Code

STVCAMP

SRBRECR2 SRBRECR_COLL_CODE_2 Recruit 2nd Curr Coll

Code

STVCOLL

SRBRECR2 SRBRECR_DEGC_CODE_2 Recruit 2nd Curr Degree

Code

STVDEGC

SRBRECR2 SRBRECR_DEPT_CODE_2 Recruit 2nd Curr Dept

Code

STVDEPT

SRBRECR2 SRBRECR_LEVL_CODE_2 Recruit 2nd Curr Level

Code

STVLEVL

SRBRECR2 SRBRECR_MAJR_CODE_2 Recruit 2nd Curr Major

Code

STVMAJR

SRBRECR2 SRBRECR_PROGRAM_2 Recruit 2nd Curr

Program

SMRPRLE

STVADDA Administrator Assignment Data Element Validation Form

Base Table Data Element Description

Validation

Table

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

SRRCHRT SRRCHRT_CHRT_CODE Recruit Cohort Code STVCHRT

SRRRATT SRRRATT_ATTS_CODE Recruit Attribute Code STVATTS

STVAPLS EDI Application Source Code Validation Form

EDI Electronic Data Interchange

WEB World Wide Web

STVAPST Admissions Application Status Code Validation Form

C Complete/Ready for Review

D Decision Made

I Incomplete/Items Outstanding

STVASTD Academic Standing Code Validation Form

00 Good Standing

STVATYP Address Type Code Validation Form

MA Mailing

MA is required for data load processing

and is used by the Banner Advancement

System for Banner Student loading

processes.

PA Parents

PA is from the original system-required

values used on SOAFOLK when entering

a parent address.

BI Billing

BI is required for sample data purposes if

the Banner Finance System is installed.

STVADDA Administrator Assignment Data Element Validation Form

Base Table Data Element Description

Validation

Table

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

Note: Please note that STVCACT does not contain a system-required

indicator. The indicator resides in the Curriculum Activity Status Rules

Table (SOBCACT). The specified values must exist in the table when

using curriculum processing.

BU Business

BU is required for sample data purposes

if the Banner Finance System is installed.

XX Accounts Payable

XX is reserved for use by TGRFEED.

STVCACT Curriculum Activity Status Validation Form

ACTIVE Active Curriculum

INACTIVE Inactive Curriculum

REMOVED Removed

STVCAST Combined Academic Standing Code Validation Form

00 Good Standing

STVCKSR Application Checklist Source Validation Form

BASELINE Originates from Banner

STVCOLL College Code Validation Form

00 No College Designated

99 College Used in Statistical Calculation

STVCSTS Curriculum Status Validation Form

ADMITREPLACE Application replaces learner

APPACCEPT Applicant Acceptance

APPLIED Application Exists

AWARDED Degree Awarded

STVATYP Address Type Code Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

Note: Please note that STVCSTS shares these required values with the

Curriculum Status Events Table (SORCSTS). The specified values must

exist in the SORCSTS table when using curriculum status events and

user-preferred translations for the value of the curriculum status code on

STVCSTS.

CHANGED Changed

COMPLETED Completed

DENIED Application has been rejected

INPROGRESS In Progress

INSTACCEPT Institution Acceptance

NOPUSH Self-Service No Push to Learner

OVERLOAD Overload

PENDING Pending

REMOVED Inactivate field of study

SOUGHT Degree has sought status

STUDYPATH Study Path Created

STVDAYS Days of the Week Validation Form

U Sunday

M Monday

T Tuesday

W Wednesday

R Thursday

FFriday

S Saturday

STVDEGC Degree Code Validation Form

000000 Degree Not Declared

STVCSTS Curriculum Status Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVDEGS Degree Status Code Validation Form

SO Sought

STVDEPT Department Code Validation Form

0000 Department Not Declared

STVDFLT Compliance Defaults Option Validation Form

ONLINE Online processing default

BATCH Batch processing default

WEB Web processing default

STVEAPL Electronic Application Status Validation Form

H Admissions Hold

I Can’t Insert Decision Code

RMatch Error

N Not Processed

Y Process Complete

P Push Error

U Suspended Record

V Verification Error

STVEDIS EDI Status Code Validation Form

P0 XML Request Received

P1 XML Transcript Exported

P2 XML Export had errors

P4 XML Export held for final grades

P5 XML Export held for awarded degree

STVEGRP EDI Rule Group Validation Form

ACHR AMCAS Course Summaries

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

ADDR Address Source Rules

ADMS Admission Rules

AGPA AMCAS GPA Types

ATST AMCAS Test Codes

ATYP Address Type Rules

CHKL Checklist Rules

CQLF Code Qualifiers

CURR Curriculum Rules

DCSN Applicant Decision

DISP Web Display Rules

DTQL Date/Time Qualifier Rules

ENTY Entity Rules

FLVL Field of Study Level Rules

LGCY Legacy Rules

PATH System Path Rules

PCOL Prior College Rules

PQLF Phone Qualifier Code Rules

PREL Electronic Prospect Group

QSTN Question Code Rules

RESD Residency Rules

RFQL Reference Qualifier Rules

RLTN Relationship Qualifier Rules

TELE Telephone Pattern Rules

VCRL Verification Control Rules

STVELMT HTML Letter Module Validation Form

Module Description View

A Admissions

AS_ADMISSIONS_APPLICANT

E Electronic App

SAVEAPS

F Registration

AS_STUDENT_REGISTRATION_DETAIL

STVEGRP EDI Rule Group Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

P Electronic Prospect

SRVPREL

RRecruit

AS_RECRUITING_DATA

S Student

AS_STUDENT_DATA

TTranscripts

SHVTRE1

STVESTS Student Registration Status Code Validation Form

EL Eligible to Register

STVETCT IPEDS Ethnic Code Validation Form

1 Black Non-Hispanic

2 American Indian or Alaskan Native

3 Asian or Pacific Islander

4 Hispanic

5 White Non-Hispanic

6Other

STVEVEN Academic History Event Code Validation Form

999 Miscellaneous Event

STVFTYP Fee Type Validation Form

FLAT Flat Fee

BILL Per Bill Hour Fee

CRED Per Credit Hour Fee

DURN Per Duration Unit

STVGAST Graduation Application Status Validation Form

AC Active Application

IA Inactivate Application

STVELMT HTML Letter Module Validation Form

Module Description View

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVGCHG Grade Change Code Validation Form

CC Composite Calculation

CR Capped Resit

DL Degraded Late Mark

OE Original Entry

RC Re-Calculated

SG Substitute Grade

STVINTS Outside Interest Code Validation Form

A1 Instrumental Music

A2 Vocal Music

A3 Student Government

A4 Publications, Literary

A5 Debate

A6 Departmental Clubs

A7 Dramatics, Theater

A8 Religious Organizations

A9 Racial or Ethnic Organizations

AA Intramural Athletics

AB Varsity Athletics

AC Political Organizations

AD Radio - TV

AE Fraternity or Sorority

AF Special Interest Groups

AG Campus or Community Service Groups

AH Art

AI Coop or Internship Programs

AJ Dance

AK Environmental or Ecology Activity

AL Foreign Study Abroad

AM Honors or Independent Study

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

Note: Please note that STVLMOD does not contain a system-required

indicator. The indicator resides in the Learner Curriculum Frequency

Rules Table (SOBLMOD). The specified values must exist in the table

when using curriculum processing.

AN ROTC

STVLEVL Level Code Validation Form

00 Level Not Declared

STVLMOD Learner Module Validation Form

RECRUIT Recruiting

ADMISSIONS Admissions

LEARNER Student

OUTCOME Student Outcome

STVMAJR Major Code Validation Form

0000 Major Not Declared

STVMECL Mass Entry Column Validation Form

Mass Entry Code Description

Mass Entry

Forms Used

ACTC_CODE Athletic - Sports Code SGAMSPT

ADD_BILL_HRS Add registration bill hours SFAMREG

ADD_CAMP_CODE Add registration campus code SFAMREG

ADD_CREDIT_HRS Add registration credit hours SFAMREG

ADD_CRN Add registration CRN SFAMREG

ADD_END_DATE Add registration end date SFAMREG

ADD_GMOD_CODE Add registration grade mode

code

SFAMREG

ADD_INSM_CODE Add registration instructional

method code

SFAMREG

STVINTS Outside Interest Code Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

ADD_LEVL_CODE Add registration level code SFAMREG

ADD_PTRM_CODE Add registration part of term SFAMREG

ADD_RSTS_CODE Add registration status code SFAMREG

ADD_SSTS_CODE Add registration with registration

status code

SFAMREG

ADD_START_DATE Add registration start date SFAMREG

ADD_TMST_HRS Add registration with time status

hours

SFAMREG

ADMR_CODE Admissions checklist code SAAMAPP

ADMT_CODE Admissions Code SAAMAPP

APDC_CODE Decision code SAAMAPP

APDC_CODE_MOST_RECENT Most recent application decision SAAMAPP

APDC_DATE Decision date SAAMAPP

APDC_IND Current Decision: Accept; Reject;

Confirm

SAAMAPP

APST_CODE Application status SAAMAPP

APST_DATE Application status date SAAMAPP

ATHL_AID_IND Athletic - Aid Indicator SGAMSPT

ATTS_CODE Attribute SAAMAPP,

SGAMSTU

ATYP_CODE Address type code SHANDIP

BLCK_CODE Block code SFAMREG,

SGAMSTU

BLOCK_PROCESS_IND Block registration processing

indicator

SFAMREG

BLOCK_RSTS_CODE Block registration status code SFAMREG

BYPASS_REG_ELIG Bypass registration eligibility

check

SFAMREG

CAP_ORDER_DATE Cap-Gown-Hood tickets order

date

SHAMUCA

CAP_ORDER_IND Cap order indicator SHAMUCA

CAP_PICKUP_IND Cap picked up indicator SHAMUCA

STVMECL Mass Entry Column Validation Form

Mass Entry Code Description

Mass Entry

Forms Used

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

CAP_RETURN_DATE Cap-Gown-Hood Returned date SHAMUCA

CAP_RETURN_IND Cap returned indicator SHAMUCA

CAP_SIZE Graduation Cap Size SHAMUCA

CAP_TYPE Cap Type SHAMUCA

CERT_CODE Ceremony code SHAMCAT,

SHAMUCA

CERT_ORDER_DATE Order date SHAMUCA

CERT_PICKUP_DATE Pickup date SHAMUCA

CERT_RETURN_DATE Return date SHAMUCA

CHKL_SOURCE Checklist source SAAMAPP

CHRT_CODE Cohort code SAAMAPP,

SGAMSTU

CKSR_CODE Checklist source SAAMAPP

CLAS_CODE Class code SFARMEG,

SGAMSTU,

SAAMAPP,

SHAMDEG,

SHAMCAT,

SHAMDIP

CONFIRM APDC IND, Student accept SAAMAPP

CONFIRM_APDC_IND Student accept SAAMAPP

COPY_ACTC_CODE Athletic Copy - Copy Sports

Code

SGAMSPT

COPY_ATTR_COHORT Copy attribute and cohort to new

term

SGAMSTU

COPY_ATTRIBUTES Athletic Copy - Copy All

Attributes from Search Term

SGAMSPT

COPY_ELIG_CODE Athletic Copy - Eligible SGAMSPT

COPY_SAAT_CODE Athletic Copy - Attribute Code SGAMSPT

COPY_SAEL_CODE Athletic Copy - Academic

Eligibility

SGAMSPT

COPY_SPST_CODE Athletic Copy - Status Code SGAMSPT

CREATE_CERT_IND Create Ceremony Attendance SHAMIP

STVMECL Mass Entry Column Validation Form

Mass Entry Code Description

Mass Entry

Forms Used

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

CREATE_DIPL_IND Create Diploma SHAMDIP

CRN_REG Student is registered in CRN SFAMREG

CRN_RSTS_CODE Status code for currently

registered CRN

SFAMREG

DEGS_CODE Outcome status SHAMDEG,

SHAMCAT,

SHAMUCA,

SHAMDIP,

SHAMUDI

DIPL_MAILED_DATE Diploma mailed date SHAMUDI

DIPL_ORDER_DATE Diploma order date SHAMDIP,

SHAMUDI

DIPL_PICKUP_DATE Diploma pick up date SHAMUDI

DIPL_PICKUP_IND Pick up indicator for diploma SHAMUCA

DROP_ALL_CRN Drop registration for all CRNs

indicator

SFAMREG

DROP_CRN Drop registration CRN SFAMREG

DROP_CRSE_NUMB Drop registration course number SFAMREG

DROP_REMOVE_REG Drop all registration records SFAMREG

DROP_RSTS_CODE Drop registration status on drop SFAMREG

DROP_SEQ_NUMB Drop registration sequence

number

SFAMREG

DROP_SUBJ_CODE Drop registration subject code SFAMREG

EDLV_CODE Education level SGAMSTU

EGOL_CODE Education goal SGAMSTU

ELIG_CODE Athletic - Eligible SGAMSPT

EXP_GRAD_DATE Expected graduation date SGAMSTU

FEE_AMOUNT Fee Amount SHAMDEG,

SHAMDIP,

SHAMCAT

FEE_DATE Fee effective date SHAMDEG,

SHAMDIP,

SHAMCAT

STVMECL Mass Entry Column Validation Form

Mass Entry Code Description

Mass Entry

Forms Used

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

FEE_DETC_CODE Fee detail code SHAMDEG,

SHAMDIP,

SHAMCAT

FEE_IND Y to charge fee; W to waive fee SHAMDEG,

SHAMDIP,

SHAMCAT

FEE_TERM_CODE Fee term code SHAMDEG,

SHAMDIP,

SHAMCAT

GAST_CODE Graduation Application Status SHAMDEG

GMOD_CODE CRN grade mode SFAMREG

GOWN_ORDER_IND Gown order indicator SHAMUCA

GOWN_PICKUP_IND Gown picked up indicator SHAMUCA

GOWN_RETURN_IND Gown returned indicator SHAMUCA

GOWN_SIZE Graduation Gown Size SHAMUCA

GOWN_TYPE Gown type SHAMUCA

GRAD_ATTEND_CDE Graduation Attend Value SHAMCAT

GRAD_ATTEND_IND Graduation Attend Ceremony

Indicator

SHAMUCA

GRAD_DATE Graduation date SGAMSTU,

SHAMDEG

GRAD_YEAR Graduation year SGAMSTU,

SHAMDEG

GRST_CODE Graduation status SHAMDEG

HOOD_ORDER_IND Hood order indicator SHAMUCA

HOOD_PICKUP_IND Hood picked up indicator SHAMUCA

HOOD_RETURN_IND Hood returned indicator SHAMUCA

HOOD_TYPE Hood type SHAMUCA

INNM_CODE Degree Awarded by Code SHAMDIP

INSERT_ACTC_CODE Athletic Insert - Sports Code SGAMSPT

INTS_CODE Interest code SAAMAPP

LCUR_ADMIT_TERM Learner admission term SGAMSTU

LCUR_ADMT_CODE Learner admission code SGAMSTU

STVMECL Mass Entry Column Validation Form

Mass Entry Code Description

Mass Entry

Forms Used

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

LCUR_CAMP_CODE Campus SAAMAPP,

SFAMREG,

SGAMSTU,

SHAMDEG,

SHAMCAT,

SHAMDIP,

SHAMUDI

LCUR_COLL_CODE College SAAMAPP,

SFAMREG,

SGAMSTU,

SHAMDEG,

SHAMCAT,

SHAMDIP,

SHAMUDI

LCUR_CURRICULA Which curricula to review:

Primary, Secondary or All

SAAMAPP,

SFAMREG,

SGAMSTU,

SHAMDEG,

SHAMCAT,

SHAMDIP,

SHAMUDI

LCUR_DEGC_CODE Degree SAAMAPP,

SFAMREG,

SGAMSTU,

SHAMDEG,

SHAMCAT,

SHAMDIP,

SHAMUDI

LCUR_DEPT_CODE Department SAAMAPP,

SFAMREG,

SGAMSTU,

SHAMDEG,

SHAMCAT,

SHAMDIP,

SHAMUDI

LCUR_LEVL_CODE Level SAAMAPP,

SFAMREG,

SGAMSTU,

SHAMDEG,

SHAMCAT,

SHAMDIP,

SHAMUDI

STVMECL Mass Entry Column Validation Form

Mass Entry Code Description

Mass Entry

Forms Used

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

LCUR_LFST_CODE Field of study type SAAMAPP,

SFAMREG,

SGAMSTU,

SHAMDEG,

SHAMCAT,

SHAMDIP,

SHAMUDI

LCUR_MAJR_CODE Field of study code SAAMAPP,

SFAMREG,

SGAMSTU,

SHAMDEG,

SHAMCAT,

SHAMDIP,

SHAMUDI

LCUR_MATRIC_TERM Learner matriculation term SGAMSTU

LCUR_PROGRAM Program SAAMAPP,

SFAMREG,

SGAMSTU,

SHAMDEG,

SHAMCAT,

SHAMDIP,

SHAMUDI

LETR_CODE Letter code SAAMAPP,

SGAMSPT,

SGAMSTU,

SHAMDEG,

SHAMCAT,

SHAMDIP,

SHAMUDI,

SHAMUCA

LETR_DATE Initiated date on the letter SAAMAPP,

SGAMSPT,

SGAMSTU,

SHAMDEG,

SHAMCAT,

SHAMDIP,

SHAMUDI,

SHAMUCA

STVMECL Mass Entry Column Validation Form

Mass Entry Code Description

Mass Entry

Forms Used

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

LETR_INIT_CODE Letter initials code SAAMAPP,

SGAMSPT,

SGAMSTU,

SHAMDEG,

SHAMCAT,

SHAMDIP,

SHAMUDI,

SHAMUCA

LETR_PRINT_DATE Date letter was printed SAAMAPP,

SGAMSPT,

SGAMSTU,

SHAMDEG,

SHAMCAT,

SHAMDIP,

SHAMUDI,

SHAMUCA

LETR_WAIT_DAYS Wait days on the new letter SAAMAPP,

SGAMSPT,

SGAMSTU,

SHAMDEG,

SHAMCAT,

SHAMDIP,

SHAMUDI,

SHAMUCA

MANDATORY_IND Admissions checklist mandatory

indicator

SAAMAPP

NUMBER_TICKETS Number of Tickets SHAMUCA

POPSEL_APPLICATION_ID Population Selection Application SAAMAPP,

SGAMSPT,

SGAMSTU,

SHAMDEG,

SHAMCAT,

SHAMDIP,

SHAMUDI,

SHAMUCA,

SFAMREG

STVMECL Mass Entry Column Validation Form

Mass Entry Code Description

Mass Entry

Forms Used

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

POPSEL_CREATOR_ID Population Selection Creator ID SAAMAPP,

SGAMSPT,

SGAMSTU,

SHAMDEG,

SHAMCAT,

SHAMDIP,

SHAMUDI,

SHAMUCA,

SFAMREG

POPSEL_SELECTION_ID Population Selection ID SAAMAPP,

SGAMSPT,

SGAMSTU,

SHAMDEG,

SHAMCAT,

SHAMDIP,

SHAMUDI,

SHAMUCA,

SFAMREG

POPSEL_USER_ID Population Selection User ID SAAMAPP,

SGAMSPT,

SGAMSTU,

SHAMDEG,

SHAMCAT,

SHAMDIP,

SHAMUDI,

SHAMUCA,

SFAMREG

RATE_CODE Student fee assessment rate

code

SGAMSTU,

SAAMAPP,

SFAMREG

REG_CHECK_APPR Indicator to check for approvals SFAMREG

REG_CHECK_ATTS Indicator to check for student

attributes

SFAMREG

REG_CHECK_CAMP Indicator to check for campus SFAMREG

REG_CHECK_CAPC Indicator to check for capacity SFAMREG

REG_CHECK_CHRT Indicator to check for cohort SFAMREG

REG_CHECK_CLAS Indicator to check for class SFAMREG

REG_CHECK_COLL Indicator to check for college SFAMREG

REG_CHECK_CORQ Indicator to check for

corequisites

SFAMREG

STVMECL Mass Entry Column Validation Form

Mass Entry Code Description

Mass Entry

Forms Used

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

REG_CHECK_DEGREE Indicator to check for degree SFAMREG

REG_CHECK_DEPT Indicator to check for department SFAMREG

REG_CHECK_DUPL Indicator to check for duplicates SFAMREG

REG_CHECK_HOLD Indicator to check for holds SFAMREG

REG_CHECK_LEVL Indicator to check for level SFAMREG

REG_CHECK_LINK Indicator to check for linked

courses

SFAMREG

REG_CHECK_MAJR Indicator to check for fields of

study

SFAMREG

REG_CHECK_MAXH Indicator to check for maximum

hours

SFAMREG

REG_CHECK_MEXC Indicator to check for mutual

exclusions

SFAMREG

REG_CHECK_MINH Indicator to check for minimum

hours

SFAMREG

REG_CHECK_PREQ Indicator to check for

prerequisites

SFAMREG

REG_CHECK_PROGRAM Indicator to check for program SFAMREG

REG_CHECK_REPT Indicator to check for repeats SFAMREG

REG_CHECK_RPTH Indicator to check for repeat

hours

SFAMREG

REG_CHECK_TIME Indicator to check for time

conflict

SFAMREG

REG_CURRENT_CRN Currently in CRN SFAMREG

REG_DATE Registration date SFAMREG

REG_FEE_ASSESSMENT Process fees in batch or online SFAMREG

REG_GRADE_MODE Grade mode for currently

registered CRN

SFAMREG

REJECT ADPC IND, Student rejected SAAMAPP

REJECT_ADPC_IND Student rejected SAAMAPP

RESD_CODE Residence Code SAAMAPP,

SGAMSTU

RETURN_DATE Tickets returned date SHAMUCA

STVMECL Mass Entry Column Validation Form

Mass Entry Code Description

Mass Entry

Forms Used

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

SAAT_CODE Athletic - Attribute Code SGAMSPT

SAEL_CODE Athletic - Academic Eligibility SGAMSPT

SBGI_INST_AWARD Awarding institution SHAMDIP

SEASON_USED_IND Athletic - Season Used Indicator SGAMSPT

SPST_CODE Athletic - Status Code SGAMSPT

STST_CODE Student status SGAMSTU

STYP_CODE Student type code SAAMAPP,

SGAMSTU

TERM_CODE_APPL Admissions application term SAAMAPP

TERM_CODE_ATHL_COMP Athletic - Compliance Term Code SGAMSPT

TERM_CODE_ATHL_COPY Athletic - Copy Compliance Term

Code

SGAMSPT

TERM_CODE_CERT Ceremony term SHAMCAT,

SHAMDIP,

SHAMUCA,

SHAMUDI

TERM_CODE_DEGREE_

COMPLETION

Term the degree is completed SHAMDEG

TERM_CODE_EFF Learner effective term SGAMSTU,

SFAMREG

TERM_CODE_EFF_IND Term code equal indicator SGAMSTU

TERM_CODE_GRAD Graduation term SHAMDEG,

SGAMSTU,

SHAMCAT,

SHAMDIP

TERM_CODE_REG Registration term SFAMREG

TICKET_MAILED Tickets mailed date SHAMUCA

TICKET_ORDER_IND Ticket order indicator SHAMUCA

TICKET_PICKUP_IND Ticket picked up indicator SHAMUCA

WITHDRAWN_IND Student withdrew SAAMAPP

STVMECL Mass Entry Column Validation Form

Mass Entry Code Description

Mass Entry

Forms Used

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

Note: Please note that STVORIG does not contain a system-required

indicator. However, it is recommended that the value

AUTO exist when

CAPP compliance processing is used at your institution. If this value does

not exist, batch compliance will not run successfully.

STVNTCG Note Category Validation Form

Do not use the number range of 9900 - 9999 for your codes.

This range is reserved for future development.

STVNTIN Note Interaction Validation Form

Do not use the number range of 9900 - 9999 for your codes.

This range is reserved for future development.

STVORIG Originator Code Validation Form

AUTO Generated Automatically

STVPREV Progress Evaluation Code Validation Form

00 Good Standing

STVPROC Process Control Code Validation Form

COMPLIANCE Compliance Requests

DISPLAYGRADES Display Roster Grades

DISPLAYHOLDS Display Student Holds

DISPLAYSCHEDULE Display Student Schedule

DISPLAYTESTS Display Test Scores

ENTERGRADES Enter Roster Grades

TRANSCRIPT Transcript Request

STVPTRM Part of Term Code Validation Form

1 Full Term

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

C Combined Parts of Term

STVRATP Admissions Rating Type Validation Form

0000 Admissions Rating

STVRECR Recruiter Code Validation Form

000 Recruiter Not Assigned

(for Data Load Interface users only)

STVRESD Residence Code Validation Form

0 Undeclared

Note for clients in production prior to 1994.

If your institution is already using 0 (zero) for a value other than

“Undeclared”, you must assign one value which is not otherwise

being used as a system-required “Undeclared” value.

STVRSTA Recruiting Status Code Validation Form

00 Undetermined - New Recruit

(for Data Load Interface users only)

STVRSTS Course Registration Status Code Validation Form

RE Registered

DD Delete

DC Drop Course

WL Waitlisted

STVSBGI Source/Background Institution Code Validation Form

999999 Miscellaneous Institution

STVPTRM Part of Term Code Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

Note: Please note that STVSBGI does not contain a system-required

indicator. However, it is recommended that the value

999999 exist when

AMCAS processing and/or transfer course processing is used at your

institution. If this value does not exist, processing may not run

successfully. It is also recommended that the value

999999 exist on

SHATRNS so you can enter a name for the institution when you are

entering transfer work for a person.

Note: Term codes are numeric and are in the format YYYYTT. The codes

must be constructed so that the codes maintain the appropriate sequence

of terms. Term codes are displayed in descending order with the highest

term first.

STVSTSP Student Study Path Status Code Validation Form

AS Active Study

Path

Active and Allow Registration = checked

(Yes) Y

STVSTST Student Status Code Validation Form

AS Active Allow Registration = checked (Yes) Y

IS Inactive Allow Registration - unchecked (No) N

STVSTYP Student Type Code Validation Form

0 Undeclared

Note for clients in production prior to 1994:

If your institution is already using 0 (zero) for a value other than

“Undeclared”, you must assign one value which is not otherwise

being used as a system-required “Undeclared” value.

STVTERM Term Code Validation Form

000000 The Beginning of Time

999999 The End of Time

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVTESC Test Code Validation Form

Code

Test

Type Description

Number

Positions

Data

Type*

Min

Score

Max

Score

* The Data Type value of Numeric (checked) corresponds to a value of N in the database. The Data Type

value of Alphanumeric (unchecked) corresponds to a value of A in the database.

AA1 ASSET Asset 2 checked 00 99

A01 ACT English 2 checked 01 36

A02 ACT Math 2 checked 01 36

A03 ACT Reading 2 checked 01 36

A04 ACT Science Reasoning 2 checked 01 36

A05 ACT Composite 2 checked 01 36

A06 ACT Sum of Standard Scores 3 unchecked 001 180

A07 ACT ACT Combined English/Writing 2 checked 01 36

SWR ACT ACT Subscore Writing 2 checked 02 12

NEW ACT ACT Norm English/Writing 2 checked 01 99

NWR ACT ACT Norm Writing 2 checked 01 99

SUM ACT Subscore - Usage and Mech. 2 unchecked 01 18

SRH ACT Subscore - Rhetorical Skills 2 unchecked 01 18

SEA ACT Subscore - Elementary Algebra 2 unchecked 01 18

SAG ACT Subscore - Algebra/Geometry 2 unchecked 01 18

SGT ACT Subscore - Plane Geometry/Trig. 2 unchecked 01 18

SSS ACT Subscore - Social Studies 2 unchecked 01 18

SAL ACT Subscore - Arts/Literature 2 unchecked 01 18

NUM ACT Norm - Usage and Mech 2 unchecked 01 99

NRH ACT Norm - Rhetorical Skills 2 unchecked 01 99

NEA ACT Norm - Elementary Algebra 2 unchecked 01 99

NAG ACT Norm - Algebra/Geometry 2 unchecked 01 99

NGT ACT Norm - Plane Geometry/Trig 2 unchecked 01 99

NSS ACT Norm - Social Studies 2 unchecked 01 99

NAL ACT Norm - Arts/Literature 2 unchecked 01 99

G01 GMAT GMAT Verbal Percent 2 checked 00 99

G02 GMAT GMAT Quantitative Percent 2 checked 00 99

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

G03 GMAT GMAT Total Converted Percent 3 checked 200 800

G04 GMAT GMAT Writing Percent 2 checked 00 99

G05 GMAT GMAT Total Percent 2 checked 00 99

G06 GMAT GMAT Verbal Converted 2 checked 00 60

G07 GMAT GMAT Quantitative Converted 2 checked 00 60

G08 GMAT GMAT Writing Converted 2 checked 00 60

G09 GMAT GMAT Integrated Reasoning Scor 2 checked 00 99

G10 GMAT GMAT Integrated Reasoning Conv 1 checked 0 8

G03Q GRE Revised General Quantitative 3 checked 130 170

G03V GRE Revised General Verbal 3 checked 130 170

G03W GRE Revised General Writing 3 checked 0.0 6.0

GR01 GRE Verbal Code 3 checked 200 800

GR02 GRE Quantitative Code 3 checked 200 800

GR03 GRE Analytical Code 3 checked 200 800

GR04 GRE Writing Assessment 3 checked 0.0 6.0

GR05 GRE Analytical Writing Test 3 checked 0.0 6.0

G22 GRE Biochem, C & M Total Score 3 checked 200 990

G221 GRE Biochem, C & M Subscore 1 3 checked 020 099

G222 GRE Biochem, C & M Subscore 2 3 checked 020 099

G223 GRE Biochem, C & M Subscore 3 3 checked 020 099

G24 GRE Biology Total Score 3 checked 200 990

G241 GRE Biology Subscore 1 3 checked 020 099

G242 GRE Biology Subscore 2 3 checked 020 099

G243 GRE Biology Subscore 3 3 checked 020 099

G27 GRE Chemistry Total Score 3 checked 200 990

G271 GRE Chemistry Subscore 1 3 checked 020 099

G272 GRE Chemistry Subscore 2 3 checked 020 099

G273 GRE Chemistry Subscore 3 3 checked 020 099

G29 GRE Computer Science Total Score 3 checked 200 990

STVTESC Test Code Validation Form

Code

Test

Type Description

Number

Positions

Data

Type*

Min

Score

Max

Score

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

G291 GRE Computer Science Subscore 1 3 checked 020 099

G292 GRE Computer Science Subscore 2 3 checked 020 099

G293 GRE Computer Science Subscore 3 3 checked 020 099

G2QE GRE GRE Quantitative Estimated Cur 3 checked 130 170

G2VE GRE GRE Verbal Estimated Current 3 checked 130 170

G31 GRE Economics Total Score 3 checked 200 990

G311 GRE Economics Subscore 1 3 checked 020 099

G312 GRE Economics Subscore 2 3 checked 020 099

G313 GRE Economics Subscore 3 3 checked 020 099

G34 GRE Education Total Score * 3 checked 020 099

G341 GRE Education Subscore 1 * 3 checked 020 099

G342 GRE Education Subscore 2 * 3 checked 020 099

G343 GRE Education Subscore 3 * 3 checked 020 099

G35 GRE Rev. Education Total Score 3 checked 200 990

G351 GRE Rev. Education Subscore 1 3 checked 020 099

G352 GRE Rev. Education Subscore 2 3 checked 020 099

G353 GRE Rev. Education Subscore 3 3 checked 020 099

G37 GRE Engineering Total Score 3 checked 200 990

G371 GRE Engineering Subscore 1 3 checked 020 099

G372 GRE Engineering Subscore 2 3 checked 020 099

G373 GRE Engineering Subscore 3 3 checked 020 099

G44 GRE French Total Score * 3 checked 020 099

G441 GRE French Subscore 1 * 3 checked 020 099

G442 GRE French Subscore 2 * 3 checked 020 099

G443 GRE French Subscore 3 * 3 checked 020 099

G46 GRE Geography Total Score * 3 checked 020 099

G461 GRE Geography Subscore 1 * 3 checked 020 099

G462 GRE Geography Subscore 2 * 3 checked 020 099

G463 GRE Geography Subscore 3 * 3 checked 020 099

STVTESC Test Code Validation Form

Code

Test

Type Description

Number

Positions

Data

Type*

Min

Score

Max

Score

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

G47 GRE Geology Total Score 3 checked 200 990

G471 GRE Geology Subscore 1 3 checked 020 099

G472 GRE Geology Subscore 2 3 checked 020 099

G473 GRE Geology Subscore 3 3 checked 020 099

G52 GRE German Total Score * 3 checked 020 099

G521 GRE German Subscore 1 * 3 checked 020 099

G522 GRE German Subscore 2 * 3 checked 020 099

G523 GRE German Subscore 3 * 3 checked 020 099

G57 GRE History Total Score 3 checked 200 990

G571 GRE History Subscore 1 3 checked 020 099

G572 GRE History Subscore 2 3 checked 020 099

G573 GRE History Subscore 3 3 checked 020 099

G64 GRE Literature Total Score 3 checked 200 990

G641 GRE Literature Subscore 1 3 checked 020 099

G642 GRE Literature Subscore 2 3 checked 020 099

G643 GRE Literature Subscore 3 3 checked 020 099

G67 GRE Mathematics Total Score 3 checked 200 990

G671 GRE Mathematics Subscore 1 3 checked 020 099

G672 GRE Mathematics Subscore 2 3 checked 020 099

G673 GRE Mathematics Subscore 3 3 checked 020 099

G68 GRE Mathematics Rs Total Score 3 checked 200 990

G681 GRE Mathematics Rs Subscore 1 3 checked 020 099

G682 GRE Mathematics Rs Subscore 2 3 checked 020 099

G683 GRE Mathematics Rs Subscore 3 3 checked 020 099

G71 GRE Music Total Score * 3 checked 020 099

G711 GRE Music Subscore 1 * 3 checked 020 099

G712 GRE Music Subscore 2 * 3 checked 020 099

G713 GRE Music Subscore 3 * 3 checked 020 099

G72 GRE Music Total Score 3 checked 200 990

STVTESC Test Code Validation Form

Code

Test

Type Description

Number

Positions

Data

Type*

Min

Score

Max

Score

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

G721 GRE Music Subscore 1 3 checked 020 099

G722 GRE Music Subscore 2 3 checked 020 099

G723 GRE Music Subscore 3 3 checked 020 099

G74 GRE Philosophy Total Score * 3 checked 020 099

G741 GRE Philosophy Subscore 1 * 3 checked 020 099

G742 GRE Philosophy Subscore 2 * 3 checked 020 099

G743 GRE Philosophy Subscore 3 * 3 checked 020 099

G77 GRE Physics Total Score 3 checked 200 990

G771 GRE Physics Subscore 1 3 checked 020 099

G772 GRE Physics Subscore 2 3 checked 020 099

G773 GRE Physics Subscore 3 3 checked 020 099

G78 GRE Rev. Political Science Total Score 3 checked 200 990

G781 GRE Rev. Political Science Subscore 1 3 checked 020 099

G782 GRE Rev. Political Science Subscore 2 3 checked 020 099

G783 GRE Rev. Political Science Subscore 3 3 checked 020 099

G79 GRE Political Science Total Score * 3 checked 020 099

G791 GRE Political Science Subscore 1 * 3 checked 020 099

G792 GRE Political Science Subscore 2 * 3 checked 020 099

G793 GRE Political Science Subscore 3 * 3 checked 020 099

G81 GRE Psychology Total Score 3 checked 200 990

G811 GRE Psychology Subscore 1 3 checked 020 099

G812 GRE Psychology Subscore 2 3 checked 020 099

G813 GRE Psychology Subscore 3 3 checked 020 099

G87 GRE Sociology Total Score 3 checked 200 990

G871 GRE Sociology Subscore 1 3 checked 020 099

G872 GRE Sociology Subscore 2 3 checked 020 099

G873 GRE Sociology Subscore 3 3 checked 020 099

G91 GRE Spanish Total Score * 3 checked 020 099

G911 GRE Spanish Subscore 1 * 3 checked 020 099

STVTESC Test Code Validation Form

Code

Test

Type Description

Number

Positions

Data

Type*

Min

Score

Max

Score

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

G912 GRE Spanish Subscore 2 * 3 checked 020 099

G913 GRE Spanish Subscore 3 * 3 checked 020 099

* These codes are no longer used for the GRE.

MBS MCAT MCAT Biological Science Score 2 checked 00 99

MPS MCAT MCAT Physical Science Score 2 checked 00 99

MVR MCAT MCAT Verbal Score 2 checked 00 99

MWS MCAT MCAT Writing Score 2 unchecked J T

S01 SAT Verbal Score 3 checked 200 800

S02 SAT Mathematics Score 3 checked 200 800

S03 SAT Reading Subscore 2 checked 20 80

S04 SAT Vocabulary Subscore 2 checked 20 80

S07 SAT SAT Writing 3 checked 200 800

S08 SAT SAT Essay Subscore 2 checked 00 12

S09 SAT SAT MC Subscore 2 checked 20 80

AH SATII American History/Social Studies 3 checked 200 800

BY SATII Biology 3 checked 200 800

CH SATII Chemistry 3 checked 200 800

CL SATII Chinese with Listening 3 checked 200 800

EB SATII Bio-Ecological Emphasis 3 checked 200 800

EH SATII European History/World Cultures 3 checked 200 800

EN SATII English Composition 3 checked 200 800

EP SATII English Proficiency 3 checked 200 800

ES SATII English Composition with Essay 3 checked 200 800

FL SATII French with Listening 3 checked 200 800

FR SATII French 3 checked 200 800

GL SATII German with Listening 3 checked 200 800

GM SATII German 3 checked 200 800

HB SATII Hebrew 3 checked 200 800

IT SATII Italian 3 checked 200 800

STVTESC Test Code Validation Form

Code

Test

Type Description

Number

Positions

Data

Type*

Min

Score

Max

Score

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

Note: It is recommended that the listed values be checked periodically

against the current delivered file layout values, since changes occur over

time.

JL SATII Japanese with Listening 3 checked 200 800

KL SATII Korean with Listening 3 checked 200 800

LR SATII Literature 3 checked 200 800

LT SATII Latin 3 checked 200 800

MB SATII Bio-Molecular Emphasis 3 checked 200 800

M1 SATII Mathematics Level I 3 checked 200 800

M2 SATII Mathematics Level II 3 checked 200 800

1C SATII Mathematics Level IC 3 checked 200 800

2C SATII Mathematics Level IIC - Calculator 3 checked 200 800

MH SATII Modern Hebrew 3 checked 200 800

PH SATII Physics 3 checked 200 800

SL SATII Spanish with Listening 3 checked 200 800

SP SATII Spanish 3 checked 200 800

UH SATII U.S. History 3 checked 200 800

WH SATII World History 3 checked 200 800

WR SATII Writing 3 checked 200 800

STVTMST Time Status Code Validation Form

99 Error Calculating Time Status

STVTPFD Tape Field Names Validation Form

Field names with an * are no longer used for the ACT.

A01_NATIONAL_NORM ACT English National Norm

A01_TADM_CODE ACT A01 Test Admin Code

A01_TEST_MON ACT A01 Test Month

STVTESC Test Code Validation Form

Code

Test

Type Description

Number

Positions

Data

Type*

Min

Score

Max

Score

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

A01_TEST_SCORE ACT A01 Test Score

A01_TEST_YEAR ACT A01 Test Year

A02_NATIONAL_NORM ACT Math National Norm

A02_TADM_CODE ACT A02 Test Admin Code

A02_TEST_MON ACT A02 Test Month

A02_TEST_SCORE ACT A02 Test Score

A02_TEST_YEAR ACT A02 Test Year

A03_NATIONAL_NORM ACT Reading National Norm

A03_TADM_CODE ACT A03 Test Admin Code

A03_TEST_MON ACT A03 Test Month

A03_TEST_SCORE ACT A03 Test Score

A03_TEST_YEAR ACT A03 Test Year

A04_NATIONAL_NORM ACT Science National Norm

A04_TADM_CODE ACT A04 Test Admin Code

A04_TEST_MON ACT A04 Test Month

A04_TEST_SCORE ACT A04 Test Score

A04_TEST_YEAR ACT A04 Test Year

A05_NATIONAL_NORM ACT Composite National Norm

A05_TADM_CODE ACT A05 Test Admin Code

A05_TEST_MON ACT A05 Test Month

A05_TEST_SCORE ACT A05 Test Score

A05_TEST_YEAR ACT A05 Test Year

A06_TADM_CODE ACT A06 Test Admin Code

A06_TEST_MON ACT A06 Test Month

A06_TEST_SCORE ACT A06 Test Score

A06_TEST_YEAR ACT A06 Test Year

A07_NATIONAL_NORM ACT Combined English/Writing

National Norm

A07_TEST_SCORE ACT A07 Test Score

A1_INTS_CODE A1 Interest Code Chosen

A2_INTS_CODE A2 Interest Code Chosen

STVTPFD Tape Field Names Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

A3_INTS_CODE A3 Interest Code Chosen

A4_INTS_CODE A4 Interest Code Chosen

A5_INTS_CODE A5 Interest Code Chosen

A6_INTS_CODE A6 Interest Code Chosen

A7_INTS_CODE A7 Interest Code Chosen

A8_INTS_CODE A8 Interest Code Chosen

A9_INTS_CODE A9 Interest Code Chosen

AA_INTS_CODE AA Interest Code Chosen

AB_INTS_CODE AB Interest Code Chosen

AC_INTS_CODE AC Interest Code Chosen

ADDITIONAL_ID Additional ID

ADDL_MCAT_INTENT_IND MCAT Intent Indicator Placehld

ADM_ACTION_CODE Admission Action Code

Placehld

ADM_ACTION_DATE Admission Action Date

Placehld

ADVISOR_INFO_RELEASE Advisor Info Release Placehold

AD_INTS_CODE AD Interest Code Chosen

AE_INTS_CODE AE Interest Code Chosen

AF_INTS_CODE AF Interest Code Chosen

AGE Age of Recruit/App Placeholder

AG_INTS_CODE AG Interest Code Chosen

AH_INTS_CODE AH Interest Code Chosen

AI_INTS_CODE AI Interest Code Chosen

AJ_INTS_CODE AJ Interest Code Chosen

AK_INTS_CODE AK Interest Code Chosen

AL_INTS_CODE AL Interest Code Chosen

AMCAS_ID AMCAS ID

AM_INTS_CODE AM Interest Code Chosen

AN_INTS_CODE AN Interest Code Chosen

AO_INTS_CODE AO Interest Code Chosen

APPL_TYPE Application Type

STVTPFD Tape Field Names Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

APP_YEAR Application Year

AP_HOURS Advanced Placement Hours

BIO_NUMBER Number of the Applicant

BIRTH_CENT Birth Date Century

BIRTH_CITY City of Birth

BIRTH_COUNTY_COUNTRY_CODE County or Country of Birth

BIRTH_COUNTY_COUNTRY_NAME Birth Cnty/Ctry Name

Placehold

BIRTH_COUNTY_RURAL_IND Birth County is Rural

BIRTH_DATE Full Birth Date

BIRTH_DAY Day of Month of Birth

BIRTH_MON Month of Birth

BIRTH_STATE State or Province of Birth

BIRTH_YEAR Year of Birth

CANADIAN_POSTAL_CODE Canadian Postal Code

CANADIAN_PROVINCE Canadian Province

CHANGE_FLAG Change Flag Placeholder

CHANGE_NBR Change Number Placeholder

CITIZENSHIP Citizenship Code

CITIZEN_NATN_CODE Nation Code of Citizenship

CITIZEN_NATN_NAME Nation Name of Citize Placehld

CITY Current Address City

CLEP_HOURS College Level Exam Prog

Hours

CNTY_CODE Current Address County Code

CUM_AO_GPA Cumulative All Other GPA

CUM_AO_HOURS Cumulative All Other Hours

CUM_BCPM_GPA Cumulative BioChemPhysMath

GPA

CUM_BCPM_HOURS Cumulative BioChemPhysMath

Hrs

CUM_TOTAL_GPA Cumulative Total GPA

STVTPFD Tape Field Names Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

CYCLE_ADD Cycle Add Placeholder

CYCLE_CHANGE Cycle Change Placeholder

DATE_APPLIED Application Date

DEGC_CODE Degree Code

DEPT_CODE Department Code

DISADVANTAGED_IND Disadvantaged Indicator

EARLY_DECISION Early Decision Indicator

EDUC_GOAL Education Goal

EFFECTIVE_DATE Effective Date of Test

EMAIL_ADDR Email Address

ENROLLMENT_DATE Intended Enrollment Date

ETHN_CODE Ethnic Code 1

ETHN_CODE10 Ethnic Code 10

ETHN_CODE2 Ethnic Code 2

ETHN_CODE3 Ethnic Code 3

ETHN_CODE4 Ethnic Code 4

ETHN_CODE5 Ethnic Code 5

ETHN_CODE6 Ethnic Code 6

ETHN_CODE7 Ethnic Code 7

ETHN_CODE8 Ethnic Code 8

ETHN_CODE9 Ethnic Code 9

EVALUATION Evaluation Placeholder

EXP_GRAD_DATE Expect Graduation Date Holder

FEE_WAIVER Fee Waiver

FELONY Felony Indicator

FELONY_PLACE_HOLDER Felony Placeholder

FOREIGN_ADDRESS Foreign Address Indicator

FOREIGN_NATION Foreign Nation

FOREIGN_SSN Foreign SSN

FR_AO_GPA Freshman All Other GPA

FR_AO_HOURS Freshman All Other Hours

STVTPFD Tape Field Names Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

FR_BCPM_GPA Freshman BioChemPhysMath

GPA

FR_BCPM_HOURS Freshman BioChemPhysMath

Hrs

FR_TOTAL_GPA Freshman Total GPA

G01_TADM_CODE GMAT G01 Test Admin Code

G01_TEST_MON GMAT G01 Test Month

G01_TEST_SCORE GMAT G01 Test Score

G01_TEST_YEAR GMAT G01 Test Year

G02_TEST_SCORE GMAT G02 Test Score

G03_TEST_SCORE GMAT G03 Test Score

G04_TEST_SCORE GMAT G04 Test Score

G05_TEST_SCORE GMAT G05 Test Score

G06_TEST_SCORE GMAT G06 Test Score

G07_TEST_SCORE GMAT G07 Test Score

G08_TEST_SCORE GMAT G08 Test Score

G09_TEST_SCORE GMAT G09 Test Score

G10_TEST_SCORE GMAT G10 Test Score

GENDER Gender

GRAD_AO_GPA Graduate All Other GPA

GRAD_AO_HOURS Graduate All Other Hours

GRAD_BCPM_GPA Graduate BioChemPhysMath

GPA

GRAD_BCPM_HOURS Graduate BioChemPhysMath

Hrs

GRAD_TOTAL_GPA Graduate Total GPA

GRE_EST_CURR0 GRE Estimated Current 0

GFRE_EST_CURR1 GRE Estimated Current 1

GRE_PERCENTILE0 GRE Percentile 0

GRE_PERCENTILE1 GRE Percentile 1

GRE_PERCENTILE2 GRE Percentile 2

GRE_PERCENTILE3 GRE Percentile 3

STVTPFD Tape Field Names Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

GRE_SCORE0 GRE Score 0

GRE_SCORE1 GRE Score 1

GRE_SCORE2 GRE Score 2

GRE_SCORE3 GRE Score 3

GRE_TEST_CENT GRE Test Century

GRE_TEST_CODE GRE Test Code

GRE_TEST_MON GRE Test Month

GRE_TEST_SCORE GRE Test Score

GRE_TEST_YEAR GRE Test Year

GRE_TYPE0 GRE Type 0

GRE_TYPE1 GRE Type 1

GRE_TYPE2 GRE Type 2

GRE_TYPE3 GRE Type 3

HISP_IND Hispanic Indicator

HSCH_AO_GPA High School All Other GPA

HSCH_AO_HOURS High School All Other Hours

HSCH_BCPM_GPA High School ChemBioPhyMath

GPA

HSCH_BCPM_HOURS High School ChemBioPhyMath

Hrs

HSCH_CITY High School City

HSCH_CLASS_RANK High School Class Rank

HSCH_CLASS_SIZE High School Class Size

HSCH_GPA High School Total GPA

HSCH_GRADE_LEVEL High School Grade Level

HSCH_GRAD_CENT High School Graduation

Century

HSCH_GRAD_DAY High School Graduation Day

HSCH_GRAD_MON High School Graduation Month

HSCH_GRAD_YEAR High School Graduation Year

HSCH_NAME High School Name

HSCH_NATION High School Nation

STVTPFD Tape Field Names Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

HSCH_SBGI_CODE High School SBGI Code

HSCH_STAT_CODE High School State Code

HSCH_STREET1 High School Street Address 1

HSCH_TOTAL_HOURS High School Total Hours

HSCH_ZIP High School ZIP Code

INSTITUTIONAL_ACTION Institutional Action

INTEREST Interest

INTS_CODE1 Interest Code 1

INTS_CODE2 Interest Code 2

INTS_CODE3 Interest Code 3

INTS_CODE4 Interest Code 4

INTS_CODE5 Interest Code 5

INTS_CODE6 Interest Code 6

INTS_CODE7 Interest Code 7

INTS_CODE8 Interest Code 8

INTS_CODE9 Interest Code 9

INTS_CODE10 Interest Code 10

INTS_CODE11 Interest Code 11

INTS_CODE12 Interest Code 12

INTS_CODE13 Interest Code 13

INTS_CODE14 Interest Code 14

JR_AO_GPA Junior All Other GPA

JR_AO_HOURS Junior All Other Hours

JR_BCPM_GPA Junior BioChemPhysMath GPA

JR_BCPM_HOURS Junior BioChemPhysMath

Hours

JR_TOTAL_GPA Junior Total GPA

LEGAL_COUNTY_CODE Legal County Code

LEGAL_COUNTY_NAME Legal County Name

Placeholder

LEGAL_COUNTY_RURAL_IND Legal County Rural Indicator

LEGAL_STATE Legal State Code

STVTPFD Tape Field Names Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

MAJR_CODE Major Code 1

MAJR_CODE2 Major Code 2

MAJR_CODE3 Major Code 3

MAJR_CODE4 Major Code 4

MAJR_CODE5 Major Code 5

MAJR_CODE6 Major Code 6

MAJR_PSAT PSAT Major Code

MATRIC_DATE Matriculation Date Placeholder

MBS_LITHOCODE MCAT BioSci Lcode Placehold

MBS_MED_MAR_IND MCAT BioSci Med Mar

Placehold

MBS_TEAC_CODE MCAT BioSci Test

Accommodation

MBS_TEFR_CODE MCAT BioSci Test Form Code

MBS_TEST_DATE MCAT MBS Test Date

MBS_TEST_SCORE MCAT MBS Test Score

MBS_UNUSED1 MCAT BioSci Unused

Placeholder

MBS_UNUSED2 MCAT BioSci Unused

Placeholder

MBS_UNUSED3 MCAT BioSci Unused

Placeholder

MBS_WS_FORM_NUM MCAT Writing Sample

Placehold

MCAT_INTENT_DATE MCAT Intent Test Date

MILITARY_DISCHARGE_IND Military Discharge Indicator

MILITARY_HON_DISCHARGE_IND Military Honorable Dischg Ind

MILITARY_SERVICE_IND Military Service Indicator

MISDEMEANOR_IND Misdemeanor Indicator

MPS_TEST_SCORE MCAT MPS Test Score

MVR_TEST_SCORE MCAT MVR Test Score

MWS_TEST_SCORE MCAT MWS Test Score

NAG_NATIONAL_NORM ACT Alg/Coord Geom National

Norm

STVTPFD Tape Field Names Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

NAG_TADM_CODE ACT NAG Test Admin Code

NAG_TEST_MON ACT NAG Test Month

NAG_TEST_SCORE * ACT NAG Test Score

NAG_TEST_YEAR ACT NAG Test Year

NAL_NATIONAL_NORM ACT Arts/Lit National Norm

NAL_TADM_CODE ACT NAL Test Admin Code

NAL_TEST_MON ACT NAL Test Month

NAL_TEST_SCORE * ACT NAL Test Score

NAL_TEST_YEAR ACT NAL Test Year

NAME_FIRST First Name

NAME_LAST Last Name

NAME_LAST_OLD Former Last Name

NAME_MI Middle Initial

NATION_CODE Nation Code

NATION_NAME Nation Name

NEA_NATIONAL_NORM ACT Elem Algebra National

Norm

NEA_TADM_CODE ACT NEA Test Admin Code

NEA_TEST_MON ACT NEA Test Month

NEA_TEST_SCORE * ACT NEA Test Score

NEA_TEST_YEAR ACT NEA Test Year

NEW_TADM_CODE ACT NEW Test Admin Code

NEW_TEST_MON ACT NEW Test Month

NEW_TEST_SCORE * ACT NEW Test Score

NEW_TEST_YEAR ACT NEW Test Year

NEXT_MCAT_DATE Next MCAT Date (pre-2008)

NGT_NATIONAL_NORM ACT Plane Geom/Trig National

Norm

NGT_TADM_CODE ACT NGT Test Admin Code

NGT_TEST_MON ACT NGT Test Month

NGT_TEST_SCORE * ACT NGT Test Score

NGT_TEST_YEAR ACT NGT Test Year

STVTPFD Tape Field Names Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

NRH_NATIONAL_NORM ACT Rhetorical Skills National

Norm

NRH_TADM_CODE ACT NRH Test Admin Code

NRH_TEST_MON ACT NRH Test Month

NRH_TEST_SCORE * ACT NRH Test Score

NRH_TEST_YEAR ACT NRH Test Year

NSS_NATIONAL_NORM ACT Soc Stud/Sci National

Norm

NSS_TADM_CODE ACT NSS Test Admin Code

NSS_TEST_MON ACT NSS Test Month

NSS_TEST_SCORE *‘ ACT NSS Test Score

NSS_TEST_YEAR ACT NSS Test Year

NUMBER_OF_DEPENDENTS Number of Dependents

NUM_MCATS Number of MCATS Placeholder

NUM_NATIONAL_NORM ACT Usage/Mech National

Norm

NUM_TADM_CODE ACT NUM Test Admin Code

NUM_TEST_MON ACT NUM Test Month

NUM_TEST_SCORE * ACT NUM Test Score

NUM_TEST_YEAR ACT NUM Test Year

NWR_NATIONAL_NORM ACT Writing National Norm

NWR_TADM_CODE ACT NWR Test Admin Code

NWR_TEST_MON ACT NWR Test Month

NWR_TEST_SCORE * ACT NWR Test Score

NWR_TEST_YEAR ACT NWR Test Year

OLDSAT1_PERCENTILE SAT II National Percentile

OLDSAT1_RCRV_IND Old SAT RCRV

OLDSAT1_TADM_CODE Old SAT Test Admin Code

OLDSAT1_TEST_CODE Old SAT Test Code

OLDSAT1_TEST_MON Old SAT Test Month

OLDSAT1_TEST_SCORE Old SAT Test Score

OLDSAT1_TEST_YEAR Old SAT Test Year

STVTPFD Tape Field Names Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

OLDSAT2_PERCENTILE SAT II National Percentile

OLDSAT2_TEST_CODE Old SAT Test Code

OLDSAT2_TEST_SCORE Old SAT Test Score

OLDSAT3_PERCENTILE SAT II National Percentile

OLDSAT3_TEST_CODE Old SAT Test Code

OLDSAT3_TEST_SCORE Old SAT Test Score

PBUG_AO_GPA Post Bac UG All Other GPA

PBUG_AO_HOURS Post Bac UG All Other Hours

PBUG_BCPM_GPA Post Bac UG

BioChemPhyMath GPA

PBUG_BCPM_HOURS Post Bac UG

BioChemPhyMath Hrs

PBUG_TOTAL_GPA Post Bac UG Total GPA

PCOL_CITY Prior College City

PCOL_DEGR_CODE Prior College Degree Code

PCOL_DEGR_CODE2 Previous College Degree 2

PCOL_DEGR_CODE3 Previous College Degree 3

PCOL_DEGR_CODE4 Previous College Degree 4

PCOL_DEGR_CODE5 Previous College Degree 5

PCOL_GPA Previous College GPA

PCOL_GRAD_CENT Previous College Grad Century

PCOL_GRAD_DATE Previous College Grad Date

PCOL_GRAD_DATE2 Previous College Grad Date 2

PCOL_GRAD_DATE3 Previous College Grad Date 3

PCOL_GRAD_DATE4 Previous College Grad Date 4

PCOL_GRAD_DATE5 Previous College Grad Date 5

PCOL_GRAD_DAY Previous College Grad Day

PCOL_GRAD_MON Previous College Grad Month

PCOL_GRAD_YEAR Previous College Grad Year

PCOL_LONG_DESC Previous College Long

Placehld

PCOL_MAJR_CODE Previous College Major 1

STVTPFD Tape Field Names Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

PCOL_MAJR_CODE2 Previous College Major 2

PCOL_MAJR_CODE3 Previous College Major 3

PCOL_MAJR_CODE4 Previous College Major 4

PCOL_MAJR_CODE5 Previous College Major 5

PCOL_MAJR_NAME Prev Coll Majr Desc 1 Placehld

PCOL_MAJR_NAME2 Prev Coll Majr Desc 2 Placehld

PCOL_MAJR_NAME3 Prev Coll Majr Desc 3 Placehld

PCOL_MAJR_NAME4 Prev Coll Majr Desc 4 Placehld

PCOL_MAJR_NAME5 Prev Coll Majr Desc 5 Placehld

PCOL_NAME Previous College Name

Placehld

PCOL_NATION Previous College Nation

PCOL_PROGRAM Previous College Program

PCOL_SBGI_CODE Previous College SBGI Code

PCOL_SHORT_DESC Previous College Shrt Placehld

PCOL_STAT_CODE Previous College State Code

PCOL_STREET1 Previous College Street Line 1

PCOL_YEARS_ATTEND Previous College To From

YYYY

PCOL_ZIP Previous College ZIP Code

PF_FAIL_HOURS Pass Fail - Failed Hours

PF_PASS_HOURS Pass Fail - Passed Hours

PHONE_AREA Phone Area Code

PHONE_COMMENT Phone Comment for GRE

PHONE_NUMBER Phone Number

PHONE_PREF Preferred Phone Number Ind

PIDM PIDM

PLUS_MINUS_GRADES Grades Use Plus or Minus

PREF_ADDRESS Preferred Address Placeholder

PREF_CITY Preferred City Placeholder

PREV_APP1 YYYY Previously Applied 1

PREV_APP2 YYYY Previously Applied 2

STVTPFD Tape Field Names Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

PREV_APP3 YYYY Previously Applied 3

PREV_APP4 YYYY Previously Applied 4

PREV_MATRIC Previous Matriculation

RACE1 Race Code 1

RACE10 Race Code 10

RACE2 Race Code 2

RACE3 Race Code 3

RACE4 Race Code 4

RACE5 Race Code 5

RACE6 Race Code 6

RACE7 Race Code 7

RACE8 Race Code 8

RACE9 Race Code 9

REC_NUMBER Record Number

RELG_CODE Religion Code

S01_NATIONAL_PERCENTILE SAT Verbal National Percentile

S01_RCRV_IND SAT S01 RCRV Indicator

S01_STATE_PERCENTILE SAT Verbal State Percentile

S01_TADM_CODE SAT S01 Test Admin Code

S01_TEST_MON SAT S01 Test Month

S01_TEST_SCORE SAT S01 Test Score

S01_TEST_YEAR SAT S01 Test Year

S02_NATIONAL_PERCENTILE SAT Math National Percentile

S02_RCRV_IND SAT S02 RCRV Indicator

S02_STATE_PERCENTILE SAT Math State Percentile

S02_TADM_CODE SAT S02 Test Admin Code

S02_TEST_MON SAT S02 Test Month

S02_TEST_SCORE SAT S02 Test Score

S02_TEST_YEAR SAT S02 Test Year

S03_RCRV_IND SAT S03 RCRV Indicator

S03_TADM_CODE SAT S03 Test Admin Code

STVTPFD Tape Field Names Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

S03_TEST_MON SAT S03 Test Month

S03_TEST_SCORE SAT S03 Test Score

S03_TEST_YEAR SAT S03 Test Year

S04_RCRV_IND SAT S04 RCRV Indicator

S04_TADM_CODE SAT S04 Test Admin Code

S04_TEST_MON SAT S04 Test Month

S04_TEST_SCORE SAT S04 Test Score

S04_TEST_YEAR SAT S04 Test Year

S05_RCRV_IND SAT S05 RCRV Indicator

S05_TADM_CODE SAT S05 Test Admin Code

S05_TEST_MON SAT S05 Test Month

S05_TEST_SCORE SAT S05 Test Score

S05_TEST_YEAR SAT S05 Test Year

S06_RCRV_IND SAT S06 RCRV Indicator

S06_TADM_CODE SAT S06 Test Admin Code

S06_TEST_MON SAT S06 Test Month

S06_TEST_SCORE SAT S06 Test Score

S06_TEST_YEAR SAT S06 Test Year

S07_NATIONAL_PERCENTILE SAT Writing Natl Percentile

S07_RCRV_IND SAT S07 RCRV Indicator

S07_STATE_PERCENTILE SAT Writing State Percentile

S07_TADM_CODE SAT S07 Test Admin Code

S07_TEST_MON SAT S07 Test Month

S07_TEST_SCORE SAT S07 Test Score

S07_TEST_YEAR SAT S07 Test Year

S08_RCRV_IND SAT S08 RCRV Indicator

S08_TADM_CODE SAT S08 Test Admin Code

S08_TEST_MON SAT S08 Test Month

S08_TEST_SCORE SAT S08 Test Score

S08_TEST_YEAR SAT S08 Test Year

S09_RCRV_IND SAT S09 RCRV Indicator

STVTPFD Tape Field Names Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

S09_TADM_CODE SAT S09 Test Admin Code

S09_TEST_MON SAT S09 Test Month

S09_TEST_SCORE SAT S09 Test Score

S09_TEST_YEAR SAT S09 Test Year

SAG_TADM_CODE ACT SAG Test Admin Code

SAG_TEST_MON ACT SAG Test Month

SAG_TEST_SCORE ACT SAG Test Score

SAG_TEST_YEAR ACT SAG Test Year

SAL_TADM_CODE ACT SAL Test Admin Code

SAL_TEST_MON ACT SAL Test Month

SAL_TEST_SCORE ACT SAL Test Score

SAL_TEST_YEAR ACT SAL Test Year

SAT_ESSAY_ID SAT Essay ID

SCHOOL_NUM School Number

SCHOOL_STATE School State

SCHOOL_UNUSED MCAT School Unused

Placeholder

SEA_TADM_CODE ACT SEA Test Admin Code

SEA_TEST_MON ACT SEA Test Month

SEA_TEST_SCORE ACT SEA Test Score

SEA_TEST_YEAR ACT SEA Test Year

SGT_TADM_CODE ACT SGT Test Admin Code

SGT_TEST_MON ACT SGT Test Month

SGT_TEST_SCORE ACT SGT Test Score

SGT_TEST_YEAR ACT SGT Test Year

SO_AO_GPA Sophomore All Other GPA

SO_AO_HOURS Sophomore All Other Hours

SO_BCPM_GPA Sophomore

BioChemPhysMath GPA

SO_BCPM_HOURS Sophomore

BioChemPhysMath Hrs

SO_TOTAL_GPA Sophomore Total GPA

STVTPFD Tape Field Names Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

SRH_TADM_CODE ACT SRH Test Admin Code

SRH_TEST_MON ACT SRH Test Month

SRH_TEST_SCORE ACT SRH Test Score

SRH_TEST_YEAR ACT SRH Test Year

SR_AO_GPA Senior All Other GPA

SR_AO_HOURS Senior All Other Hours

SR_BCPM_GPA Senior BioChemPhysMath

GPA

SR_BCPM_HOURS Senior BioChemPhysMath

Hours

SR_TOTAL_GPA Senior Total GPA

SSN Social Security Number

SSN_OLD Old SSN Placeholder

SSS_TADM_CODE ACT SSS Test Admin Code

SSS_TEST_MON ACT SSS Test Month

SSS_TEST_SCORE ACT SSS Test Score

SSS_TEST_YEAR ACT SSS Test Year

STAT_CODE State Code

STREET_LINE1 Street Address Line 1

STREET_LINE2 Street Address Line 2

STREET_LINE3 Street Address Line 3

STUDENT_TYPE Student Type

SUFFIX Name Suffix

SUM_TADM_CODE ACT SUM Test Admin Code

SUM_TEST_MON ACT SUM Test Month

SUM_TEST_SCORE ACT SUM Test Score

SUM_TEST_YEAR ACT SUM Test Year

SWR_TEST_SCORE ACT SWR Test Score

TELE_TYPE_CODE Telephone Type Code

URM_IND URM Indicator Placeholder

VERIFY_IND Verified Indicator Placeholder

VISA Visa Type

STVTPFD Tape Field Names Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

ZIP ZIP Code

STVTRNS Transcript Name Source Code Validation Form

IDEN General Person Identification

LEGAL General Person Legal Name

DIPLOMA Diploma Name

STVTSPT Test Score Percentile Type Validation Form

ANN ACT National Norm Cumulative Percent

GRP GRE Percentile

SMN SAT Math National College-Bound

Percentile

SMS SAT Math State College-Bound

Percentile

SVN SAT Verbal National College-Bound

Percentile

SVS SAT Verbal State College-Bound

Percentile

SWN SAT Writing National College-Bound

Percentile

SWS SAT Writing State College-Bound

Percentile

S2N SAT II National College-Bound Percentile

STVVTAB Web Display Tables Validation Form

GTVINSM Instructional Method Validation

STVATTR Attribute Validation

STVBLDG Building Code Validation

STVCAMP Campus Code Validation

STVCOLL College Code Validation

STVDEPT Department Code Validation

STVDIVS Division Code Validation

STVTPFD Tape Field Names Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVLEVL Level Code Validation

STVPTRM Part of Term Code Validation

STVSCHD Schedule Type Code Validation

STVSUBJ Subject Code Validation

STVSESS Session Code Validation

STVTESC Test Code Validation

STVWACK

Web Prospect Acknowledgment Letter Codes

Validation Form

ADDR1_ATYP_CODE Address 1 Address Code

ADDR1_CITY Address 1 City

ADDR1_FROM_DATE Address 1 From Date

ADDR1_HNUM Address 1 House Number

ADDR1_NATN_CODE Address 1 Nation Code

ADDR1_STAT_CODE Address 1 State Code

ADDR1_STR1 Address 1 Street 1

ADDR1_STR2 Address 1 Street 2

ADDR1_STR3 Address 1 Street 3

ADDR1_STR4 Address 1 Street 4

ADDR1_TO_DATE Address 1 To Date

ADDR1_ZIP Address 1 ZIP

ADDR2_ATYP_CODE Address 2 Address Code

ADDR2_CITY Address 2 City

ADDR2_FROM_DATE Address 2 From Date

ADDR2_HNUM Address 2 House Number

ADDR2_NATN_CODE Address 2 Nation Code

ADDR2_STAT_CODE Address 2 State Code

ADDR2_STR1 Address 2 Street 1

ADDR2_STR2 Address 2 Street 2

ADDR2_STR3 Address 2 Street 3

ADDR2_STR4 Address 2 Street 4

STVVTAB Web Display Tables Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

ADDR2_TO_DATE Address 2 To Date

ADDR2_ZIP Address 2 ZIP

BIRTHDATE Birth Date

CITZ_CODE Citizenship

EMAIL_ADDRESS Email Address

EMAL_CODE Email Address Code

ETHN_CODE Ethnicity

FIRST_NAME First Name

FOREIGN_SSN Foreign SSN

GENDER Gender

HS_CITY High School City

HS_CLASS_RANK High School Class Rank

HS_CLASS_SIZE High School Class Size

HS_GPA High School GPA

HS_GRAD_DATE High School Grad Date

HS_HNUM High School House Number

HS_NAME High School Name

HS_NATN_CODE High School Nation

HS_SBGI_CODE High School SBGI Code

HS_STAT_CODE High School State

HS_STR1 High School Street 1

HS_STR2 High School Street 2

HS_STR3 High School Street 3

HS_STR4 High School Street 4

HS_ZIP High School ZIP Code

INTS_CODE_1 Interest 1

INTS_CODE_2 Interest 2

INTS_CODE_3 Interest 3

INTS_CODE_4 Interest 4

INTS_CODE_5 Interest 5

STVWACK

Web Prospect Acknowledgment Letter Codes

Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

LAST_NAME Last Name

LAST_NAME_PREFIX Surname Prefix

LEND_CODE_1 How I Learned About

LEND_CODE_2 How I Learned About

LEND_CODE_3 How I Learned About

MAJR_CODE Major

MATL_CODE_1 Requested Material

MATL_CODE_2 Requested Material

MATL_CODE_3 Requested Material

MIDDLE_NAME Middle Name

NAME_PREFIX Name Prefix

NAME_SUFFIX Name Suffix

NATN_CODE_LEGAL Country of Citizenship

NICKNAME Nickname

NTYP_CODE Name Type Code

PCOL_CITY Prior College City

PCOL_GPA Prior College GPA

PCOL_GRAD_DATE Prior College Grad Date

PCOL_HNUM Prior College House Number

PCOL_NAME Prior College Name

PCOL_NATN_CODE Prior College Nation

PCOL_SBGI_CODE Prior College SBGI Code

PCOL_STAT_CODE Prior College State

PCOL_STR1 Prior College Street 1

PCOL_STR2 Prior College Street 2

PCOL_STR3 Prior College Street 3

PCOL_STR4 Prior College Street 4

PCOL_ZIP Prior College ZIP Code

SSNTINTFN SSN/TIN/TFN

STYP_CODE Student Type

STVWACK

Web Prospect Acknowledgment Letter Codes

Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

TELE1_ATYP_CODE Telephone 1 Address Code

TELE1_CTRY_PHONE Telephone 1 Country Code

TELE1_INTL_ACCESS Telephone 1 Inter Access

TELE1_PHONE_AREA Telephone 1 Phone Area

TELE1_PHONE_EXT Telephone 1 Phone Extension

TELE1_PHONE_NUMBER Telephone 1 Phone Number

TELE2_ATYP_CODE Telephone 2 Address Code

TELE2_CTRY_PHONE Telephone 2 Country Code

TELE2_INTL_ACCESS Telephone 2 Inter Access

TELE2_PHONE_AREA Telephone 2 Phone Area

TELE2_PHONE_EXT Telephone 2 Phone Extension

TELE2_PHONE_NUMBER Telephone 2 Phone Number

TELE3_CTRY_PHONE Telephone 3 Country Code

TELE3_INTL_ACCESS Telephone 3 Inter Access

TELE3_PHONE_AREA Telephone 3 Phone Area

TELE3_PHONE_EXT Telephone 3 Phone Extension

TELE3_PHONE_NUMBER Telephone 3 Phone Number

TELE4_CTRY_PHONE Telephone 4 Country Code

TELE4_INTL_ACCESS Telephone 4 Inter Access

TELE4_PHONE_AREA Telephone 4 Phone Area

TELE4_PHONE_EXT Telephone 4 Phone Extension

TELE4_PHONE_NUMBER Telephone 4 Phone Number

TELE5_CTRY_PHONE Telephone 5 Country Code

TELE5_INTL_ACCESS Telephone 5 Inter Access

TELE5_PHONE_AREA Telephone 5 Phone Area

TELE5_PHONE_EXT Telephone 5 Phone Extension

TELE5_PHONE_NUMBER Telephone 5 Phone Number

TERM_CODE Term Code

TEST1_DATE Test 1 Date

TEST1_SCORE Test 1 Score

STVWACK

Web Prospect Acknowledgment Letter Codes

Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

TEST1_TESC_CODE Test 1 TESC Code

TEST2_DATE Test 2 Date

TEST2_SCORE Test 2 Score

TEST2_TESC_CODE Test 2 TESC Code

TEST3_DATE Test 3 Date

TEST3_SCORE Test 3 Score

TEST3_TESC_CODE Test 3 TESC Code

TEST4_DATE Test 4 Date

TEST4_SCORE Test 4 Score

TEST4_TESC_CODE Test 4 TESC Code

TEST5_DATE Test 5 Date

TEST5_SCORE Test 5 Score

TEST5_TESC_CODE Test 5 TESC Code

VTYP_CODE Visa

STVWAPP Application Type Code Validation Form

00 Default Example - All Sections

W1 Undergraduate Freshman

W2 Undergraduate Transfer

W3 Internatnl Undergrad Freshman

W4 Internatnl Undergrad Transfer

W5 Graduate Studies

W6 International Graduate Studies

W7 Continuing Ed, Non-Degree

STVWLTT Web Application Customized Letter Type Validation Form

Letter Type

Code Module Description

APPLHOLD E Application Holds Exist Letter

DECNERR E Error on Decision Record Letter

STVWACK

Web Prospect Acknowledgment Letter Codes

Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

DEFAULT E Default Letter If Not Specified

MATCHERR E Matching Processing Returns Error Letter

NOSTUREC S Cannot Insert Student Record Letter

PUSHERR E Push Processing Returns Error Letter

QUIKADMT S Standard Quick Start Signature Letter

STANDARD E Standard Web Application Signature Letter

SUSPENSE E Suspended Match Status Signature Letter

VERERR E Verify Processing Returns Error Letter

STVWPIC Web Prospect Information Selection Validation Form

ADDRESS1 Primary Address

ADDRESS2 Secondary Address

BIRTHDATE Prospect Birthdate

CITIZENSHP Prospect Citizenship

EMAIL E-Mail Address

ENTRYTERM Prospect Entry Term

ETHNICITY Prospect Ethnicity/Race

GENDER Prospect Gender

HIGHSCHOOL Prospect High School

HOWILEARND How Prospect Learned About Us

INTERESTS Prospect Interests

INTERNATNL Prospect International Info

MAJOR Prospect Major

MATERIAL Requested Material

NAME Prospect Name

NTYPE Prospect Name Type

PRIORCOLL Prospect Prior College

SSNTINTFN Prospect SSN/TIN/TFN

STUDENTTYP Prospect Student Type

STVWLTT Web Application Customized Letter Type Validation Form

Letter Type

Code Module Description

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

TELE3 Additional Telephone Numbers

TESTSCORES Prospect Test Scores

VISA Visa Information

STVWSCF Admissions Web Page Element Validation Form

Element Code Description Web Section

ACTIVITY Activity ACTIVITIES

ADDR2_CITY City ADDR2

ADDR2_COUNTY County ADDR2

ADDR2_HOUSE_NUMBER House Number ADDR2

ADDR2_INTL_ACCESS International Access ADDR2

ADDR2_NATION Country ADDR2

ADDR2_PHONE_CTRY_CODE Phone Country Code ADDR2

ADDR2_PHONE_NUMBER Phone Number ADDR2

ADDR2_STATE State/Province ADDR2

ADDR2_STREET1 Street Line 1 ADDR2

ADDR2_STREET2 Street Line 2 ADDR2

ADDR2_STREET3 Street Line 3 ADDR2

ADDR2_STREET4 Street Line 4 ADDR2

ADDR2_ZIP ZIP Code ADDR2

ATYP Address Type ADDR1

BIRTHDATE Birth Date PERSONAL

CELL_EXTENSION Cellular Phone Ext PERSONAL

CELL_INTL_ACCESS Cellular Phone Int

Access Code

PERSONAL

CELL_PHONE Cellular Phone

Number

PERSONAL

CELL_PHONE_CTRY_CODE Cellular Phone

Country Code

PERSONAL

CITIZEN Citizenship PERSONAL

CITY City ADDR1

CONCENTRATION Concentration PLAN

STVWPIC Web Prospect Information Selection Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

CONFIDENT Confidentiality PERSONAL

COUNTY County ADDR1

EMAIL Email PERSONAL

ETHNIC Ethnicity PERSONAL

ETHNIC_CATEGORY Ethnicity PERSONAL

FIRST_NAME First Name NAME

GENDER Gender PERSONAL

HOUSE_NUMBER House Number ADDR1

HSCH_CITY High School City HIGHSCH

HSCH_CLASS_SIZE High School Class

Size

HIGHSCH

HSCH_CODE High School Code HIGHSCH

HSCH_COUNTY High School County HIGHSCH

HSCH_GPA GPA HIGHSCH

HSCH_GRAD_DATE Graduation Date HIGHSCH

HSCH_HOME_SCHOOL Home School HIGHSCH

HSCH_HOUSE_NUMBER House Number HIGHSCH

HSCH_NAME High School Name HIGHSCH

HSCH_NATION High School Nation HIGHSCH

HSCH_RANK High School Rank HIGHSCH

HSCH_STATE High School State HIGHSCH

HSCH_STREET1 High School Street1 HIGHSCH

HSCH_STREET2 High School Street2 HIGHSCH

HSCH_STREET3 High School Street3 HIGHSCH

HSCH_STREET4 High School Street4 HIGHSCH

HSCH_ZIP High School ZIP Code HIGHSCH

INTL_ACCESS International Access ADDR1

LAST_NAME Last Name NAME

LAST_NAME_PREFIX Last Name Prefix NAME

LEGACY Legacy PERSONAL

STVWSCF Admissions Web Page Element Validation Form

Element Code Description Web Section

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

MAJOR Major PLAN

MARITAL Marital Status PERSONAL

MATERIAL Requested Material MATERIALS

MEDICAL Medical Information PERSONAL

MID_NAME Middle Name NAME

MINOR Minor PLAN

NATION Nation ADDR1

NICKNAME Nickname NAME

OTHER_ACTIVITY Other Activity ACTIVITIES

PAR_CITY City PARENTS

PAR_CODE Relationship PARENTS

PAR_COUNTY County PARENTS

PAR_DECEASED Deceased PARENTS

PAR_FIRST_NAME First Name PARENTS

PAR_HOUSE_NUMBER House Number PARENTS

PAR_LAST_NAME Last Name PARENTS

PAR_MIDDLE_NAME Middle Name PARENTS

PAR_NATION Nation PARENTS

PAR_PHONE_CTRY_CODE Phone Country Code PARENTS

PAR_PREFIX Prefix PARENTS

PAR_STATE State/Province PARENTS

PAR_STREET1 Street Line 1 PARENTS

PAR_STREET2 Street Line 2 PARENTS

PAR_STREET3 Street Line 3 PARENTS

PAR_STREET4 Street Line 4 PARENTS

PAR_SUFFIX Suffix PARENTS

PAR_SURNAME_PREFIX Last Name Prefix PARENTS

PAR_ZIP ZIP Code PARENTS

PARENT_EMPLOYER Employer PARENTS

PARENT_INTL_ACCESS International Access PARENTS

STVWSCF Admissions Web Page Element Validation Form

Element Code Description Web Section

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

PARENT_PHONE_NUMBER Phone Number PARENTS

PCOL_ATTEND_FROM College Attend From

Date

PRVCOLLEGE

PCOL_ATTEND_TO College Attend To

Date

PRVCOLLEGE

PCOL_CITY City PRVCOLLEGE

PCOL_CLASS_SIZE Class Size PRVCOLLEGE

PCOL_CODE College School Code PRVCOLLEGE

PCOL_COUNTY College County PRVCOLLEGE

PCOL_DEGREE College Degree PRVCOLLEGE

PCOL_DEGREE_DATE College Degree Date PRVCOLLEGE

PCOL_GPA GPA PRVCOLLEGE

PCOL_HOUSE_NUMBER House Number PRVCOLLEGE

PCOL_MAJOR College Major PRVCOLLEGE

PCOL_MINOR College Minor PRVCOLLEGE

PCOL_NAME College Name PRVCOLLEGE

PCOL_NATION College Nation PRVCOLLEGE

PCOL_RANK Rank PRVCOLLEGE

PCOL_STATE College State PRVCOLLEGE

PCOL_STREET1 Street1 PRVCOLLEGE

PCOL_STREET2 Street2 PRVCOLLEGE

PCOL_STREET3 Street3 PRVCOLLEGE

PCOL_STREET4 Street4 PRVCOLLEGE

PCOL_ZIP ZIP Code PRVCOLLEGE

PHONE_CTRY_CODE Phone Country Code ADDR1

PHONE_NUMBER Phone Number ADDR1

PREFIX Prefix NAME

PREV_APPL Previously Applied? NAME

PREV_ATTEND Previously Attended? NAME

PREV_LAST Previous Last Name NAME

STVWSCF Admissions Web Page Element Validation Form

Element Code Description Web Section

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

QUESTION Question *

*You can select the Web section value that best suits the

QUESTION element

code for your site.

RACE Race PERSONAL

RELIGION Religion PERSONAL

RESID Resident PERSONAL

SSN SSN PERSONAL

STATE State ADDR1

STREET1 Street Line 1 ADDR1

STREET2 Street Line 2 ADDR1

STREET3 Street Line 3 ADDR1

STREET4 Street Line 4 ADDR1

SUFFIX Suffix NAME

TEST_INFO Test TESTS

VET_CATEGORY Veteran Classification PERSONAL

VET_FILE_NO Veteran ID PERSONAL

VISA_BIRTH_NATION Birth Country INTERNATL

VISA_CITZN_NATION Citizenship Country INTERNATL

VISA_EXPIRE_DATE Visa Expiration Date INTERNATL

VISA_ISSUE_DATE Visa Issue Date INTERNATL

VISA_LANGUAGE Native Language INTERNATL

VISA_NUMBER Visa Number INTERNATL

VISA_TYPE Visa INTERNATL

ZIP ZIP Code ADDR1

STVWSCT Web Prospect Information Selection Validation Form

ACTIVITIES Activities

ADDITIONAL Additional Information

ADDR1 First Address and Phone

ADDR2 Second Address and Phone

STVWSCF Admissions Web Page Element Validation Form

Element Code Description Web Section

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

Note: You must also enter the appropriate Web procedure name in the

Procedure field for each section code.

ESSAY Essay Questions

HIGHSCH High School

INTERNATL International Information

MATERIALS Requested Materials

NAME Name

PARENTS Parental Information

PERSONAL Personal Information

PLAN Planned Course of Study

PRVCOLLEGE Previous College

TESTS Test Scores

STVXLBL EDI Verification Label Validation Form

AGEVERFY Age Verification Codes

ASESSLVL XML Import StudentLevelCode

CNTYRURL County Rural Indicators

CRDBASIS XML CourseCreditBasis to EDI

CRDUNIT XML CourseCreditUnits to EDI

CRDLEVEL XML CourseCreditLevel

CRSLEVEL XML CourseLevel to EDI

CRSOVERR XML CourseOverideSchool

CRSRPEAT XML CourseRepeatCode to EDI

DEGRLEVL Degree Level Codes

DFMTCODE Date Format Codes

EIDNCODE Entity Identifier Codes

FSTYIDQL Field of Study Qualifier Codes

FSTYLEVL Field of Study Level Codes

GENDER Gender Codes

GRCRLEVL Grade or Course Level Codes

STVWSCT Web Prospect Information Selection Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

GTVLFST Field of Study Types

HEADXPRP XML DocumentType to XPRP

HEADXRSN XML TransmissionType to XRSN

HONRLEVL Honor Level Codes

HSCHRSON High School Graduation Codes

IMMZRTYP Immunization Report Type

IMMZSTAT Immunization Status Codes

IMMZTYPE Immunization Type Codes

ITCCLEVL Individual Level Codes

LANGPROF Language Proficiency Codes

LANGUSE Language Use Codes

NTYPCODE Name Type Codes

QSTNCODE EDI Question Codes

RESDCRIT Residency Criteria Codes

RFNOQLFR Reference Qualifier Code

SBGIQLFR Educational Inst Qualifier

STVASTDD XML ASTD Delinquency codes

STVASTDH XML ASTD Honor codes

STVATTR Course Attributes

STVATYP Address Type Codes

STVATYPR Relatives Address Type Codes

STVCITZ Citizenship Type Codes

STVCLAS Class Codes

STVCNTY County Codes

STVDEGC Degree Level-Degree Code

STVEGOL College Program Type Codes

STVESEL Eligibility Factor Codes

STVETHN Ethnic Type Codes

STVHONR Honor codes

STVINTS Award and Activity Codes

STVLANGN Language Name Codes

STVXLBL EDI Verification Label Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVLANGW Written Language Codes

STVLEVL Course and Student Level codes

STVLGCY Legacy Codes

STVMAJR EDI Major Codes

STVMATL Requested Materials

STVMEDI Medical Condition Codes

STVMRTL Marital Status Codes

STVNATN Nation Codes

STVRELG Religion Codes

STVRELT Relationship Codes

STVSBGIC EDI College Codes

STVSBGIH EDI High School Codes

STVSTAT State Codes

STVTEAC MCAT Non-Standard Indicator

STVTEFR XML Test form codes

STVTELE Telephone Qualifier Codes

STVTESC Sub-Test Codes

STVTRMT Term Type codes

STVTRMTC Term Type for Credit Units

STVVETC Veteran Type Code

STVVTYP VISA Type Codes

STVWAIV Appl Waiver Code

SUMACTYP XML AcademicSummaryLevel=>CTYP

SUMASLVL XML AcademicSummaryType =>SLVL

TESTCODE EDI Test Qualifier Codes

STVXLBL EDI Verification Label Validation Form

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

Validation Forms Menu System

The following page shows a diagram of the menu hierarchy for the Banner Student

System and Accounts Receivable module validation forms. All of the validation forms are

listed alphabetically and are grouped by submenu. Each submenu is listed with a notation

as to which validation forms are included on it. To find which menu a form is on, check the

alphabetic range in which it falls.

For example, to locate STVTERM, you see it falls between STVTELE and STVTRAC and

would be listed on submenu *STDVALD3F.

Use this menu system to view the validation forms used in the Banner Student System.

Updates to validation forms can also be done by entering the name of the form you want

and retrieving it directly in expert mode, or by using the subsystem of menus to navigate to

the desired form. The validation forms are listed alphabetically. Updates and additions are

made directly on the validation form.

101

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

Validation Forms System Reference

This list references the system validation forms which are used by Banner Student System functional/application forms and their related

modules.

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

GTVDUNT Duration Unit Validation Form SCACRSE Basic Course Information Form

SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

SFARHST Student Registration History and

Extension Form

SSARULE Schedule Processing Rules Form

SSASECQ Schedule Section Query Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

Catalog

Registration

Schedule

GTVINSM Instructional Method Validation Form SCACRSE Basic Course Information Form

SFARGFE Registration Fee Assessment Rules

Form

SOAORUL Open Learning Section Default Rules

Form

SSADFEE Section Fees Assessment Control Form

SSASECQ Schedule Section Query Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

Catalog

Registration

Overall

Schedule

102

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

GTVLETR Letter Code Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAADCRV Admissions Decision Form

SAAMAPP Admissions Mass Entry Form

SGAMSPT Mass Entry Athletic Compliance Form

SGAMSTU General Student Mass Entry Form

SHAGADR Self-Service Graduation Application

Display Rules Form

SHAMCAT Mass Entry Ceremony Attendance Form

SHAMDEG Mass Entry Graduation Form

SHAMDIP Mass Entry Diploma Form

SHAMUCA Mass Update Ceremony Attendance

Form

SHAMUDI Mass Update Diploma Form

SHATPRT Transcript Type Rules Form

SOAMATL Material Form

SUAMAIL Student Mail Form

Admissions

General Student

Academic History

Overall

Recruiting/Admissions

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

103

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

GTVLFST Learner Field of Study Type Validation

Form

SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAAMAPP Admissions Mass Entry Form

SCADETL Course Detail Information Form

SCARRES Course Registration Restrictions Form

SFAMREG Registration Mass Entry Form

SFAMHRS Registration Minimum Maximum Hours

Form

SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

SFARGFE Registration Fee Assessment Rules

Form

SFARQST Enrollment Verification Request Form

SFARWLP Reserved Seats Priority Management

Form

SGAMSTU General Student Mass Entry Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SHADEGR Degrees and Other Formal Awards

Form

SHAGELR Graduation Application Eligibility Rules

Form

SHAMCAT Mass Entry Ceremony Attendance Form

SHAMDEG Mass Entry Graduation Form

SHAMDIP Mass Entry Diploma Form

SHAMUDI Mass Update Diploma Form

Admissions

Catalog

Registration

General Student

Academic History

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

104

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

GTVLFST Learner Field of Study Type Validation

Form (cont.)

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

SOACTRL Curriculum Rules Control Form

SOAWLTC Automated Waitlist Term Control Form

SSADETL Schedule Detail Form

SSADFEE Section Fee Assessment Control Form

SSARRES Schedule Restrictions Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

SSIRESV Reserved Seats Inquiry Form

Recruiting

Overall

Schedule

GTVMTYP Meeting Type Validation Form SHAGADR Self-Service Graduation Application

Display Rules Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

SSAXMTI Cross List Meeting Time/Instructor

Query Form

Academic History

Schedule

GTVPARA Paragraph Code Validation Form GUALETR Letter Process Form Overall

GTVPARS Partition Code Validation Form SCACRSE Basic Course Information Form

SLABLDG Building Definition Form

SLARDEF Room Definition Form

SSASBSH Subject Scheduling Rules Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

Catalog

Location Management

Schedule

GTVSCHS Scheduling Status Code Validation Form SSASCHW Schedule Work Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

Schedule

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

105

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

GTVZIPC ZIP/Postal Code Validation Form GOAMTCH Common Matching Entry Form

SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SFARQST Enrollment Verification Request Form

SHADIPL Diploma Form

SHAGAPP Graduation Application Form

SHARQTC Transcript Request Form

SLABLDG Building Definition Form

SPAEMRG Emergency Contact Form

SPAIDEN General Person Identification Form

SRAQUIK Quick Recruit Form

SOAFOLK Guardian Information Form

General Person

Admissions

Registration

Academic History

Location Management

General Person

Recruiting

Recruiting/Admissions

PTRTENR Tenure Code Rule Form SIAFPER Faculty Personnel Form

SIAIQRY Faculty/Advisor Query Form

Faculty Load

STVACCL Academic Calendar Type Validation

Form

SSAACRL Schedule Academic Calendar Rules

Form

SSAACCL Schedule Calendar Form

SSAQCRL Academic Calendar Rule Query Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

Schedule

STVACCT Attendance Accounting Method

Validation Form

SSASECT Schedule Form Schedule

STVACPR Acceptance Practice Code Validation

Form

SOABGTA Transfer Articulation Institution Form Academic History

STVACST Institutional Accreditation Status

Validation Form

SOABGTA Transfer Articulation Institution Form Academic History

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

106

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVACTC Banner Student Activity Code Validation

Form

SFAMHRS Registration Minimum Maximum Hours

Form

SGAMSPT Mass Entry Athletic Compliance Form

SGASPRT Athletic Compliance Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SGISPRT Athletic Compliance Inquiry Form

Registration

General Student

STVACTN Action Code Validation Form Please refer to the CAPP Handbook.CAPP

STVACYR Academic Year Validation Form SGAMSTU General Student Mass Entry Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SHADEGR Degrees and Other Formal Awards

Form

SHADGMQ Degree Summary Form

SHAGADR Self-Service Graduation Application

Display Rules Form

SHAGAPP Graduation Application Form

SHAMDEG Mass Entry Graduation Form

General Student

Academic History

STVADMR Admission Request Checklist Code

Validation Form

SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAACHKB Admissions Checklist Rules Form

SAAMAPP Admissions Mass Entry Form

SOAHSCH High School Information Form

SOAPCOL Prior College Form

SOATEST Test Score Information Form

SOISBGI Source/Background Institution Query-

Only Form

Admissions

Overall

Recruiting

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

107

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVADMT Admission Type Code Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAACHKB Admissions Checklist Rules Form

SAADCRV Admissions Decision Form

SAADCSN Admissions Decision Rules Form

SAAMAPP Admissions Mass Entry Form

SAAQKER Quick Entry Rules Form

SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SAASUMI Admissions Application Summary Form

SFAMHRS Registration Minimum Maximum Hours

Form

SGAMSTU General Student Mass Entry Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

SOAIDNS Person Search Detail Form

SOAMATL Material Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

SRAQUIK Quick Recruit Form

Admissions

Registration

General Student

Academic History

System Administration

Overall

Recruiting

STVADVR Advisor Type Validation Form SGAADVR Multiple Advisors Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

General Student

STVAFCT Admissions Factor Code Validation

Form

SAARRFT Admissions Rating Factor Rules Form

SAARRDF Admissions Rating Formula Definition

Form

Admissions

STVAFDC Student CARE AFDC Duration

Validation Form

SGAEOPS Education Opportunity Programs and

Services Form

General Student

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

108

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVAPDC Admission Application Decision Code

Validation Form

SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAADCRV Admissions Decision Form

SAADCSN Admissions Decision Rules Form

SAAMAPP Admissions Mass Entry Form

SAAQKER Quick Entry Rules Form

SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SAASUMI Admissions Application Summary Form

SOAMATL Material Form

Admissions

Overall

STVAPRN Apprenticeship Validation Form SGASTDN General Student Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

General Student

Academic History

STVAPLS EDI Application Source Code Validation

Form

SAAETBL Electronic Application Submitted Form Admissions

STVAPRV Catalog Approval Code Validation Form SCACRSE Basic Course Information Form Catalog

STVAPST Admission Application Status Code

Validation Form

SCACRSE Basic Course Information Form

SAADCRV Admissions Decision Form

SAAMAPP Admissions Mass Entry Form

SAAQKER Quick Entry Rules Form

SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SAASUMI Admissions Application Summary Form

Admissions

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

109

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVARTP Room and Meal Application Type

Validation Form

SLAMASG Meal Assignment Form

SLAPASG Phone Assignment Form

SLARASG Room Assignment Form

SLARMAP Dorm Room and Meal Application Form

SLQRASG Room Assignment Query Form

SLQRMAP Application Query Form

Location Management

STVASCD Room Assignment Status Code

Validation Form

SLAASCD Room Assignment Status Form

SLARASG Room Assignment Form

SLARMAT Roommate Application Form

SLARUSE Dorm Room Query Form

SLASGNQ Available Dorm Room Query Form

SLQASCD Room Assignment Status Query Form

SLQRASG Room Assignment Query Form

Location Management

STVASTA Application Verification Steps Validation

Form

SAAEAPS Electronic Application Process Form Admissions

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

110

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVASTD Academic Standing Code Validation

Form

SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

SFARQST Enrollment Verification Request Form

SGASADD Additional Student Information Form

SGASPRT Athletic Compliance Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SGISPRT Athletic Compliance Inquiry Form

SHAACST Academic Standing Rules Form

SHAGELR Graduation Application Eligibility Rules

Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

SHARQTC Transcript Request Form

SHASTAT Academic Standing Query Form

SHASUBJ Subject Sequence History Form

SHATERM Term Sequence Course History Form

SHATRMC Course History By Term and Campus

Form

SHQTERM Term Summary Form

SOAWLTC Automated Waitlist Term Control Form

Registration

General Student

Academic History

Overall

STVASTY Assignment Type Code Validation Form SIAASGN Faculty Assignment Form Faculty Load

STVATRA Day Attribute One Validation Form SOACALD Calendar Day Information Form Schedule

STVATRB Day Attribute Two Validation Form SOACALD Calendar Day Information Form Schedule

STVATRC Day Attribute Three Validation Form SOACALD Calendar Day Information Form Schedule

STVATRD Day Attribute Four Validation Form SOACALD Calendar Day Information Form Schedule

STVATRE Day Attribute Five Validation Form SOACALD Calendar Day Information Form Schedule

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

111

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVATTR Attribute Validation Form SCADETL Course Detail Information Form

SSADETL Schedule Detail Form

SSQATTR Section Course Attribute Form

SHADEGR Degrees and Other Formal Awards

Form

SHARQTC Transcript Request Form

SHATATR Transfer Course Articulation Form

SHATCKN Course Maintenance Form

SHATRNS Transfer Course Form

SHATRTA Transfer Articulation Attributes Form

SOAWLTC Automated Waitlist Term Control Form

Catalog

Schedule

Academic History

Overall

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

112

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVATTS Student Attribute Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAAMAPP Admissions Mass Entry Form

SCADETL Course Detail Information Form

SCARRES Course Registration Restrictions Form

SFAMHRS Registration Minimum Maximum Hours

Form

SFAMREG Registration Mass Entry Form

SFARWLP Reserved Seats Priority Management

Form

SGAMSTU General Student Mass Entry Form

SGASADD Additional Student Information Form

SHAGELR Graduation Application Eligibility Rules

Form

SOAMATL Material Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

SSADETL Schedule Detail Form

SSADFEE Section Fee Assessment Control Form

SSARRES Schedule Restrictions Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

SSIRESV Reserved Seats Inquiry Form

Admissions

Catalog

Registration

General Student

Academic History

Overall

Recruiting

Schedule

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

113

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVATYP Address Type Code Validation Form GOAMTCH Common Matching Entry Form

SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SAAWAPP Web Application Section Rules Form

SFARQST Enrollment Verification Request Form

SOAFOLK Guardian Information Form

SHADIPL Diploma Form

SHAMDIP Mass Entry Diploma Form

SHAGAPP Graduation Application Form

SHARQTC Transcript Request Form

SOAFOLK Guardian Information Form

SOADDRQ Address Summary Form

SOAIDNS Person Search Detail Form

SPAEMRG Emergency Contact Form

SPAIDEN General Person Identification Form

SPATELE General Person Telephone Form

SRAQUIK Quick Recruit Form

General Person

Admissions

Registration

General Student

Academic History

Overall

System Administration

General Person

Recruiting

STVBCHR Background Inst. Characteristic Code

Validation Form

SOABGIY Source/Background Institution Year

Form

Recruiting

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

114

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVBLCK Block Code Validation Form SFAMREG Registration Mass Entry Form

SGAMSTU General Student Mass Entry Form

SGASADD Additional Student Information Form

SGASPRT Athletic Compliance Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

SSABLCK Block Schedule Control Form

SSABLKQ Block Schedule Query Form

SSABSCQ Block Schedule Section Query Form

SSADETL Schedule Detail Form

Registration

General Student

Academic History

Schedule

STVBLDG Building Code Validation Form SFAREGQ Registration Query Form

SFQSECT Section Schedule Query Form

SHACATQ Ceremony Attendance Query Form

SHACPRQ Ceremonies By Attendee Query Form

SHACRMQ Ceremony Query Form

SHACRMY Ceremony Form

SIAASGQ Faculty Schedule Query Form

SIQSECM Faculty Course Section Query Form

SLABLDG Building Definition Form

SLABQRY Building Query Form

SLAEVNT Event Form

Registration

Academic History

Faculty Load

Location Management

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

115

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVBLDG Building Code Validation Form (cont.) SLARASG Room Assignment Form

SLARDEF Room Definition Form

SLARMAP Dorm Room and Meal Application Form

SLARMAT Roommate Application Form

SLARUSE Dorm Room Query Form

SLASGNQ Available Dorm Room Query Form

SLIAEVN Event Available Room Query Form

SLQBCAT Building Category Query Form

SLQMEET Available Class Room Query Form

SLQRASG Room Assignment Query Form

SLQROOM Room Query Form

SSAMATX Building/Room Schedule Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

SSAXMTI Cross List Meeting Time/Instructor

Query Form

SSQMEET Meeting Time Help Form

Location Management

Schedule

STVBSKL Basic Skills Validation Form SGASTDN General Student Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

General Student

Academic History

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

116

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVCACT Curriculum Activity Status Validation

Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

SHADEGR Degrees and Other Formal Awards

Form

SORCACT Learner Curriculum Activity Rules Form

Recruiting

Admissions

General Student

Registration

Academic History

Overall

STVCALD Calendar Type Code Validation Form SHATAEQ Transfer Articulation Evaluation Form

SHATATC Transfer Institution Catalog Entry Form

SHATATR Transfer Course Articulation Form

SHATRTA Transfer Articulation Attributes Form

SOABGTA Transfer Articulation Institution Form

Academic History

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

117

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVCAMP Campus Code Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAADCRV Admissions Decision Form

SAAMAPP Admissions Mass Entry Form

SAAQKER Quick Entry Rules Form

SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SCADETL Course Detail Information Form

SCARRES Course Registration Restrictions Form

SCASRES Catalog Schedule Restrictions Form

SFAALST Class Attendance Roster Form

SFAGEOR Gainful Employment OPEID Rules Form

SFAMHRS Registration Minimum Maximum Hours

Form

SFAMREG Registration Mass Entry Form

SFAREGF Student Course/Fee Assessment Query

Form

SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

SFAREGQ Registration Query Form

SFARGFE Registration Fee Assessment Rules

Form

SFARQST Enrollment Verification Request Form

SFARWLP Reserved Seats Priority Management

Form

Admissions

Catalog

Registration

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

118

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVCAMP Campus Code Validation Form (cont.) SFASLST Class Roster Form

SFASTSR Student Centric Time Status Rules Form

SFATMST Time Status Rules Form

SFQSECM Registration Section Query Form

SFQSECT Section Schedule Query Form

SGADISA Student Disability Services Form

SGAMSTU General Student Mass Entry Form

SGASADD Additional Student Information Form

SGAPSRT Student Sport Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SHACRSE History Course Summary Form

SHADEGR Degrees and Other Formal Awards

Form

SHADGMQ Degree Summary Form

SHAGADS Graduation Application Display Rule

Selection Form

SHAGELR Graduation Application Eligibility Rules

Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

SHAMCAT Mass Entry Ceremony Attendance Form

SHAMDEG Mass Entry Graduation Form

SHAMDIP Mass Entry Diploma Form

SHAMUDI Mass Update Diploma Form

Registration

General Student

Academic History

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

119

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVCAMP Campus Code Validation Form (cont.) SHAPCMP Pre-Banner Summary Hours and GPA

Form

SHASUBJ Subject Sequence History Form

SHATCKN Course Maintenance Form

SHATERM Term Sequence Course History Form

SHATRMC Course History by Term and Campus

Form

SHQSECT Academic History Section Query Form

SLABLDG Building Definition Form

SLABQRY Building Query Form

SLAEVNT Event Form

SLARMAP Dorm Room and Meal Application Form

SLARMAT Roommate Application Form

SLARUSE Dorm Room Query Form

SLIAEVN Event Available Room Query Form

SLQEVNT Event Query Form

SLQMEET Available Class Room Query Form

SOACURR Curriculum Rules Form

SOACOMM Communication Plan Form

SOAPROF Campus Security User Profile Form

SOAWLTC Automated Waitlist Term Control Form

Academic History

Location Management

Overall

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

120

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVCAMP Campus Code Validation Form (cont.) SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

SRAQUIK Quick Recruit Form

SSABLCK Block Schedule Control Form

SSABSCQ Block Schedule Section Query Form

SSADETL Schedule Detail Form

SSADFEE Section Fee Assessment Control Form

SSAMATX Building/Room Schedule Form

SSASECQ Schedule Section Query Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

SSAXLST Cross List Definition Form

SSARRES Schedule Restrictions Form

SSIRESV Reserved Seats Inquiry Form

Recruiting

Schedule

STVCAPL Career Plan Code Validation Form SGASTDN General Student Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

General Student

Academic History

STVCAST Combined Academic Standing Code

Validation Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SGASTDQ General Student Summary Form

SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

SHAACST Academic Standing Rules Form

SHAGELR Graduation Application Eligibility Rules

Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

SHASUBJ Subject Sequence History Form

SHATERM Term Sequence Course History Form

General Student

Registration

Academic History

STVCCSL Classification Code Validation Form SCADETL Course Detail Information Form Catalog

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

121

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVCERT Ceremony Type Validation Form SHACATQ Ceremony Attendance Query Form

SHACATT Ceremony Attendance Form

SHACPRQ Ceremonies By Attendee Query Form

SHACRMQ Ceremony Query Form

SHACRMY Ceremony Form

SHADIPL Diploma Form

SHAMCAT Mass Entry Ceremony Attendance Form

SHAMDIP Mass Entry Diploma Form

SHAMUCA Mass Update Ceremony Attendance

Form

SHAMUDI Mass Update Diploma Form

Academic History

STVCGRP Communication Group Code Validation

Form

SOACGRP Communication Group Form

SOACPLN Communication Plan Form

Overall

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

122

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVCHRT Cohort Code Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAAMAPP Admissions Mass Entry Form

SCADETL Course Detail Information Form

SCARRES Course Registration Restrictions Form

SFAMHRS Registration Minimum Maximum Hours

Form

SFAMREG Registration Mass Entry Form

SFARWLP Reserved Seats Priority Management

Form

SGAMSTU General Student Mass Entry Form

SGASADD Additional Student Information Form

SHAGELR Graduation Application Eligibility Rules

Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

SOAWLTC Automated Waitlist Term Control Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

SSADETL Schedule Detail Form

SSADFEE Section Fee Assessment Control Form

SSARRES Schedule Restrictions Form

SSIRESV Reserved Seats Inquiry Form

Admissions

Catalog

Registration

General Student

Academic History

Overall

Recruiting

Schedule

STVCIPC CIP Code Validation Form SCACRSE Basic Course Information Form Catalog

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

123

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVCITZ Citizen Type Code Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

SPAPERS General Person Form

SOAMATL Material Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

Admissions

General Student

Academic History

General Person

Overall

Recruiting

STVCKSR Application Checklist Source Validation

Form

SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAAMAPP Admissions Mass Entry Form

Admissions

STVCKST Application Checklist Status Validation

Form

SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAAACKL Admissions Application/Checklist

Summary Form

Admissions

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

124

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVCLAS Class Code Validation Form SCADETL Course Detail Information Form

SCARRES Course Registration Restrictions Form

SFAMHRS Registration Minimum Maximum Hours

Form

SFAMREG Registration Mass Entry Form

SFAREGF Student Course/Fee Assessment Query

Form

SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

SFARGFE Registration Fee Assessment Rules

Form

SFARWLP Reserved Seats Priority Management

Form

SGACLSR Student Class Rules Form

SGAMSTU General Student Mass Entry Form

SGASADD Additional Student Information Form

SGASPRT Athletic Compliance Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SHAACST Academic Standing Rules Form

SHAGELR Graduation Application Eligibility Rules

Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

Catalog

Registration

General Student

Academic History

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

125

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVCLAS Class Code Validation Form (cont.) SHAMCAT Mass Entry Ceremony Attendance Form

SHAMDEG Mass Entry Graduation Form

SHAMDIP Mass Entry Diploma Form

SHAMUDI Mass Update Diploma Form

SHQSUBJ Academic History Catalog Query Form

SOAWLTC Automated Waitlist Term Control Form

SSADETL Schedule Detail Form

SSADFEE Section Fee Assessment Control Form

SSARRES Schedule Restrictions Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

SSIRESV Reserved Seats Inquiry Form

Academic History

Overall

Schedule

STVCMTT Comment Type Code Validation Form SPACMNT Person Comment Form

SGASPRT Athletic Compliance Form

General Person

General Student

STVCNTR Contract Rules Validation Form SIAASGN Faculty Assignment Form

SIACONA Faculty Contract Analysis Form

SIAFLCT Faculty Contract Term Rules Form

SIACONQ Faculty Contract Query Form

SIAINST Faculty/Advisor Information Form

SIAFLRC Faculty Workload Contract Rules Form

Faculty Load

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

126

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVCNTY County Code Validation Form GOAMTCH Common Matching Entry Form

SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SLABLDG Building Definition Form

SOAFOLK Guardian Information Form

SOAHSCH High School Information Form

SOAPCOL Prior College Form

SOASBGI Source or Background Institution Base

Form

SOTCNVT Tape Code Conversion Form

SPAIDEN General Person Identification Form

SRAQUIK Quick Recruit Form

General Person

Admissions

Location Management

Overall

System Administration

General Person

Recruiting

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

127

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVCOLL College Code Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAACHKB Admissions Checklist Rules Form

SAADCRV Admissions Decision Form

SAADCSN Admissions Decision Rules Form

SAAMAPP Admissions Mass Entry Form

SAAQKER Quick Entry Rules Form

SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SAASUMI Admissions Application Summary Form

SCACRSE Basic Course Information Form

SCADETL Course Detail Information Form

SCARRES Course Registration Restrictions Form

SCATEXT College Department Text Form

SFAMHRS Registration Minimum Maximum Hours

Form

SFAMREG Registration Mass Entry Form

SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

SFARGFE Registration Fee Assessment Rules

Form

SFARQST Enrollment Verification Request Form

SFARWLP Reserved Seats Waitlist Priority

Management Form

SFASTSR Student Centric Time Status Rules Form

SFATMST Time Status Rules Form

Admissions

Catalog

Registration

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

128

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVCOLL College Code Validation Form (cont.) SGAASST Assistantship/Fellowship/Internship

Form

SGAMSTU General Student Mass Entry Form

SGASADD Additional Student Information Form

SGASPRT Athletic Compliance Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SHAACST Academic Standing Rules Form

SHACOMI Committee/Service Form

SHADEGR Degrees and Other Formal Awards

Form

SHAGADS Graduation Application Display Rule

Selection Form

SHAGELR Graduation Application Eligibility Rules

Form

SHADGMQ Degree Summary Form

SHADIPL Diploma Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

SHAMCAT Mass Entry Ceremony Attendance Form

SHAMDEG Mass Entry Graduation Form

SHAMDIP Mass Entry Diploma Form

SHAMUDI Mass Update Diploma Form

SHARQTC Transcript Request Form

SHQTERM Term Summary Form

General Student

Academic History

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

129

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVCOLL College Code Validation Form (cont.) SHASTAT Academic Standing Query Form

SHATCKN Course Maintenance Form

SHQASTR Academic Standing Rules Query Form

SHQSUBJ Academic History Catalog Query Form

SIAASGN Faculty Assignment Form

SIACONA Faculty Contract Analysis Form

SIACONQ Faculty Contract Query Form

SIAFAVL Available Faculty Query Form

SIAFDEG Faculty Degree Information Form

SIAFLRC Faculty Workload Contract Rules Form

SIAINST Faculty/Advisor Information Form

SIAIQRY Faculty/Advisor Query Form

SLABLDG Building Definition Form

SLAEVNT Event Form

SLARDEF Room Definition Form

SLQEVNT Event Query Form

SLQROOM Room Query Form

Academic History

Faculty Load

Location Management

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

130

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVCOLL College Code Validation Form (cont.) SOACOMM Communication Rules Form

SOACURR Curriculum Rules Form

SOAIDNS Person Search Detail Form

SOAPCOL Prior College Form

SOAPCOQ Prior College Summary Form

SOAWLTC Automated Waitlist Term Control Form

SRAQUIK Quick Recruit Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

SSADETL Schedule Detail Form

SSADFEE Section Fee Assessment Control Form

SSARRES Schedule Restrictions Form

SSAOVRR Schedule Override Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

SSIRESV Reserved Seats Inquiry Form

Overall

System Administration

Overall

Recruiting

Schedule

STVCOMF Committee Member Role/Function

Validation Form

SHACOMI Committee/Service Form Academic History

STVCOMS Committee/Service Status Validation

Form

SHACOMI Committee/Service Form Academic History

STVCOMT Committee/Service Type Validation

Form

SHACOMI Committee/Service Form Academic History

STVCOPC Cooperative Education Code Validation

Form

SGACOOP Cooperative Education Form General Student

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

131

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVCPLN Communication Plan Code Validation

Form

SOACCOL Communication Plan Collector Form

SOACOMM Communication Rules Form

SOACPLN Communication Plan Form

SOAPLAN Communication Plan Assignment Form

Overall

STVCPRT Compliance Type Code Validation Form Please refer to the CAPP Handbook. CAPP

STVCREA Cohort Reason Code Validation Form SGASADD Additional Student Information Form General Student

STVCSTA Course Status Code Validation Form SCACRSE Basic Course Information Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

Catalog

Schedule

STVCSTS Curriculum Status Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SHADEGR Degrees and Other Formal Awards

Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

SRAQUIK Quick Recruit Form

Admissions

Registration

General Student

Academic History

Recruiting

STVCTYP Contact Type Code Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SRAQUIK Quick Recruit Form

SRARAPT Recruiter Appointments/Visits Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

SRASRCE Source Visit/Prospect Form

SOAAPPT Person Appointments/Contacts Form

SOAMATL Material Form

Admissions

Recruiting

Overall

STVCUDA Catalog Element One Validation Form SCADETL Course Detail Information Form Catalog

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

132

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVCUDB Catalog Element Two Validation Form SCADETL Course Detail Information Form Catalog

STVCUDC Catalog Element Three Validation Form SCADETL Course Detail Information Form Catalog

STVCUDD Catalog Element Four Validation Form SCADETL Course Detail Information Form Catalog

STVCUDE Catalog Element Five Validation Form SCADETL Course Detail Information Form Catalog

STVCUDF Catalog Element Six Validation Form SCADETL Course Detail Information Form Catalog

STVDAYS Day of Week Validation Form SFAREGQ Registration Query Form

SFATMST Time Status Rules Form

SFQSECM Registration Section Query Form

SFQSECT Section Schedule Query Form

SLAEVNT Event Form

SLIAEVN Event Available Room Query Form

SLQMEET Available Class Room Query Form

SSAMATX Building/Room Schedule Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

SSAXMTI Cross List Meeting Time/Instructor

Query Form

SSQMEET Meeting Time Help Form

Registration

Location Management

Schedule

STVDAYT Institutional Type of Day Validation Form SOACALD Calendar Day Information Form Schedule

STVDCPR Degree Completion Change Reason

Validation Form

SGAAPRG Athletic Academic Progress Form General Student

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

133

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVDEGC Degree Code Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAACHKB Admissions Checklist Rules Form

SAADCRV Admissions Decision Form

SAADCSN Admissions Decision Rules Form

SAAMAPP Admissions Mass Entry Form

SAAQKER Quick Entry Rules Form

SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SAASUMI Admissions Application Summary Form

SCADETL Course Detail Information Form

SFAGECR Gainful Employment Program Rules

Form

SFAMHRS Registration Minimum Maximum Hours

Form

SFAMREG Registration Mass Entry Form

SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

SFARQST Enrollment Verification Request Form

SFARWLP Reserved Seats Waitlist Priority

Management Form

SFASTSR Student Centric Time Status Rules Form

SFATMST Time Status Rules Form

SGAMSTU General Student Mass Entry Form

SGASADD Additional Student Information Form

SGASPRT Athletic Compliance Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

Admissions

Catalog

Registration

General Student

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

134

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVDEGC Degree Code Validation Form (cont.) SHADEGR Degrees and Other Formal Awards

Form

SHADGMQ Degree Summary Form

SHADIPL Diploma Form

SHAGADS Graduation Application Display Rule

Selection Form

SHAGELR Graduation Application Eligibility Rules

Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

SHAMCAT Mass Entry Ceremony Attendance Form

SHAMDEG Mass Entry Graduation Form

SHAMDIP Mass Entry Diploma Form

SHAMUDI Mass Update Diploma Form

SHAQPNO Qualifying Paper Form

SHATRNS Transfer Course Form

SHQTERM Term Summary Form

SIAFDEG Faculty Degree Information Form

SOAIDNS Person Search Detail Form

SOTCNVT Tape Code Conversion Form

Academic History

Faculty Load

System Administration

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

135

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVDEGC Degree Code Validation Form (cont.) SOABGIY Source/Background Institution Year

Form

SOACOMM Communication Rules Form

SOACURR Curriculum Rules Form

SOAPCOL Prior College Form

SOAWLTC Automated Waitlist Term Control Form

SRAQUIK Quick Recruit Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

SSADETL Schedule Detail Form

SSADFEE Section Fee Assessment Control Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

SSIRESV Reserved Seats Inquiry Form

Overall

Recruiting

Schedule

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

136

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVDEGS Degree Status Code Validation Form SFAALST Class Attendance Roster Form

SFASLST Class Roster Form

SGAASST Assistantship/Fellowship/Internship

Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SHADEGR Degrees and Other Formal Awards

Form

SHADGMQ Degree Summary Form

SHAGELR Graduation Application Eligibility Rules

Form

SHAMCAT Mass Entry Ceremony Attendance Form

SHAMDEG Mass Entry Graduation Form

SHAMDIP Mass Entry Diploma Form

SHAMUDI Mass Update Diploma Form

Registration

General Student

Academic History

STVDEPS Student CARE Number of Dependents

Validation Form

SGAEOPS Education Opportunity Programs and

Services Form

General Student

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

137

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVDEPT Department Code Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAAMAPP Admissions Mass Entry Form

SAAQKER Quick Entry Rules Form

SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SCACRSE Basic Course Information Form

SCADETL Course Detail Information Form

SCARRES Course Registration Restrictions Form

SCATEXT College Department Text Form

SFAMHRS Registration Minimum Maximum Hours

Form

SFAMREG Registration Mass Entry Form

SFARWLP Reserved Seats Waitlist Priority

Management Form

SGAASST Assistantship/Fellowship/Internship

Form

SGAMSTU General Student Mass Entry Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SHACOMI Committee/Service Form

SHAGADS Graduation Application Display Rule

Selection Form

SHAGELR Graduation Application Eligibility Rules

Form

SHAMCAT Mass Entry Ceremony Attendance Form

Admissions

Catalog

Registration

General Student

Academic History

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

138

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVDEPT Department Code Validation Form

(cont.)

SHAMDIP Mass Entry Diploma Form

SHAMDEG Mass Entry Graduation Form

SHAMUDI Mass Update Diploma Form

SHATCKN Course Maintenance Form

SHQSUBJ Academic History Catalog Query Form

SIAASGN Faculty Assignment Form

SIACONA Faculty Contract Analysis Form

SIACONQ Faculty Contract Query Form

SIAFAVL Available Faculty Query Form

SIAINST Faculty/Advisor Information Form

SIAIQRY Faculty/Advisor Query Form

SIAFAVL Available Faculty Query Form

SLABLDG Building Definition Form

SLAEVNT Event Form

SLARDEF Room Definition Form

SLQEVNT Event Query Form

SLQROOM Room Query Form

Academic History

Faculty Load

Location Management

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

139

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVDEPT Department Code Validation Form

(cont.)

SOAMATL Material Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

SRAQUIK Quick Recruit Form

SSADETL Schedule Detail Form

SSADFEE Section Fee Assessment Control Form

SSAOVRR Schedule Override Form

SSARRES Schedule Restrictions Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

SSIRESV Reserved Seats Inquiry Form

Overall

Recruiting

Schedule

STVDFLT Compliance Defaults Option Validation

Form

Please refer to the CAPP Handbook.CAPP

STVDISA Disability Type Code Validation Form SGADISA Student Disability Services Form General Student

STVDIVS Division Code Validation Form SCACRSE Basic Course Information Form

SHATCKN Course Maintenance Form

SHQSUBJ Academic History Catalog Query Form

SSAOVRR Schedule Override Form

Catalog

Academic History

Schedule

STVDPLM Diploma Type Validation Form SAADCRV Admissions Decision Form

SAADCSN Admissions Decision Rules Form

SOAHSCH High School Information Form

SOABGIY Source Background Institution Year

Form

Admissions

Overall

STVDPMR Duplicate Material Code Validation Form SOADPMR Duplicate Material Rules Form

SOAMATL Material Form

Overall

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

140

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVDRES Ceremony Dress Validation Form SHACRMY Ceremony Form

SHACPRQ Ceremonies By Attendee Query Form

Academic History

STVDSTS Electronic Document Status Code

Validation Form

SHAEDIS Online Transcripts Activity List Form Academic History

STVEAPL Electronic Application Status Validation

Form

SAAEAPS Electronic Application Process Form Admissions

STVEDIS Electronic Status Code Validation Form SHARQTC Transcript Request Form Academic History

STVEDLV Education Level Code Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAAQKER Quick Entry Rules Form

SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SGAMSTU General Student Mass Entry Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

Admissions

General Student

Academic History

Recruiting

STVEGOL Education Goal Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAAQKER Quick Entry Rules Form

SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SGAMSTU General Student Mass Entry Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SHAMDEG Mass Entry Graduation Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

Admissions

General Student

Academic History

Recruiting

STVEGRP EDI Rule Group Validation Form SAAERUL Electronic Admissions Application Rules

Form

Admissions

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

141

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVELIG Eligibility Code Validation Form SGAMSPT Mass Entry Athletic Compliance Form

SGASPRT Athletic Compliance Form

SGISPRT Athletic Compliance Inquiry Form

General Student

STVELMT HTML Letter Module Validation Form SOAELTL HTML Letter Rules Form Overall

STVEMEX Employment Expectation Validation

Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

General Student

Academic History

STVEMPL Employer Code Validation Form SFARQST Enrollment Verification Request Form

SGACOOP Cooperative Education Form

Registration

General Student

STVEOPS Education Opportunity Prog/Serv Status

Validation Form

SGAEOPS Education Opportunity Programs and

Services Form

General Student

STVEPRT Enrollment Verification Type Code

Validation Form

SFAEPRT Enrollment Verification Request Rules

Form

SFAMESG Enrollment Verification Message Form

SFARQSS Enrollment Verification Status Form

SFARQST Enrollment Verification Request Form

Registration

STVESEL Eligibility Factor Validation Form SGAEOPS Education Opportunity Programs and

Services Form

General Student

STVESTS Enrollment Status Code Validation Form SFAESTS Student Registration Status Form

SFAREGF Student Course/Fee Assessment Query

Form

SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

SFARQST Enrollment Verification Request Form

SFQESTS Enrollment Status Query Form

SGASADD Additional Student Information Form

SGAPSRT Student Sport Form

Registration

General Student

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

142

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVETHN Ethnic Code Validation Form SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SPAPERS General Person Form

SOABGIY Source/Background Institution Year

Form

SOAMATL Material Form

SOTCNVT Tape Code Conversion Form

SRAQUIK Quick Recruit Form

Admissions

General Person

Overalls

Overall

System Administration

Recruiting

STVETYP Event/Function Type Code Validation

Form

SLAEVNT Event Form

SLQEVNT Event Query Form

Location Management

STVEVAL Evaluation Question Code Validation

Form

SSAEVAL Schedule Evaluation Form Schedule

STVEVEN Academic History Event Code Validation

Form

SHATCMT Transcript Events and Comments Form Academic History

STVEXAM Examination Code Validation Form SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form Academic History

STVFATT Faculty Member Attributes Code

Validation Form

SIAFAVL Available Faculty Query Form

SIAINST Faculty/Advisor Information Form

Faculty Load

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

143

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVFCNT Faculty Contract Type Code Validation

Form

SIAASGN Faculty Assignment Form

SIACFTE Faculty Workload Contract FTE Form

SIACONA Faculty Contract Analysis Form

SIACONQ Faculty Contract Query Form

SIAFAVL Available Faculty Query Form

SIAFCTR Faculty Contract Type Term Rules Form

SIAFLCT Faculty Contract Term Rules Form

SIAFLRC Faculty Workload Contract Rules Form

SIAINST Faculty/Advisor Information Form

SIAIQRY Faculty/Advisor Query Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

Faculty Load

Schedule

STVFCST Faculty Status Code Validation Form SGASTDN General Student Form

SHATCKN Course Maintenance Form

SIAASGN Faculty Assignment Form

SIACONQ Faculty Contract Query Form

SIAINST Faculty/Advisor Information Form

SIAIQRY Faculty/Advisor Query Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

General Student

Academic History

Faculty Load

Schedule

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

144

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

STVFCTG Faculty Category Code Validation Form SIAASGN Faculty Assignment Form

SIACONA Faculty Contract Analysis Form

SIACONQ Faculty Contract Query Form

SIAFAVL Available Faculty Query Form

SIAINST Faculty/Advisor Information Form

SIAIQRY Faculty/Advisor Query Form

Faculty Load

STVFSTP Faculty Staff Type Code Validation Form SIAASGN Faculty Assignment Form

SIACONA Faculty Contract Analysis Form

SIACONQ Faculty Contract Query Form

SIAFAVL Available Faculty Query Form

SIAINST Faculty/Advisor Information Form

SIAIQRY Faculty/Advisor Query Form

Faculty Load

STVFTYP Fee Type Validation Form SCADETL Course Detail Information Form

SSADETL Section Detail Information Form

SSADFEE Section Fee Assessment Control Form

SSARULE Schedule Processing Rules Form

SOAORUL Open Learning Section Default Rules

Form

Catalog

Schedule

Overall

STVGADR Graduation Application Display Rule

Code Validation Form

SHAGADR Self-Service Graduation Application

Display Rules Form

SHAGADS Graduation Application Display Rule

Selection Form

Academic History

145

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVGAIN Gain Status Code Validation Form SGASTDN General Student Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

General Student

Academic History

STVGAST Graduation Application Status Validation

Form

SHAGADR Self-Service Graduation Application

Display Rules Form

SHAGAPP Graduation Application Form

SHAMDEG Mass Entry Graduation Form

Academic History

STVGATT Goal Attribute Validation Form SEAGDTL Goal Attributes and Comments Form General Person

STVGCHG Grade Change Code Validation Form SHATCKN Course Maintenance Form Academic History

STVGCMT Grade Comment Code Validation Form SFAALST Class Attendance Roster Form

SFASLST Class Roster Form

SHATCKN Course Maintenance Form

Registration

Academic History

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

146

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVGMOD Grading Mode Code Validation Form SCACRSE Basic Course Information Form

SFAALST Class Attendance Roster Form

SFACREQ Student Course Request Form

SFAMREG Registration Mass Entry Form

SFAREGF Student Course/Fee Assessment Query

Form

SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

SFASLST Class Roster Form

SFQSECT Section Schedule Query Form

SHACRSE Course Summary Form

SHADEGR Degrees and Other Formal Awards

Form

SHAGRDE Grade Code Maintenance Form

SHAGRDS Grade Code Substitution Form

SHASUBJ Subject Sequence History Form

SHATAEQ Transfer Articulation Evaluation Form

SHATCKN Course Maintenance Form

SHATERM Term Sequence History Form

SHATGRD Transfer Grade Code Maintenance

Form

SHATRMC Degrees and Other Formal Awards

Form

Catalog

Registration

Academic History

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

147

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVGMOD Grading Mode Code Validation Form

(cont.)

SHATRNS Transfer Course Form

SHQSECT Academic History Section Query Form

SHQSUBJ Academic History Catalog Query Form

SSABLCK Block Schedule Control Form

SSABSCQ Block Schedule Section Query Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

Academic History

Schedule

STVGOAL Goal Validation Form SEADETL Support Service Detail Form

SEAGDTL Goal Attributes and Comments Form

SEAGQRY Student Services Goal Query Form

SEAQGNS Support Services Query Form

SEASSGP Service Group Rules Form

General Person

STVGRST Graduation Status Validation Form SHADEGR Degrees and Other Formal Awards

Form

SHADGMQ Degree Summary Form

SHAGADR Self-Service Graduation Application

Display Rules Form

SHAGAPP Graduation Application Form

SHAGELR Graduation Application Eligibility Rules

Form

Academic History

STVGSTA A/F/I Status Validation Form SGAASST Assistantship/Fellowship/Internship

Form

General Student

STVGTYP A/F/I Type Validation Form SGAASST Assistantship/Fellowship/Internship

Form

General Student

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

148

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVHAPS Housing Application Status Code

Validation Form

SLAMASG Meal Assignment Form

SLAPASG Phone Assignment Form

SLARASG Room Assignment Form

SLARMAP Dorm Room and Meal Application Form

SLQRASG Room Assignment Query Form

SLQRMAP Application Query Form

Location Management

STVHLDD Hold Type Code Validation Form SFARQST Enrollment Verification Request Form

SHACATT Ceremony Attendance Form

SHACPRQ Ceremonies By Attendee Query Form

SHADEGR Degrees and Other Formal Awards

Form

SHADIPL Diploma Form

SHARQTC Transcript Request Form

SOQHOLD Holds Query-Only Form

SOAHOLD Hold Information Form

Registration

Academic History

Overall

STVHLWK Highest Level of Work Validation Form SOABGTA Transfer Articulation Institution Form Academic History

STVHOND Departmental Honors Code Validation

Form

SHADEGR Degrees and Other Formal Awards

Form

Academic History

STVHONR Institutional Honors Code Validation

Form

SAADCRV Admissions Decision Form

SHADEGR Degrees and Other Formal Awards

Form

SIAFDEG Faculty Degree Information Form

SOAPCOL Prior College Form

SOAPCOQ Prior College Summary Form

SRAQUIK Quick Recruit Form

Admissions

Academic History

Faculty Load

Overall

Recruiting

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

149

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVINCM Income Range Code Validation Form SGASTDN General Student Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

General Student

Academic History

STVINFC Interface Validation Form SOTCNVT Tape Code Conversion Form System Administration

STVINIT Initials Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAADCRV Admissions Decision Form

SAAMAPP Admissions Mass Entry Form

SGAMSPT Mass Entry Athletic Compliance Form

SGAMSTU General Student Mass Entry Form

SHAMCAT Mass Entry Ceremony Attendance Form

SHAMDEG Mass Entry Graduation Form

SHAMDIP Mass Entry Diploma Form

SHAMUCA Mass Update Ceremony Attendance

Form

SHAMUDI Mass Update Diploma Form

SOAMATL Material Form

SUAMAIL Student Mail Form

Admissions

General Student

Academic History

Overall

Recruiting/Admissions

STVINNM Awarding Institution Validation Form SHADIPL Diploma Form

SHAGRDD Graduation Default Control Form

SHAMDIP Mass Entry Diploma Form

SHAMUDI Mass Update Diploma Form

Academic History

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

150

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVINTS Outside Interest Code Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAAMAPP Admissions Mass Entry Form

SRAQUIK Quick Recruit Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

SOAMATL Material Form

Admissions

Recruiting

Overall

STVINTV Interview Code Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form Admissions

STVLEAV Leave of Absence Code Validation Form SGASTDN General Student Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

General Student

Academic History

STVLEND Web Prospect How I Learned About

Validation Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form Recruiting

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

151

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVLEVL Level Code Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAACHKB Admissions Checklist Rules Form

SAADCRV Admissions Decision Form

SAADCSN Admissions Decision Rules Form

SAAMAPP Admissions Mass Entry Form

SAAQKER Quick Entry Rules Form

SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SAASUMI Admissions Application Summary Form

SCACRSE Basic Course Information Form

SCADETL Course Detail Information Form

SCARRES Course Registration Restrictions Form

SFAALST Class Attendance Roster Form

SFACREQ Student Course Request Form

SFAGECR Gainful Employment Program Rules

Form

SFAMHRS Registration Minimum Maximum Hours

Form

SFAMREG Registration Mass Entry Form

SFAREGF Student Course/Fee Assessment Query

Form

SFAREGQ Registration Query Form

SFARGFE Registration Fee Assessment Rules

Form

Admissions

Catalog

Registration

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

152

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVLEVL Level Code Validation Form (cont.) SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

SFARQST Enrollment Verification Request Form

SFARWLP Reserved Seats Waitlist Priority

Management Form

SFASLST Class Roster Form

SFASTSR Student Centric Time Status Rules Form

SFATMST Time Status Rules Form

SGAASST Assistantship/Fellowship/Internship

Form

SGACLSR Student Class Rules Form

SGACOOP Cooperative Education Form

SGAMSTU General Student Mass Entry Form

SGASADD Additional Student Information Form

SGASPRT Athletic Compliance Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SHAACST Academic Standing Rules Form

SHACRSE Course Summary Form

SHADEGR Degrees and Other Formal Awards

Form

SHADGMQ Degree Summary Form

SHAGADS Graduation Application Display Rule

Selection Form

SHAGELR Graduation Application Eligibility Rules

Form

Registration

General Student

Academic History

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

153

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVLEVL Level Code Validation Form (cont.) SHAGRDE Grade Code Maintenance Form

SHAGRDS Grade Code Substitution Form

SHAINCG Incomplete Grade Rules Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

SHAMCAT Mass Entry Ceremony Attendance Form

SHAMDEG Mass Entry Graduation Form

SHAMDIP Mass Entry Diploma Form

SHAMUDI Mass Update Diploma Form

SHAPCMP Pre-Banner Summary Hours and GPA

Form

SHARPTR Repeat/Multiple Course Rules Form

SHARQTC Transcript Request Form

SHASTAT Academic Standing Query Form

SHASUBJ Subject Sequence History Form

SHATAEQ Transfer Articulation Evaluation Form

SHATCKN Course Maintenance Form

SHATCMT Transcript Events/Comments Form

SHATERM Term Sequence History Form

SHATGRD Transfer Grade Code Maintenance

Form

Academic History

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

154

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVLEVL Level Code Validation Form (cont.) SHATRMC Course History by Campus and Term

Form

SHATRNS Transfer Course Form

SHATRTA Transfer Articulation Attributes Form

SHQASTR Academic Standing Rules Query Form

SHQSUBJ Academic History Catalog Query Form

SHQTERM Term Summary Form

SHQTRAM Transfer Attendance Period Form

SOAIDNS Person Search Detail Form

SOACOMM Communication Rules Form

SOACURR Curriculum Rules Form

SOAWLTC Automated Waitlist Term Control Form

SRAQUIK Quick Recruit Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

SSADETL Schedule Detail Form

SSADFEE Section Fee Assessment Control Form

SSARRES Schedule Restrictions Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

SSIRESV Reserved Seats Inquiry Form

Academic History

System Administration

Overall

Recruiting

Schedule

STVLGCY Legacy Code Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SPAPERS General Person Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

SOAMATL Material Form

Admissions

General Person

Recruiting

Overall

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

155

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVLMOD Learner Module Validation Form SOACTRL Curriculum Rules Control Form

SOILCUR Learner Curriculum Query Form

Overall

STVMAJR Major, Minor, Concentration Code

Validation Form

SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAACHKB Admissions Checklist Rules Form

SAADCRV Admissions Decision Form

SAADCSN Admissions Decision Rules Form

SAAMAPP Admissions Mass Entry Form

SAAQKER Quick Entry Rules Form

SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SAASUMI Admissions Application Summary Form

SCADETL Course Detail Information Form

SCARRES Course Registration Restrictions Form

SFAGECR Gainful Employment Program Rules

Form

SFAMHRS Registration Minimum Maximum Hours

Form

SFAMREG Registration Mass Entry Form

SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

SFARGFE Registration Fee Assessment Rules

Form

SFARQST Enrollment Verification Request Form

SFARWLP Reserved Seats Waitlist Priority

Management Form

Admissions

Catalog

Registration

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

156

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVMAJR Major, Minor, Concentration Code

Validation Form (cont.)

SFASTSR Student Centric Time Status Rules Form

SFATMST Time Status Rules Form

SGAASST Assistantship/Fellowship/Internship

Form

SGAMSTU General Student Mass Entry Form

SGASADD Additional Student Information Form

SGASPRT Athletic Compliance Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SHADEGR Degrees and Other Formal Awards

Form

SHADGMQ Degree Summary Form

SHADIPL Diploma Form

SHAGADS Graduation Application Display Rule

Selection Form

SHAGELR Graduation Application Eligibility Rules

Form

SHAMCAT Mass Entry Ceremony Attendance Form

SHAMDEG Mass Entry Graduation Form

SHAMDIP Mass Entry Diploma Form

SHAMUDI Mass Update Diploma Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

SHASTAT Academic Standing Query Form

SHQTERM Term Summary Form

Registration

General Student

Academic History

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

157

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVMAJR Major, Minor, Concentration Code

Validation Form (cont.)

SIAFDEG Faculty Degree Information Form

SOACURR Curriculum Rules Form

SOAIDNS Person Search Detail Form

SOAMATL Material Form

SOAPCOL Prior College Form

SOTCNVT Tape Code Conversion Form

SOAWLTC Automated Waitlist Term Control Form

SRAQUIK Quick Recruit Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

SSADETL Schedule Detail Form

SSADFEE Section Fee Assessment Control Form

SSARRES Schedule Restrictions Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

SSIRESV Reserved Seats Inquiry Form

Faculty Load

Overall

System Administration

Overall

System Administration

Overall

Recruiting

Schedule

STVMARS Student CARE Marital Status Validation

Form

SGAEOPS Education Opportunity Programs and

Services Form

General Student

STVMATL Material Code Validation Form SOACGRP Communication Group Form

SOACPLN Communication Plan Form

SOAMATL Material Form

SUAMAIL Student Mail Form

Overall

Recruiting/Admissions

STVMEAS Measurement Validation Form SHACATT Ceremony Attendance Form

SHAGRDD Graduation Default Control Form

SHASIZE Attendee Size Classification Rules Form

Academic History

STVMEDI Medical Code Validation Form SGADISA Student Disability Services Form General Student

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

158

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVMEET Meeting Time Code Validation Form SLQMEET Available Class Room Query Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

Location Management

Schedule

STVMRCD Meal Rate Code Validation Form SLALMFE Room/Meal/Phone/Rate Code Rules

Form

SLAMASG Meal Assignment Form

SLAMSCD Meal Assignment Status Form

SLARMAP Dorm Room and Meal Application Form

Location Management

Location Management/

STVMRTL Marital Status Code Validation Form SPAPERS General Person Form General Person

STVMSCD Meal Assignment Status Code Validation

Form

SLAMASG Meal Assignment Form

SLQMSCD Meal Assignment Status Query Form

Location Management

STVNATN Nation Code Validation Form GOAMTCH Common Matching Entry Form

SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SGACOOP Cooperative Education Form

SHADIPL Diploma Form

SHAGAPP Graduation Application Form

SHARQTC Transcript Request Form

SOASBGI Source or Background Institution Base

Form

SOAFOLK Guardian Information Form

SOAHSCH High School Information Form

SOAPCOL Prior College Form

SPAEMRG Emergency Contact Form

SPAIDEN General Person Identification Form

SRAQUIK Quick Recruit Form

General Person

Admissions

General Student

Academic History

Overall

General Person

Recruiting

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

159

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVNATT Need Attribute Validation Form SEANDTL Need Attributes and Comments Form General Person

STVNCRQ Non-Course Requirements Code

Validation Form

SHANCRS Academic Non-Course Form Academic History

STVNCST Non-Course Requirements Status Code

Validation Form

SHANCRS Academic Non-Course Form Academic History

STVNDRF Need Referral Validation Form SEADETL Support Service Detail Form General Person

STVNEED Needs Validation Form SEADETL Support Service Detail Form

SEANDTL Need Attributes and Comments Form

SEANQRY Student Services Need Query Form

SEAQGNS Support Services Query Form

SEASSGP Service Group Rules Form

General Person

STVNIST Faculty Non-Instructional Type Code

Validation Form

SIAASGN Faculty Assignment Form Faculty Load

STVOCCS Occupational Course Code Validation

Form

SCADETL Course Detail Information Form Catalog

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

160

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVORIG Origin Code Validation Form SEADETL Support Services Detail Form

SGADISA Student Disability Services Form

SGASPRT Athletic Compliance Form

SHACATT Ceremony Attendance Form

SHADEGR Degrees and Other Formal Awards

Form

SHADIPL Diploma Form

SHATCMT Transcript Events and Comments Form

SOAHOLD Hold Information Form

SOQHOLD Holds Query-Only Form

SPACMNT Person Comment Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

General Person

General Student

Academic History

Overall

General Person

Recruiting

STVORSN Orientation Session Code Validation

Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

General Student

Academic History

STVPRAC Practical Training Code Validation Form SGASTDN General Student Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

General Student

Academic History

STVPREV Progress Evaluation Code Validation

Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SGASTDQ General Student Summary Form

SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

SHAACST Academic Standing Rules Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

SHASUBJ Subject Sequence History Form

SHATERM Term Sequence Course History Form

General Student

Registration

Academic History

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

161

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVPRCD Phone Rate Code Validation Form SLABLDG Building Definition Form

SLALMFE Room/Meal/Phone/Rate Code Rules

Form

SLAPASG Phone Assignment Form

SLARDEF Room Definition Form

Location Management

STVPRGA Program Accreditation Code Validation

Form

SOABGTA Transfer Articulation Institution Form Academic History

STVPRNT Compliance Print Code Validation Form Please refer to the CAPP Handbook.CAPP

STVPROC Process Control Code Validation Form SOAFACS Faculty/Advisor Process Rules Form Faculty Load

STVPSCD Phone Assignment Status Code

Validation Form

SLAPASG Phone Assignment Form

SLAPSCD Phone Assignment Status Form

SLQPSCD Phone Assignment Status Query Form

Location Management

STVPTRM Part of Term Code Validation Form SFAALST Class Attendance Roster Form

SFAREGF Student Course/Fee Assessment Query

Form

SFAREGQ Registration Query Form

SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

SFARGFE Registration Fee Assessment Rules

Form

SFARSTS Course Registration Status Form

SFASLST Class Roster Form

SFQRSTS Course Registration Status Query Form

SFQSECM Registration Section Query Form

Registration

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

162

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVPTRM Part of Term Code Validation Form

(cont,)

SHACRSE Academic History Course Summary

Form

SHADEGR Degrees and Other Formal Awards

Form

SHATCKN Course Maintenance Form

SIQSECM Faculty Course Section Query Form

SOATERM Term Control Form

SOATEST Test Score Information Form

SSAACCL Schedule Calendar Form

SSABLCK Block Schedule Control Form

SSABSCQ Block Schedule Section Query Form

SSAEXCL Schedule Exclusion Rules Form

SSAMATX Building/Room Schedule Form

SSASECQ Schedule Section Query Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

SSAXLST Cross List Definition Form

Academic History

Faculty Load

Overall

Schedule

STVPTYP Source Contact Person Type Code

Validation Form

SOASBGI Source or Background Institution Base

Form

SRAQUIK Quick Recruit Form

Overall

Recruiting

STVPWAV Prerequisite Waiver Code Validation

Form

SCACRSE Basic Course Information Form Catalog

STVQPTP Qualifying Paper Type Code Validation

Form

SHAQPNO Qualifying Papers Form

SHQQPNM Qualifying Papers by Person Form

Academic History

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

163

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVRATE Student Fee Assessment Code

Validation Form

SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAAQKER Quick Entry Rules Form

SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SCADETL Course Detail Information Form

SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

SFARGFE Registration Fee Assessment Rules

Form

SFARQST Enrollment Verification Request Form

SGAMSTU General Student Mass Entry Form

SGASADD Additional Student Information Form

SGASPRT Athletic Compliance Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

SSADETL Schedule Detail Form

SSADFEE Section Fee Assessment Control Form

Admissions

Catalog

Registration

General Student

Academic History

Schedule

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

164

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVRDEF Building/Room Attribute Code Validation

Form

SHACRMY Ceremony Form

SLABLDG Building Definition Form

SLAEVNT Event Form

SLARASG Phone Assignment Form

SLARDEF Room Definition Form

SLARMAP Dorm Room and Meal Application Form

SLARMAT Roommate Application Form

SLASGNQ Available Dorm Room Query Form

SLIAEVN Event Available Room Query Form

SLQMEET Available Class Room Query Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

Academic History

Location Management

Schedule

STVRECR Recruiter Code Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SOAAPPT Person Appointments/Contacts Form

SRAQUIK Quick Recruit Form

SRARAPT Recruiter Appointments/Visits Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

SRARINF Recruiter's Prospect Form

SRASRCE Source Visit/Prospect Form

Admissions

Overall

Recruiting

STVRELG Religion Code Validation Form SPAPERS General Person Form

SOTCNVT Tape Code Conversion Form

General Person

System Administration

STVRELT Relation Code Validation Form SOAFOLK Guardian Information Form

SPAEMRG Emergency Contact Form

Overall

General Person

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

165

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVREPS Repeat Status Code Validation Form SCACRSE Basic Course Information Form

SFQSECT Registration Course Query Form

SHQSUBJ Academic History Catalog Query Form

Catalog

Registration

Academic History

STVRESD Residence Code Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAACHKB Admissions Checklist Rules Form

SAADCRV Admissions Decision Form

SAADCSN Admissions Decision Rules Form

SAAMAPP Admissions Mass Entry Form

SAAQKER Quick Entry Rules Form

SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SCADETL Course Detail Information Form

SFAMHRS Registration Minimum Maximum Hours

Form

SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

SFARGFE Registration Fee Assessment Rules

Form

SFARQST Enrollment Verification Request Form

SGAMSTU General Student Mass Entry Form

SGASADD Additional Student Information Form

SGASPRT Athletic Compliance Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

Admissions

Catalog

Registration

General Student

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

166

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVRESD Residence Code Validation Form (cont.) SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

SOAIDNS Person Search Detail Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

SSADETL Schedule Detail Form

SSADFEE Section Fee Assessment Control Form

Academic History

System Administration

Recruiting

Schedule

STVRGRE Registration Reason Code Validation

Form

SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form Registration

STVRMST Room Status Code Validation Form SSASECT Schedule Form

SLAEVNT Event Form

SLARASG Room Assignment Form

SLARDEF Room Definition Form

SLASGNQ Available Dorm Room Query Form

SLIAEVN Event Available Room Query Form

SLQMEET Available Class Room Query Form

SLQROOM Room Query Form

Schedule

Location Management

STVROLE Role Definition Validation Form SOAFPAC Faculty Attribute/Advisor Type Control

Form

SOAROLE Role Assignment Form

Overall

STVROVR Registration Permit-Override Code

Validation Form

SFAROVR Registration Permit-Override Control

Form

SFASRPO Student Registration Permit-Override

Form

Registration

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

167

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVRRCD Room Rate Code Validation Form SLABLDG Building Definition Form

SLALMFE Room/Meal/Phone Rate Code Rules

Form

SLARASG Room Assignment Form

SLARDEF Room Definition Form

SLASGNQ Available Dorm Room Query Form

SLQRASG Room Assignment Query Form

Location Management

STVRSLT Appointment Result Code Validation

Form

SOAAPPT Person Appointments/Contacts Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

Overall

Recruiting

STVRSTA Recruiting Internal Status Code

Validation Form

SRAQUIK Quick Recruit Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

SRARINF Recruiter's Prospect Form

Recruiting

STVRSTS Course Registration Status Code

Validation Form

SFAALST Class Attendance Roster Form

SFAMREG Registration Mass Entry Form

SFAREGF Student Course/Fee Assessment Query

Form

SFAREGQ Registration Query Form

SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

SFARSTS Course Registration Status Form

SFASLST Class Roster Form

SFQRSTS Course Registration Status Query Form

SFQSECM Registration Section Query Form

SSABLCK Block Schedule Control Form

SSABSCQ Block Schedule Section Query Form

Registration

Schedule

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

168

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVRTRM Term Restriction Code Validation Form SCASRES Catalog Schedule Restrictions Form Catalog

STVRTYP Recruit Type Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SOAMATL Material Form

SRAQUIK Quick Recruit Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

Admissions

Overall

Recruiting

STVSAAT Athletic Attribute Validation Form SGAMSPT Mass Entry Athletic Compliance Form

SGASPRT Athletic Compliance Form

General Student

STVSAEL Athletic Academic Eligibility Validation

Form

SGAMSPT Mass Entry Athletic Compliance Form

SGASPRT Athletic Compliance Form

SGISPRT Athletic Compliance Inquiry Form

General Student

STVSAQS Athletic Qualifier Status Validation Form SGASPRT Athletic Compliance Form General Student

STVSARE Athletic Competition Reason Validation

Form

SGASPRT Athletic Compliance Form General Student

STVSAPR Special Approval Code Validation Form SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

SSABLCK Block Schedule Control Form

SSABSCQ Block Schedule Section Query Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

Registration

Schedule

STVSARX Athletic Residency Exception Validation

Form

SGASPRT Athletic Compliance Form General Student

STVSATR Athlete Transfer Status Validation Form SGASPRT Athletic Compliance Form General Student

STVSATT Service Attribute Validation Form SEASDTL Service Attributes and Comments Form General Person

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

169

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVSBGI Source/Background Institution Code

Validation Form

SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAADCRV Admissions Decision Form

SAAQKER Quick Entry Rules Form

SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SCADETL Course Detail Information Form

SHACATT Ceremony Attendance Form

SHARQTC Transcript Request Form

SHATAEQ Transfer Articulation Evaluation Form

SHATATC Transfer Institution Catalog Entry Form

SHATATR Transfer Course Articulation Form

SHATGRD Transfer Grade Code Maintenance

Form

Admissions

Catalog

Academic History

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

170

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVSBGI Source/Background Institution Code

Validation Form (cont.)

SHATRNS Transfer Course Form

SHATRTA Transfer Articulation Attributes Form

SHQTATC Transfer Course Query Form

SHQTRAM Transfer Attendance Period by Person

Query Form

SHQTRIT Transfer Institution by Person Query

Form

SIAFDEG Faculty Degree Information Form

SOAAPPT Person Appointments/Contacts Form

SOABGIY Source/Background Institution Year

Form

SOABGTA Transfer Articulation Institution Form

SOAHSCH High School Information Form

SOAPCOL Prior College Form

SOAPCOQ Prior College Summary Form

SOASBGI Source or Background Institution Base

Form

SOISBGI Source/Background Institution Query-

Only Form

SRAQUIK Quick Recruit Form

SRARAPT Recruiter Appointments/Visits Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

SRASRCE Source Visit/Prospect Form

Academic History

Faculty Load

Overall

Recruiting

STVSBJC High School Subject Validation Form SAADCRV Admissions Decision Form

SAADCSN Admissions Decision Rules Form

SOAHSCH High School Information Form

Admissions

Overall

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

171

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVSCCD Schedule Contract Code Validation Form SSADETL Schedule Detail Form Schedule

STVSCHD Schedule Type Code Validation Form SCACRSE Basic Course Information Form

SFAALST Class Attendance Roster Form

SFASLST Class Roster Form

SFQSECM Registration Section Query Form

SFQSECT Section Schedule Query Form

SHATCKN Course Maintenance Form

SHQSECT Academic History Section Query Form

SIQSECM Faculty Course Section Query Form

SSABLCK Block Schedule Control Form

SSABSCQ Block Schedule Section Query Form

SSADFEE Section Fee Assessment Control Form

SSASECQ Schedule Section Query Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

SSAXMTI Cross List Meeting Time/Instructor

Query Form

Catalog

Registration

Academic History

Faculty Load

Schedule

STVSCPC Student Centric Period Cycle Validation

Form

SOASCPT Student Centric Period Term Control

Form

Overall

STVSEPR Services Provided Validation Form SEADETL Support Service Detail Form

SGADISA Student Disability Services Form

General Person

General Student

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

172

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVSESS Session Code Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAADCRV Admissions Decision Form

SAADCSN Admissions Decision Rules Form

SFAALST Class Attendance Roster Form

SFARGFE Registration Fee Assessment Rules

Form

SFASLST Class Roster Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

SHATCKN Course Maintenance Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

Admissions

Registration

General Student

Academic History

Recruiting

Schedule

STVSFAE State F/A Eligibility Validation Form SGAEOPS Education Opportunity Programs and

Services Form

General Student

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

173

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVSITE Site Code Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SHACATQ Ceremony Attendance Query Form

SHACRMQ Ceremony Query Form

SHACRMY Ceremony Form

SHACPRQ Ceremonies By Attendee Query Form

SLABLDG Building Definition Form

SLABQRY Building Query Form

SLAEVNT Event Form

SLIAEVN Event Available Room Query Form

SLQEVNT Event Query Form

SLQMEET Available Class Room Query Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

Admissions

General Student

Academic History

Location Management

Recruiting

STVSIZE Academic Dress Size Validation Form SHACATT Ceremony Attendance Form

SHACRMQ Ceremony Query Form

SHAMUCA Mass Update Ceremony Attendance

Form

SHASIZE Attendee Size Classification Rules Form

Academic History

STVSOFF A/F/I Fund Source Validation Form SGAASST Assistantship/Fellowship/Internship

Form

General Student

STVSPRV Service Provider Validation Form SEADETL Support Service Validation Form

SGADISA Student Disability Services Form

General Person

General Student

STVSPSR Disability Service Code Validation Form SGADISA Student Disability Services Form General Student

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

174

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVSPST Sport Code Status Validation Form SGAMSPT Mass Entry Athletic Compliance Form

SGASPRT Athletic Compliance Form

SGISPRT Athletic Compliance Inquiry Form

General Student

STVSSEP Services Exemption Validation Form SEADETL Support Service Detail Form

SGADISA Student Disability Services Form

General Person

General Student

STVSSER Service Code Validation Form SEADETL Support Service Detail Form

SEASDTL Service Attributes and Comments Form

SEASQRY Student Services Service Query Form

SEASSGP Service Group Rules Form

SGADISA Student Disability Services Form

General Person

General Student

STVSSGP Service Group Validation Form SEAASGN Service Group Assignment Form

SEADETL Support Service Detail Form

SEAGQRY Student Services Goal Query Form

SEANQRY Student Services Need Query Form

SEAQGNS Support Services Query Form

SEASQRY Student Services Service Query Form

SEASSGP Service Group Rules Form

General Person

STVSSRS Service Result Validation Form SEADETL Support Services Detail Form

SGADISA Student Disability Services Form

General Person

General Student

STVSSST Services Status Validation Form SEADETL Support Services Detail Form

SGADISA Student Disability Services Form

General Person

General Student

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

175

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

STVSSTS Section Status Code Validation Form SFAALST Class Attendance Roster Form

SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

SFASLST Class Roster Form

SFQSECM Registration Section Query Form

SFQSECT Section Schedule Query Form

SHQSECT Academic History Section Query Form

SSABLCK Block Schedule Control Form

SSABSCQ Block Schedule Section Query Form

SSASECQ Schedule Section Query Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

Registration

Academic History

Schedule

176

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVSTAT State/Province Code Validation Form GOAMTCH Common Matching Entry Form

SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SFARQST Enrollment Verification Request Form

SGACOOP Cooperative Education Form

SHADIPL Diploma Form

SHAGAPP Graduation Application Form

SHARQTC Transcript Request Form

SLABLDG Building Definition Form

SOADDRQ Address Summary Form

SOAFOLK Guardian Information Form

SOAHSCH High School Information Form

SOAIDNS Person Search Detail Form

SOAMATL Material Form

SOAPCOL Prior College Form

SOASBGI Source or Background Institution Base

Form

SPAEMRG Emergency Contact Form

SPAIDEN General Person Identification Form

SRAQUIK Quick Recruit Form

General Person

Admissions

Registration

General Student

Academic History

Location Management

Overall

General Person

Recruiting

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

177

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVSTSP Student Study Path Status Validation

Form

SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SFAREGF Student Course/Fee Assessment Query

Form

SFAREGQ Registration Query Form

SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

SFARHST Student Registration History and

Extension Form

SFASRPO Student Registration Permit-Override

Form

SFASTCA Student Course Registration Audit Form

SGASADD Additional Student Information Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SHADEGR Degrees and Other Formal Awards

Form

SHADGMQ Degree Summary Form

SHATCKN Course Maintenance Form

Admissions

Registration

General Student

Academic History

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

178

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVSTST Student Status Code Validation Form SAAQKER Quick Entry Rules Form

SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

SFARQST Enrollment Verification Request Form

SGAAPRG Athletic Academic Progress Form

SGAMSTU General Student Mass Entry Form

SGASADD Additional Student Information Form

SGASPRT Athletic Compliance Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SGISPRT Athletic Compliance Inquiry Form

SHAGELR Graduation Application Eligibility Rules

Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

SHQTERM Term Summary Form

SOAIDNS Person Search Detail Form

Admissions

Registration

General Student

Academic History

System Administration

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

179

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVSTYP Student Type Code Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAACHKB Admissions Checklist Rules Form

SAADCRV Admissions Decision Form

SAADCSN Admissions Decision Rules Form

SAAMAPP Admissions Mass Entry Form

SAAQKER Quick Entry Rules Form

SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SAASUMI Admissions Application Summary Form

SCADETL Course Detail Information Form

SFAMHRS Registration Minimum Maximum Hours

Form

SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

SFARGFE Registration Fee Assessment Rules

Form

SFARQST Enrollment Verification Request Form

SFATMST Time Status Rules Form

SGAAPRG Athletic Academic Progress Form

SGAMSTU General Student Mass Entry Form

SGASADD Additional Student Information Form

SGASPRT Athletic Compliance Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

Admissions

Catalog

Registration

General Student

Academic History

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

180

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVSTYP Student Type Code Validation Form

(cont.)

SFASTSR Student Centric Time Status Rules Form

SOACSPC Continuant Student Centric Period Rule

Form

SOACTRM Continuant Term Rules Form

SOAIDNS Person Search Detail Form

SOAMATL Material Form

SOQCTRM Continuant Terms Query Form

SRAQUIK Quick Recruit Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

SSADFEE Section Fee Assessment Control Form

Registration

Overall

System Administration

Overall

Recruiting

Schedule

STVSUBJ Subject Code Validation Form SCABASE Course Base Maintenance Form

SCACRSE Basic Course Information Form

SCADETL Course Detail Information Form

SCARRES Course Registration Restrictions Form

SCASRES Catalog Schedule Restrictions Form

SFAALST Class Attendance Roster Form

SFAREGF Student Course/Fee Assessment Query

Form

SFAREGQ Registration Query Form

SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

SFASLST Class Roster Form

SFASRPO Student Registration Permit-Override

Form

Catalog

Registration

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

181

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVSUBJ Subject Code Validation Form (cont.) SFQSECM Registration Section Query Form

SFQSECT Section Schedule Query Form

SHACRSE Academic History Course Summary

Form

SHADEGR Degrees and Other Formal Awards

Form

SHASUBJ Subject Sequence History Form

SHATRMC Course History by Term and Campus

Form

SHQTATC Transfer Course Query Form

SHATAEQ Transfer Articulation Evaluation Form

SHATATC Transfer Institution Catalog Entry Form

SHATATR Transfer Course Articulation Form

SHATCKN Course Maintenance Form

SHATERM Term Sequence History Form

SHATRNS Transfer Course Form

SHATRTA Transfer Articulation Attributes Form

SHQATTR Academic History Course Attribute Form

SHQSECT Academic History Section Query Form

SHQSUBJ Academic History Catalog Query Form

Registration

Academic History

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

182

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVSUBJ Subject Code Validation Form (cont.) SIAASGQ Faculty Schedule Query Form

SIQSECM Faculty Course Section Query Form

SOAWLTC Automated Waitlist Term Control Form

SSABLCK Block Schedule Control Form

SSABSCQ Block Schedule Section Query Form

SSADETL Schedule Detail Form

SSAMATX Building/Room Schedule Form

SSARRES Schedule Restrictions Form

SSASECQ Schedule Section Query Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

SSAXLST Cross List Definition Form

SSQATTR Section Course Attributes Form

Faculty Load

Overall

Schedule

STVSUDA Student Element One Validation Form SGAUSDF Student Institutional Reporting

Requirements Form

General Student

STVSUDB Student Element Two Validation Form SGAUSDF Student Institutional Reporting

Requirements Form

General Student

STVSUDC Student Element Three Validation Form SGAUSDF Student Institutional Reporting

Requirements Form

General Student

STVSUDD Student Element Four Validation Form SGAUSDF Student Institutional Reporting

Requirements Form

General Student

STVSUDE Student Element Five Validation Form SGAUSDF Student Institutional Reporting

Requirements Form

General Student

STVSUDF Student Element Six Validation Form SGAUSDF Student Institutional Reporting

Requirements Form

General Student

STVSUDG Student Element Seven Validation Form SGAUSDF Student Institutional Reporting

Requirements Form

General Student

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

183

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVSUDH Student Element Eight Validation Form SGAUSDF Student Institutional Reporting

Requirements Form

General Student

STVSUDI Student Element Nine Validation Form SGAUSDF Student Institutional Reporting

Requirements Form

General Student

STVSUDJ Student Element Ten Validation Form SGAUSDF Student Institutional Reporting

Requirements Form

General Student

STVTAAU Acceptance Authority Code Validation

Form

SOABGTA Transfer Articulation Institution Form Overall

STVTADM Test Score Administration Type Code

Validation Form

SAADCRV Admissions Decision Form

SOATEST Test Score Information Form

SOTCNVT Tape Code Conversion Form

Admissions

Overall

System Administration

STVTASK A/F/I Task Validation Form SGAASST Assistantship/Fellowship/Internship

Form

General Student

STVTAST Transfer Articulation Course Status

Validation Form

SHATAEQ Transfer Articulation Evaluation Form

SHATATC Transfer Institution Catalog Entry Form

SHATATR Transfer Course Articulation Form

SHQTATC Transfer Course Query Form

Academic History

STVTEAC Test Accommodation Validation Form SOATEST Test Score Information Form Overall

STVTEFR Test Form Validation Form SOATEST Test Score Information Form Overall

STVTEIN Test Instrument Validation Form SOATEST Test Score Information Form Overall

STVTELE Telephone Type Validation Form GOAMTCH Common Matching Entry Form

SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SPAIDEN General Person Identification Form

SPATELE General Person Telephone Form

SRAQUIK Quick Recruit Form

General Person

Admissions

General Person

Recruiting

STVTEPR Test Purpose Validation Form SOATEST Test Score Information Form Overall

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

184

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVTERM Term Code Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAACHKB Admissions Checklist Rules Form

SAADCRV Admissions Decision Form

SAADCSN Admissions Decision Rules Form

SAAMAPP Admissions Mass Entry Form

SAAQKER Quick Entry Rules Form

SAAECTM EDI Cross-Reference Term Code Rules

Form

SAAQUIK Quick Entry Form

SAASUMI Admissions Application Summary Form

SCABASE Course Base Maintenance Form

SCACLBD Course Labor Distribution Form

SCACRSE Basic Course Information Form

SCADETL Course Detail Information Form

SCAMEXC Mutual Course Exclusion Form

Admissions

Catalog

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

185

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVTERM Term Code Validation Form (cont.) SCARRES Course Registration Restrictions Form

SCASRES Catalog Schedule Restrictions Form

SCATEXT College Department Text Form

SEAASGN Service Group Assignment Form

SEADETL Support Service Detail Form

SEAGDTL Goal Attributes and Comments Form

SEAGQRY Student Services Goal Query Form

SEANDTL Need Attributes and Comments Form

SEANQRY Student Services Need Query Form

SEAQGNS Support Services Query Form

SEASDTL Service Attributes and Comments Form

SEASQRY Student Services Service Query Form

SEASSGP Service Group Rules Form

SFAAFEE Additional Registration Fees Form

SFAALST Class Attendance Roster Form

SFACREQ Student Course Request Form

SFAGECR Gainful Employment Program Rules

Form

SFAGEDR Gainful Employment Detail Code Rules

Form

SFAGEOR Gainful Employment OPEID Rules Form

Catalog

General Person

Registration

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

186

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVTERM Term Code Validation Form (cont.) SFAFMAX Registration Fees Min/Max Charge

Control Form

SFAEFEE Registration Additional Fees Form

SFAESTS Student Registration Status Form

SFAMESG Enrollment Verification Message Form

SFAMHRS Registration Minimum Maximum Hours

Form

SFAMREG Registration Mass Entry Form

SFARCTL Registration Group Control Form

SFARCTT Registration Priority Control Form

SFAREGF Student Course/Fee Assessment Query

Form

SFAREGQ Registration Query Form

SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

SFARFND Registration Fee Assessment Refund by

Total Rules Form

SFARGFE Registration Fee Assessment Rules

Form

SFARGRP Student Registration Group Form

SFAROVR Registration Permit-Override Control

Form

SFARQST Enrollment Verification Request Form

SFARSTS Course Registration Status Form

Registration

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

187

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVTERM Term Code Validation Form (cont.) SFARWLP Reserved Seats Priority Management

Form

SFASCPR Student Centric Registration History

Form

SFASLST Class Roster Form

SFASRPO Student Registration Permit-Override

Control Form

SFATMST Time Status Rules Form

SFAWLPR Waitlist Priority Management Form

SFAXWLP Cross List Waitlist Priority Management

Form

SFIRGRP Student Registration Group Query Form

SFIWLNT Waitlist Notification Query Form

SFQESTS Enrollment Status Query Form

SFQRESG Registration Query Form

SFQRSTS Course Registration Status Query Form

SFQSECM Registration Section Query Form

SFQSECT Section Schedule Query Form

SGAAPRG Athletic Academic Progress Form

SGACOOP Cooperative Education Form

SGADISA Student Disability Services Form

Registration

General Student

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

188

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVTERM Term Code Validation Form (cont.) SGAEOPS Education Opportunity Programs and

Services Form

SGAMSPT Mass Entry Athletic Compliance Form

SGAMSTU General Student Mass Entry Form

SGASADD Additional Student Information Form

SGASPRT Athletic Compliance Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SGISPRT Athletic Compliance Inquiry Form

SHAACST Academic Standing Rules Form

SHACATQ Ceremony Attendance Query Form

SHACATT Ceremony Attendance Form

SHACPRQ Ceremonies By Attendee Query Form

SHACRMQ Ceremony Query Form

SHACRMY Ceremony Form

SHACRSE Academic History Course Summary

Form

SHADEGR Degrees and Other Formal Awards

Form

SHADGMQ Degree Summary Form

SHADIPL Diploma Form

SHAGADR Self-Service Graduation Application

Display Rules Form

SHAGAPP Graduation Application Form

General Student

Academic History

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

189

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVTERM Term Code Validation Form (cont.) SHAGELR Graduation Application Eligibility Rules

Form

SHAGCOL Grade Mailer Status/Error Correction

Form

SHAGRDE Grade Code Maintenance Form

SHAGRDS Grade Code Substitution Form

SHAINCG Incomplete Grade Rules Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

SHAMCAT Mass Entry Ceremony Attendance Form

SHAMDIP Mass Entry Diploma Form

SHAPCMP Pre-Banner Summary Hours Form

SHARPTR Repeat/Multiple Course Rules Form

SHARQTC Transcript Request Form

SHAMDEG Mass Entry Graduation Form

SHAMUCA Mass Update Ceremony Attendance

Form

SHAMUDI Mass Update Diploma Form

SHASTAT Academic Standing Query Form

SHASUBJ Subject Sequence History Form

SHATAEQ Transfer Articulation Evaluation Form

SHATATC Transfer Institution Catalog Entry Form

Academic History

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

190

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVTERM Term Code Validation Form (cont.) SHATATR Transfer Course Articulation Form

SHATCKN Course Maintenance Form

SHATCMT Transcript Events/Comments Form

SHATERM Term Sequence Course History Form

SHATGRD Transfer Grade Code Maintenance

Form

SHATRMC Course History by Term and Campus

Form

SHATRNS Transfer Course Form

SHATRTA Transfer Articulation Attributes Form

SHQATTR Student Academic History Course

Attribute Form

SHQSECT Academic History Section Query Form

SHQTATC Transfer Course Query Form

SHQTERM Term Summary Form

SIAASGN Faculty Assignment Form

SIAASGQ Faculty Schedule Query Form

SIACFTE Faculty Workload Contract FTE Form

SIACONA Faculty Contract Analysis Form

SIACONQ Faculty Contract Query Form

SIAFAVL Available Faculty Query Form

SIAFCTR Faculty Contract Type Term Rules Form

Academic History

Faculty Load

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

191

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVTERM Term Code Validation Form (cont.) SIAFLCT Faculty Contract Term Rules Form

SIAFLRC Faculty Workload Contract Rules Form

SIAFLRT Faculty Workload Term Rules Form

SIAINST Faculty/Advisor Information Form

SIAIQRY Faculty/Advisor Query Form

SIATERM Faculty Load Term Form

SIQSECM Faculty Course Section Query Form

SLAASCD Room Assignment Status Form

SLAEVNT Event Form

SLALMFE Room/Meal/Phone Rate Code Rules

Form

SLAMASG Meal Assignment Form

SLAMSCD Meal Assignment Status Form

SLAPASG Phone Assignment Form

SLAPSCD Phone Assignment Status Form

SLARASG Room Assignment Form

SLARDEF Room Definition Form

SLARMAP Dorm Room and Meal Application Form

SLARMAT Roommate Application Form

SLARUSE Dorm Room Query Form

SLATERM Housing Term Control Form

Faculty Load

Location Management

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

192

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVTERM Term Code Validation Form (cont.) SLIAEVN Event Available Room Query Form

SLQASCD Room Assignment Status Query Form

SLQMEET Available Class Room Query Form

SLQMSCD Meal Assignment Status Query Form

SLQROOM Room Query Form

SLQPSCD Phone Assignment Status Query Form

SLQRASG Room Assignment Query Form

SLQRMAT Roommate Application Query Form

SOAATRM Web Application Term Display Control

Form

SOABGTA Transfer Articulation Institution Form

SOACURR Curriculum Rules Form

SOACSPC Continuant Student Centric Period Rule

Form

SOACTRM Continuant Terms Rule Form

SOAFRYR Federal Reporting Year Rules Form

SOAIDNS Person Search Detail Form

SOASCPT Student Centric Period Term Control

Form

SOATERM Term Control Form

SOAWLTC Automated Waitlist Term Control Form

SOAXCUR EDI Cross-Reference Curriculum Rules

Form

Location Management

Overall

System Administration

Overall

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

193

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVTERM Term Code Validation Form (cont.) SOILCUR Learner Curriculum Query Form

SOQCTRM Continuant Terms Query Form

SOTCNVT Tape Code Conversion Form

SUAMAIL Student Mail Form

SRARINF Recruiter's Prospect Form

SRASRCE Source Visit/Prospect Form

SRAQUIK Quick Recruit Form

SRARAPT Recruiter Appointments/Visits Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

SSABLCK Block Schedule Control Form

SSABLKQ Block Schedule Query Form

SSABSCQ Block Schedule Section Query Form

SSAACCL Schedule Calendar Form

SSAACRL Schedule Academic Calendar Rules

Form

SSACLBD Section Labor Distribution Form

SSADETL Schedule Detail Form

SSADFEE Section Fee Assessment Control Form

SSAEVAL Schedule Evaluation Form

SSAMATX Building/Room Schedule Form

SSAOVRR Schedule Override Form

Overall

System Administration

Recruiting/Admissions

Recruiting

Schedule

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

194

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVTERM Term Code Validation Form (cont.) SSAMATX Building/Room Schedule Form

SSAOVRR Schedule Override Form

SSAQCRL Academic Calendar Rule Query Form

SSARRES Schedule Restrictions Form

SSASECQ Schedule Section Query Form

SSASECT Schedule Form

SSATEXT Schedule Comment Form

SSAWLSC Waitlist Automation Section Control

Form

SSAXLST Cross List Definition Form

SSAXMTI Cross List Meeting Time/Instructor

Query Form

SSAXLSQ Schedule Cross List Query Form

SSIRESV Reserved Seats Inquiry Form

SSQATTR Section Course Attribute Form

Schedule

STVTESC Test Code Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAADCRV Admissions Decision Form

SAADCSN Admissions Decision Rules Form

SCARRES Course Registration Restrictions Form

SOABGIY Source/Background Institution Year

Information Form

SOAMATL Material Form

SOATEST Test Score Information Form

SSARRES Schedule Restrictions Form

Admissions

Catalog

Overall

Schedule

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

195

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVTLVL Transfer Level Code Validation Form SHATATC Transfer Institution Catalog Entry Form

SHATATR Transfer Course Articulation Form

SHATRTA Transfer Articulation Attributes Form

SHQTATC Transfer Course Query Form

SOABGTA Transfer Articulation Institution Form

Academic History

Overall

STVTMST Time Status Code Validation Form SFASCPR Student Centric Registration History

Form

SFASTSR Student Centric Time Status Rules Form

SFATMST Time Status Rules Form

Registration

STVTOPS Taxonomy of Program Code Validation

Form

SCADETL Course Detail Information Form

SIAASGN Faculty Assignment Form

SSAOVRR Schedule Override Form

Catalog

Faculty Load

Schedule

STVTPRT Transcript Type Code Validation Form SHACTRL Academic History Control Form

SHAGADR Self-Service Graduation Application

Display Rules Form

SHARQTC Transcript Request Form

SHATPRT Transcript Type Rules Form

Academic History

STVTRAC Acceptance Reason Validation Form SGAEOPS Education Opportunity Programs and

Services Form

General Student

STVTRCN Transfer Center Code Validation Form SGASTDN General Student Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

General Student

Academic History

STVTREQ Time Required Validation Form SEADETL Support Service Detail Form General Person

STVTRMT Term Type Validation Form SHACTRL Academic History Control Form Academic History

STVTRNS Transcript Name Source Code

Validation Form

SHRTRNS Transcript Name Source Rules Form Academic History

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

196

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVTSPT Test Score Percentile Type Validation

Form

SOATEST Test Score Information Form Overall

STVTSRC Admissions Test Score Source Code

Validation Form

SAADCRV Admissions Decision Form

SOATEST Test Score Information Form

Admissions

Overall

STVTYPE Academic Dress Type Validation Form SHACATQ Ceremony Attendance Query Form

SHACATT Ceremony Attendance Form

SHAMUCA Mass Update Ceremony Attendance

Form

SHACPRQ Ceremonies By Attendee Query Form

Academic History

STVVETC Veteran Type Code Validation Form SGASTDN General Student Form General Student

STVVTAB Web Display Tables Validation Form SOAWDSP Web Display List Customization Form Overall

STVVTYP Visa Type Code Validation Form SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SCADETL Course Detail Information Form

SFAMHRS Registration Minimum Maximum Hours

Form

SSADETL Schedule Detail Form

SSADFEE Section Fee Assessment Control Form

Admissions

Catalog

Registration

Schedule

STVVOED Vocational Education Code Validation

Form

SGASTDN General Student Form

SHAINST Term Course Maintenance Form

General Student

Academic History

STVWACK Web Acknowledgment Validation Form SRAWACK Web for Prospects Acknowledgment

Letter Form

Recruiting

STVWAIV Application Waiver Reason Code

Validation Form

SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SAAWADP Web Application Customized Lists Form

Admissions

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

197

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVWAPP Application Type Code Validation Form SAAECRL Electronic Admissions Procedure/

Routine Control Form

SAAETBL Electronic Application Submitted Form

SAAWAPP Web Application Section Rules Form

SAAWUDQ Web User Defined Questions Form

Admissions

STVWKLD Term Workload Rules Code Validation

Form

SIAASGN Faculty Assignment Form

SIAFLRT Faculty Workload Term Rules Form

SIAINST Faculty/Advisor Information Form

Faculty Load

STVWLTT Web Application Customized Letter

Type Validation Form

SAAWADF Electronic Applicant Web Default Rules

Form

Admissions

STVWPIC Web Prospect Information Selection

Validation Form

SRAWPRO Web for Prospects Selection Rules

Form

Recruiting

STVWPYO Web Payment Options Validation Form SFARQSS Enrollment Verification Status Form

SHAGADR Self-Service Graduation Application

Display Rules Form

SHARQTC Transcript Request Form

SHARQTS Transcript Request Status Form

SHATPRT Transcript Type Rules Form

Registration

Academic History

STVWRSN Withdrawal Reason Code Validation

Form

SAAADMS Admissions Application Form

SRARECR Recruit Prospect Information Form

Admissions

Recruiting

STVWSCF Web Application Elements Validation

Form

SAAWAPP Web Application Section Rules Form Admissions

STVWSCT Web Application Section Validation

Form

SAAWAPP Web Application Section Rules Form Admissions

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

198

Banner Student User Guide | Validation Reference

STVWSSO Web Self Service Options Validation

Form

SFARQSS Enrollment Verification Status Form

SHARQTC Transcript Request Form

SHARQTS Transcript Request Status Form

SHATPRT Transcript Type Rules Form

Registration

Academic History

STVWTHD Student EOPS/CARE Withdrawal

Reason Validation Form

SGAEOPS Education Opportunity Programs and

Services Form

General Student

STVXLBL EDI Verification Label Validation Form SOAXREF EDI Cross-Reference Rules Form Overall

Validation Form Application/Functional Form Modules

258

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

Course Catalog

This chapter discusses processing and procedure information for Course Catalog.

Course Catalog Procedures

Here are tasks you can perform in this module.

Building or Changing a Course Catalog

Once you have compiled all the data you need to create a catalog for your institution, you’ll

need to enter it into Banner® using the Catalog module.

You use the Basic Course Information Form (SCACRSE) to enter the minimum

information needed for a catalog entry:

• the course title,

• department, and

• credit hours.

You maintain any additional information concerning a course (such as corequisites, fee

information, and text) on the Course Detail Information Form (SCADETL). Any changes

made to the Course Catalog may be kept as a historical record.

Course Contact Hours

The Contact (Hours) Low and Contact (Hours) High fields contain the totals of the

Lecture, Lab, and Other fields in the Hours section of the Basic Course Information Form

(SCACRSE). The default calculation may be overridden. Course contact hours high are

calculated using lecture/lab/other hours low when the corresponding high hours are not

entered. The first Or/To (Hours Indicator) entered for the Lecture/Lab/Other Hours

fields defaults to the Or/To (Hours Indicator) for the Contact (Hours) fields.

Open Learning Registration and Course Catalog

Open learning registration provides learners with the ability to register for a class based on

start/end dates rather than a term. This date-based approach is optional and works with

Banner Student’s registration processing for enrollment and administrative purposes.

259

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

The differences between traditional courses and open learning courses are as follows:

• A traditional course is a part-of-term based class that is defined by and conducted within

a term structure.

• An open learning course, while still contained within a term, can be any class offering

where:

• section level controls are required,

• registration records are processed at the student level versus the class level,

• fees are to be calculated based on the duration of the class,

• course content delivery is other than classroom-based.

This may include but is not limited to:

• open entry/open exit classes,

• distance education classes,

• continuing education classes,

• classroom-based classes,

• independent study classes,

• practicums,

• apprenticeship classes,

• or any combination of these.

Open learning allows you to do the following in the Catalog module:

• Run reports using date ranges in place of term.

• Create a rudimentary syllabus (made up of student learning objectives, required

materials for the course, and technical requirements).

• Use an expanded course title (up to 100 characters).

• Store the URL for course content.

• Search for courses based on criteria other than term.

• Use free format text to store and display course descriptions and college and/or

department text.

• Specify dates when registration is accepted outside of the current parts-of-term defined

on SOATERM. (For open learning courses only.)

• Define instructional methods for courses.

• Specify the duration of the course (the amount of time to be given to the student to

complete the course) for the course and section levels to determine the expected course

completion date for the learner.

• Create a single course for both traditional and open learning class offerings. The

delivery method of the course is established when the individual section records are

created.

260

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

Set Up New Course for Traditional and Open Learning

Registration

Before setting up new courses, make sure all course-related rules and validation codes

have been defined in Banner.

1. Access the Basic Course Information Form (SCACRSE), and enter the subject code,

course number and effective term in the Key Block.

2. Use Next Block to access the Course Information block, and enter all applicable

information including course high/low hour information.

•Check the Continuing Education checkbox if the course is considered as a

continuing education course.

• Enter the duration and duration units if the course could be offered as an open

learning course. If the course will not be offered in an open learning format, duration

is not required and will not be accepted for traditional sections.

3. Use Next Block to access the Course Level window, and add applicable course level

code information. For example, if the course is considered to be a continuing

education course and has been designated as such in the Course Information block,

assign a level for continuing education to the course in this window.

4. Use Next Block to access the Grading Mode window, and enter applicable grading

modes for the course. Make sure that one mode is designated as the default.

5. Use Next Block to access the Schedule Type window, and enter applicable schedule

types for the course. The schedule type codes are entered in the Schedule field or

selected using the List of Values from STVSCHD.

If the schedule type has been created with an attached instructional method, the

instructional method will also display when the schedule type code is added. This is

optional, as the schedule type/instructional method relationship can be established

when creating the individual sections. It is possible to override or delete the attached

instructional method.

6. Save the course. This causes the associated table entries to be created.

7. Access the Course Syllabus Form (SCASYLB) if course syllabus information (long

course title, URL, learning objectives, technical requirements and/or required

materials) is associated with this course for display on the Web.

Note: Unlike other course default information, course syllabus information

will not be displayed for the section. It is necessary to copy all or some of

this information to the individual sections, as syllabus information may not

be desired for all sections of the same course. The section syllabus copy

process is accomplished using the Copy button.

261

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

Update Existing Course for Open Learning Registration

Before updating existing courses, make sure all course-related rules and validation codes

have been defined in Banner.

1. Access the Basic Course Information Form (SCACRSE), and enter the subject code,

course number and effective term in the Key Block.

2. Use Next Block to access the Course Information block, and enter the duration and

duration units for the course. This information will be used in the registration process

to calculate the student’s expected completion date based on the date the student

elects to start the course.

3. Save the course. This causes the associated table entries to be updated.

4. Access the Course Syllabus Form (SCASYLB) if course syllabus information (long

course title, URL, learning objectives, technical requirements and/or required

materials) is associated with this course for display on the Web.

Note: Unlike other course default information, course syllabus information

will not be displayed for the section. It is necessary to copy all or some of

this information to the individual sections, as syllabus information may not

be desired for all sections of the same course. Again, the section syllabus

copy process is accomplished very easily using the Copy from Course

button.

Creating a Continuing Education Catalog Entry

You enter and maintain catalog entries for CEU course offerings on the Course

Information Form (SCACRSE). You must check the Continuing Education box to

designate that this offering is only available as a CEU course.

The Course Level window can only contain valid CEU levels which have been established

on the Level Code Validation Form (STVLEVL). A course cannot be both a CEU and a

non-CEU course. Whenever the Continuing Education box changes, the Level (Code)

field in the Course Level window is checked by the system, to insure that the levels are

Continuing Education levels.

Banner automatically calculates the continuing education units associated with the CEU

course offering. This is done by leaving the CEU or Credit field blank and entering the

total contact hours associated with the course. The total contact hours will then be divided

by ten to generate the CEUs.

Here is an example of the CEU calculation:

Lecture 15.00

Lab 5.00

Other 5.00

Tota l 25 .0 0

System calculated CEUs: 2.5

262

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

You may override the system-calculated CEU value. Ranges of CEUs and contact hours

can be maintained on CEU course offerings. Billing hours must also be specified on CEU

courses. If no billing hours exist, then a zero must be entered.

Maintaining Faculty Workload

The Schedule Type window on the Basic Course Information Form (SCACRSE) can be

used to specify the faculty workload information by schedule type for each course offering.

An adjusted workload which is used when the course section enrollment meets or

exceeds the overload enrollment may also be specified here.

For any class session with a schedule type of A, the default workload for an instructor

teaching the session will be 3.00. If more than 32 students are enrolled, then the workload

will automatically be displayed on the Schedule Form (SSASECT) as 3.25.

Building Registration Restrictions on Courses

After you have added a course to the system, use the Course Registration Restrictions

Form (SCARRES) to build restrictions on who may register for the course.

Note: Course and section restriction rules created prior to Release 8.0

are handled as follows. The (Field of Study) Type field on SCARRES

and SSARRES will be set to a default of

MAJOR when a current course or

section restriction rule exists for a major (STVMAJR). Since only the field

of study type of

MAJOR was previously considered, all registration

restriction rules will function as before. Processing checks the primary

and secondary curriculum elements.

You may restrict a course to include or exclude students specifically by the following data

items.

• department

• field of study (major)

• class

• level

• degree

• program

• campus

Schedule Type Workload Over-Enrollment Adjusted Workload

A Lecture 3.00 33 3.25

B Lab 2.00 14 2.30

263

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

• college

• student attribute

• cohort

The restriction controls are used to enter and maintain the restriction indicators associated

with the restrictions for a course. The only values that can be selected in the Include

Exclude radio groups are

Include for include restrictions and Exclude for exclude

restrictions. An inclusion restriction means a course may be offered only for the values

displayed for that restriction. An exclusion restriction prohibits the offering of a course for

the specified restrictions.

To end restrictions:

• Select the Maintenance button and choose the End Restrictions option, or use

Duplicate Item from that restriction section (such as Department Restriction), and those

restrictions are ended for the term in the Key Information.

To modify restrictions:

• Select the Maintenance button and choose the Copy Restrictions option, or use

Duplicate Record from the appropriate section to create a new effective term record for

the term in the Key Information. This new effective term record may be modified at the

your discretion.

Campus Restrictions

Use the Campus Restriction section of the Course Registration Restriction Form

(SCARRES) to create rules to restrict registration of a course by campus. The course may

be included or excluded to a single campus or a group of campuses. These campus

restriction rules function in the same manner as the class and level restrictions which exist

on the form.

An inclusion restriction indicates that registration for the course is only permitted for those

students whose campus value equals the campuses in the Campus Restriction section.

An exclusion restriction prohibits the registration of the course for those students whose

campus value equals the campus in the Campus Restriction section.

For example, AUTO 123 has a campus registration restriction rule to include campus

1. This means that only those students whose campus value is equal to 1 on

SFAREGS (Campus field in the Curriculum window for the curriculum record that is

active and current) will be able to register for the course.

The course MATH 500 has a campus registration restriction rule to exclude campus 2

and campus 3. This means that a student whose campus value is equal to either 2 or

3 on SFAREGS (Campus field in the Curriculum window for the curriculum record that

is active and current) will be prevented from registering for the course.

These campus restrictions default to the schedule information and are maintained on the

Schedule Restrictions Form (SSARRES). Additional restrictions may then be added or

modified at the section via the Schedule Restrictions Form (SSARRES). The campus

restriction checking is controlled by a the Campus (Restriction Severity) registration

error flag on the Term Control Form (SOATERM).

264

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

Test Score and Prerequisite Restrictions

You may also restrict courses by test score restrictions and prerequisites. Use the Catalog

Prerequisite and Test Score Restrictions Form (SCAPREQ) to set up course test score

and prerequisite restrictions and course area prerequisite restrictions. Use the Schedule

Prerequisite and Test Score Restrictions Form (SSAPREQ) to set up section test score

and prerequisite restrictions and section area prerequisite restrictions.

The combined prerequisite and test score restriction processing enables you to establish

specific tests and minimum scores, courses and minimum grades, or combinations of

these which must be attained prior to registering for the course.

You may specify multiple conditions using the AND (A) and OR (O) connectors along with

parentheses. For test restrictions, Test Code and Test Score are required. For basic

prerequisite checking, Subject and Course are required. If grade checking is to be

performed for a subject and course, then Grade and Level are also required. Grade

checking will check for the numeric value on the Grade Code Maintenance Form

(SHAGRDE). If a student is permitted to take a course and the prerequisite for the course

in the same term, the flag in the Concurrency field should be set to Yes from the pulldown

list.

Restrictions and prerequisites set at the course level on the Course Registration

Restrictions Form (SCARRES) and the Catalog Prerequisite and Test Score Restrictions

Form (SCAPREQ) will default to the schedule information and are maintained on the

Schedule Restrictions Form (SSARRES) and the Schedule Prerequisite and Test Score

Restrictions Form (SSAPREQ) respectively. These restrictions and prerequisites may

then be added to or modified for the section via SSARRES and SSAPREQ.

Test score and prerequisite restrictions are examined on the Student Course Registration

Form (SFAREGS) when the student attempts to register for the course. This restriction

checking is controlled by the Prerequisites (Course Severity) radio group on the Term

Control Form (SOATERM).

The student's test information must be maintained on the Test Score Information Form

(SOATEST). Prerequisite course restrictions will automatically check graded courses in

registration, academic history, and transfer work. The student's same term registration will

only be checked if the Concurrency (Indicator) on SCAPREQ or SSAPREQ is set to

Yes for the course being checked.

Note: Ungraded courses in registration will be unchecked and will

generate an In Progress error in registration. This error is different from

the Not Satisfied error.

Example:

The following is an example of a test score and prerequisite restriction.

• Math 400 requires a student to have taken the SAT math test and have received a

minimum score of 500.

• Or, they must have successfully completed Math 300.

• Or, they must have received a minimum score of 425 on the math SAT and

completed Math 200 at the undergraduate level and received a grade of A.

265

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

These restrictions would be set up as follows:

TEST (Code, Score) and PREREQUISITE (Subject, Course, Level, Grade, and

Concurrency)

Note: Level 01 is undergraduate, and Test Code S01 is SAT math.

If the Prerequisites (Course Severity) radio group on SOATERM is set to check

these restrictions, and the student attempts to register for Math 400, the student's test

information on SOATEST, as well as the student's academic history and transfer

course work, are examined to see if the student meets any of the three requirements.

If the student does meet the required restrictions, then the registration will be

processed. If none of these restrictions are met, then an error message is generated

on SFAREGS, and an override may be performed.

Example:

The following is an example using stacked parentheses to create prerequisite

restrictions on SCAPREQ and SSAPREQ.

This example assumes a prerequisite of ((ENGL 101 or ENGL 102) AND (ENGL 103

or ENGL 104)) OR (LITR 101 and LITR 103).

• The student must have successfully completed ENGL 101 or 102 with a grade of C

AND ENGL 103 or ENGL 104 with a grade of C.

• OR

• The student must have successfully completed LITR 101 and LITR 103 with a grade

of C.

These restrictions would be set up as follows:

TEST (Code, Score) and PREREQUISITE (Subject, Course, Level, Grade, and

Concurrency)

A/O '(' Code Score Subj Crse Level Grade Concurrency ')'

( S01 500 )

O( MATH300 )

O ( S01 425

AMATH20001A)

A/O '(' Code Score Subj Crse Level Grade Concurrency ')'

(

(ENGL101C

OENGL102C)

266

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

Test score and prerequisite restrictions are edited by an SQL Editor that parses the

entered data in the same format used to apply the restrictions within the registration

process. This allows you to know immediately if the syntax of the statement you created

will be executable and so prevents possible prerequisite execution errors.

Using All Field of Study Types with Restrictions

The All Field of Study Types checkbox on SCARRES and SSARRES is used to indicate

whether all field of study types should be considered for the field of study code entered.

When this field is checked, a field of study code must be entered in the (Field of Study)

Code field to activate the restriction rule. A message is displayed that the rule cannot be

saved without a field of study code. All field of study types (

MAJOR, MINOR,

CONCENTRATION, and so on) will be considered for any field of study codes that are

entered. You cannot enter a specific field of study type in the Type field when the All Field

of Study Types checkbox is checked. The user is taken to the Code field to select the

field of study value.

When the checkbox is not checked, you can access the Type field and enter field of study

types. Multiple field of study type rules can exist, but they must be unique. At least one

field of study code must be entered in the (Field of Study) Code field to activate the

restriction rule. Once a field of study type rule exists, the All Field of Study Types

checkbox is not accessible.

You can either check the All Field of Study Types checkbox, or enter one or more values

in (Field of Study) Type field, but you cannot do both. If you enter more than one value in

(Field of Study) Type field (

MAJOR, MINOR, CONCENTRATION, and so on) you must

set the Include Exclude radio group for each type. (Each field of study is independently

included or excluded.)

Field of study type restrictions use AND conditions, not OR conditions. For example, when

a section has

MAJOR, MINOR, and CONCENTRATION field of study types set to include

MATH, all three field of study types have to be satisfied for the student to register for the

course. When the All Field of Study Types checkbox is checked and the field of study

types include MATH, the student would only have to have MATH as a

MAJOR, MINOR, or

CONCENTRATION to register for the course.

A( ENGL103 C

OENGL104C)

)

O ( LITR 101 C

ALITR103C)

A/O '(' Code Score Subj Crse Level Grade Concurrency ')'

267

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

Using Field of Study Type Codes with Restrictions

The (Field of Study) Type field displays the learner field of study type code and the

associated description from GTVLFST, such as

MAJOR, MINOR, CONCENTRATION.

When a field of study type is entered in the Type field, a field of study code must also be

entered in the (Field of Study) Code field to activate the restriction rule. A message is

displayed that the rule cannot be saved without a field of study code. The field of study

type for the code entered will be checked during processing. When a field of study type

exists in the Type field, you cannot access the All Field of Study Types checkbox.

The field of study type (in the Type field) is associated with the Include Exclude radio

group. Multiple field of study codes can be included in or excluded from the rule for each

particular field of study type. When a field of study type is selected, a field of study code

must exist. Only one inclusion or exclusion can exist per field of study type.

Include and exclude options can be modified at any time on SCARRES for any valid,

active, field of study type restriction rule when the header term is equal to the from term for

the rule. A rule with an existing field of study type allows you to add a new, unique, field of

study type rule. Otherwise, the Maintenance button must be used to end or copy the rule.

Once a field of study rule has been saved, the field of study type cannot be changed.

Example 1:

Valid Rule: One include/exclude rule per field of study type allowed.

Example 2:

Valid Rule: One include/exclude rule per field of study type allowed.

Include/Exclude Field of Study Type Field of Study Code

Include MINOR MATH

SPAN

CHEM

Exclude CONCENTRATION ENGL

Include CERTIFICATE YOGA

Include/Exclude Field of Study Type Field of Study Code

Include MINOR MATH

ENGL

268

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

Example 3:

Invalid Rule: Multiple include/exclude rules per field of study type not allowed.

Example 4:

Valid Rule: One include/exclude rule when All Field of Study Types is checked

allowed.

Example 5:

Invalid Rule: Only one rule can exist when All Field of Study Types is checked. The

Type field rule (

MAJOR) cannot be created at the same time. (The Type field is not

available for data entry when the All Field of Study Types field is checked.)

Include/Exclude Field of Study Type Field of Study Code

Include MAJOR MATH

Exclude MAJOR ENGL

Include/Exclude Field of Study Type Field of Study Code

Include All Field of Study Types

checked (set to

MATH

ENGL

SPAN

Include/Exclude Field of Study Type Field of Study Code

Exclude All Field of Study Types

checked (set to

MATH

ENGL

SPAN

Include/Exclude Field of Study Type Field of Study Code

Include All Field of Study Types

checked (set to Y)

MATH

ENGL

SPAN

Exclude MAJOR BUSI

269

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

Sample Rules for Field of Study Codes and Types

Here are some rules for how field of study codes and field of study types can be used with

restriction rules.

• When the (Field of Study) Type field is null and the All Field of Study Types checkbox

is checked, all field of study types (

MAJOR, MINOR, CONCENTRATION, and so on) are

considered for the entered field of study codes.

• When the (Field of Study) Type field is not-null, the All Field of Study Types checkbox

cannot be checked, and the specific field of study type entered in the Type field will be

considered for the field of study codes that are entered.

• When the All Field of Study Types checkbox is unchecked, the (Field of Study) Type

field is null, and the (Field of Study) Code field is null, no field of study restriction rule

exists.

• Only a single field of study rule can exist when the All Field of Study Types checkbox

is checked. However, multiple field of study codes can be entered.

• Multiple, active field of study type rules can be created (MAJOR, MINOR,

CONCENTRATION), as long as each field of study type that is entered is unique.

The Field of Study severity flag on SOATERM is used with registration error checking.

Although any number of field of study type restrictions can exist on a section restriction

rule (

MAJOR, MINOR, CONCENTRATION, and so on), there is only one registration

override flag associated with field of study. This means that when one field of study

restriction is overridden during registration processing, no further registration error

checking will be performed on any remaining fields of study.

Example:

On SSARRES, CRN 10012 has multiple field of study restrictions for MINOR,

CONCENTRATION, AND CERTIFICATE.

On SOATERM the Field of Study error checking is set to

FATAL.

On SFAREGS, a student registers for the CRN and does not meet any of the multiple

field of study restrictions. The first restriction that is encountered appears as a fatal

error.

If the operator overrides the

CONCENTRATION error, no further error checking is

performed for field of study restrictions on this course for this student.

Ending Field of Study Type Rules

Each field of study restriction rule must be ended independently on SCARRES. If multiple

rules exists and the Maintenance button is used to end a restriction, only the field of study

type in context is ended.

10112 ART 311 Field of Study Restriction

CONCENTRATION

.000 400.000 RE UG

270

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

Example:

Field of study type rules exist for CONCENTRATION, MAJOR, and MINOR. Only the

MAJOR rule is to be ended. Scroll through (Field of Study) Type rules until MAJOR is

displayed, and use the Maintenance button to end the restriction. Only the

MAJOR

restriction is ended. The

CONCENTRATION and MINOR restrictions remain active.

If only one rule exists, whether it is a field of study type (such as

MAJOR) or all field of

study types (per the All Field of Study Types checkbox), that rule can be ended as

well by using the Maintenance button.

Building Schedule Restrictions on Courses

After you have added a course to the system, you can use the Catalog Schedule

Restrictions Form (SCASRES) to build restrictions on when sections can be created for a

course. You may restrict courses that are used on the Schedule Form (SSASECT) by

including or excluding courses for specific terms or campuses.

The term restriction control is used to enter and maintain the restriction indicator

associated with the term restrictions for a course. The only values that can be selected in

the Include Exclude radio group are

Include for include restrictions and Exclude for

exclude restrictions. An inclusion restriction means a course may be offered only for the

terms displayed in the Term Restriction section of the form. An exclusion restriction

prohibits the offering of a course for the specified terms.

The campus restriction control is used to enter and maintain the restriction indicator

associated with the campus restrictions for a course. The only values that can be entered

in the Include Exclude radio group are

Include for include restrictions and Exclude

for exclude restrictions. An inclusion restriction means a course may be offered only for

the campuses displayed in the Campus Restriction section of the form. An exclusion

restriction prohibits the offering of a course for the specified campuses.

Mutually Exclusive Courses

Institutions can track courses that are similar to other courses in content but are not

considered to be equivalent courses. These courses can be defined in Banner at the

catalog level as mutually exclusive courses. Students who have taken courses in this

category can be prevented from registering for other associated courses. This functionality

builds on existing equivalent course processing. It is similar to repeat processing but does

not use repeat hours or repeat limit error checking. Mutual exclusion error checking is

used instead. This processing is used in Banner Student baseline, Banner Student Self-

Service, and Voice Response.

Implementation Steps

Use the following steps to set up mutually exclusive courses and track them through

registration error checking and override processing.

271

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

1. Set up registration error checking severity for mutually exclusive courses on the Term

Control Form (SOATERM).

2. Define mutually exclusive courses on the Mutual Course Exclusion Form

(SCAMEXC).

3. Set up custom error messages on the Registration Error Messages Form (SFARMSG)

if you wish, or use the delivered default error message for mutually exclusive courses.

4. Set up a registration permit-override code for mutually exclusive courses on the

Registration Permit-Override Validation Form (STVROVR). This is optional.

5. Set up registration permit-override rules on the Registration Permit-Override Control

Form (SFAROVR) where the rules include mutually exclusive courses. This is

optional.

6. Perform individual registration processing in Banner Student baseline on the Student

Course Registration Form (SFAREGS), in Banner Student Self-Service, and/or in

Banner Voice Response, and review any mutual exclusion errors.

7. Perform mass registration processing in baseline on the Registration Mass Entry

Form (SFAMREG), and review any mutual exclusion errors.

8. Define additional mutually exclusive courses as needed on the Mutual Course

Exclusion Form (SCAMEXC) after registration has occurred.

9. Run the Registration Admin Messages Report (SFRRGAM) to identify any affected

students who have already registered for those courses before they were defined as

mutual exclusions.

Set up Registration Error Checking for Mutually Exclusive Courses

Registration error checking can be set up for mutually exclusive courses on the Term

Control Form (SOATERM). Use the Mutual Exclusion radio group in the Student Options

in the Registration Error Checking window. This can be set to

Fatal to prevent

registration or

No Check to not have error checking occur.

When a mutually exclusive course exists, registration processing performs validation for

all sections of the course against the catalog record and the student’s academic history,

transfer coursework, and in-progress courses. If no mutual exclusions exist in the

student’s record, registration is allowed. If a mutual exclusion exists, an error message is

displayed (when error checking is set to

Fatal), and registration is not allowed.

• When academic history and transfer coursework are evaluated, and a mutually

exclusive course is found, an error is generated if the student attained the minimum

grade.

• When in-progress courses are evaluated, and a mutually exclusive course is found, an

error is generated. (A course is considered to be “in-progress” until it is graded, at which

time the grade is evaluated.)

When mutual exclusions are defined on SCAMEXC after registration has begun, the

SFRRGAM report should be run to identify students who are affected by the changes. If

these students then make changes to their schedules, they will receive mutual exclusion

errors on any existing registration records that are part of the newly defined mutual

exclusion groups.

272

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

Note: Mutual exclusion error checking takes place independently of

repeat hours checking and repeat limit error checking. It is controlled

solely by the mutual exclusion error checking set up on SOATERM.

Define Mutually Exclusive Courses

Existing courses can be associated with similar courses by defining them as mutually

exclusive at the catalog level. Mutually exclusive courses are treated as reciprocal in

nature, the same way equivalent courses are. Once a course has been defined as a

mutual exclusion, it cannot also be defined as an equivalent. Registration error checking

validates the mutually exclusive courses when a student registers for those courses.

Mutually exclusive courses carry the minimum grade by level. A mutually exclusive course

cannot be taken if the minimum grade has already been achieved for any course in the

group.

The Mutual Course Exclusion Form (SCAMEXC) is used to define courses as mutually

exclusive. These course definitions are stored in the Mutually Exclusive Course

Definitions Rule Table (SCRMEXC). You can enter the subject, course, and effective term

in the Key Block, and then set up the course that is mutually exclusive to that course in the

Mutually Exclusive Course Definitions block. Multiple courses can be defined as mutual

exclusions. You can also modify an existing mutually excluded course, or you can delete a

mutually excluded course. The levels for the grade and the passing grade, which come

from the Grade Code Maintenance Form (SHAGRDE), are also entered in this block. If the

level is not valid for the course, a warning is displayed, but you can still enter the record.

Rules are created for an effective term in the Key Block and can be copied and ended for

a term range in the Mutuality Exclusive Course Definitions Block. The from and to term

information defaults in for the course from the Key Block. Use the Maintenance button to

create a new effective term and to copy and end the from and to term information for the

course. Remember that the end term is included in the term range. For example, if a

course is defined as a mutual exclusion from start term 200820 to end term 200920, term

200920 is included in the mutual exclusion definition time period. If you do not want to

include term 200920, use the previous term as the end term for the mutual exclusion

definition.

You do not need to set up reciprocal definitions for courses. When two courses are

associated and one is mutually exclusive to the other, registration processing will

recognize that the relationship exists for both courses. For example, ENGL 1005 is

defined as mutually exclusive to LIT 1007 on SCAMEXC. If a student has completed

ENGL 1005, that student is not permitted to register for LIT 1007. The reverse is also true.

If a student has completed LIT 1007, that student is not permitted to register for ENGL

1005.

Courses can be defined as mutually exclusive for the effective term, subject, course

number, level from SHAGRDE for the grade to be used, passing grade, and start and end

terms. A check is performed on the level entered to make sure it is valid for the course as

defined on SCACRSE. The passing grade is inclusive and is the lowest grade a student

can have that restricts registration for a mutually exclusive course. For example, LIT 1007

and ENGL 1005 are mutually exclusive. The passing grade for the mutually exclusive

course is “D”. A student who receives a “D” for ENGL 1005 would not be allowed to

allowed to register for LIT 1007.

273

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

When a student tries to register for a course that has associated mutually exclusive

courses, the student’s academic history record and transfer coursework are checked to

see if he/she has successfully completed any of the courses defined on SCAMEXC,

based on the lowest grade allowed. In-progress courses are also checked for compliance

with the courses defined on SCAMEXC. (A course is considered to be in-progress until

grades are entered, whether or not those grades have been rolled to history.) If any

courses are found that are defined as mutual exclusions, the registration for that course

will fail, and an error will be displayed.

A course grouping can be defined as either equivalent courses or mutually exclusive

courses. The grouping cannot be defined as both. Edit checking occurs on SCAMEXC to

ensure that courses being entered as mutual exclusions do not already exist as

equivalencies. Edit checking occurs on SCADETL to ensure that courses being defined as

equivalencies do not already exist as mutual exclusions.

Note: Courses cannot be defined as mutual exclusions at the CRN level.

They are defined at the catalog level. Registration error checking

validates the catalog record. Therefore, when a course is defined as a

mutual exclusion, all sections of the course carry that definition. When a

course is associated with a mutually excluded course, all sections of the

course carry that association.

Course Detail Error Checking

The Course Information Detail Form (SCADETL) performs an edit check that prevents a

user from defining an equivalent course if the same course is already defined as a mutual

exclusion. When a conflicting entry is found, a mutual exclusions error message, *Error*

Mutual Exclusions exist for this course. Courses may not be mutually exclusive and

equivalent, is displayed. The error appears when the user attempts to navigate out of the

row (such as going to an empty row to create a new record) or when the user attempts to

save the record.

When a course is defined as an equivalent or a mutual exclusion, that qualification is in

effect for all terms within the effective term range and for all terms for which the start and

end terms are inclusive. When an error occurs, the user should check for overlapping

equivalencies or courses defined as mutual exclusions for the effective terms and the start

and end term ranges.

Set up Registration Error Messages for Mutually Exclusive Courses

If a student attempts to register for a mutually exclusive course when he/she has already

taken the associated course, a registration error message is displayed. The default error

message that is delivered for the Registration Error Message Rules Table (SFRRMSG)

and displayed on the Registration Error Messages Form (SFARMSG) is Mutual Exclusion

with %1% %2%, where %1% represents the subject code, and %2% represents the

course number. This error message can be customized on SFARMSG by modifying the

MEXC error message row. The mutual exclusion error message is displayed in the

Message field on the Student Course Registration Audit Form (SFASTCA).

274

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

Use Registration Error Overrides with Mutually Exclusive Courses

Use the Mutual Exclusion checkbox on the Registration Permit-Override Control Form

(SFAROVR) to designate that mutual exclusion errors can be overridden for a registration

permit-override rule. You can create a standalone override code for mutual exclusion

errors on the Registration Permit-Override Validation Form (STVROVR) if you wish. This

code can then be used to set up a specific mutual exclusion permit-override rule on

SFAROVR. Or, you can use existing override codes from STVROVR to set up your

override rules on SFAROVR and include mutual exclusions in those rules as needed.

Use Registration Processing with Mutually Exclusive Courses

When registration is performed on the Student Course Registration Form (SFAREGS),

error checking for the term is determined by the severity level set on SOATERM. When a

student registers for a mutually exclusive course and has already taken the associated

course, an error is displayed from SFARMSG. When the error checking is set to Fatal, the

record must be deleted or overridden in order to continue with registration. When

registration is performed in Banner Student Self-Service, and the same scenario occurs,

registration is not allowed, unless an override has been entered through Banner Faculty

and Advisor Self-Service or Student baseline.

Mutual exclusion error checking looks for equivalent courses in the student’s academic

history, transfer coursework, and in-progress coursework. When a completed equivalent

course is found and a mutually exclusive course exists, the student cannot register for the

mutually exclusive course. For example, if a student completed ENGL 1004 with a passing

grade, and ENGL 1004 is defined as an equivalent to ENGL 1005, and ENGL 1005 is

defined as mutually exclusive with LIT 1007, that student is prevented from registering for

LIT 1007.

Use Mass Registration Processing with Mutually Exclusive Courses

When mass registration is performed using the Registration Mass Entry Form

(SFAMREG), mutual exclusion errors will be displayed in the Message field in the Results

window. The message that is displayed comes from SFARMSG. The message displayed

can be the default message that is delivered or a customized message of your choice.

The Mutual Exclusion radio group in the Student Options in the Error Checking window

can be set to

Fatal or No Check for mass registration error checking.

View Mutually Exclusive Courses in Self-Service

When students view courses through the catalog in Banner Student Self-Service, the

detailed course and class section information indicates when courses are defined as

mutually exclusive on SCAMEXC.

Mutual exclusion registration error checking is performed in Self-Service. The default error

message from SFARMSG is displayed during registration, but this error message can be

customized at your institution.

275

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

Use Voice Response Registration

Voice Response processing recognizes mutual exclusion errors during telephone

registration as part of registration error checking.

Identify Students Affected by Courses Defined after Registration

The Registration Admin Messages Report (SFRRGAM) can be used to identify students

who are affected when courses are defined as mutual exclusions during registration or

after registration has occurred. If these students make changes to their schedules, they

will receive mutual exclusion errors on any existing registration records that are part of the

newly defined mutual exclusion groups. SFRRGAM displays the mutual exclusion errors

from the SFRRMSG table on the output.

Repeat/Equivalent Course Rules

Repeat/Equivalent Course processing is controlled by the (Repeat) Limit and the

(Repeat) Maximum Hours fields on the Basic Course Information Form (SCACRSE). You

can specify that a course may be repeated for only a specified maximum number of hours,

as well as the existing repeat limit. This is done using the (Repeat) Maximum Hours and

(Repeat) Limit fields on SCACRSE. These fields are invoked in the Registration module

according to the status of the registration error flags on the Term Control Form

(SOATERM) and are calculated in Academic History according to the Repeat/Equivalent

Course Rules Form (SHARPTR).

Note: The Repeat Status (Code) field on SCACRSE does not control

any processing. It is informational only.

Example 1:

Using both Repeat Limits and Repeat Maximum Hours in Repeat processing works like

this:

The course may be taken up to four times for an unlimited number of credits.

Example 2:

Repeat Limit 3

Repeat Maximum Hours Null

Repeat Limit Null

Repeat Maximum Hours 12

276

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

The course may be taken up to as many times as desired, as long as the credit hours do

not exceed 12.

Example 3:

Using a three credit hour course, if the course is taken four times, as allowed by the

Repeat Limit, this would exceed the Repeat Maximum Hours of 10 (three credits multiplied

by four occurrences equals twelve), so the fourth occurrence would not be allowed.

Please see the Repeat/Equivalent Course Rules section in the “Academic History

Procedures” for a detailed explanation and more examples of Repeat processing.

Tuition Fee Waivers

To indicate that a course should not have the customary tuition and fee charges, check the

Tuition Waiver box on the Basic Course Information Form (SCACRSE). This indicates to

the system that this course is exempt from tuition and fees which are overrideable when

the Override box is checked on the Registration Fees Process Control Form (SFARGFE).

If this field is checked, all rules on SFARGFE which are overrideable will be ignored during

fee assessment. If this field is not checked, all rules on SFARGFE apply.

If it is determined by your institution that a fee other than the customary tuition and fees

should be charged for this course, check the Tuition Waiver box and assign a fee code on

the Course Detail Information Form (SCADETL). You must enter an amount when

assigning a fee code. A flat fee or a per credit hour fee may be charged. This

determination must be made by your institution when entering the fee code.

This information will default to each of the sections created for this course. This

information may be modified on section-by-section basis.

Note: Once a waiver has been created for a section and enrollment has

begun, the Tuition Waiver box should not be changed, so that fees are

assessed correctly.

Banner Course Data Extract Capabilities

Data extract capabilities allow flexibility for processing. A utility program is used to extract

course information from the Banner database. Extracted course data are written to an

XML file and conform to the IMS Enterprise Information Model 1.01.

The IMS Enterprise Information Model describes data structures that are used to provide

interoperability of Internet-based Instructional Management systems with other enterprise

systems used to support the operations of an organization. These structures provide the

basis for standardized data bindings that allow software developers and implementers to

Repeat Limit 3

Repeat Maximum Hours 10

277

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

create instructional management processes that interoperate across systems developed

independently by various software developers. In other words, use of the IMS model

facilitates third party interfaces.

Overview

This section describes the basic integration components of the software that enables

users to extract course data for presentation to third parties.

Course Data Extract Processing

Banner extract processing will extract your course data and provide it in an XML format

readable to third parties using IMS standards. The Course Catalog IMS Extract

(SCRRIMS) creates the IMS Properties object and the IMS Course Group Data Object.

Course Data

This section outlines the course-related data elements passed between Banner and the

partner systems.

Course Data Details

Item Banner Source IMS Data Element

Course Identifier

SCBCRSE_SUBJ_CODE

concatenated with

SCBCRSE_CRSE_NUMB

SOURCEDID.ID

Course Title

SCBCRSE_TITLE DESCRIPTION.SHORT

Full Course

Description

SCRTEXT_TEXT DESCRIPTION.FULL

Course Department

SCBCRSE_DEPT_CODE ORG.ORGUNIT

Course Active Indicator Set to 0 (Not Accepting

Enrollments). Cannot enroll in

Banner course; enrollment occurs

in Banner course section.

ENROLLCONTROL.ENROLL

Course Enrollment

Indicator

Set to 0 (Target system cannot

enroll).

ENROLLCONTROL.ENROLL

ALLOWED

Course Begin Date

STVTERM_START_DATE

Start date of the minimum

effective term.

TIMEFRAME.BEGIN

278

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

IMS Properties Object

The XML file created by the extract program contains an IMS Properties Object. This

object contains basic packaging and control data that the target system(s) use to

determine the source, timing, and type of event that generated the data package. This

basic information and control data facilitate the exchange of data between systems.

The IMS Course Group Data Object

The Course Catalog IMS Extract (SCRRIMS) also creates an IMS Course Group Data

Object. This object contains course code, course title, full course descriptions, course start

and end dates, and course delivery mode. The collection of these IMS Course Data

Objects is a reflection of your institution’s course catalog for the selected academic year.

SCRRIMS Program Parameters

When you run the Course Catalog IMS Extract (SCRRIMS), you are prompted to enter the

academic year for which course catalog information will be extracted. Valid values come

from the Academic Year Validation Form (STVACYR).

SCRRIMS Program Output Files

The Course Catalog IMS Extract (SCRRIMS) runs through job submission and creates up

to three separate files that are written to the standard job submission subdirectory. If job

submission results are written to a personal job submission directory, these results will

usually also be written there.

Course End Date

STVTERM_END_DATE

End date of the maximum

effective term.

TIMEFRAME.END

Academic Year

STVACYR_DESC TIMEFRAME.ADMINPERIOD

Source ID

GUBINST_NAME concatenated

with “Banner”TYPEVALUE of 1

(Instruction), 3 (Course)

SOURCEDID.SOURCE

Institution Name

GUBINST_NAME ORG.ORGNAM

Institution FICE Code

SHBCGPA_INST_FICE ORG.ORGID

Delivery Mode

STVSCHD_DESC EXTENSION DELIVERY

MODE

Data Source

GUBINST_NAME concatenated

with “Banner”

DATASOURCE

Item Banner Source IMS Data Element

279

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

The three files created by SCRRIMS are:

America’s Learning Exchange with Banner

America's Learning Exchange (ALX) no longer has an active website (www.alx.org).

The United States Department of Labor has discontinued support for uploading course

data to the ALX website. Institutions may continue to use the SCRIMMS process to extract

course data to send to any third party that accepts course information in XML format.

Catalog Extract and Load Processing

This processing allows a receiving institution to automatically extract catalog records from

a sending institution and then load those records into their own database. This aids in the

creation and setup of catalog records from multiple transfer institutions within the receiving

institution's database. This functionality is a base for self-service transfer credit modeling,

which can assist receiving institutions with processing prospective transfer students and

reducing paper work and coordination by admissions and advising staffs.

Catalog extract and load processing provides the ability to:

• Exchange the necessary course catalog data for transfer articulation purposes.

• Extract course catalog data into a file that can be transmitted to an external institution.

• Import external catalog data into the appropriate transfer articulation data structures.

• Update existing but previously imported transfer articulation data.

• Store course descriptions and course attributes for transfer courses.

• Copy transfer course data from one institution to another.

File Description

scrrims_<oneup>.log

This is a standard job submission log report. If the

process is successful, the log report contains a success

completion message.

If the process fails, the log may include error messages

that will assist in diagnosing problems.

scrrims_<oneup>.lis

This is the standard listing report, which includes the

standard report control page. This page lists the current

version number of the process and the parameters

used to run the process.

scrrims_<oneup>.xml

This is the XML file that will be imported into a partner’s

database.

280

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

Exchanging Data for Transfer Articulation

Course catalog data can be exchanged for use with transfer articulation. Maintaining

transfer course data represents a large portion of the effort required for transfer

articulation, because institutional equivalents of transfer courses cannot be defined until

the transfer course data exists within the receiving school's database. This streamlined

exchange using the extract and import of catalog data between institutions significantly

reduces the amount of manual data entry.

Extracting Data for File Transmission

Course catalog data can be extracted into a file that can be transmitted to an external

institution. Course catalog data elements have been identified that need to be exchanged

between institutions for transfer articulation purposes. These data elements can be

extracted from the sending institution's database and written to a file that can be sent to

and retrieved by the receiving institution.

Note: This functionality takes into account the work being done by PESC

on an XML schema for course catalog data transmissions. When fields in

the Postsecondary Electronic Standards Council (PESC) Course Catalog

XML schema contain enumeration lists, values not on those lists will not

be included in the extract.

The Course Catalog Data Extract Process (SCRCATE) produces a course catalog data

extract file with specified results. The Course Catalog package (

bwckctlg.sql) in

Student Self-Service contains a link that produces query results in an XML format that can

be saved to a user’s desktop.

Different types of extract files can be created by SCRCATE:

• Extract file of course catalog data that includes all courses from a specific level and

catalog year and can be displayed on an unsecured page of the institution's website,

sent to a third party (such as another institution or a Web-based repository of catalog

data), or stored on a server to be transmitted upon request.

• Extract file of course catalog data that is limited to the courses from a specific college,

department, or subject for administrative and/or departmental review.

• Extract file of course catalog data that is limited to those courses that are returned by the

criteria entered using the unsecured Search for Courses Web page.

Importing External Data for Transfer Articulation

External catalog data can be imported into the appropriate transfer articulation data

structures. The Transfer Catalog Data Import Process (SHRTCIM) imports course catalog

data from other institutions into Banner. Extract files received from other institutions can

be imported into the tables behind the Transfer Institution Catalog Entry Form (SHATATC).

Data does not need to be entered manually.

Here are some different examples of how the batch import process could be used in

Update Mode:

281

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

• A new institution is being set up for transfer articulation processing. All records in a

course catalog extract file are new to the system. (No transfer course records exist for

the institution.) SHRTCIM is run in Update Mode to import all records into the system.

• A new course catalog extract file is obtained from an institution from which the receiving

school has not had any transfer applicants in several years. All existing records in the

system are at least five years old. SHRTCIM is run in Update Mode to import all records

from the extract file, even though many already exist with an earlier effective term.

Updating Existing Imported Data

Existing, previously imported transfer articulation data can be updated. When SHRTCIM is

run in Audit Mode, a report is generated that shows which incoming courses are

completely new, which are exact matches of existing records, and which are partial

matches of existing records. You can choose to protect certain existing records from being

updated by the import process, because they match data that exists in the extract file

being imported.

Here are examples of how SHRTCIM could be run multiple times in Audit Mode:

• One or more incoming records are found to be duplicates of existing records based

upon several elements including effective term, subject, course number, and level. The

user needs to be able to protect those courses from being updated when the import

process is run again in Update Mode.

• Several incoming records are found to be similar to existing records based upon subject

and course number only. Some elements (such as effective term, level or credit hour

range values) of the existing records differ from those of the incoming record. The user

needs to be able to decide whether to include or exclude such records when the process

is run again in Update Mode.

Storing Course Details, Descriptions, and Attributes

Course details, descriptions, and attributes for transfer courses can be stored on the

Transfer Institution Catalog Entry Form (SHATATC) and the Transfer Course Articulation

Form (SHATATR) to assist with the review of transfer courses and assignment of

institutional equivalents. Until PESC delivers the course catalog schema, only 2000

characters of the course description will be captured and transmitted.

• On SHATATC, course detail and description information can be maintained in the

Transferring Course Block. Course attribute information can be maintained in the

Course Attributes block. This data can be collected to help in the determination of which

courses are institutional equivalents. The Protect from Import field in the Course

Details section is used to protect selected records from being updated by the Transfer

Catalog Data Import Process (SHRTCIM).

• On SHATATR, course detail and description information can be maintained in the

Transferring Course Block. Course attribute information can be maintained in the

Attributes section. This data can be collected to help in the determination of which

courses are institutional equivalents. The Protect from Import field in the Details

section is used to protect selected records from being updated by the Transfer Catalog

Data Import Process (SHRTCIM).

282

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

Course attributes can be crosswalked on SOAXREF using the value of STVATTR on

STVXLBL and can then be used in the extract export file.

Copying Data to Another Institution

Transfer course data can be copied from one institution to another. Copy functionality can

be used when separate institution codes are being set up for different campuses of the

same school. Use the Transfer Institution Catalog Entry Form (SHATATC) and the

Transfer Course Articulation Form (SHATATR) to copy transfer course data from a default

institution code to another institution code for a specific program.

Using the Default Institution and Copy Options

You can use the Edit function from the Program field on SHATATC and SHATATR to

display a list of unique program codes for which transfer courses have been defined for

the institution code entered in the Key Block. (The Programs Defined for Institution item in

the Option List can also be used.)

You can enter a value in the Default Institution field on SHATATC and SHATATR and

perform a Next Block to copy all existing transfer course records associated with the

Default Institution value into the tables for the STVSBGI code entered in the Institution

field, subject to certain limitations. The limitations are that in order for a transfer course

record to be copied, its level code must be valid according to the records in the Transfer

Levels block of the Transfer Articulation Institution Form (SOABGTA).

Since it cannot be assumed that effective terms for different transfer level codes defined in

the Transfer Level block of SOABGTA are the same from institution to institution, transfer

level effective terms play an important role in determining the effective term of transfer

courses when they are defaulted from one institution to another. Please see the example

below for more details.

Institution A and Institution B have the following transfer levels defined on SOABGTA with

the corresponding effective terms:

Institution A has several courses defined at each transfer level shown above. All of the CE

level courses have an effective term of 199010, all of the GR courses have an effective

term of 199510, and all of the UG courses have an effective term of 200010. In other

words, each transfer course's effective term matches the effective term of its level as

defined on SOABGTA.

Effective Term Codes Effective Term Codes

Transfer Level Codes Institution A Institution B

CE 199010 N/A

GR 199510 199310

UG 200010 200510

283

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

When a user defaults the courses from Institution A to Institution B, the expected results

are:

• None of the CE level courses are copied, because that level is not valid for Institution B.

• All of the GR level courses are copied with an effective term of 199510, because that

was the earliest (known) effective term for those courses. The system cannot assume

the courses were effective in 199310.

• All of the UG level courses are copied with an effective term of 200510, because that is

the earliest effective term for UG courses at Institution B.

If values are entered in both the Program and Default Institution fields before a Next

Block function is performed, this indicates the intent to copy only those course records

from the default institution that have been defined for that program. In this case, a warning

message is displayed that only those courses defined for that program will be copied, and

the Default Institution function cannot be used again. You have the option to cancel the

copy process, which will roll back all of the changes and remove the value from the

Program field. You also have the option to continue, in which case only those records

defined for the program will be copied.

If records exist with a value defined in the Minimum Grade field that has not been defined

in SHATGRD for the new institution, the Invalid Grade code exists warning message will

be displayed. You have the option to cancel the copy process, which will roll back all of the

changes and allow you to define the missing grade codes in SHATGRD. You also have the

option to continue, in which case the records will be copied, but with a null value in the

Minimum Grade field.

If records exist in the Comments block and/or Course Attributes block for the transfer

courses being defaulted from one institution to another, you are prompted once to decide

if the system should copy those records as well.

Course Catalog Data Extract Process (SCRCATE)

This Java process is used to extract course catalog data and create an XML output file of

that data. An institution can post the output file on an unsecured page of its website where

people seeking the data can download it to their workstations. Similarly, the output file can

be sent to a third-party organization that hosts a Web-based repository of course catalog

data.

The process uses the same search parameters that are available on the Search for

Courses page in Banner Student Self-Service, as well as additional parameters. These

additional parameters allow users to determine if the output file should include course

description data and/or course attributes. This process calls the

SP_CATALOG_EXPORT

process API, which contains all of the logic required to return the correct records and data

fields.

The XML output file for the extract process includes the fields listed in the table below. The

HTML output file for the extract contains a subset of those fields such as subject, course

number, and course short title. Additional fields can be included in the HTML file by

modifying the stylesheet template. The stylesheet can be configured at your institution to

display the fields you choose. To modify the stylesheet, do the following:

284

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

1. Extract the stylesheet using the command: jar -xvf scrcate.jar

bwckctlg.xsl

2. Modify the stylesheet to display the selected fields in the HTML file.

3. Upload the modified stylesheet using the command:

jar -uvf scrcate.jar

bwckctlg.xs

Until a standard schema for the XML file has been adopted by the Postsecondary

Electronic Standards Council (PESC), the following fields will comprise the extract file.

XML Field Table Column Additional Information

Header Record Information

<Organization> Complex elements made up

of the items below

<FICE>

SHBCGPA_INST_FICE

Defined on SHACTRL

GUBINST_NAME

Defined on GUAINST

<Contacts> Complex element made up

of the Address and Phone

complex elements

<Address> Complex element made up

of the items below

GUBINST_STREET_LINE1

Defined on GUAINST

GUBINST_STREET_LINE2

Defined on GUAINST

GUBINST_STREET_LINE3

Defined on GUAINST

<City>

GUBINST_CITY

Defined on GUAINST

GUBINST_STAT_CODE

Defined on GUAINST

GUBINST_ZIP

Defined on GUAINST

GUBINST_NATN_CODE

Defined on GUAINST

<Phone> Complex element made up

of the items below

GUBINST_PHONE_AREA

Defined on GUAINST

GUBINST_PHONE

Defined on GUAINST

GUBINST_PHONE_EXT

Defined on GUAINST

Course Detail Record Information

SCBCRSE_SUBJ_CODE

Defined on SCACRSE

SCBCRSE_CRSE_NUMB

Defined on SCACRSE

285

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

SCBCRSE_TITLE

Defined on SCACRSE

SCBCRSE_TITLE

Defined on SCACRSE

Once the PESC schema for

course catalog data is

finalized, the source for this

field will most likely change

to the

SCRSYLN_LONG_COURSE

_TITLE

defined on

SCASYLB.

SCBDESC_TEXT_

NARRATIVE

Defined on SCADETL

STVTERM_START_DATE

The effective date for course

is derived from the start date

defined for the term code

that is assigned as the

effective term for the course.

<CourseCreditBasis> Hardcoded to "Regular" This value needed to be set

to an enumerated value

established for the PESC

college transcript schema

which uses the same field.

Given that "Regular" was

the value hardcoded into the

XML transcript export

process, it was also

selected for this process.

This value may be re-

evaluated once the PESC

course catalog schema is

adopted as a standard.

STVTERM_TRMT_CODE or

SHBCGPA_TRMT_CODE

The process checks the

Term Type value on

STVTERM, if it is not

defined, it then checks the

Term Type value on

SHACTRL to retrieve this

value.

SCBCRSE_CREDIT_HR_

LOW

Defined on SCACRSE

SCBCRSE_CREDIT_HR_

HIGH

Defined on SCACRSE

<CourseLevel> Complex element made up

of the items below

XML Field Table Column Additional Information

286

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

Transfer Catalog Data Import Process (SHRTCIM)

This Java process is used to import an XML extract file of course catalog data into a

Banner database. After entering the input file name and other default values, the user can

choose between running the process in Audit Mode or Update Mode. In Audit Mode, the

process compares the records in the incoming data file with transfer course records that

already exist in the system. Records in the incoming data file that are found to match

existing records will be identified as partial or exact matches.

When run in Audit Mode, the process calls the

SB_TRANSFER_CRSE API for matching

logic.

• If an incoming transfer course does not match any existing transfer courses based on

the institution ID plus the subject plus the course number plus the transfer level, then it

will be identified as a new record.

• If an incoming transfer course matches an existing transfer course based on institution

ID, plus the program, plus the transfer level, plus the subject, plus the course number,

plus the effective term, plus the group, then it will be identified as an exact match (even

though values in the Title, Credit Hours Low, Credit Hours High, Minimum Grade,

Catalog Year, and Course Description fields may differ).

Existing transfer courses that have been entered with a value in the Program and/or

Group fields will not match incoming transfer course records. As such, many incoming

transfer course records that do match existing records based upon institution ID, plus

transfer level, plus the subject, plus the course number, plus the effective term, but not

on program or group, will fall into the next category.

• If an incoming transfer course does not satisfy the criteria to be identified as new or an

exact match, then it will be flagged as a partial match.

After the input file has been processed in Audit Mode, users can review those courses

identified as exact matches to see if any data exists in the Title, Credit Hours Low, Credit

Hours High, and/or Course Description fields that should be added to the system. If not,

SCRLEVL_LEVL_CODE

Defined on SCACRSE

STVLEVL_DESC

Institutional course level

codes must be cross-

referenced on SOAXREF to

one of the enumerated

values defined by PESC.

<Attribute> Complex element made up

of the items below

SCRATTR_ATTR_CODE

Defined on SCADETL

STVATTR_DESC

To be included in the catalog

extract, course attributes

must be cross-referenced

on SOAXREF.

XML Field Table Column Additional Information

287

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

you can check the Protect from Import field for the existing transfer courses in the

Transfer Institution Catalog Entry form (SHATATC) or the Transfer Course Articulation

form (SHATATR). Those courses will not be updated when the input file is processed

again in Update Mode.

Similarly, after the input file has been processed in Audit Mode, users can review those

courses identified as partial matches to see if any data exists in the Title, Credit Hours

Low, Credit Hours High, and/ or Course Description fields that should not be added to the

system. If so, the Protect from Import field can be checked for those records, and those

courses will not be updated when the input file is processed again in Update Mode.

When the process is run in Update Mode, new records from the input file are imported into

the SHBTATC and SHRTCAT tables. Records identified as exact matches will update the

existing records, unless the Protect from Import field is checked. Records identified as

partial matches will update existing records if the matched fields are the Institution ID,

Effective Term, Transfer Level, Subject, and Course Number, unless the Protect from

Import field is checked. Otherwise, the partial matches will be loaded as new courses.

Banner Table Table Column Additional Information

SHBTATC Transfer Course Information

SBGI_CODE

Institution ID parameter

PROGRAM

Defaults to “......”

TLVL_CODE

Comes from <CourseLevelCode>

Value must be defined on STVTLVL and

be valid for the institution ID on

SOABGTA.

SUBJ_CODE_TRNS

Comes from

Value is not validated by Banner.

CRSE_NUMB_TRNS

Comes from <CourseNumber>

TERM_CODE_EFF_

TRNS

Effective Term parameter

ACTIVITY_DATE

Defaults to system date

TRNS_TITLE

Comes from <CourseShortTitle>

TRNS_LOW_HRS

Comes from

TRNS_HIGH_HRS

Comes from

TRNS_REVIEW_IND

Defaults to N

TAST_CODE

Status Code parameter

TRNS_CATALOG

Catalog Year parameter

288

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

TGRD_CODE_MIN

Minimum Grade parameter

GROUP

Defaults to NULL

GROUP_PRIMARY_

IND

Defaults to NULL

CRSE_DESC

Comes from <CourseDescription>

USERID

Defaults to user ID of person running the

process

DATA_ORIGIN

Defaults to either SHATATC, SHATATR, or

SHRTCIM

PROTECT_IND

Defaults to N

SHRTCAT Transfer Course Attributes

SBGI_CODE

Institution ID parameter

PROGRAM

Defaults to “......”

TLVL_CODE

Comes from <CourseLevelCode>

Value must be defined on STVTLVL and

be valid for institution ID on SOABGTA.

SUBJ_CODE_TRNS

Comes from

Value is not validated by Banner.

CRSE_NUMB_TRNS

Comes from <CourseNumber>

TERM_CODE_EFF_

TRNS

Effective Term parameter

ATTR_CODE

Comes from <RAPCode>

Value is not validated by Banner.

ATTR_DESC

Comes from <RAPName>

USERID

Defaults to user ID of person running the

process

ACTIVITY_DATE

Defaults to system date

DATA_ORIGIN

Defaults to SHRTCIM

Banner Table Table Column Additional Information

289

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

Oracle Object Types

Oracle object types are used with this processing. The delivered scripts listed below

create the object types.

The intent of the Oracle Object Type is to represent the PESC Course Catalog Schema

once it has been officially delivered. The version delivered with Release 8.0 represents a

very small subset of what PESC may deliver in the future for their final implementation of

the Course Catalog Schema. This subset is listed below.

Script Result

soo_xfer_crse0.sql

Creates the Oracle Object Type (OOT)

so_transfer_course

soo_xfer_crse_nt.sql

Creates a table of so_transfer_course

soo_xfer_crse_levl0.sql

Creates the Oracle Object Type (OOT)

so_transfer_course_level

soo_xfer_crse_levl_nt.sql

Creates a table of so_transfer_course_level

soo_xfer_crse_atr0.sql

Creates the Oracle Object Type (OOT)

so_transfer_course_attr

soo_xfer_crse_atr_nt.sql

Creates a table of so_transfer_course_attr

Course Catalog Schema Description

COURSESUBJECTABBREVIATION VARCHAR2(10 CHAR)

COURSENUMBER VARCHAR2(15 CHAR)

COURSESUBNUMBER VARCHAR2(15 CHAR)

PREVIOUSCOURSEID VARCHAR2(30 CHAR)

COURSESHORTTITLE VARCHAR2(60 CHAR)

COURSELONGTITLE VARCHAR2(60 CHAR)

COURSEDESCRIPTION VARCHAR2(2000 CHAR)

COURSEHONORSCODE VARCHAR2(13 CHAR)

COURSEEFFECTIVEDATE VARCHAR2(6 CHAR)

COURSEEXPIRATIONDATE VARCHAR2(6 CHAR)

COURSECREDITBASIS VARCHAR2(30 CHAR)

COURSECREDITLEVEL VARCHAR2(30 CHAR)

COURSECREDITUNITS VARCHAR2(30 CHAR)

290

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

COURSECOLLEGECODE VARCHAR2(2 CHAR)

COURSECOLLEGEDESCRIPTION VARCHAR2(30 CHAR)

COURSEDIVSCODE VARCHAR2(4 CHAR)

COURSEDIVSDESCRIPTION VARCHAR2(30 CHAR)

COURSEDEPTCODE VARCHAR2(4 CHAR)

COURSEDEPTDESCRIPTION VARCHAR2(30 CHAR)

COURSECEUIND VARCHAR2(1 CHAR)

COURSECREDITHRIND VARCHAR2(2 CHAR)

COURSECREDITMINIMUMVALUE NUMBER(7,3)

COURSECREDITMAXIMUMVALUE NUMBER(7,3)

COURSELECHRIND VARCHAR2(2 CHAR)

COURSELECMINIMUMVALUE NUMBER(7,3)

COURSELECMAXIMUMVALUE NUMBER(7,3)

COURSELABHRIND VARCHAR2(2 CHAR)

COURSELABMINIMUMVALUE NUMBER(7,3)

COURSELABMAXIMUMVALUE NUMBER(7,3)

COURSEOTHHRIND VARCHAR2(2 CHAR)

COURSEOTHMINIMUMVALUE NUMBER(7,3)

COURSEOTHMAXIMUMVALUE NUMBER(7,3)

COURSEREPEATCODETYPE VARCHAR2(30 CHAR)

COURSELEVEL BANINST1.SO_TRANSFER_COURSE_

LEVL_NT

COURSEATTRIBUTE BANINST1.SO_TRANSFER_COURSE_

ATTR_NT

Course Catalog Schema Description

291

Banner Student User Guide | Course Catalog

Catalog Reports

The following reports are run through the Catalog module:

Please refer to the Banner Student Reports and Processes Handbook for report

descriptions, instructions, parameter definitions, and output samples.

Bulletin Report (SCRBULT)

Course Catalog IMS Extract (SCRRIMS)

Course Catalog Data Extract Process (SCRCATE)

292

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Class Schedule

This chapter discusses processing and procedure information for Class Schedule.

Class Schedule Procedures

Here are tasks you can perform in this module.

Create Term Controls

The first step in the schedule building process is to identify the characteristics of the term

in which classes are being scheduled. This is done via the Term Control Form

(SOATERM) where dates for each session within the term are established and where the

Course Reference Number starting number is established for the term.

The next step is to create any exclusion dates when classes are not being held. This is

done via the Schedule Exclusion Rules Form (SSAEXCL). A date established on this form

will be excluded from the number of meeting times for the section. Vacation days, in-

service dates, and breaks in the academic calendar should be maintained on this form.

The Part of Term field may be used to clearly define those days which are to be excluded

from the academic calendar by part of term and calendar year. New exclusion rules for

each part of term at the institution must be built by the user. This process may be

performed via the Default Part of Term window accessed from the Key Information. This

allows exclusion days to be copied from one part of term to another. A description may be

added for the excluded days, i.e., 01/18/1994 is a national holiday; 02/18/1994 is an in-

service day.

You also have the option to create academic calendar rules based on different calendar

types using the Schedule Academic Calendar Rules Form (SSAACRL).

Creating Instructors

Instructors must first be identified to the system using the General Person Identification

Form (SPAIDEN). Once this is completed, they are entered on the Faculty/Advisor

Information Form (SIAINST). Here, they may be identified as a faculty member, an

advisor, or as both. This process would be completed as an initial task; new hires and

terminations would be part of the maintenance process. Once a faculty member is

identified on the Faculty/Advisor Information Form (SIAINST) he/she may then be

assigned to class sections.

293

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Building Available Rooms

Buildings must first be defined on the Building Code Validation Form (STVBLDG) and the

Building Definition Form (SLABLDG). In order for classes to be scheduled into

classrooms, available rooms must first be identified on the Room Definition Form

(SLARDEF). This form is used to enter and maintain rooms and their characteristics

needed for querying their availability and attributes on the Available Classroom Query

Form (SLQMEET).

Creating Campus Security

If an institution wishes to restrict the class schedule by campus, then the Campus Security

User Profile Form (SOAPROF) should be used. Each user may be assigned to a particular

campus. Once this is done, the user is restricted from updating any class schedule

information not associated with his campus. This is an optional process which may be

omitted if class schedule campus security is not necessary.

A function also exists to restrict the access of the schedule and the class roster

information to a specific campus by user ID. When campus security is invoked, the user

whose access is restricted will only be able to view and modify the schedule and class list

information which is associated with their campus. These rules are established on the

Campus Security User Profile Form (SOAPROF). A user who is not maintained on this

form will have access to all schedule information regardless of campus. This campus

security function is used in the Schedule and Registration modules.

Create Future Term Schedule

The Term Roll Report (SSRROLL) will roll the class schedule forward from one specified

term to another specified term. This process has the option of also rolling meeting days,

times, and rooms, and block schedule codes and instructors. Instructors will not be rolled

if their associated meeting time information is not rolled. This process allows for the initial

creation of a specified schedule, then the roll forward will create the next specified

schedule at which time any necessary changes can be made to the new schedule. The

CRN Starting Sequence Number field on the Term Control Form (SOATERM) is updated

as each section is rolled. If the job is interrupted prior to completion, the counter will

remain in sync with the rolled sections.

The data in the Projected (Enrollment) field in the Enrollment Data window of the

Schedule Form (SSASECT) rolls to the Projected (Enrollment) field for the future term.

The actual enrollment from the term being rolled continues to roll to the Prior

(Enrollment) field in the Enrollment Data window for the future term.

294

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

The following represents an example of the fields being updated in the Term Roll Report

(SSRROLL).

The Term Roll Report (SSRROLL) uses section restriction rules when rolling data

elements from one term to another term. A number of parameters allow the roll of data

elements from the Catalog module to the Schedule module. The value of

C can be used to

roll data elements from the course to the section. When a specified parameter is set to

the data element is rolled from the Schedule module for the term in the From Term

parameter to the term in the To Term parameter. When a specified parameter is set to

the data element is rolled from the Catalog module by subject and course, as well as the

effective term that is less than or equal to the term in the Roll Term parameter.

The following parameters use the value of

C to roll data from Catalog:

• Roll Fees

• Roll Degree Attributes

• Roll Text

• Roll Class Restrictions

• Roll College Restrictions

• Roll Fld of Study Restrictions

• Roll Level Restrictions

• Roll Campus Restrictions

• Roll Test Restricts & Pre-reqs

• Roll CAPP Area or DW Pre-reqs

• Roll Degree Restrictions

• Roll Program Restrictions

• Roll Partition Codes

Actual Projected Prior

199301

10002 21 39 0

10003 11 20 0

- rolled to -

199502

10002 0 39 21

10003 0 20 11

295

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

• Roll Room Attributes

• Roll Section Syllabus

• Roll Department Restrictions

• Roll Student Attr Restrictions

• Roll Cohort Restrictions

Building/Changing Course Sections

After the catalog records are established on the Banner® Student System, course

sections are entered into the system for production of the Class Schedule (SSRSECT)

and student registration. Sections being offered for a term are built using the Schedule

Form (SSASECT). The capacity of the section, and meeting days, times, and rooms, and

instructors are assigned using this form.

The Schedule Detail Form (SSADETL) permits the entry of additional information about a

course section, including section corequisites, section fees and block codes. The user is

permitted to enter only sections where subject and course number have been specified in

the Catalog as corequisites for the course. The section corequisite must be a subject of

the course corequisite defined on the Course Detail Information Form (SCADETL).

Meeting Time/Room Assignments

After a course section has been entered in the database, the section may be scheduled

into a building and room for specific days and times. The Available Class Room Query

Form (SLQMEET), which is accessed from the Schedule Form (SSASECT), will aid in the

room scheduling process by finding and displaying available rooms for user days and

times specified and that meet specific requirements for capacity, building, and room type.

The Building/Room Schedule Form (SSAMATX), which is also accessed from SSASECT,

will display the course sections which are scheduled into the building and room based on

the user-selected query information.

Session Creation

Individual sessions for a course section may be defined on the Meeting Time window of

the Schedule Form (SSASECT). A session may be used to specify the different meeting

time combinations or different schedule types associated with a section. For example, a

geology course which has a lecture, a lab, and a field trip may want to create three

separate sessions within the course section to further define each of the meeting types.

Sessions would not be used to define sections where there are multiple labs to choose

from. The link identifiers should be used in these situations.

The Meeting Time (Code) field in the Meeting Time window and the Session Indicator

field in the Instructor window prevent instructors from being attached to non-existent

session identifiers and also prevent a non-existent session identifier from being entered in

the Instructor window.

296

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

If meeting times exist, you may not change the Part of Term field unless you first delete

the meeting information, then change the Part of Term field, and finally re-enter the

meeting information. This allows you to change Part of Term field without changing the

days on which the course is scheduled, and avoids possible room assignment for

inaccurate days.

Duplicate Section Creation

You may duplicate a section on the Schedule Form (SSASECT). When adding a new

section of a course, enter the term in the Term field for which you would like to add a

section and enter

ADD in the CRN field. Use Next Item to open the Default Section

Information window. This will default the term code from the Term field into the Default

Term field. This default term code reflects the term from which you would like to duplicate

a section. The default term can be changed. Perform a List function from the Default

Term field to display the Term Code Validation (STVTERM) list of values to view existing

term codes.

Move to the Default CRN field, where a CRN may be entered, or use Count Query Hits to

display the Schedule Section Query Form (SSASECQ) where you can query sections of

courses. Select the appropriate CRN to bring back to the Default CRN field. After all Key

Information has been entered, select the Process Default button or use Next Block to

duplicate section information. A new CRN is immediately assigned to the newly created

course. If you wish to discontinue processing with default data, use the Cancel button or

Rollback to close the window and return to the Key Block in SSASECT.

Note: When duplicating a section, all Key Block fields must be entered.

When simply adding a section from scratch, only the Term field and CRN

field must be entered.

Duplicate Section for Same Term

Duplicate sections may be created within the same term; that is, the add term and the

default term are the same. When duplicating sections within the same term, the default

section number must be zero (0). If the section number is not equal to zero, the section

may not be duplicated. Just as when entering a section from scratch on the Schedule

Form (SSASECT), if a section exists with the subject, course, or section number, the

section may not be entered, and therefore, may not be duplicated. Likewise, when

entering a section from scratch, if the section number is zero, the subject, course, or

section may be added multiple times to the same term, and therefore, can be duplicated.

When you have successfully duplicated a section within the same term, section

information will be duplicated from the forms listed below as follows:

From the Schedule Form (SSASECT):

•

All information in the Section portion of the form, with the exception of cross list data and

reserved seating, will be duplicated.

• Meeting Time window and Instructor window information is not duplicated.

297

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

• Enrollment data is handled in the following manner:

From the Schedule Detail Form (SSADETL):

The following fields are duplicated: Maximum Enrollment for the Section

Projected Section Enrollment

Waitlist Maximum Capacity

The following fields are set to zero: Actual Enrollment

Prior Enrollment

Waitlist Actual

Generated Credit Hours

Census One

Census Two

The following fields are set to a value: Waitlist Remaining is set equal to Waitlist

Maximum

Seats Remaining is set equal to Maximum

Enrollment

Reserved Seat Indicator is unchecked

The following information will be

duplicated from the form sections and

windows:

Link Section

Section Fees

Degree Program Attribute

The following information will not be

duplicated from the form sections and

windows:

Corequisite Section

Contract

Block Schedule Code

298

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

From the Schedule Restrictions Form (SSARRES):

From the Schedule Pre-requisite and Test Score Restrictions Form

(SSAPREQ):

Duplication From One Term to a Different Term

Sections may be duplicated from one term to another; that is, the add term and the default

term are different. When duplicating from one term to another, keep the following in mind:

• If the subject/course/section combination already exists for the add term, the section

may not be duplicated.

• The subject/course must be within the catalog range according to the Course Base

Maintenance Form (SCABASE) for the add term.

A section of LAW 415 created for term 199301 could not be duplicated for terms

earlier than 199301 or later than term 199401.

• In order to create duplicate sections from one term to a different term, the following

information must be valid at the catalog for the add term on the Basic Course

Information Form (SCACRSE):

• The status code for the course must be active.

• The billing and credit hours for the section must be valid at the catalog.

• The schedule type for this section must be valid at the catalog.

All information will be duplicated from

the form sections and windows. This

includes:

College Restriction

Major Restriction

Class Restriction

Level Restriction

Campus Restriction

Test Score and Prerequisite

The following information will be

duplicated from the form sections and

windows:

Test Score Restriction

Prerequisite Restriction

For example, LAW 415

Start Term 199301 End Term 199401

299

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

• The default section's part of term must be defined on the Term Control Form

(SOATERM) for the add term.

• The CEU Indicator field on SSASECT will be set to Y or N according to the catalog for

the effective term of the section being added.

• A section may not be duplicated if the Catalog Schedule Restrictions Form (SCASRES)

prohibits the creation of sections for either term or campus scheduling restrictions.

• If a grading mode is specified at the section level, and this grading mode is not valid for

the add term according to SCACRSE, the default grading mode will be specified for the

new section.

When you have successfully duplicated a section within the same term, section

information will be duplicated from the forms listed below as follows from one term to

another:

• Schedule restrictions on the Schedule Restrictions Form (SSARRES) and schedule

detail on the Schedule Detail Form (SSADETL) will not be duplicated at the section level

from one term to another.

• If catalog restrictions on the Course Registration Restrictions Form (SCARRES) and/or

catalog detail on the Course Detail Information Form (SCADETL) exist for the course,

these values will be defaulted for the section, just as they are defaulted when a section

is created form scratch.

For example, If at the catalog (SCACRSE) for LAW 415,

From Term 199301 To Term 199301

Credit Hours 3.00 to 4.00

From Term 199302 To Term 999999

Credit Hours 2.50 to 3.00

and a section of LAW 415 is created in term 199301

with 3.50 credit hours specified at the section level, this

section cannot be duplicated for term 199302, because

the section specified hours are out of the valid credit

range. However, if no section specified range had been

entered, the section could be duplicated, and the valid

credit hour range from the catalog would default to the

new section's credit hour range.

300

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

From the Schedule Form (SSASECT):

• All information on the Section area of the form, with the exception of cross list data and

reserved seating, will be duplicated.

• Meeting Time and Instructor information is not duplicated.

• Enrollment data is handled in the following manner:

Create Duration Units

Use the Duration Unit Validation Form (GTVDUNT) to create and maintain duration unit

codes that are associated with the calculation of an expected completion date for courses

and/or sections, such as

SEM (Semester), WEEK (Week), DAYS (Days), or MTHS (Month).

This calendar equivalent must be created to make sure that, regardless of when the

learner elects to start the course, they would have the same time frame in which to

complete it as other learners registering on different days. This do not reflect attendance

hours.

For example, if the learner starts the course on January 1, and the course has a duration

of six weeks (where a week equates to seven days), the learner’s expected completion

date for the course would be the 11th of February. Or, the course has a duration of ten

units (where a unit equates to 30 days). Or, the course has a duration of one semester

(which equates to x days).

The following fields are duplicated: Maximum Enrollment for the Section

Projected Section Enrollment

Waitlist Maximum Capacity

The following fields are set to zero: Actual Enrollment

Prior Enrollment

Waitlist Actual

Generated Credit Hours

Census 1

Census 2

The following fields are set to a value: Waitlist Remaining is set equal to Waitlist

Maximum

Seats Remaining is set equal to Maximum

Enrollment

Reserved Seat Indicator is unchecked

301

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

The duration unit code is also used as an alternate method of assessing fees. For

example, an institution may require that tuition at a rate of $50 per week be assessed and

charged to the learner instead of an amount that is calculated by credit hours. This type of

section level fee assessment could be used for self-paced sections of a course, allowing

the learner to buy time in the course.

Other courses such as continuing education could also use this method of assessing fees

where individual learner progress in a course, rather than static date ranges, is required

for refunding purposes without the need to define a proliferation of parts-of-term. Section

level refunding rules would control any fee refunds in these instances.

Duration unit codes will only be used when associated with open learning courses in the

Schedule Form (SSASECT). The duration units can be established for a course in

SCACRSE and will default to the section record when it is created. (An open learning

course is characterized by the lack of a part-of-term code in SSASECT.)

• The calendar days information associated with the duration code is used to derive the

student’s expected completion date, if the learner has selected a start date when

registering for the course. Conversely, the student may choose their expected

completion date. In this case, the start date will be derived based on the duration days

information.

• The units will be associated with the course duration information entered in the Basic

Course Information Form (SCACRSE) for those courses that will be available for open

learning registration.

This information will be used in tandem with a numeric value representing the number of

units (for example, 16 weeks). Duration unit codes cannot be deleted if they have been

associated with a course or section.

Some example seed data might be:

Create Instructional Methods

Use the Instructional Method Validation Form (GTVINSM) to create and maintain

instructional method codes that can be applied to schedule type codes, courses, and/or

sections, such as

CLASS (Classroom based), TUTOR (Tutorial), or WEB (Web-based).

This represents the delivery method of the course content.

An instructional method code can be associated with a schedule type code in STVSCHD

or can be used as a standalone description of the content delivery method for the course

at the section level. Once an instructional method code has been assigned to a schedule

type or section record, it cannot be deleted until all its course and section associations

have been removed.

Code Description Days

WEEK Weeks 7

MTHS Months 31

302

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Use the Instructional Method field in the Schedule Types window of SCACRSE and on

the Schedule Form (SSASECT) to enter the code as a standalone value, with no

association with a particular schedule type, or if the code has been previously associated

with a course, the code will default and automatically populate the field. The defaulted

value may be accepted or updated.

Open Learning and Class Schedule

Open learning registration provides learners with the ability to register for a class based on

start/end dates rather than a term. This open learning approach is optional and works with

Banner Student’s registration processing for enrollment and administrative purposes.

Open learning allows you to do the following in the Schedule module:

• Run reports using date ranges in place of term.

• Establish de-centralized section level processing rules for registration, extensions, and

refunding based on the individual learner’s progress in the course versus static dates.

• Expand your fee assessment options using user-defined units (in addition to flat and per

credit fees) and registration processing rules.

• Use free-form text to store information for class requirements and display URLs for

Web-based courses so students can make informed decisions when selecting the class

that best suits their needs.

• Specify section-specific dates when registration is accepted outside of the current parts-

of-term defined on SOATERM.

• Define instructional methods for courses.

• Specify the duration of the course for the course and section levels to determine the

expected registration completion date for the learner.

Set up an Open Learning Section

Before setting up an open learning section, make sure all section-related rules and

validation codes have been defined in Banner.

1. Access the Schedule Form (SSASECT), and enter the term and then enter ADD in the

CRN field in the Key Block.

2. Use Next Block to access the Section Information block, and enter all applicable

information including the subject code and course number.

• The section will inherit the instructional method assigned to the course when the

schedule type is entered or selected. If this association has not been made prior to

the creation of the section, you will be required to enter this information for open

learning sections.

• The duration units and number of duration units will automatically be defaulted if

they are defined for the course. If they are not defined, you will be required to enter

this information for open learning sections.

303

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

• The part-of-term information is not required for open learning courses.

• The registration from and to dates and start from and to dates are required. If the

date record in SOAORUL is defined with the Override (Indicator) checked, those

dates can be modified in SSASECT.

– The registration dates default from SOAORUL and represent the period of

time a learner may register in this section.

– The start dates also default from SOAORUL and represent the date range the

learner may actually start their course.

– The census one and census two dates (if defined) will be populated with the

corresponding information from SOAORUL.

• The maximum number of extensions that will be granted to an individual student

registered in this section will default to zero and should be changed if the

institution’s policy permits the extension of the expected completion date.

• If you are using the contract analysis functionality in the Faculty Load module, the

attendance method should be set to a code defined as Independent Studies if the

section will not have regular instructor/learner contact hours. Then the instructor will

not be penalized in the daily and weekly contact hour calculations. This information

is displayed in the main window.

• The lab, lecture, and other hours information are also displayed in the main window.

3. Save the course. At this time, a CRN is assigned, which replaces the word

ADD in the

Key Block, and the appropriate registration status code, extension and refunding rules

will be created for the section and housed in SSARULE. In addition, the Faculty Self

Service indicators, used to control the display of midterm grades, final grades, and

waitlists, will be created. These checkboxes will be defaulted to allow access and may

be changed in the Section Web Controls Form (SSAWSEC).

4. Use the Detail button next to the Registration Dates First and Last fields to view or

update the registration status code rules, refunding rules, or extension processing

rules which are stored on SSARULE.

5. Use Next Block to access the Meeting Time block to record scheduled meeting times

or other scheduled events.

6. It is not mandatory to establish contact times in the Meeting Time block if the section

has been deemed to be open learning one (i.e., no part-of-term has been defined).

• If there is a face-to-face component of the course or an online chat available to

students on a regular schedule, enter a meeting code to default in start and end

dates, days of the week, and times, or enter the meeting information manually.

• Also, enter the meeting type for the purpose of the meeting. A meeting type of

CLAS

will default into the Meeting Type field but may be changed to reflect the values

housed in the Meeting Type Validation Form (GTVMTYP).

This information appears on the student’s hardcopy class schedule or their Web

schedule in Banner Student Self-Service. For example, if there are regular chat

sessions established for a Web-based course, these can be defined as such and then

communicated to the student via their student schedule or via the Web.

7. Save the meeting time information.

304

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

8. Use Next Block to access the Instructor block and assign an instructor or tutor to this

section.

Due to the fact that the section has been defined as open learning, instructor IDs can

be entered without the dependency of meeting time records (for open learning classes

only).

9. Save the instructor information.

10. Access the Section Syllabus Form (SSASYLB) using the *SCHEDULE menu or the

Section Syllabus Form item in the Options Menu to enter syllabus information for

display on the Web.

• If syllabus information has already been entered for the course, this information is

available to be copied from the Course Syllabus (SCASYLB) to the Section Syllabus

(SSASYLB) by selecting the Copy from Course button. This button can be found in

all blocks of this form. Once the information is copied to the section, it is updatable.

• If no course syllabus information has been stored, you can enter or cut and paste

information into any of these fields. These fields will store approximately one and

one half pages of text.

11. Access the Schedule Processing Rules Form (SSARULE) to review the defaulted

open learning rules.

• If the rule information that defaulted to the section from the Open Learning Section

Default Rules Form (SOAORUL) is acceptable, or the information cannot be

overridden, the section setup process is complete.

• If no registration status codes, extension rules, or refunding rules were defined in

SOAORUL, this information should now be entered to permit registration. All

registration processes will verify that the appropriate registration status codes and

rules were set up here.

• To enter, update, or delete the extension processing rule, position the cursor on the

status code record where Ext checkbox is checked, and use Next Block.

• To enter, update, or delete a refunding rule, position the cursor on the appropriate

status code record, and use Next Block.

Note: If there is a requirement for all students to start on the same date,

the start from/to dates may be set to the same date. For example, in

defining a continuing education class with set meeting times, the start

dates could be set to the first day of class. In doing so, all the benefits of

an opening learning class could be realized (i.e., section level rules)

without the requirement to define specific parts-of-term.

Additional Registration Information Table (SFRAREG)

The Additional Registration Information Table (SFRAREG) is used with registration

processing. One record for every registration, regardless of the type of section, will be

created through the registration processes and will house the start and/or end dates of the

registration (the part-of-term start and end dates for traditional sections), and the assigned

tutor (the primary instructor for the section).

305

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Also, for the assigned tutor information in SFRAREG, if the primary instructor has been

redefined for a section with existing enrollments, the tutor assignment for all students

registered in that section is updated to reflect the change. The same change occurs if the

primary instructor is removed and a new instructor is assigned.

When a new section is created, a record in the faculty self-service display controls

(SSBFSEC) is created with a value of

Y in the following fields:

• SSBFSEC_FAC_WAIT_LIST_DISP_IND

• SSBFSEC_FAC_MGRD_DISP_IND

• SSBFSEC_FAC_FGRD_DISP_IND

Update an Existing Section to be an Open Learning

Section

Before updating an existing section to be an open learning section, make sure all section-

related rules and validation codes have been defined in Banner.

Note: The following changes can only be accomplished if there are no

existing registration records for the section. It is possible to redefine an

existing traditional section as an open learning section. However, the

section must be physically deleted when you are redefining an open

learning section as a traditional one.

1. Access the Schedule Form (SSASECT), and enter the term and CRN in the Key

Block.

2. Use Next Block to access the Section Information block, and enter all applicable

information including the subject code and course number.

• An instructional method, registration from and to dates, start from and to dates,

duration, and duration units are required to identify this section as available for open

learning registration.

• Remove the existing part-of-term information to ensure that the registration from

and to dates will default from the Open Learning Section Default Rules Form

(SOAORUL). It may be necessary to delete any meeting time or instructor

assignments to accomplish this.

• Update the Maximum Extensions field if extensions are permitted for this section.

3. Save the changes to the section records.

4. Use Next Block to access the Meeting Time block, and add any meeting time records

(if required).

5. Save the changes to the meeting time information.

6. Use Next Block to access the Instructor block, and identify the instructor that will be

assigned to the registering students as the primary instructor, if there are multiple

instructors assigned to the section. The student-tutor allocation process will ignore

other instructor records at time of registration.

306

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

7. Save the changes to the instructor information.

8. Access the Schedule Processing Rules Form (SSARULE) to add the open learning

rules.

• Open learning section rules should now be entered to permit registration. All

registration processes will verify that the appropriate registration status codes and

rules were set up here.

• To enter the extension processing rule, position the cursor on the status code record

where Extension checkbox is checked, and use Next Block.

• To enter a refunding rule, position the cursor on the appropriate status code record,

and use Next Block.

Set Up Non-Open Learning Section

Before setting up a non-open learning section, make sure all section-related rules and

validation codes have been defined in Banner.

1. Access the Schedule Form (SSASECT), and enter the term and then enter

ADD in the

CRN field in the Key Block.

2. Use Next Block to access the Section Information block, and enter all applicable

information including the subject code and course number.

The part-of-term information is mandatory, and an applicable part-of-term number

must be entered manually. (The value for part-of-term 1 is not defaulted in.)

3. Save the course. At this time, a CRN is assigned, which replaces the word

ADD in the

Key Block.

4. Use Next Block to access the Meeting Time block to record scheduled meeting times.

5. Enter a meeting code to default in start and end dates, days of the week, and times, or

enter the meeting information manually. Also enter the meeting type for the purpose of

the meeting. A meeting type of

CLAS will default into the Meeting Type field but may

be changed to reflect the values defined in the Meeting Type Validation Form

(GTVMTYP).

This information appears on the student’s hard copy class schedule or their Web

schedule in Banner Student Self-Service.

6. Save the meeting time information.

7. Use Next Block to access the Instructor block and assign an instructor or tutor to this

section.

8. Save the instructor information.

9. Access the Section Syllabus Form (SSASYLB) using the *SCHEDULE menu or the

Section Syllabus Form item in the Options Menu to enter syllabus information for

display on the Web.

• If syllabus information has already been entered for the course, this information is

available to be copied from the Course Syllabus (SCASYLB) to the Section Syllabus

(SSASYLB) by selecting the Copy from Course button. This button can be found in

all blocks of this form. Once the information is copied to the section, it is updatable.

307

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

• If no course syllabus information has been stored, you can enter or cut and paste

information into any of these fields. These fields will store approximately one and

one half pages of text.

Note: SSASECT will permit a traditional section to be converted into an

open learning section, however, the reverse is not true.

Set Up Section Fee Assessment, Extension, and

Refunding Rules for Open Learning Courses

Before setting up section fee assessment, extension, and refunding rules for open

learning courses, make sure the term control record has been established in SOATERM,

and the required registration date values and registration status codes have been defined

in SOAORUL.

1. Create CRNS using the Term Roll Report (SSRROLL) or through the Schedule Form

(SSASECT) to default the appropriate registration, extension, and refunding rules to

the section.

• All new open learning sections (those sections defined with no part-of-term), will be

populated with section level registration dates. Registration status codes, extension

rules, and refunding rules will be defaulted, if they are defined on SOAORUL.

• This information is defaulted from the Open Learning Rules Form (SOAORUL). The

registration from and to dates will reflect the most appropriate registration dates as

per section characteristics defined in SOAORUL. These rules are accessible using

the new Schedule Processing Rules Form (SSARULE).

• Modifications to the registration and learner start dates, registration status codes (if

defaulted), extension rules (if defaulted), and refunding rules (if defaulted) will be

permitted if the original open learning rule has been denoted as overridable.

• If the status codes and rules have not been set up to default when a new section is

created, the registration status codes, at a minimum, will need to be established

prior to registration processing. If no extensions are permitted for this section, an

extension rule will not be necessary.

2. Establish fee assessment information in the Section Detail Form (SSADETL).

• If course level fees have been defined in the Course Detail Information Form

(SCADETL), they will be defaulted to the section when a new CRN is created. This

is also the case if fees are defined in the Section Fees Assessment Control Form

(SSADFEE). Note: If both are defined, both will default.

• If sections were created before default values were defined in SSADFEE, and this

information should be carried over to individual sections, run the Section Fee

Population Process (SSPMFEE) to generate fee records.

3. Once established at the section level, the Track by CRN function controlled in the

Term Control Form (SOATERM) will add the CRN number to all fee assessment

transactions on the student’s accounts receivable records, and the Track by Course

function will do the same in the refunding process. This capability facilitates the

tracking of fees to an individual registration.

308

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Faculty Assignments

Faculty members can be assigned to sections via the Instructor window on the Schedule

Form (SSASECT). Instructors must be created using the previously defined Create

Instructors procedures. Instructors may be assigned to multiple sessions or only part of a

session using the Instructional Workload and the Percent of Session fields. The

instructional workload value will default from the catalog information but may be adjusted

on the Faculty Assignment Form (SIAASGN). When a new section is added to an

instructor's schedule via SSASECT, the instructor's default contract type, specified on the

Faculty/Advisor Information Form (SIAINST), defaults to the Faculty Assignment Form

(SIAASGN).

All information entered in the Instructor window is displayed on SIAASGN, and any

assignments entered or updated on SIAASGN will be displayed here.

Instructors who have been inactivated on the Faculty/Advisor Information Form (SIAINST)

may not be assigned teaching assignments in the Instructor window of SSASECT. The

message Instructor is not active for this term is displayed when an inactive instructor is

scheduled.

Maintaining Section Comments

After the course sections have been added to the database, the Schedule Comment Form

(SSATEXT) may be used to enter section comments for the production of the Class

Schedule (SSRSECT). The comments may also be modified or deleted using this form.

These comments may be free-format descriptive text lines for each section requiring a

comment.

Reviewing Course Sections

The Schedule Section Query Form (SSASECQ) displays all the sections entered into the

system that match user-specified criteria. For example, the user may request to view all

sections of ENGL 101 or all sections of ENGL 101 on a particular campus. Enrollment

counts and remaining seats are also displayed here. This form may be used to locate the

course reference number for a particular section. The Block Schedule (Indicator) field is

used to indicate that a section is part of a block of courses.

Reviewing Building/Room Schedule

The Building/Room Schedule Form (SSAMATX) is used to display section information for

all sections scheduled into each building and room. The user may specify selection criteria

to determine what is displayed. For example: all classes scheduled in East Hall on

Mondays, or a list where all English classes are scheduled.

SSAMATX allows for queries to be processed in a flexible, useful manner. In the example

below, queries may be performed for a date range for the course, or for the beginning and

ending times of the course.

309

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

If you have a course which meets from September 1, 1992, through December 15, 1992, it

will be returned when any of the above query dates are entered.

For example, if you want to know all meetings scheduled for a room at 8:30, all of the

following examples would be returned.

When entering search criteria for start or end date queries, the following rules hold true:

16-AUG-1992 16-SEP-1992

16-SEP-1992 16-OCT-1992

16-OCT-1992 30-DEC-1992

Begin Time End Time

0800 0900

0830 1000

0800 0930

Rule Result

If only start date entered: Retrieves record(s) if SSAMATX date is between

SSRMEET start and end dates (inclusive)

If only end date entered: Retrieves record(s) if SSAMATX date is between

SSRMEET start and end dates (inclusive)

Class A

15-DEC-1992

01-SEP-1992

15-AUG-1992

15-SEP-1992

15-OCT-1992

30-DEC-1992

310

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Example:

Note: The same logic applies to the time searches.

If both dates entered: Retrieves record(s) if SSRMEET start date between

SSAMATX start and end dates (inclusive)

- or -

SSRMEET end date between SSAMATX start and end

dates (inclusive)

- or -

SSRMEET start date less than or equal to the

SSAMATX start date and SSRMEET end date greater

than or equal to the SSAMATX end date

SSRMEET Start SSRMEET End

1 01-Jan-1999 31-Jan-1999

2 05-Jan-1999 28-Jan-1999

3 01-Feb-1999 28-Feb-1999

4 01-Mar-1999 31-Mar-1999

5 31-Mar-1999 30-Jun-1999

6 01-Mar-1999 01-Mar-1999

SSAMATX Start Entered SSAMATX End Entered Records Retrieved

01-Feb-1999 record 3

15-Feb-1999 record 3

15-Jan-1999 records 1, 2

01-Jan-1999 01-Mar-1999 records 1, 2, 3, 4, 6

01-Mar-1999 01-Mar-1999 records 4, 6

01-Dec-1998 01-Feb-1999 records 1, 2, 3

Rule Result

311

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Producing a Schedule of Classes

After the course schedule information has been entered into the system, the Class

Schedule Report (SSRSECT) may be produced. The Class Schedule lists all course

section information required for the registration process, including the title, meeting days

and times, and instructors. It is used by students and advisors in the registration process

for the upcoming term.

Reviewing Enrollment Counts

The Schedule Section Tally Report (SSRTALY) may be used to review past enrollments in

sections to aid in the determination of current capacity and may also be used to verify

current enrollment counts during and following registration. The report is able to show the

maximum, actual, and remaining waitlists for enrollment, as well as census two counts

and blocks associated with a CRN.

Schedule Contact Hours

The information in the Contact Hours field in the Section information of the Schedule

Form (SSASECT) defaults from the Contact field on SCACRSE. Scheduling contact

hours is defined for a term as follows:

• A Meeting Period is a pattern of days and meeting times within an established Start Date

and End Date.

• A Session is made up of one or more Meeting Periods.

• A Section is made up of one or more Sessions, as in the example below.

The data used for scheduling contact hours is as follows:

Example: Section 10001 - ENGL 100

Session 1 Meeting Period 1 MWF 8:00 - 8:50 29-AUG-1992 20-DEC-1992

Session 1 Meeting Period 2 TR 9:00 - 10:15 29-AUG-1992 20-DEC-1992

Session 2 Meeting Period 1 MWF 1:00 - 1:50 29-AUG-1992 20-DEC-1992

A Meeting Period Number.

B Days of the Week for the Meeting Period.

C Start Time and End Time of Meeting Period (in military time).

D Starting Date of the Meeting Period. (This is not necessarily a Monday or

Tuesday.)

312

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

1992 Calendar

E Ending Date of the Meeting Period. (This is not necessarily a Thursday or

Friday.)

F Number of Days of the Week (B) that fall within the Start Date (D) and End

Date (E) of the Meeting Period.

ABCDEF

Meeting Period 1 MWF 8:00 - 8:50 29-AUG-1992 20-DEC-1992 48

Meeting Period 2 TR 14:00 - 16:00 29-AUG-1992 20-DEC-1992 32

80 days total

Month U M T W R F S

AUG 29

30 31 01 02 03 04 05

SEPT 06 07 08 09 10 11 12

13 14 15 16 17 18 19

20 21 22 23 24 25 26

27 28 29 30 01 02 03

OCT 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17

18 19 20 21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 31

NOV 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

08 09 10 11 12 13 14

15 16 17 18 19 29 21

22 23 24 25 26 27 28

29 30 01 02 03 04 05

DEC 06 07 08 09 10 11 12

13 14 15 16 17 18 19

313

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

For the Exclusion Rules Form (SSAEXCL) for the year 1992:

On the Schedule Calendar Form (SSAACCL), the Number of Weeks field is calculated by

using the earliest Meeting Period Start Date (D) and the latest Meeting Period End Date

(E) to determine the actual Number of Days in the entire section. (This is the second

Number of Weeks field in the Schedule Academic Calendar section.) The Exclusion

Rules Form (SSAEXCL) is not checked for this calculation.

114 Actual Meeting Days / 7 days in a week = 16.28 weeks

Section Contact Hours

The Total Section Contact Hours figure is calculated in the Total Contact field of the

Faculty Instructional Assignment section on the Faculty Assignment Form (SIAASGN).

The equation is as follows:

[(Total Meeting Period Days of the Week - Exclusion Rule Days for Meeting Period) =

Number of Meeting Period Days * Number of Minutes in Meeting Period] / Duration

factor = Number of Meeting Period Contact Hours

Section Weekly Contact Hours

The Section Weekly Contact Hours figure is calculated in the Weekly Contact field of the

Faculty Instructional Assignment section on the Faculty Assignment Form (SIAASGN).

The equation is as follows:

(Number of Days in a Meeting Period Week * Number of Minutes per Meeting Period) /

Duration factor = Meeting Period Weekly Contact Hours

Monday November 23, 1992 Falls in Meeting Period 1

Tuesday November 24, 1992 Falls in Meeting Period 2

Wednesday November 25, 1992 Falls in Meeting Period 1

Thursday November 26, 1992 Falls in Meeting Period 2

Friday November 27, 1992 Falls in Meeting Period 1

Example:

[(48 - 3 = 45) * 50] = 2250 min/50 = 45 Contact Hours for Session 1

[(32 - 2 = 30) * 120] = 3600 min/50 = 72 Contact Hours for Session 2

Total Section Contact Hours is 45 + 72 = 117

314

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

The sum of all Meeting Period Weekly Contact Hours = Section Weekly Contact Hours

Creating Cross List Definitions

If the institution will be establishing cross-listed sections, the cross list group identifiers

which will be used must be created on the Schedule Cross List Definition Form

(SSAXLST). The maximum enrollment for the cross list is also specified on this form.

SSAXLST uses the Block (Code) field to indicate that a section is part of a block of

courses.

After creating cross list group identifiers, these identifiers must be entered in the Cross

List field of the Schedule Form (SSASECT) for the appropriate courses. If cross-listed

courses are to be scheduled for the same room during the same time, one method to

accomplish this would be to assign meeting days, times, rooms, and instructors to one of

the cross-listed courses and save this data in the Schedule Form (SSASECT).

To quickly schedule the other cross-listed courses to the same room, enter SSASECT for

each of the remaining cross-listed courses, and use Duplicate Item to access the Cross

List Meeting Time/Instructor Query Form (SSAXMTI) from the Meeting Time window. This

form displays the meeting time and instructor information already associated with the

cross-listed group of courses.

You will see the room, time, and instructor information added previously via SSASECT for

other sections. Place your cursor in the CRN field of the course with previously added

schedule information. Use Select to default the meeting dates, days, times, rooms, and

instructors into SSASECT with the

O value (both time and room conflict) in the Override

Indicator fields in the Meeting Time and Instructor windows.

Save your records. They are automatically posted. Meeting time and instructor information

can also be added manually for each course, and overrides will need to be requested to

schedule the same rooms and instructors for the course.

Note: It is not necessary to schedule the cross-listed courses in the same

room or with the same instructor.

(3 * 50) / 50 = 3.0

(2 * 120) / 50 = 4.8

3.0 + 4.8 = 7.8

315

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Schedule Module Links

In the Banner Student System there are two methods of scheduling courses that must be

taken concurrently, corequisites and links.

Corequisites

Corequisites are two or more different courses that must be taken concurrently.

Corequisites are set up in the Catalog module by identifying the courses as corequisites of

each other in the Corequisite Course section of the Course Detail Form (SCADETL) for

each of the courses required.

If a specific section of a course is required as a corequisite, then that section must also be

identified in the Corequisite Section information of the Schedule Detail Form (SSADETL).

Link Processing

Links are used to connect sections of the “same course” when it is required that some

combination of these sections be taken concurrently. The same course can be defined as

a course having the same subject and the same course number but with different

schedule types, and that course can be used in the linking process.

Linking sections requires defining link identifiers on the Schedule Form (SSASECT) and

defining link connectors on the Schedule Detail Form (SSADETL). Both link identifiers and

link connectors are two-byte characters which are user-defined.

Example 1:

ARTS 201 and ARTS 210 must be taken concurrently.

SCADETL: Key Information Corequisite information

ARTS 201 Subject: ARTS Course: 210

ARTS 210 Subject: ARTS Course: 201

Example 2:

ARTS 201-01 and ARTS 210-10 must be taken concurrently.

SSADETL: Key Information Corequisite Section information

ARTS 201 01 CRN Subject: ARTS Course: 210 Section: 10

ARTS 210 10 CRN Subject: ARTS Course: 201 Section: 01

316

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

In each of the following examples, the linking process places a link connector on a section

of a course and uses that same value as the link identifier on another section of the same

course. This action links the section with the connector to the section with that identifier. It

will create an error message at registration, should a student try to register for the section

with the connector, without registering for the section with the identifier of equal value.

(This error message is dependent upon (Registration) Links error checking being set to

Fatal on the Term Control Form (SOATERM) for the term.) For a linked course with a fatal

error, the error that is displayed is the translation of the

SSBSECT_SCHD_CODE of the

missing course.

The following courses will be used in the examples of linking sections in various

combinations:

Example 1:

Students may take a lab section without a lecture section, but not a lecture section

without a lab section (any lab section).

Note that for this combination, no connector is placed on the lab sections, and no

identifier is required on the lecture sections.

Example 2:

Students may take a lecture section without a lab section, but not a lab section without

a lecture section (any lecture section).

Note that for this combination, no connector is placed on the lecture sections, and no

identifier is required on the lab sections.

Course Section Title Schedule Type Credits

Chemistry 120 001 Chemistry I Lecture 4

Chemistry 120 002 Chemistry I Lecture 4

Chemistry 120 003 Chemistry I Lab 0

Chemistry 120 004 Chemistry I Lab 0

Course and

Section

Link Identifier

(SSASECT)

Link Connector

(SSADETL)

120-001 L1

120-002 L1

120-003 L1

120-004 L1

317

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Example 3:

Students may take any lab section with any lecture section, but must have both a lab

section and a lecture section.

Note that for this combination, all lecture sections have the same identifier, and all lab

sections have the same identifier.

Example 4:

Students in section 001 Lecture must take section 003 Lab, and students in section

002 Lecture must take section 004 Lab.

Note that for this combination, the identifiers are unique values for each section of the

lectures and each section of the labs.

When creating sections, each section must be defined as gradable (Gradable box is

checked) or non-gradable (Gradable box is unchecked) on SSASECT. If the lab and

lecture sections are one course and are graded as one course, then one of the sections,

Course and

Section

Link Identifier

(SSASECT)

Link Connector

(SSADETL)

120-001 A1

120-002 A1

120-003 A1

120-004 A1

Course and

Section

Link Identifier

(SSASECT)

Link Connector

(SSADETL)

120-001 A1 L1

120-002 A1 L1

120-003 L1 A1

120-004 L1 A1

Course and

Section

Link Identifier

(SSASECT)

Link Connector

(SSADETL)

120-001 A1 L1

120-002 A2 L2

120-003 L1 A1

120-004 L2 A2

318

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

either the lab or the lecture, must be defined as non-gradable, and the credit hours/billing

hours must be changed to zero (0).

In order to change the credit hours and billing hours for a course at the section level, the

credit and billing hours at the catalog level must have been defined for variable credit, 0 or

3 credits, for example. This range will default on SSASECT when the section is created,

and the user can then define the lecture section, to follow the example, as offered for 3

credits. The lab section would be defined as available for zero (0) credits to avoid

duplicate credit and billing for the same course.

Create Section Contract Information

The Schedule Detail Form (SSADETL) allows the user to designate a section as a

contract section via the Section Contracts information on the Contract/Block Schedule

Code window. Examples of contract codes may be military contract, IBM contract, AICPA

contract, etc. The contract information is repeating. Therefore, multiple contract codes

may be listed for a section. The Percentage field is also provided to designate the

contract breakdown. The Primary Indicator designates the primary contractor if multiples

exist. No processing is performed with the information.

The following is an example of contract information: ELEC 121, Electrical Wiring, is a

contract course in the Continuing Education Division which is funded 80% by the

Electricians Union for their apprentices. The other 20% is funded by the Continuing

Education Division.

The Section Contracts information could be set up as follows:

Creating/Modifying Restrictions on Sections

When a course has been added to the system, restrictions as to who may register for the

course are built on the Course Registration Restrictions Form (SCARRES). When

sections of a course are added for a term, any restrictions set at the catalog level will

default to the sections at the schedule level. These restrictions are maintained on the

Schedule Restrictions Form (SSARRES) and may be added to or otherwise modified for

the Key Information. Please see the “Catalog Procedures” section for further information

and examples of setting restrictions.

Note: Course and section restriction rules created prior to Release 8.0

are handled as follows. The (Field of Study) Type field on SCARRES

and SSARRES will be set to a default of

MAJOR when a current course or

section restriction rule exists for a major (STVMAJR). Since only the field

of study type of

MAJOR was previously considered, all registration

restriction rules will function as before. Processing checks the primary

and secondary curriculum elements.

EU Electricians Union 80% Primary - checked

CE Continuing Education 20%

319

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

You may restrict a course to include or exclude students specifically by the following data

items.

• department

• field of study (major)

• class

• level

• degree

• program

• campus

• college

• student attribute

• cohort

The restriction controls are used to enter and maintain the restriction indicators associated

with the restrictions for a course. The only values that can be selected in the Include

Exclude radio groups are

Include for include restrictions and Exclude for exclude

restrictions. An inclusion restriction means a course may be offered only for the values

displayed for that restriction. An exclusion restriction prohibits the offering of a course for

the specified restrictions.

The All Field of Study Types checkbox is used to indicate that all field of study types

should be considered. When this box is checked, the Type field is inactive, and the user is

taken to the Code field to select the field of study value.

The (Field of Study) Type field displays the code of the learner field of study type, such

MAJOR, MINOR, CONCENTRATION. Values are selected from the Learner Field of

Study Type (GTVLFST) list.

Please refer to the “Building Registration Restrictions on Courses” section of the “Course

Catalog Chapter” for more information on using the All Field of Study Types checkbox

and the (Field of Study) Type field.

Test Score Restrictions and Prerequisites

Use the Schedule Pre-requisite and Test Score Restrictions Form (SSAPREQ) to restrict

sections for test scores and area prerequisites. Restrictions set at the course level on the

Catalog Pre-requisite and Test Score Restrictions Form (SCAPREQ) will default to the

schedule prerequisite and test score restriction information maintained on SSAPREQ.

These restrictions may be added to or otherwise modified on SSAPREQ. Please see the

“Catalog Procedures” section for further information and examples of setting prerequisite

and test score restrictions.

320

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Course Fee Assessment Rules by Level

A Level field exists in the Section Fees information on the Schedule Detail Form

(SSADETL). The Section Fee Assessment Control Form (SSADFEE) allows an institution

to build fee assessment rules on a term basis for sections based on schedule type and

level. Once these section assessment rules have been built, they will default to the section

based on the schedule type of the section and the level entered in the Section Fees

information in the Section Fees/Degree Program Attribute window of SSADETL. The

Tuition and Fee Waiver checkbox on the Schedule Form (SSASECT) must be checked,

and the Override checkbox on the Registration Fee Assessment Rules Form (SFARGFE)

must be checked, if regular fee assessment processing is to be bypassed for this section.

When this section fee assessment process is used, the system stores the course

reference number with the account detail information generated for the section. This will

allow the institution to use the Tuition & Fee Analysis by Course View (SFVTFAN).

Tuition & Fee Analysis by Course

You have the ability to monitor the tuition income for those sections which were assessed

using course fee assessment rules by level. An Oracle view (SFVTFAN) is provided which

contains the information necessary to report this tuition income.

Fields in the view include: Term, CRN, Subject, Course Number, Sequence Number,

Detail Code, Detail Code Category, Admissions Type, Degree Code, Course Level,

Registration Status Code, Course Title, Primary Instructor Name, Transaction Number,

and Amount.

Tuition Fee Waivers

To indicate that a section should not have the customary tuition and fee charges, check

the Tuition and Fee Waiver box on the Schedule Form (SSASECT). This will indicate to

the system that this section is exempt from tuition and fees which are overrideable as

defined on the Registration Fees Process Control Form (SFARGFE), when the Override

box is checked. If this box is checked, all rules on SFARGFE which are overrideable will

ignore billing hours for this section during registration fee assessment. If this box is not

checked, all rules on SFARGFE apply.

If it is determined by your institution that a fee other than the customary tuition and fees

should be charged for this course, this is accomplished by checking the Tuition and Fee

Waiver box in conjunction with assigning a section fee on the Schedule Detail Form

(SSADETL). When assigning a fee code, an amount also needs to be entered. A flat fee

or a per credit hour fee may be charged. This determination must be made by the

institution when entering the fee code.

For a section, a level may also be specified for a fee. This level specifies the level at which

the course is taken. This allows for differing fees or additional fees to be charged, if the

section is taken at different levels. If no level is specified, the rule will apply to all levels. If

tuition fee waiver rules had been defined at the catalog level, these rules will default to the

section for all levels (level is null). These defaulted catalog rules may then be modified for

each section as needed.

321

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Note: Once a waiver has been created for a section and enrollment has

begun, the setting of the Tuition and Fee Waiver box should not be

changed, so that fees are assessed correctly.

This flag is not dynamically looked at in the registration fee assessment process.

Therefore, if a section has a waiver and a student registers for the course, they will be

given a waiver. However, if at a later date the setting of the Tuition and Fee Waiver box is

changed, even if this student is re-processed via registration fee assessment, they may

not be charged correctly, because the Tuition and Fee Waiver box has already been

populated.

Reserved Seating

Reserved seats rules are established in the Reserved Seats window of SSASECT after

enrollment information for non-reserved seats has been created for the section. You can

reserve a group of seats in a section for a particular group of students. Reservations can

be defined using curriculum and student components, including the primary and

secondary curriculum. Admission, matriculation, and graduation terms are included. The

user ID and activity date are displayed for each rule. Reserved and waitlist totals are also

displayed.

Reserved seat rules processing checks the curriculum data elements against SORLCUR

and SORLFOS. Student attributes are checked against SGRSATT. Cohort data is checked

against SGRCHRT. The admission and matriculation terms are checked against

SORLFOS. The graduation term is checked against SGBSTDN.

Overflow checking is used during processing to check unreserved available seats when

seats on the reserved rule are full. Students can register for those unreserved available

seats when overflow checking is turned on.

Values can be entered in the data elements for the rules, but once a rule has been saved,

it cannot be changed. The rule must be deleted and re-entered. The Overflow checkbox

can be checked (set to

Y) or unchecked (set to N) as needed. The Reserved Maximum

and Waitlist Maximum fields can also be modified by rule, for reserved or non-reserved

seating. When waitlist maximums have been set up, the waitlist messages, which are

displayed at registration, will reflect that this section has reserved seating in place.

The Reserved Seats Inquiry Form (SSIRESV) is used to query and review reserved seats

rules for a term and CRN combination. This form can be accessed from the Options Menu

on SSASECT.

When a Student Meets Multiple Rules

The reserved seats process will attempt to place the student in the most restrictive rule

that applies. The most restrictive rule is considered the rule with the most reserved rule

components. If the student meets rules with the same number of reserved rule

components, left-most components are considered most restrictive. If a student meets

multiple reserved seats rules that are equally restrictive, an attempt is made to place the

student in the reserved rule the process finds first.

322

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Example:

If a student meets rule 1 with a level of UG and rule 2 with an attribute of A1, the

student will be placed in rule 1.

If a student meets rule 1, where rule 1 has three data elements, and the student also

meets rule 2, where rule 2 has three data elements, the student will be placed in the

rule with the three elements that are listed left-most in the rule.

Once the process makes a hit, and the most restrictive rule is found for the student, the

student will be placed in the reserved seats bucket, if seats are available in that rule. The

reserved seats process does not check for additional restrictive rules for which the student

may apply.

Reserved seats processing does not consider the value of the components, rather the

quantity of components and/or the location of the components. The exception is

curriculum components. See additional information regarding curricula hierarchy, below.

When the student meets a rule, that student is placed in the reserved seat or waitlist

bucket for the rule when available seats exist. If no reserved seats are available in the

most restrictive rule for which the student qualifies, the system looks at the setting of the

Overflow checkbox.

• When the Overflow checkbox is unchecked (N), the student is not allowed to register for

the course.

• When the Overflow checkbox is checked (Y), the student can register for an unreserved

available seat in the course.

• When no unreserved available seats exist, the student is not allowed to register for the

course.

The components for the reserved seats rule are checked in order as they appear in the

Reserved Seats window. Rules are checked moving from left to right, and the data

elements that appear to the left carry more weight on the rule.

Curricula Hierarchy

The Curricula field is the exception to the above information. This field is used to

determine which of the student’s curriculum records should be checked against the

reserved rule. When curriculum components are considered, the following hierarchy is

used:

• Any or Null curricula are considered first.

• Primary curriculum is considered second.

• Secondary curriculum is considered last.

Example:

When the student meets multiple rules based on curriculum components, the student

is placed in the rule where the curriculum components are considered first. In the

example below, the student would be placed in the first rule with the Curricula field

set to

Null or Any.

323

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Rule Data Entry

Data entry of rules must be considered so that rules are valid and can be saved. Duplicate

reserved rules cannot be saved. Please note that the Curricula field is not considered

when determining equality. Therefore, the following rules are considered duplicates and

will generate an error message. Only one of the following rules can be successfully saved.

Here is another example of duplicate rules. Only one of the following can be saved.

Reserved Seats Rules Totals

Reserved seats rules totals are displayed separately in the Reserved Seats window.

These numbers are the totals for all the rules for the CRN. As the maximum reserved

seats and maximum waitlist seats values are modified by rule, the totals will automatically

be updated and displayed. These fields are display only.

The totals in the Reserved Seats window reflect the totals from the Enrollment Data block.

Use the Delete Reserved Seats button to delete all reserved seats rules if each reserved

rule has zero (0) actual seats taken. This removes all the reserved seating information and

returns the enrollment data to the section level.

Note: The system tests for reserved seating each time the Reserved

Seats window is entered. You can only delete reserved seating when no

enrollment exists for the reserved seating. When enrollment exists that

Level

Field of

Study

Type

Field of

Study

Code Curricula Attribute

Matriculation

Term

UG MAJOR MATH Null or Any A1 200510

UG MAJOR ENGL Primary A2 200510

Program

Field of Study

Type

Field of Study

Code Curricula

BA-MATH MAJOR MATH Primary

BA-MATH MAJOR MATH Secondary

Department

Field of Study

Type

Field of Study

Code Curricula

MAJOR MATH Null

MAJOR MATH Any

324

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

meets the reserved seating requirement, you will not be allowed to delete

reserved seating.

Overflow Rule Option

The Overflow (Indicator) checkbox in the Reserved Seats window is used to check

unreserved available seats when seats on the reserved rule are full. Students can register

for those unreserved available seats when overflow checking is turned on. When a

student meets a reserved rule for which no reserved seats are available and the Overflow

(Indicator) is checked (set to

Y), an attempt is made to place the student in a non-

reserved available seat and successfully register the student for the course. If there are no

non-reserved available seats, processing will use the reserved rule and issue capacity

messages as usual.

When the Overflow checkbox is checked (set to

Y), students who met a reserved rule but

could not register because the maximum reserved seats value had been met are able to

• When the Overflow checkbox is unchecked (N) and no reserved seats are available,

the student is not allowed to register for the course. The reserved rule is used to issue

capacity messages.

• When the Overflow checkbox is checked (Y) and no reserved seats are available, the

student can register for an unreserved available seat in the course. The overflow option

is allowed. The reserved rule is deactivated so that unreserved available seats can be

used by students who would have normally met the reserved seats rule.

• When the Overflow checkbox is checked (Y) and no reserved seats are available and

no unreserved available seats exist, registration processing will go back and use the

reserved rule to issue associated capacity messages.

• When reserved seats rules are initially created, the Overflow checkbox is unchecked

(

N).

• The Overflow checkbox can be activated or inactivated at any time during registration.

• The Overflow checkbox cannot be activated for the unreserved rule.

• When seats are full for reserved and/or unreserved rules and the student who meets a

reserved rule is waitlisted, the student is waitlisted for the rule in which the requirements

are met, whether the Overflow checkbox is checked or unchecked.

• When the Overflow checkbox is checked (Y), it is used, regardless of the setting of the

Capacity section option in SOATERM.

Note: The reserved seats rule overflow option is also used by Waitlist

Automation processing. If a seat becomes available on the non-reserved

rule, then all students waitlisted in that rule and in reserved rules with the

Overflow checkbox checked (

Y) are treated as a single waitlist, and the

student with the highest priority is notified.

Please note that the setting of the Overflow checkbox is not considered

when the system attempts to waitlist a student. If a student meets a

reserved rule where the waitlist is full and the Overflow checkbox is

325

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

checked (Y), the student will not overflow into the waitlist on the non-

reserved rule.

Querying Reserved Seats

The Reserved Seats Inquiry Form (SSIRESV) is used to query and view all reserved seats

rules for a term and CRN combination. Rules are displayed in their entirety, and multiple

rules are displayed for a section. This form can be accessed from the Options Menu on

SSASECT.

Queries are based on the Term and CRN fields in the Key Block. The Data block displays

the rules that are returned by the query for the term and CRN. Rule data elements are also

queryable. Rule components are displayed in the same order as in the Reserved Seats

window on SSASECT. The fields in the Reserved Seats Totals block are display only.

Rolling Reserved Seats

The Term Roll Report (SSRROLL) rolls the data elements from SSASECT (Reserved

Seats window) when reserved seats are rolled to a new term. The setting of the Overflow

checkbox for the rule is also rolled to the new term. The optional

sussrresv.sql script is used

to set the Overflow checkbox to checked (

Y) or unchecked (N) for all CRNs for a term.

The overflow options can be reset using the delivered script or can be updated manually

after the roll has been performed.

Note: When SSRROLL is run and the SSRRESV records are created for

the new term, the user ID for the user that runs SSRROLL will be the user

ID that populates the new SSRRESV records.

Reserved Seats Rules Script - srssrresv.sql

The srssrresv.sql PL/SQL script is used as a report. When run, it selects all

reserved seats rules by term and CRN. The script resides in the SQL*Plus directory.

The script uses the following prompts:

• Term (Required) - Enter the term for the reserved seats rule.

• CRN (Optional) - Enter the CRN for the reserved seats rule.

• Date (Optional) - Enter the date the report is being run.

The output includes:

• Report Name

• Date

• Ter m Co de

• CRN

• Subject

326

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

• Course Number

• Enrollment Detail (seat counts) for the CRN

• Reserved Rules detail, including the Overflow checkbox setting associated with each

rule

• Reserved Detail (seat counts for the rule)

The output pages break on the CRN and print the sum of the seat counts for each CRN,

based on the rules for the CRN. The display order of the rules within a term and CRN

follows the sort order of the fields that make up the rule from left to right.

Converting Existing Reserved Seats Rules

Prior to Release 8.0, reserved seats rules were constructed using level, major, and class.

Only the primary curriculum was checked during registration processing to determine

which reserved seat rule was met by the student. During the upgrade to Banner Student

8.0, existing reserved seat rules were converted as follows, to ensure that all rules

function as they did in the previous release.

• Reserved seat components will be set to Null.

• The Overflow checkbox will be unchecked (N). (An optional script is delivered to set the

Overflow checkbox to checked (

Y) or unchecked (N) for all CRNs for a term.)

• If an existing rule contains a major value (STVMAJR), the Field of Study Type field will

be set to

MAJOR, and the Field of Study Code field will be populated with the existing

major value.

• If the Majr field (now the Field of Study Code field) is Null in the existing reserved

rule, both Field of Study Type and Field of Study Code will be set to

Null.

• If an existing rule contains a level or a major, the Curricula field will be set to Primary

to preserve prior registration processing that only checked the primary curriculum.

• If an existing rule used only class, the Curricula field will remain Null.

Maintain Academic Calendar

The academic calendar processing records and calculates the significant academic

calendar dates for a group of sections or a specific section.

Note: The academic calendar processing is an optional portion of the

Schedule module which does not need to be implemented unless it is

required.

Creating codes on the Academic Calendar Type Validation Form (STVACCL) is the first

step in establishing the academic calendar. These academic calendar type codes are

user-defined. Examples are: daily contact, weekly contact, CEU, or semester calendar.

327

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

The Schedule Academic Calendar Rules Form (SSAACRL) may be used to build the rules

associated with an academic calendar. Once academic calendar rules are built, they may

be copied to another academic calendar type within the same term via the Default Type

field in the Default Calendar Type window.

The academic calendar contains an optional census two date. The Census Two Date

field is also on the Term Control Form (SOATERM) in the Base Part of Term section. If

census two is entered here, it will default to the Census Two information on the Schedule

Form (SSASECT). A census two enrollment will automatically be maintained if a census

two date is specified.

The information included in an academic calendar includes census one, census two,

enrollment date, record academic history date, and drop without a penalty date. There are

three fields associated with each of these rules: Numbers of Days, Percentage of Days,

and Date. The user may choose a specific date or have the system calculate the date

when the number of days or percentage of days is used. If number of days or percentage

of days is specified, then the system will automatically calculate the correct dates when an

academic calendar type is associated with a section. These three fields work in

conjunction with one another. If a census one date is entered, then the number of days to

census one and percentage of days to census one may not be entered.

The Census One Date and Census Two Date fields are used in processing the

registration information to calculate the census one and census two enrollment. The last

day to enroll, the last day to record academic history, and last day to drop without a

penalty are informational only and are not currently used in any process.

The Academic Calendar Rule Query Form (SSAQCRL), which is a stand alone query

form, may be used to view the academic calendar types for which rules are established for

the term.

The Schedule Calendar Form (SSAACCL) allows you to tie an academic calendar to a

section. The keys to the form are term and course reference number. Once a calendar

type is entered, this form examines the session meeting information from the Schedule

Form (SSASECT) and calculates the academic calendar information. An academic

calendar type may only be added or modified prior to enrollment existing for the section.

This is because a change in the census dates after enrollment exists would give an

inaccurate census enrollment count.

The dates on the Schedule Exclusion Rules Form (SSAEXCL) are excluded from the

academic calendar calculations. The Part of Term field in the Key Information of

SSAEXCL allows the institution to define those days which are to be excluded from the

academic calendar by parts of term and calendar year. A description may also be added

for the excluded days.

The Academic Calendar Type is included in the Section Roll Process (SSRROLL) to roll

the academic calendar information forward to the next term being processed.

Academic calendar types may only be associated with those sections whose part of term

allows override capabilities of start, end, and census dates on the Term Control Form

(SOATERM).

328

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Note: The academic calendar information on the Schedule Calendar

Form (SSAACCL) cannot be deleted with a Remove Record function.

The following is an example of academic calendar processing. An academic calendar rule

of daily contact is established on the Schedule Academic Calendar Rules Form

(SSAACRL) for 199301 (Fall 1992) as follows:

This rule is given to a section which meets Monday, Wednesday, and Friday, from August

29th till December 15th. Monday, September 7th, Thursday, November 26th, and Friday,

November 27th, have been defined as exclusion days on the Schedule Exclusion Rules

Form (SSAEXCL) for this section's part of term. Therefore, they are not used when

calculating the academic calendar dates.

When you examine all the Mondays, Wednesdays, and Fridays which fall between August

29th and December 15th, and remove the two exclusion days that follow Monday,

Wednesday, or Friday, you can determine that there are 44 actual meetings of this section.

Using the rules established on SSAACRL the dates calculate as follows:

Registration Dates:

Note: The Registration Dates are informational only.

# Days % Days Date

Census One: 10

Census Two: 50%

Enrollment: 20

Record Academic History: 10-NOV-1992

Drop Without Penalty: 35

Census One 10 Days 23-SEP-1992

Census Two 50% Days 21-OCT-1992

Last Date to Enroll 16-OCT-1992

Last Date to Record Academic History 10-NOV-1992

Last Date to Drop without Penalty 35 Days 20-NOV-1992

329

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Maintain Attendance Accounting Method

The Attendance (Accounting) Method field on the Schedule Form (SSASECT) is

validated against the Attendance Accounting Method Validation Form (STVACCT). This

validation form allows the user to specify the accounting method for the section. Examples

are weekly, daily, independent study, or actual. Only one method may be specified on the

validation form.

Both the Daily and Weekly Contact Hour calculations use the number of hours per week

when the session meets. The Hours Per Week field in the Meeting Time window is

updateable. This allows those sessions which do not meet for the standard duration factor,

and are maintained on the Faculty Load Term Control Form (SIATERM), to be updated to

reflect the correct hours of meeting per week.

In the meeting times listed below, the system, using a 50 minute duration factor

maintained on SIATERM, would calculate 4.4 and 4.8 hours per week. Due to break

periods, the institution only gives 4 hours of meeting time per week to the three examples.

To correctly specify the number of hours per week for these special sessions, the override

on SSASECT may be used.

Number of Weeks in the Session is calculated using the earliest session start date and the

latest session end date.

When a weekly attendance accounting method is specified on a section with multiple

meeting times, the value appearing in the Weekly Contact Hours field is calculated as

follows:

For the following course meeting information:

The calculation is as follows:

System Calculated Override Value

TR 0800 - 0950 4.40 4.00

TR 0810 - 1000 4.40 4.00

TR 0800 - 1000 4.80 4.00

Total Contact Hours/Week for

Meeting 1

+ Total Contact Hours/Week for

Meeting 2

Meeting 1 29-AUG-1992 20-DEC-1992 M W F 8:00 - 9:00 3 hours/week

Meeting 2 29-AUG-1992 20-DEC-1992 T R 8:30 - 9:00 1 hour/week

330

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

When a daily attendance accounting method is specified on a section, the value appearing

in the Daily Contact Hours field is calculated as follows:

For the following course meeting information:

The calculations are as follows:

Total number of MWFs, taking exclusion days into account is 43.

Total number of TRs, taking exclusion days into account is 30.

Schedule Overrides

The Schedule Override Form (SSAOVRR) allows the user to override the following

catalog values associated with the section, such as College, Division, Department, and

Taxonomy of Program. There is no edit against the catalog information. If the Catalog

states that the course is in the College of Arts and Sciences in the English Department,

Meeting 1 = 3 hours/week

Meeting 2 = 1 hour/week

WCH = 3 + 1 = 4

Total Contact Hours for Meeting 1 + Total Contact Hours for Meeting 2

Number of Days in Meeting 1 Number of Days in Meeting 2

Meeting 1 29-AUG-1992 20-DEC-1992 M W F 8:00 - 9:00 3 hours/week

Meeting 2 29-AUG-1992 20-DEC-1992 T R 8:30 - 9:00 1 hour/week

Meeting 1 3 hours/week

3 meetings/week

x 43 meeting days = 43 contact hours

Meeting 2 1 hours/week

2 meetings/week

x 30 meeting days = 15 contact hours

Meeting 1 43 contact hours

43 meeting days

Meeting 2 15 contact hours

30 meeting days

=.5

DCH = 1 + 5 = 1.5

331

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

the class schedule information may be changed to the Business School, Economics

Department.

These override fields are used when the course is rolled to academic history either in

batch or online, and the overrides are used in the Class Roster (SFRSCST), Schedule

Section Tally (SSRTALY), and Class Schedule (SSRSECT) reports.

Block Scheduling

The Block Scheduling function will allow an institution to register students in a group of

user-defined courses through the use of user-defined block codes. This processing

impacts the Schedule, General Student, and Registration modules, which are set up as

follows.

Schedule Module

The first step in using the block scheduling function is defining the institution's blocks on

the Block Code Validation Form (STVBLCK). The block codes can be up to ten position

alphanumeric characters.

After defining the block codes, the institution should now begin to establish the sections of

courses that are to be associated with each block code on the Block Schedule Control

Form (SSABLCK), where the keys to the form are block code and term. Sections may also

be assigned to the blocks via the Schedule Detail Form (SSADETL).

When adding sections to the block of courses via the Block Schedule Control Form

(SSABLCK), the CRN is a required field that when entered will display the following data

elements: subject code, course number, section number, part of term, campus, maximum

enrollment, actual enrollment, and seats remaining. A section may be associated with

more than one block. A

Y displays in the Multiple Block field to indicate that the section

belongs to multiple blocks. When adding sections to a block code on SSABLCK, the user

may enter a valid subject, course, and section number to retrieve section data, just as

entering a valid CRN will retrieve all section information. Use Count Query Hits from the

CRN field to access the Schedule Section Query Form (SSASECQ) from which valid

section codes may be queried and selected.

Courses may also be entered on this form by entering a valid subject code, course

number, and section number combination. Use List from the Subject, Course Number, or

Section fields to display the Schedule Section Query Form (SSASECQ), from which valid

section information may be retrieved.

If the section has variable credit or billing hours, the system defaults in the low credit or

billing hours. Both credit and billing hours can be overridden for this CRN and all students

associated with the block on the Block Schedule Control Form (SSABLCK) or for an

individual student on the Student Course Registration Form (SFAREGS).

Total credit and billing hours for the Key Block Block (Code) field are displayed at the

bottom of SSABLCK. Please be aware that these hours are accurate only after saving all

of the changes.

332

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Note: Additional changes may be made to a student's registration on the

Student Course Registration Form (SFAREGS), so these values do not

necessarily reflect the registered credit hours for students associated with

the block.

If the section has multiple grading modes, the default grading mode is used in the Grade

Mode field of the Block Schedule Control Form (SSABLCK). The grading mode may be

overridden for this CRN and all students associated with the section of SSABLCK, or for

an individual student on the Student Course Registration Form (SFAREGS).

If a special approval code is required for the section, then the Special Approval field will

default to

Y. This flag can not be overridden on the Block Schedule Control Form

(SSABLCK).

The purpose of these defaults is to assure that the registration process occurs with a

minimal amount of data entry.

The Block Schedule Code information on the Schedule Detail Form (SSADETL) permits

the user to assign the course to a block code. This is a repeating section which lists all of

the block codes of which the course section is a part. Block codes may be added and

deleted in this section. If a block code is added through the Block Schedule Code

information, the special approval code override will be established when you save (as it is

in SSABLCK), and all other defaults will be set to the course as if they were added in

SSABLCK. If overrides are desired for this section and all students associated with the

block, the data must be overridden on the Block Schedule Control Form (SSABLCK). If

overrides are desired for an individual student, the changes must be made on the Student

Course Registration Form (SFAREGS).

All of the standard registration errors are still controlled by the Term Control Form

(SOATERM) and are performed at the time of registration on the Student Course

Registration Form (SFAREGS).

Block Scheduling Example

In the Fall of 1993, a freshman business student must take the following sections:

These sections would be added on the Block Schedule Control Form (SSABLCK) for the

Fall term 1993 and Freshman Business Student block. An example of a block code could

be FL93FRBS where:

10050 ACCT 101

10057 ECON 100

10087 ENGL 100

10197 HIST 105

333

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

From the Block Schedule Control Form (SSABLCK), the user is able to access the

following forms via the Options Menu:

The Block Schedule Query Form (SSABLKQ), which is a stand alone query form, displays

all the block codes which have been created for a term. An optional CRN may be entered

in the key. If the CRN is entered, then only those blocks which contain the CRN entered

are returned. This limits the display of block schedule codes to those blocks to which the

CRN belongs. For example, if the mass lecture section of Psychology 101 belongs to five

different freshman blocks, then the CRN may be entered in the key to verify that all five

blocks have been given the Psychology 101 section.

SSABLKQ may be accessed from the Block (Code) field of SSABLCK using Count Query

Hits and from the CRN field of SSABLCK using List to display related blocks. It may also

be accessed using Count Query Hits from the Block Schedule field in the Student Term

window of the Student Course Registration Form (SFAREGS) to display valid blocks for

the registration term.

The Block Schedule Section Query Form (SSABSCQ), which is a stand alone query form,

lists all the sections associated with a block code. A valid term and block code are

required in the key. From the Block (Code) field, you can display an LOV from STVBLCK,

or use Count Query Hits to display SSABLKQ.

The Schedule Section Query Form (SSASECQ) has a Block Schedule field. Placing a

in this field when entering a query will display only those courses that are related to a

block code.

The Schedule Cross List Definition Form (SSAXLST) has a Block (Code) field. If any of

the CRNs which are cross-listed also belong to a block code, the Block (Code) field

displays a value of

The Block Schedule Query Form (SSABLKQ) may be accessed from the Options Menu of

SSAXLST to see the detail information associated with the block. The Block Schedule

Control Form (SSABLCK) may be accessed from the Options Menu of the Schedule Form

(SSASECT).

FL93 = Fall 1993

FR = Freshman

BS = Business students

SSASECT Schedule Form

SSADETL Schedule Detail Form

SFAREGS Student Course Registration Form

334

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

General Student and Registration Modules

To attach a block code to a student, use the General Student Form (SGASTDN), the

Student Course Registration Form (SFAREGS), or the Student Block Load Process

(SGPBLCK). Block codes are maintained by effective term, like all other general student

information. Hence, an institution may want to maintain a consistent block code for each

student so that the information need not be updated on a term-by-term basis.

To associate students with block codes online, the user may enter a valid code in the

Block (Code) field on either the General Student Form (SGASTDN) or the Block

Schedule field on the Student Course Registration Form (SFAREGS). You can access

SSABLKQ from the Student Term window on SFAREGS and from the Additional

Information block of SGASTDN. Use Count Query Hits from the Block (Code) field

(SGASTDN) or the Block Schedule field (SFAREGS) to display the Block Schedule

Query Form (SSABLKQ) and query for valid codes for the effective term. (The CRN is

optional.)

Students may be associated with block codes in batch by using population selection and

the Student Block Load Process (SGPBLCK). This process will associate the groups of

students defined through population selection to a block code for an effective term.

Population selection and the Student Block Load Process (SGPBLCK) must be performed

for each population and block code you wish to assign.

Assigning a block code to a student will not automatically register the student for the

CRNs associated with the block code.

If a block code is associated with a student for a term, this information will display in the

Block Schedule field in the Student Term window of the Student Course Registration

Form (SFAREGS). This information will assist the user when performing block scheduling

registration online.

Two fields located in the Registration information of this form, the Process Block and

Delete All CRNs fields, are described below.

Check the Process Block box and use Next Block to default the CRNs associated with

the student's block code into SFAREGS. If any values (grading mode, variable credit

hours) have options other than the defaults available, the user is permitted to override

these values at this time. However, the system will not prompt you to enter values in the

multiple value fields as it normally would in registration, because the system assumes you

have done the bulk of your adjustments at the section level when assigning CRNs to a

block code. Entering a student in a block does not register the student for the associated

CRNs; it simply defaults the CRNs to SFAREGS if this process is

selected.

Check the Delete All CRNs box and use Next Block to activate the system to delete all

the CRNs for the active person and term in the key. This enables you to quickly delete

CRNs if a student was associated with the wrong block, or if they have changed blocks.

The Process Block and Delete All CRNs requests cannot be processed concurrently.

For example, a student assigned in the Fall of 1993 to the Freshman Business Student

block code was registered for the following sections:

335

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

At a later time during the registration period, the student needed to be removed from this

block and added into the Computer Science block.

In order to accurately perform this function, you must enter the Student Course

Registration Form (SFAREGS) and delete all CRNs. To do this, check the Delete All

CRNs box and use Next Block. Next, the block code for the student needs to be changed.

This can be done in SFAREGS. (It may also be changed in SGASTDN, but there is no

need to access this form, since SFAREGS is active.) Finally, after entering the Computer

Science block code for the student, you must check the Process Block box and use Next

Block. The CRNs associated with the block will default into the form.

Note: Delete All CRNs will work for any student, not just those students

assigned to a block code.

Additional individual courses may be added or deleted from the Student Course

Registration Form (SFAREGS) as needed to modify the student's registration.

The Block Indicator field located on the Registration Section Query Form (SFQSECM)

and the Block field located on the Registration Course Query Form (SFQSECT) indicate if

the course being queried is associated with a block code.

Note: Simply deleting the block code from SFAREGS or SGASTDN will

not remove the CRNs from the student's registration once the student has

been processed either online or in batch through Course Request and

Scheduling processing.

Block scheduling registration may be performed for mass registration using a block code

on the Registration Mass Entry Form (SFAMREG). Please refer to the “Mass Entry

Processing” appendix for more information.

Block Scheduling registration may be performed in batch using Course Request and

Scheduling. To begin this process, use population selection to populate the Student

Course Request Form (SFACREQ) with the CRNs of the selected students' block codes

via the Course Request Load Process (SFPBLCK). SFPBLCK defaults the CRNs of a

student's block code to that student's record on the Student Course Request Form

(SFACREQ).

The selected students will now have course requests for the term, and the steps for

Course Request and Scheduling may be performed. Below is a brief outline of the steps

which need to be followed to complete this process. Please refer to the Course Request

and Scheduling Handbook for more details. Note that any student, (not just those

associated with block codes), with student requests for the term will be processed through

Course Request and Scheduling.

10050 ACCT 101

10057 ECON 100

10087 ENGL 100

10197 HIST 105

336

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Reports and Processes

The following reports and processes are used with block scheduling:

• The Term Roll Report (SSRROLL) has a parameter that allows you to roll block

schedule codes from one term to another.

• The Scheduled Section Tally Report (SSRTALY) displays blocks associated with a CRN

along with the information that has been previously reported.

• The Student Report (SGRSTDN) also displays the student's block code.

• The Student Block Load Process (SGPBLCK) associates a group of students defined

through population selection to a block code for an effective term.

• The Course Request Load Process (SFPBLCK) defaults the CRNs of a student's block

code to the selected student's record on the Student Course Request Form (SFACREQ)

for the effective term.

Sample Test Plan

1. Create block codes on the Block Code Validation Form (STVBLCK).

2. In the Block Schedule Control Form (SSABLCK) or in the Schedule Detail Form

(SSADETL), associate sections with the block codes for the effective term.

FL94FRUD (Fall 1994, Freshman, Undecided)

FL94SOBS (Fall 1994, Sophomore, Business)

FL94JRNR (Fall 1994, Junior, Nursing)

199401 FL94FRUD:

ENGL 100

COMP 110

BIOL 101

HIST 100

199401 FL94SOBS:

BUAD 200

MKTG 200

MKTG 201

ECON 200

199401 FL94JRNR:

GENE 300

337

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

3. Assign students to block codes online for the desired term via the General Student

Form (SGASTDN) or the Student Course Registration Form (SFAREGS). To assign

students to block codes using batch processing, perform population selection, and run

the Student Block Load Process (SGPBLCK) for that population.

A population selection for the new freshmen might specify effective term, level,

degree, and major. For example:

4. Process block codes for your students online by entering the Student Course

Registration Form (SFAREGS) and checking the Process Block box, and then use

Next Block. This will default the CRNs associated with the student's block code to

SFAREGS. Regular registration processing should be continued from this point.

(Additional courses may be added, and all error checking will be performed at this

time.)

To process block codes in batch, use population selection, and run the Course

Request Load Process (SFPBLCK) for the that population.

A population selection may include effective term and block codes. For example:

Running the Course Request Load Process (SFPBLCK) will populate the Student

Course Request Form (SFACREQ) with the CRNs of the student's block. To continue

batch block scheduling, the steps for Course Request and Scheduling must now be

followed.

Course Request Processing Operating Procedures

This section provides the user with step-by-step instructions for running Course Request

and Scheduling Processing. Refer to this section, along with the Module Flowchart in the

Course Request and Scheduling Handbook, as a guideline.

1. Enter the student's course requests using the Student Course Request Form

(SFACREQ), or load the request data to the SFBCREQ Oracle table using the

HCAD 300

NURS 300

BIOL 301

SGBSTDN_TERM_CODE_EFF

= ’199401’ AND

SGBSTDN_LEVL_CODE

=’01’ AND

SGBSTDN_DEGC_CODE

=’00’ AND

SGBSTDN_MAJR_CODE

= ’0000’

SGBSTDN_TERM_CODE_EFF

= ’199401’ AND

SGBSTDN_MAJR_CODE

= ’FL94JRNR’

338

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

ORACLE*Loader Utility, and run the Course Request Load Process (SFPBLCK) for a

selected population.

2. Run the Course Request Edit Report (SFPCREQ) batch program to validate the

student's course request information. Review the report for error conditions, (i.e.,

student not admitted for this term or ID does not exist). Correct and rerun this step

until satisfactory results are obtained.

Note: At the time that course requests are entered online through the

Student Course Request Form (SFACREQ), the system validates that the

CRN exists but does not check for holds, level restrictions, etc. It is only

after the Course Request Validation Process has been run through

SFPCREQ that you will detect these errors on the Course Request Edit

Report (SFPCREQ). You should call up the Student Course Request

Form (SFACREQ) for each of the students listed on the Course Request

Edit Report, and make any necessary corrections.

Note: A check appears in the Status checkbox for every course request

combination (primary/alternate) that has passed the initial validation

criteria. The requests that are not valid have an unchecked Status box. If

the request has not yet been run through the Course Request Validation

Process, the Status box is blank.

3. Enter parameter values in job submission, and then run the job SCTH1000 to extract

course request and bio/demo data from Banner. Review the Control Report for errors

before continuing.

4. Enter parameter values in job submission, and then run the job

SCTC1000 to extract

course schedule data from Banner. Review the Control Report for errors before

continuing.

5. Enter parameter values in job submission, and then run the job SCTC1500 to create

the two Oracle tables SFBREST and SFBSECT that contain restriction and relative

course information for each section extracted from Banner. Review the Control Report

for errors before continuing.

6. Enter parameter values in job submission, and then run the job

SCTC2000 to begin

the course request process. This process produces an Update Change Register

(Audit Trail) that can be used to validate that the proper requests have been

processed and to detect errors (i.e., time conflicts, level restrictions, etc.) in a

student's course request set. If changes are made to the student's requests using

Banner, it will be necessary to re-run from Step 2. Review the Control Report for errors

before continuing.

7. Enter parameter values in job submission, and then run the job CRQC3000 to

produce selected reports from the course request process. Review these reports and

make corrective actions if necessary. If changes are made to Banner, then the

process must be re-started from Step 2. When you are ready for the final run of course

request (i.e., you are satisfied with the results and have no further changes to make to

Banner), then be sure the Create Registration File parameter is set to

Y. This option

creates the input Student Scheduling.

339

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Scheduling Process Operating Procedures

This section provides the user with step-by-step instructions for running the Schedule

Process. Refer to this section, along with the Module Flowchart in the Course Request

and Scheduling Handbook, as a guideline.

Before starting be sure you have completed the steps outlined in the Course Request and

Scheduling Operating Procedures.

1. Enter parameter values in job submission, and then run job SCTD0600 to begin the

Student Scheduling. Review the output from this process, and if no errors are

encountered, continue to the next step. If you make changes to the Banner data, then

you must re-run the Course Request Processing.

2. Enter parameter values in job submission, and then run job SCHC3000 to produce

selected reports from the Student Scheduling Process. Review these reports and

make corrective actions. If you make changes to the Banner data, then you must re-

run the Course Request Processing.

At this point the Scheduling process has been completed. The following steps deal with

loading the data from Scheduling to the Banner Registration module. Note that once the

load has been run for a student, that student's requests cannot be re-run.

3. Start up ORACLE*SQLLDR using the

stucreq.ctl control file and the enrollment

file

d1520.dat as input. This process will create an interim Oracle registration table

(SFRFREQ) that is used as input to the next step.

4. Run the Course Request Update (SFPFREQ) batch program to load the course

request and schedule data to the Banner registration tables and update the section

counts. Review the Audit Trail for errors.

Auto Scheduling Processing

This section discusses auto scheduling with Schedule25.

Overview

This functionality is used to create the interface between Banner Schedule processing and

the third party scheduling products Schedule25/Model25.

This includes:

• generating a campus profile for physical features, partitions, departments, rooms, and a

control file,

• capturing this information in the Catalog and Schedule modules and generating a class

descriptor file,

• extracting the Banner data to create all files required to interface to the scheduling tool,

• creating a work file and viewing/updating extraction data with an associated process to

be used for housekeeping of this file, and

• integrating classroom assignment information from Schedule25.

340

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

You may view assignments made by Schedule25, accept or reject the assignments, and

accept and/or load the accepted assignments (and those that have not been rejected) into

Banner.

Getting Started

The following steps are suggested for the initial positioning of Banner for use with the third

party scheduling product.

1. Create validation table entries.

2. Define your campus.

3. Define room attributes and characteristics of your classrooms.

4. Record class location and required room characteristics at the subject level.

5. Record class location and room characteristic overrides (if any) at the course, section,

or meeting time level.

6. Complete your class setup.

7. Extract data from Banner.

8. Run Schedule25.

9. Review Scheduler output.

10. Update the Work Table and review.

11. Update class records in SSRMEET.

12. Purge appropriate work table entries.

Create your validation table entries

1. Define the scheduler number for the appropriate partition codes using the Scheduler

Sequence (Number) field on GTVPARS.

2. Define the room attribute codes using the Auto Schedule and Scheduler Number

checkboxes on STVRDEF.

3. Define which schedule types are eligible to be scheduled using the Automatic

Schedule checkbox on STVSCHD.

4. Ensure that scheduling status codes have been loaded to GTVSCHS from the seed

data that is provided.

Define your campus

If it is not necessary to define partitions at your institution, if they do not play a role in your

current classroom allocation. This step is not required. Otherwise, do the following.

1. Ensure that seed data that is provided has been loaded into the Scheduling Partition

Validation Form (GTVPARS). This seed data consists of a default partition code (00).

Once loaded, define your partitions (physical groupings of buildings and/or rooms) at

your school or campus on this form.

341

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

2. Draw a blueprint of your school or campus by assigning a partition code to those

buildings containing classrooms to be used in the class assignment process. This can

be accomplished by entering a partition code on the Building Definition Form

(SLABLDG). All room records created after this update will automatically receive this

partition code.

3. Assign a partition code to a classroom using the Room Definition Form (SLARDEF).

Existing room records (i.e., rooms defined after a partition code was assigned to the

building record) do not need to have this code entered unless this classroom requires

an override of the building default.

Define room attributes and characteristics for your classrooms

Again, if room allocation according to room characteristics is not required, this step is not

required. Otherwise, do the following.

1. Identify those room attribute codes that will be used in the scheduling process using

the Auto Schedule and Scheduler Number fields on the Building/Room Attribute

Code Validation Form (STVRDEF).

2. Assign the classroom characteristics in the Room Attributes block of the Room

Definition Form (SLARDEF) by selecting attribute codes defined as auto schedule in

STVRDEF. For example: if the room is characterized as wheelchair accessible or has

Lab or Audio Visual equipment, this information should be associated with the room.

Although this step is not required, is strongly encouraged that it be used to ensure that

classes requiring these attributes will be allocated to the appropriate classroom.

3. If a classroom will be unavailable for scheduling for all or part of the term, use the

Room Inactivation block on SLARDEF to identify the dates, times, and/or days of the

week that classes should not be booked into these rooms.

Record class location and required room characteristics at the subject

level

Partition and room attribute preferences should be assigned at the subject level using the

Subject Scheduling Rules Form (SSASBSH). These preferences will be used as the basis

for the meeting time records during the extract process.

These preferences should represent the base requirements and should be applicable for

all sections created for this subject. These values can be overridden but not excluded in

the next step if required.

Partitions

1. Decide if you are using partitions.

If partitions are being used as a determining factor in room scheduling, then do the

following.

2. Define your partition preferences at the subject level using the Partition Preferences

block in the main window on SSASBSH.

3. Define your partition preferences at the course level using the Partition Preferences

block in the Partition and Room Attribute Preferences window on SCACRSE.

342

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

4. Define your partition preferences at the section level using the Partition Preferences

block in the Section Scheduler Preferences window on SSASECT.

5. Define your partition preferences at the class level using the Partition Preferences

block in the Meeting Time Preferences window on SSASECT.

For example: English classes always held in a particular building.

Room Attributes

1. Decide if you are using room attributes.

If room attributes are being used as a determining factor in room scheduling, then do

the following.

2. Define your room attribute preferences optionally at the subject level using the Room

Attribute Preferences block in the main window on SSASBSH.

3. Define your room attribute preferences optionally at the course level using the Room

Attribute Preferences block in the Partition and Room Attribute Preferences window

on SCACRSE.

4. Define your room attribute preferences at the section level using the Room Attribute

Preferences block in the Section Scheduler Preferences window on SSASECT.

5. Define your room attribute preferences at the class level using the Room Attribute

Preferences block in the Meeting Time Preferences window on SSASECT.

For example: English classes always need an overhead projector.

6. Assign a scheduling status code to a class or meeting time using the Auto Scheduler

field in the Meeting Time window on SSASECT.

Record class location and room characteristic overrides (if any) at the

course, section, or meeting time level

You can also define partition preferences at other levels, but these are viewed as

overrides to the requirements set at the subject level.

• Course Preferences are set in the Partition Preferences block of the Course Catalog

Form (SCACRSE) and will apply to all sections and meeting times created for this

course.

• Section Preferences are set in the Section Partition Preferences block of the Schedule

Form (SSASECT) and will apply to all meetings times created for this section.

• Meeting Time Preferences are set in the Meeting Time Partition Preferences block of the

Schedule Form (SSASECT) and will apply to an individual meeting time only.

The extract process will first look to the meeting time preferences, then the section, and

lastly the course preferences to record overrides to the subject level definitions.

For example:

If overrides were identified at the section level, no meeting time preferences would be

entered causing the extract to look for section preferences. Having found those

records, no further search would be conducted.

343

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Therefore, in this example, if there were also course preferences defined, they would

not be picked up for the creation of the Class Descriptor records.

Complete the class setup

Assuming that all meeting time records have been created in the Schedule Form

(SSASECT), there are a few more requirements remaining for those classes requiring

classroom allocation.

1. Identify those schedule types that are eligible to be scheduled through the use of the

Automatic Scheduler checkbox on the Schedule Type Code Validation Form

(STVSCHD).

2. Ensure that the provided seed data is loaded into the Scheduling Status Code

Validation Form (GTVSCHS). These codes will be attached to those meeting times

requiring classroom assignment via Schedule25.

3. Assign an appropriate scheduling status code to a class and/or meeting time record

using the Auto Scheduler field in the Meeting Time window on SSASECT. This

scheduling status code should reflect the action that the scheduling tool must

accomplish, such as needs a classroom assignment.

4. Ensure that the schedule type for the section has been marked as eligible by checking

the Automatic Scheduler checkbox in STVSCHD.

Extract data from Banner

1. Define the control records required by Schedule25 for the terms to be processed in

the Scheduling Tool Interface Control Form (SSACTRL).

2. Create a subject code to be used in the creation of room inactivation “phantom class”

in the Subject Code Validation Form (STVSUBJ).

3. Run the Schedule25 and Work File Creation Process (SSRSCRM) for the required

term(s) and/or campus(es).

4. Review the extract data in Scheduler Work Form (SSASCHW). Any modifications or

corrections should be made in Banner, and the extract should be run.

Review scheduler output

Schedule25 produces many valuable reports from listings of classes placed, classes not

placed, placement analysis, and rooms still available for placement to process diagnostic

messages (exception or error messages).

See the third party Schedule25 Process Manual for report descriptions and examples.

Update work table and review

1. Run the Scheduler Work Table Update Process (SSRSCUP).

344

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

2. If necessary, review the data returned from Schedule25. Updates to a select few fields

are possible but should be done with great caution. Please see the information on

SSRSCUP later in this section.

3. It is possible to produce a report of what the meeting time information would likely be,

prior to actually saving the information to the SSRMEET table, by running the Class

Schedule Report (SSRSECT).

Update class records in SSRMEET

1. Run the Building/Room Update Process (SSRSCMT).

2. If the update is successful, the Update (Indicator) will be updated on the Scheduler

Work Form (SSASCHW).

3. If a record has not been updated in Banner, research will be required to determine the

reason. It may be necessary to manually update the meeting time record if, for some

reason, the meeting time record in Banner has been changed since the extract

process was run.

Purge appropriate work table entries

Records may be purged from the work table by running the Scheduler Work Table Purge

Process (SSRSCPR) for the appropriate term and/or campus.

Forms Used in Schedule25 Processing

The following Banner forms are used with Schedule25 processing.

Scheduling Status Code Validation Form (GTVSCHS)

This form is used to store Schedule25 status codes. These codes control whether the

section is to be scheduled and listed.

The following codes are required by Schedule25 for assignment and are delivered as

seed data:

Code Description

NSM Class needs a room assignment.

1SM Class needs a room assignment and has a preferred first choice room

indicated in the Room Name field. This code limits the initial pool of

candidate rooms in the assignment algorithm.

WSM Class needs a room assignment and must be assigned with the preceding

NSM or 1SM record to the same room at the same time (cross-listed).

RSM Class is related to the preceding NSM or 1SM record and must be

assigned to the same room but not at the same days/time.

345

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

The following codes are required by Schedule25 for pre-assignment and are delivered as

seed data:

Partition Code Validation Form (GTVPARS)

This form is used to define partition codes (a category or grouping of rooms). These codes

are optional, but can be instrumental in the scheduling process providing preferred

placement of classes in a geographic area of the school.

The partition can be placed at various levels:

• on the subject (referred to in Schedule25 documentation as department)

• on the course

• on the section

• on the meeting time for the section

• on the building

• on the individual room

NXM Class needs a room assignment and can share a room with another class

whose times overlap with it (can be doubled-booked).

1XM Class needs a room assignment, has a preferred first choice room

indicated in the Room Name field, and can share a room with another

class whose times overlap with it (can be double-booked).

RXM Class is related to the previous NXM or 1XM record and must be assigned

to the same room at the same or overlapping times.

Code Description

ASM Class has a room assignment that was made manually or in another

system, such as the student information system.

AXM Class has a room assignment that was made manually or in another

system, and the class time span overlaps part of all of the time span of

another class assigned to the same room (double-booking or intentional

conflict).

HSM This is a set of home cross-listed classes pre-assigned to the same room

at identical days and times.

VSM This is a set of visitor cross-listed classes pre-assigned to the same room

at identical days and times.

5SM Schedule25 assigned the class a room during a previous run.

5XM Schedule25 assigned the class a room, and it is double-booked with

another class.

Code Description

346

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

When a new partition code and description are entered and saved in this form, a

sequence number is generated if the Scheduler Sequence (Number) field is Null. This

provides a unique identifier that will, in turn, be used in the Schedule25 algorithm. The

partition code serves as a convenience for the user and is not extracted to the Scheduler

software.

Note: You can add a campus code to a partition.

The Schedule25 Rooms file requires that each room have a partition. Use the seed entry

of code

00 for the default partition.

Subject Scheduling Rules Form (SSASBSH)

This form facilitates the assignment of partitions and room attribute preferences at the

subject level.

Scheduling Tool Interface Control Form (SSACTRL)

This form is used to enter and update the control file parameters necessary to run

Schedule25.

Scheduler Work Form (SSASCHW)

This form can be used to:

• View the data from Banner prior to being submitted to Schedule25.

• Preview the results of Schedule25 prior to its integration into Banner.

Note: Preference records are not viewable.

Schedule Type Code Validation Form (STVSCHD)

Use the Automatic Scheduler field to denote which sections to extract for input into the

Schedule25 process when the schedule type is assigned to a CRN. When this indicator is

checked, only sections with a schedule type defined to have classes automatically

scheduled will be extracted.

Building/Room Attribute Code Validation Form (STVRDEF)

Use the following fields for Schedule25 processing.

• The Auto Schedule checkbox is used to denote which sections to extract for input into

the Schedule25 process when the schedule type is assigned to a CRN. This checkbox

also controls the operation of the Scheduler Number field.

• If the Auto Schedule checkbox is checked, Scheduler Number field will be

automatically populated with a unique one-up number, if the Schedule25 Code is Null

when the attribute record is saved. Or, the user can enter a unique one-up number. If the

Auto Schedule checkbox is unchecked, the Scheduler Number value will be blank.

347

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

• Use the Resequence item in the Options Menu to resequence the value in the

Scheduler Number field. This process will overwrite the existing code and replace it in

sequence starting with a value of

01.

• Although the (Attribute) Code is primarily for use with classroom requirements, it is also

used to populate the Schedule25 files.

Building Definition Form (SLABLDG)

Use the Partition field in the Building Definition block in the main window to define an

appropriate partition code for the building and provide a means to group rooms for

scheduling purposes. Valid values come from GTVPARS.

This partition code will default to the room when new entries are created on SLARDEF. If

the partition code is changed, it will not affect existing room definitions but will be reflected

in any new room records that are created.

• If all rooms in a building are considered one partition, then the partition code could be

defined at the building level, rather than at the individual room level, to save data entry.

• If a building is divided into several partitions, the partition code should not be assigned

to the building but should be entered for the individual rooms.

• If the majority of rooms within a building constitute one partition, you can record the

partition on the building and override the applicable code for rooms not considered part

of the “building” partition.

• The extract process reads the partition from the room definition. If a partition code is not

established on the room record, the partition code defined on this form will be retrieved.

Room Definition Form (SLARDEF)

Use the Partition field in the Room Definition block in the main window to define an

appropriate partition code for the room and provide a means to group rooms for

scheduling purposes. Valid values come from GTVPARS.

If a partition code has been defined for the corresponding building record, the building

partition code will default into this field. It is possible that you may wish to deviate from the

partition code that has been established for the building. In that case, you may change the

displayed value.

The extract process will first read the partition from the room definition. If a partition code

is not established on the room record, the partition code defined for the building will be

retrieved.

Attributes, Inactive Dates, and Comments Window

Use the Begin Time and End Time fields in the Room Inactivation block to enter the times

that the room will be unavailable to schedule classes. The time is entered in military

format.

The end date and end time must be greater than the start date and start time respectively.

Also, start dates and times cannot be entered without end dates and times and vice versa.

These checks will avoid diagnostic errors in the Schedule25 software.

348

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Use the checkboxes for the day s of the week (Mon, Tues, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun) to

allow you to enter the days that the room will be unavailable to schedule classes.

A room may be de-activated a number of ways:

• If the room was unavailable every day for a particular time period, you would need to

enter the appropriate start and end dates.

• If the room was unavailable for a particular period of the day, the effective start and end

dates would need to be entered, as well as the start and end times of the inactivation.

• If the room was unavailable on a specific day of the week for a given time period, the

day of the week would be checked, and the affected start/end dates would be entered.

The room inactivation records will result in the creation of phantom classes in the

Scheduler Extract with a pre-assigned status to prevent class assignments. These

phantom classes will contain a CRN of

99999 and a course number of 9999.

Basic Course Information Form (SCACRSE)

You can access the Partition and Room Attribute Preferences window from other windows

in the form, using the Options Menu.

Partition and Room Attribute Preferences Window:

This window has two blocks, the Partition Preferences block and the Room Attribute

Preferences block.

Partition Preferences Block

Use the Partition Preferences block to inform the Scheduler software that classes for

related CRNs should be assigned to a particular location on campus and to provide the

option to state the room scheduling preferences for the course. The partition preferences

defined on the catalog record are defaulted to the CRN when new sections are created.

If the partition preference code in the Catalog module is blank, the preferences defined for

the subject are displayed. If you wish to modify this value, valid values come from

STVRDEF.

The Preference (Number) field accepts the entry of a two digit number. Valid values are

01, 02, 03, or 04. Multiple records for the same preference number can be entered.

Use the Copy button or a Duplicate Record function to copy preferences from one term

range to another.

Room Attribute Preferences Block

Use the Room Attribute Preferences block to define the room attributes (i.e., blackboard,

projector, overhead) required to facilitate the needs of the instructor.

If the room attribute preference code in the Catalog module is blank, the preferences

defined for the subject are displayed. If you wish to modify this value, valid values come

from GTVPARS.

349

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

The Preference (Number) field accepts the entry of a two digit number. Valid values are

01, 02, 03, or 04. Multiple records for the same preference number can be entered.

Use the Copy button or a Duplicate Record function to copy preferences from one term

range to another.

Schedule Form (SSASECT)

Use the Options Menu selections to access the Section Scheduler Preferences window

and the Meeting Time Preferences window.

Meeting Time Window:

Use the following fields for Schedule25 processing.

• The Auto Scheduler field is used to display the assignment code for the meeting time,

whether the meeting time should be scheduled by Schedule25, and the scheduling

needs of the class i.e., cross-listed. Valid values come from GTVSCHS.

Meeting times with a pre-assigned status are processed without regard for blackout

times in the pre-assigned room.

• The Scheduler Preference button is used to access the Meeting Time Preferences

block to display the partition preferences and/or room attributes that are defined for an

individual meeting time.

• The Partition Details checkbox is display only. This checkbox is checked if meeting

time partition preferences have already been defined for this meeting time. Checked

indicates there are preferences; unchecked indicates there are no preferences.

• The Room Attribute Details checkbox is display only. This checkbox is checked if

meeting time room attribute preferences have already been defined for this meeting

time. Checked means there are preferences; unchecked means there are no

preferences.

Section Scheduler Preferences Window:

This window has two blocks, the Partition Preferences block and the Room Attribute

Preferences block.

Partition Preferences Block

Use the Partition Preferences block to define partition preferences for scheduling

purposes.

If the partition preference code in the section is blank, the Catalog preferences are

displayed. If the Catalog preferences are blank, the preferences defined for the subject

are displayed. If you wish to modify this value, valid values come from GTVPARS.

The Preference Number field accepts the entry of a two digit number. Valid values are

01, 02, 03, or 04. Multiple records for the same preference number can be entered.

350

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Room Attribute Preferences Block

Use the Room Attribute Preferences block to define room attributes (i.e., blackboard,

projector, overhead) that are required to ensure that the proper equipment is also

assigned to the room.

If the room attribute preference code in the section is blank, the Catalog preferences are

displayed. If the Catalog preferences are blank, the preferences defined for the subject

are displayed. If you wish to modify this value, valid values come from STVRDEF.

The Preference Number field accepts the entry of a two digit number. Valid values are

01, 02, 03, or 04. Multiple records for the same preference number can be entered.

Meeting Time Preferences Window:

This window is used to override the section preferences for an individual class. This block

is displayed by selecting the Scheduler Preference button in the Meeting Time block for

an individual meeting time.

The meeting time information displayed in this block defaults from the record where the

cursor was positioned in the Meeting Time block. The start and end dates and times are

displayed, as well as the days of the weeks for the class.

Partition Preferences Block

Use the Partition Preferences block to define partition preferences for scheduling

purposes.

If the partition preference code in the section is blank, the Catalog preferences are

displayed. If the Catalog preferences are blank, the preferences defined for the subject

are displayed. If you wish to modify this value, valid values come from GTVPARS.

The Preference Number field accepts the entry of a two digit number. Valid values are

01, 02, 03, or 04. Multiple records for the same preference number can be entered.

Room Attribute Preferences Block

Use the Room Attribute Preferences block to define room attributes (i.e., blackboard,

projector, overhead) that are required to facilitate the needs of the instructor.

If the room attribute preference code in the section is blank, the Catalog preferences are

displayed. If the Catalog preferences are blank, the preferences defined for the subject

are displayed. If you wish to modify this value, valid values come from STVRDEF.

The Preference Number field accepts the entry of a two digit number. Valid values are

01, 02, 03, or 04. Multiple records for the same preference number can be entered.

351

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Reports and Processes Used in Schedule25 Processing

Here are the Banner reports and processes used with Schedule25.

Room Attribute Sequence Update Process (SSRATSQ)

This process allows you to automatically populate the sequence number of the room

attribute information in the STVRDEF table. This process can be run at your discretion to

populate values, resequence existing values, or delete all values and can sort the

information by alpha or numeric organization.

Schedule25 Work File Creation Process (SSRSCRM)

This process is used to create the building, room, partition, department (subject), class

descriptor, and control files required to run the scheduling tool. It needs to be run a

minimum of once for each scheduling cycle. All files have a length of 81characters (if the

default values are used in the control file).

Even though Schedule25 requires a standard naming convention for these data (in lower

case), this process will permit you to change the file names. However, the files being read

into Schedule25 must follow the mandated naming convention.

The following files are created by running this process.

• Room Attribute File (phys.date)

• Partition File (part.dat)

• Room File (rooms.dat)

• Department Subject File (depts.dat)

• Control File (ctrl.dat)

• Class Descriptor File (datain.dat)

These files will be written to the same directory as the job listing.

Room Attribute File (phys.date)

This file represents all room attributes identified in STVRDEF as auto schedule. This data

is not room-specific. A maximum of 96 room attributes will be accepted by Schedule25.

Banner data exported:

Room Attribute Code and Name

STVRDEF_CODE

STVRDEF_DESC

Example:

AV Audio Visual

Equipment

Room Attribute Sequencer

Number

STVRDEF_SCHEDULER_

NUMBER

Example: 45

352

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Partition File (part.dat)

This file represents all partitions codes identified in GTVPARS. If the extract process is

being run for a specific campus (as defined in the Scheduling Campus Code parameter),

only partition codes with a matching campus code will be selected. If no campus code has

been selected at the running of this process, all GTVPARS rows will be selected. This data

is not room specific. A maximum of 96 partitions will be accepted by Schedule25.

Banner data exported:

Room File (rooms.dat)

This file represents active classrooms defined in SLARDEF based on the campus code

entered in the extract parameters. If multiple terms are entered, the minimum term entered

in the parameter is used in the selection of active rooms. If no campus is entered at the

time the extract process is run, then all rooms will be selected.

This file contains a minimum of three different records, with the P record being optional:

• Room Name information (N record)

• Room Size information (S record)

• Location/Partition information (L record)

• Room Attribute information (P record)

The location record will contain the partition code entered on the room definition in Banner.

If no partition is assigned at the room level, the partition code entered on the building

definition is extracted. If the building record has not been assigned a partition code, then

the default partition code (value 00) is used. The physical attributes, if any, reflect the

codes entered in the Room Attributes block of SLARDEF.

Banner data exported:

N (Name) Record

Partition Code and Name

GTVPARS_CODE

GTVPARS_DESC

Example:

Default Partition

Partition Sequencer Number

GTVPARS_SCHEDULER_

NUMBER

Example: 01

Room Name

SLBRDEF_BLDG_CODE

SLBRDEF_ROOM_

NUMBER

Example:

BIOL 101

353

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

S (Size) Record

L (Location) Record

P (Physical Attribute) Record – Not required

Department Subject File (depts.dat)

This file represents information about each subject entered in STVSUBJ. Schedule25

requires that a location record be created for each department and/or subject. Preferences

used for extract purposes are drawn from the locations and room attributes entered on

SSASBSH. If no location preferences are defined on this form for the subject, the default

partition is used. Although only four location and room attribute preferences are written to

the file for each subject, multiple preferences will be concatenated on these records based

on the priority assigned (Preference Number). A maximum of 500 subjects will be

accepted by Schedule25.

This file contains a minimum of three different records with the P record being optional:

• Subject name information (N record)

• Subject key information (K record)

• Campus partition preferences (C record)

• Room attribute preferences (P record)

Banner data exported:

Seating Capacity

SLBRDEF_CAPACITY

Example:

Partition Number

GTVPARS_SCHEDULER_

NUMBER

Of partition assigned at

room level (if any), or

building level (if any) or

default partition

Example:

Room Attribute Number

If several attributes are defined,

they will be strung together

separated by a comma.

STVRDEF_SCHEDULER_

NUMBER

Of attributes assigned at

room level (if any), or

building level (if any)

Example:

37, 39

354

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

N (Name) Record

K (Key) Record

Note: The placement and length of the subject code on this record is

dependent upon the parameters specified for the Department ID in the

Scheduling Tool Interface Control Form (SSACTRL).

C (Campus Partition) Record (up to 4 records will be created)

P (Physical Attribute) Record – Not required

Control File (ctrl.dat)

This file defines the placement of values in the Class Descriptor table for use by the

extract process, as well as parameters necessary for the execution of the assignment

algorithm. Input data for this file is retrieved from the Scheduling Tool Interface Control

Form (SSACTRL). The selection of the term and campus are determined by values

entered in the Scheduling Term Code and Scheduling Campus Code parameters.

One record will be created in this file for each of the fields contained in SSACTRL.

Class Descriptor File (datain.dat)

This file contains information about all active classes (sections containing a status code

identified as active in STVSSTS) requiring a room assignment by the Schedule25

assignment algorithms, manually assigned (pre-assigned) classes, as well as phantom

Subject Name

STVSUBJ_DESC

Example:

Introduction to Biology

Subject Code

STVSUBJ_CODE

Example:

BIOL

Partition Preferences

If several partitions are defined,

they will be strung together

separated by a comma.

GTVPARS_SCHEDULER_

NUMBER

Of partition entered

Example:

01, 45

Room Attribute Preference

If several attributes are defined,

they will be strung together

separated by a comma.

STVRDEF_SCHEDULER_

NUMBER

Of attributes entered

Example:

37, 39

355

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

classes created to implement room inactivations identified in SLARDEF. Only those

classes matching the term code(s) or date ranges entered in the parameters will be

selected.

The following selection criteria will be used when examining a section for extraction:

• Are meeting times defined?

• Does the section have a schedule type defined to be automatically scheduled?

• Has a Schedule25 status code been assigned to the meeting time record?

This file contains three different record types:

• Class descriptor record

• Room attribute preferences overrides (P record)

• Partition preferences overrides (L record)

Note: Preference override records will only be created if the class

descriptor record contains a scheduling status code of

NSM or 1SM.

Cross-listed sections (identified by the cross link code assigned to the section in

SSASECT) requiring room assignment will be grouped together. Only one of these

sections should contain the scheduling code of

NSM (needs room assignment) on the

meeting time record, with the others identified as

WSM.

For a more in depth explanation of the various scheduling codes, please consult your third

party Schedule25 Process Manual.

This process will seek out preference overrides, first accessing the meeting time

preferences. If no records have been created at the meeting time level, the section

preferences will be examined. If no records have been identified there, the course

preference tables will be considered. If no preference overrides are defined at any of these

levels, no P or L records will be generated.

Banner data exported:

Department ID

SSBSECT_SUBJ_CODE

SSBSECT_CRN

SSBSECT_TERM_CODE

Example:

BIOL 10001 200110

356

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Note: The placement and length of the fields on this record are

dependent upon the parameters specified in the Scheduling Tool

Interface Control Form (SSACTRL).

Days of the Week

SSRMEET_SUN_DAY

SSRMEET_MON_DAY

SSRMEET_TUE_DAY

SSRMEET_WED_DAY

SSRMEET_THU_DAY

SSRMEET_FRI_DAY

SSRMEET_SAT_DAY

Example: UMTWRFS

Start Time (Hours & Minutes)

From

SSRMEET_BEGIN_

TIME

Example: 0800

Finish Time (Hours & Minutes)

From

SSRMEET_END_

TIME

Example: 0850

AM/PM Designator H (military time)

Maximum Enrollment

SSBSECT_MAX_ENRL

Or default value defined in

Default Enrollment field

in SSACTRL if none is

defined at the section

level.

Example: 0050

Begin Month and Day

From

SSRMEET_START_

DATE

Example: 1031

End Month and Day

From

SSRMEET_END_

DATE

Example: 1231

Room Name

(pre-assigned classes only)

SSBSECT_BLDG_CODE

SSBSECT_ROOM_CODE

Example: BIOL 101

Scheduling Assignment Code

SSRMEET_SCHS_CODE

Example: NSM

357

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

P (Physical Attribute) Record – Overrides to those defined at the subject level, if

applicable

L (Campus Partition) Record – Overrides to those defined at the subject level, if applicable

Phantom Class Records

These records are created by the extract to reflect room inactivation periods defined in the

Room Inactivation block on SLARDEF. Rooms with inactive time periods in the term code

range selected in the Scheduling Term Code parameter are created as pre-assigned

classes. This prevents Schedule25 from assigning another class to that room.

Banner data exported:

Room Attribute

If several attributes are defined,

they will be strung together

separated by a comma.

STVRDEF_SCHEDULER_

NUMBER

Of attribute assigned at

meeting time level (if any),

or section level (if any) or

course level (if any)

Example: 37, 39

Partition Preference

If several partitions are defined,

they would be strung together

separated by a comma.

GTVPARS_SCHEDULER_

NUMBER

Of partition assigned at

meeting time level (if any),

or section level (if any) or

course level (if any)

Example: 01, 45

Department ID Subject Code defined in

run parameters

CRN of IR followed by a

sequential number

Appropriate term code

from run parameters

Example:

DUMN IR001 200110

Days of the Week

SLRRUSE_SUN_DAY

SLRRUSE_MON_DAY

SLRRUSE_TUE_DAY

SLRRUSE_WED_DAY

SLRRUSE_THU_DAY

SLRRUSE_FRI-DAY

SLRRUSE_SAT_DAY

Example: UMTWRFS

358

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Work File Creation

Work file records (SSTSCHW) will be created if the Create Work Table parameter has

been set to

Y. If work file records exist when this process is run, new entries will be added

to the table.

Scheduler Work Table Update Process (SSRSCUP)

This process reads the three Schedule25 output files (sortdp.dat, losers.dat,

notposs.dat), and updates the existing records in the Scheduler Work Table

(SSTSCHW). These entries can then be previewed via the SSASCHW form.

The following fields in the Scheduler Work Table (SSTSCHW) will be updated as a result

of the scheduling process:

Start Time (Hours & Minutes)

From

SLRRUSE_BEGIN_

TIME

Example: 001

Finish Time (Hours & Minutes)

From

SLRRUSE_END_

TIME

Example: 2400

AM/PM Designator H (military time)

Maximum Enrollment 0000

Begin Month and Day

From

SLRRUSE_START_

DATE

Example: 1031

End Month and Day

From

SLRRUSE_END_

DATE

Example: 1231

Room Name

(pre-assigned classes only)

SLRRUSE_BLDG_CODE

SLRRUSE_ROOM_

NUMBER

Example: BIOL 101

Scheduling Assignment Code 5SM

Field Description

Update (Indicator)

Y indicates that the class has been assigned a room (classes

contained in the

sortdp.dat file).

N and L indicate that no class assignment has taken place.

(

N represents classes contained in the notposs.dat file;

L from the losers.dat file.)

Status

If the Update (Indicator) has been set to

Y, and the original

scheduling status code was

NSM or 1SM, this will be changed

5SM.

Building

If the Update (Indicator) has been set to

Y, the building

assigned by Schedule25 will be displayed.

359

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Note: Meeting time records in SSRMEET are not updated at this time.

See the Update Building/Room Process (SSRSCMT).

Update Building/Room Process (SSRSCMT)

This process reads the Scheduler Work Table (SSTSCHW) entries (viewable on

SSASCHW) and updates the SSRMEET table with the room assignments generated in

Schedule25. Only those records with an Update Indicator of

Y will be applied. The Work

Table Update Indicator value will be changed to a

U (as a result of the upload process of

the scheduled sections) to indicate that the upload was successful for that record.

A possible cause for an unsuccessful upload may be attributable to a data change in

SSRMEET since the running of the extract. If the begin and/or end dates and/or times or

days of the week have been changed, this process will not be able to match the work table

records to SSRMEET. The work table represents a snapshot of how the record looked at

the time of the running of the extract.

If building and room information was previously entered in the SSRMEET record, and the

scheduling status code was originally set to one that required a classroom assignment,

that data will be overwritten with the new Schedule25 information.

Note: This process may be run as often as necessary to incorporate

changes to the work table. However, extreme caution should be exercised

if overriding values in the work table. Such changes could result in

double-booking of rooms, for example.

Scheduler Work Table Purge Process (SSRSCPR)

This process will delete Work Table (SSTSCHW) data based on the term and/or campus

specified in the process parameters.

Class Schedule Report (SSRSECT)

The Use Scheduler Results parameter can be used to interject the work file information

(for successful room assignments) giving the option to preview the report with newly

scheduled information prior to updating the SSRMEET table. It also serves as an optional

test phase for the schedule processing. Data from SSTSCHW is not displayed when the

Update Indicator is not Y (successfully scheduled). Valid values for the parameter are Y or

N, and the default is N.

Schedule Purge Process (SSPSCHD)

This process will delete the partition (SSRSPRT, SSRMPRT) and room attribute

preference (SSRSRDF, SRMRDF) table entries.

Room

If the Update (Indicator) has been set to

Y, the room

numbers assigned by Schedule25 will be displayed.

Field Description

360

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Term Roll Report (SSRROLL)

Use the following parameters to roll partition, preference, and room attribute information.

• Roll Partition Codes (Required) - Enter Y to roll the partition codes or N to not roll the

codes. The default is

• Roll Room Attributes (Required) - Enter Y to roll the cross room attributes or N to not roll

the attributes. The default is

• Roll CRN Scheduler Stat Code (Required) - Enter Y to roll CRN scheduler status codes

N to not roll the codes. The default is Y.

• Roll Meeting Time Part Pref (Required) - Enter Y to roll meeting time partition

preferences or

N to not roll the preferences. The default is Y.

• Roll Meeting Time Room Attrib (Required) - Enter Y to roll meeting time room attribute

preferences or

N to not roll the preferences. The default is Y.

Purge Process

The following purge process is part of the Schedule module.

Schedule Purge (SSPSCHD)

This process will purge the class schedule information that is less than or equal to the

term parameter when an enrollment record (SFBETRM) does not exist. Schedule

information will not be deleted if outstanding registration information exists for the term. A

new summary section history record is created in the table SCRSECT. Columns in this

table include: Subject Code, Course Number, Campus, Schedule Type, Term, Number of

Sections Offered, Total Enrollment, Total Census Enrollment, and Activity Date. This

history record allows institutions to review the historical course section information in

summary format.

Warning! When a third party product is used for scheduling, you may

need to rerun the report before you continue scheduling. Be aware that

the first time SSPSCHD is run, the SCRSECT table is populated with data

for the purged records. After the table has been populated, if the report is

a second time, data is not purged.

361

Banner Student User Guide | Class Schedule

Class Schedule Reports

The following reports are run through the Class Schedule module:

Please refer to the Banner Student Reports and Processes Handbook for report

descriptions, instructions, parameter definitions, and output samples.

Term Roll Report (SSRROLL)

Class Schedule Report (SSRSECT)

Scheduled Section Tally Report (SSRTALY)

Schedule Purge (SSPSCHD)

Room Attribute Sequence Update Process (SSRATSQ)

Schedule25 Work File Creation Process (SSRSCRM)

Scheduler Work Table Update Process (SSRSCUP)

Update Building/Room Process (SSRSCMT)

Schedule Work Table Purge Process (SSRSCPR)

Section Fee Population Process (SSPMFEE)

Schedule Open Learning Rule Default Process (SSPRDEF)

Available Seats to Zero Process (SSRASTZ)

362

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

General Person

This chapter discusses processing and procedure information for General Person.

General Person Procedures

Here are tasks you can perform in this module.

Establish Person

Before a person can become a recruit, applicant, student, instructor, advisor, or have an

account, the person must first be identified to the system with an identification number and

a name. A person is initially added to the system using the General Person Identification

Form (SPAIDEN) which maintains a person's identification number, name, and address

information. In addition to persons, the General Person Identification Form (SPAIDEN) is

also used to enter non-persons, such as companies for billing third-party accounts.

Common Matching Processing

Common Matching processing is used to prevent the creation of multiple PIDMs for a

single person or non-person in Banner®. Basic person APIs are used to provide common

logic for how all PIDMs are created. These APIs include: identification information

(SPRIDEN), biographic and demographic information (SPBPERS), address information

(SPRADDR), telephone information (SPRTELE), email information (GOREMAL), and

emergency contact information (SPREMRG). You can turn Common Matching on and off

as needed, either for the institution or for a specific user.

Common Matching uses a central, rule-based algorithm to check for possible database

matches before a new person or non-person record is inserted into the SPRIDEN table.

The same algorithm is used for new records created by data loaded via batch processes

and data entered in online forms (such as SPAIDEN). A match package is used to perform

the matching algorithm.

You can still perform searches from SPAIDEN before new records are inserted into the

database. If a person or non-person record already exists, you can update it with new

information from the current source, such as a new address type or a new email type. The

existing record will not be overwritten. Alias tables in Banner General are used to store

aliases (nicknames) for first and middle names, as well as non-person names. These

aliases are used by the matching algorithm.

Forms in Banner General are used to set up Common Matching. You can enable the

matching process at your institution using the Online Matching Process Enabled

(Indicator) on the Installation Controls Form (GUAINST). If the matching process is

363

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

enabled on GUAINST, all users are required to perform matching. The Common Matching

Entry Form (GOAMTCH) is used with SPAIDEN and other forms in Banner Student to

enter information for a new ID and then execute the matching process before a new PIDM

is created in Banner.

You can exempt selected users from the matching process on the Common Matching

User Setup Form (GORCMUS). You can also set up user online matching source defaults

on GORCMUS. You can build multiple rules on the Common Matching Rules Form

(GORCMRL) for matching persons or non-persons, using fields and field lengths from a

data dictionary. Special matching procedures can also be attached to rules allowing the

algorithm to match on fields that are not common (i.e., high school data).

Common Matching specifically affects the SPAIDEN, SRAQUIK, SAAQUIK, SRIPREL,

SAAEAPS, and SHAEDIS forms in Banner Student. The Common Matching Entry Form

(GOAMTCH) is used with these forms as follows:

• Users who are not excluded on GORCMUS will see GOAMTCH automatically from

SPAIDEN, SRAQUIK, and SAAQUIK. If they are excluded, data entry will remain the

same as in previous Banner releases.

• GOAMTCH can be turned off when a new person is created on SPAIDEN, SRAQUIK,

and SAAQUIK. It cannot be turned off when a new person is created on SRIPREL,

SAAEAPS, or SHAEDIS.

• Data in the temporary tables behind SRIPREL, SAAEAPS, and SHAEDIS is copied to

the GOAMTCH temporary table. If changes to that data are made on GOAMTCH, the

changed data is copied back to the temporary tables for the calling forms and will be

used by the calling forms (SRIPREL, SAAEAPS, or SHAEDIS) when a new record is

loaded.

• For SRIPREL, SAAEAPS, and SHAEDIS, GOAMTCH is used to attempt to match data

for a person in a temporary table to data for a person already created in Banner, before

the person is loaded into Banner.

• The interface codes on STVINFC are associated with Common Matching rules using the

Common Matching Source field. If the interface codes are not tied to a Common

Matching source code, they will not be used in the matching process.

Please refer to the Banner General User Guide for more information on the Banner

General forms used with this processing.

Setting Up Common Matching

In order to use Common Matching at your institution, you must enable it using the Online

Matching Process Enabled (Indicator) on the Installation Controls Form (GUAINST).

Use the following steps to set up Common Matching processing.

1. Create source codes.

Use the Common Matching Source Codes Validation Form (GTVCMSC) to create the

various source codes that may be used in Common Matching. These are similar to the

interface codes that exist in pre-7.0 Banner Student. Rules will be assigned to these

source codes to be used with the matching algorithm.

364

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

2. Set up defaults for the source codes.

Use the Common Matching Source Code Form (GORCMSC) to set up the defaults to

be used with a particular source code.

Be sure that you set up your matching source code on GORCMSC prior to setting up

the rules associated with it on GORCMRL.

For example, you can assign default address, telephone, and email types to the

source code which will default into GOAMTCH if the source code is used from there.

GORCMSC is also used to identify whether the source code will be used to perform

matching against person data and/or non-person data and whether the source code

can be used with online matching. Optionally, you can designate other specific forms a

user can navigate to in order to see more detailed information about possible matched

records by using the Details button on GOAMTCH.

3. Assign default online matching source codes to a user ID.

Use the Common Matching User Setup Form (GORCMUS) to assign a default online

matching source code to a specific Oracle user ID. In addition, you can specify

whether a specific user ID is allowed to choose from other matching source codes, or

if they are restricted to using just the default source code. You can also indicate if a

specific user ID is excluded from having to use online Common Matching.

For example, if a user is a “super-user” who never creates duplicate PIDM records,

they may be exempted from having the GOAMTCH form appear from SPAIDEN by

checking the Exclude User (Indicator).

4. Set up the matching rules associated with the source codes.

The Common Matching Rules Form (GORCMRL) is used to set up the actual

matching rules associated with the source codes.

Use this form to create each rule, assign a priority to it, and then assign the specific

database fields to each rule which will be used by the matching algorithm. You can

also copy previously created rules, as well as add specific procedures for matching

components that are not contained within Banner General (i.e, matching on high

school data for Banner Student). If a field is to be included in a rule but is not required,

the field is specified as

Exists on GORCMRL.

How the Matching Process Works

When you enter an ID on SPAIDEN that does not exist in Banner and then execute the

matching process, you can receive a match status of “New”, “Match”, or “Potential Match”.

New Records

Records are matched with a status of “New” if no records match, based on the rules that

have been set up. When a record is identified as being new, the General Person APIs are

used to insert the data into SPRIDEN, SPRADDR, SPRTELE, SPBPERS, and/or

GOREMAL. Once the record is made new, you are returned to SPAIDEN.

365

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

Matched Records

Records are matched with a status of “Match” if one, and only one, record in Banner

matches the incoming person based on the rules that have been set up.

Data for the matched PIDM is displayed for review by the user. You can select the

matched record and return to the main window of SPAIDEN, or you can update the

matched person with data entered in the Data Entry block on GOAMTCH before returning

to SPAIDEN.

Potentially Matched Records

Records are matched with a status of “Potential Match” (or “Suspense”) if some, but not

all, fields match someone in Banner based on the rules that have been set up. For

example, the first and last names for the record match, but the date of birth does not

match.

You can create the person as “New”, or you can select one of the potentially matched

records as the “Match”.

Rule Examples

Here is one set of rules that can be used in Banner Student.

Priority Column Name Data Element Length

Required/

Exists

SPRIDEN_SEARCH_

LAST_NAME

LAST NAME/NON-PERSON NAME 10 Required

SPRIDEN_SEARCH_

FIRST_NAME

FIRST NAME 10 Required

SPBPERS_SSN

SSN/SIN/TIN 9 Required

SPBPERS_BIRTH_DAY

DATE OF BIRTH DAY 2 Exists

SPBPERS_BIRTH_MON

DATE OF BIRTH MONTH 2 Exists

SPBPERS_BIRTH_YEAR

DATE OF BIRTH YEAR 4 Exists

SPRADDR_ZIP

ZIP/POSTAL CODE 5 Exists

SPRIDEN_SEARCH_

LAST_NAME

LAST NAME/NON-PERSON NAME 10 Required

SPRIDEN_SEARCH_

FIRST_NAME

FIRST NAME 10 Required

SPBPERS_SSN

SSN/SIN/TIN 9 Exists

SPBPERS_BIRTH_DAY

DATE OF BIRTH DAY 2 Exists

SPBPERS_BIRTH_MON

DATE OF BIRTH MONTH 2 Exists

366

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

Matching Algorithm

The matching algorithm used with Common Matching processing is composed of two

matches - primary and secondary. The primary match selects a pool of Banner records

that may match based on first, middle, and last name, and/or SSN and ID. If a record is

selected as part of the primary match, then at a minimum it will be a potential match. The

secondary match then looks at all the records from the primary match pool and uses the

rest of the fields in the matching rule to see if only one record matches exactly. If only one

record matches exactly, that record is a match. If more than one record matches, then all

those records that match or partially match become the potential matches.

An exception to this process is if an incoming record has passed the primary match, but all

of the other non-name elements included in the matching rule do not match (and none of

the fields are Null), then the person is made new.

For example, a rule could be set up as follows:

SPBPERS_BIRTH_YEAR

DATE OF BIRTH YEAR 4 Exists

SPRADDR_CITY

CITY 10 Exists

SPRADDR_ZIP

ZIP/POSTAL CODE 5 Exists

SPRIDEN_SEARCH_

LAST_NAME

LAST NAME/NON-PERSON NAME 10 Required

SPRIDEN_SEARCH_

FIRST_NAME

FIRST NAME 10 Required

SPBPERS_BIRTH_DAY

DATE OF BIRTH DAY 2 Exists

SPBPERS_BIRTH_MON

DATE OF BIRTH MONTH 2 Exists

SPBPERS_BIRTH_YEAR

DATE OF BIRTH YEAR 4 Exists

SPRADDR_CITY

CITY 10 Exists

SPRADDR_ZIP

ZIP/POSTAL CODE 5 Exists

Element Required Length

Last Name Required 10

First Name Exists 8

City Exists 8

ZIP Exists 5

Date of Birth Exists

Priority Column Name Data Element Length

Required/

Exists

367

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

Banner contains a SPRIDEN record for Joseph Smith in Tampa, FL, born on April 11,

1982. The incoming record is also for a Joseph Smith who lives in Boston, MA, and who

was born on August 18, 1981. Assuming there were no other Joseph Smiths in the Banner

database, the incoming record would be marked New. It would normally have been

marked as

Suspended, because the first and last names matched, but as the rest of the

elements in the rule (City, ZIP, Date of Birth) specifically did not match, the person was

made new.

How the Algorithm Works

The Common Matching algorithm allows for the processing of multiple rules. Priority

numbers must be defined for each rule indicating the sequence in which they are to be

processed. The strictest rule should be assigned the first priority (i.e., #1). The algorithm

will process each rule in order, separately and completely.

• The first step performed by the algorithm is primary matching for the rule. This step

defines the population on which the rest of the processing (secondary match) will be

performed. If no match occurs during the primary match, then the external record is

considered to be new.

• The second step performed by the algorithm is secondary matching processing against

the results of the primary match. If the secondary match determines an exact match on

only one record, the external source record is considered to be a match.

If more than one record is matched to the criteria, the external source record is considered

to be in suspense. The external source record will be considered to be in suspense if data

matches part of the criteria of the rules but does not match all the criteria. If the results of

the rule are new or matched, the results are returned to the calling process. No other rules

are processed.

When all the rules have been processed, the algorithm will interrogate the results and

return the results to the calling process. The match status (new, matched, or suspense)

will be returned, as well as a results message providing the elements that were matched,

not matched, or missing as a result of processing the rule.

When processing online, if a record is determined to be a match using one rule but to be in

suspense using one or more additional rules, the record's match status will be set to

match, but the user will still be able to view the potentially matched records.

Rule Indicators

The Data Required field on GORCMRL can be set to Exists or Required.

• A value of Required indicates that the data field associated with the indicator is

required and must be present on the external source and in Banner. If the field on either

the external source or in Banner is Null for a data element with the Data Required field

set to

Required, then the data element is considered to be not matched. If all data

elements are required, but all of the data elements in the secondary match are Null

either in Banner or the external source, the record will be suspended for review.

• A value of Exists indicates that either the external source or the Banner value can be

Null. If either or both values are Null, the field is considered to be a match.

368

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

Rule Priorities

The algorithm processes each rule that has been defined for the data source separately

based on the priority given in the Rule Priorities block. If the priority rule determines that

the input record is either

New or Matched, that status is the overall status that is returned

for the record.

Note: For online processing, the potential matches that result from

processing the rules may be viewed online from the Potential Matches

block on the Common Matching Entry Form (GOAMTCH). Potential

matches are listed in order by rule priority.

Field Length Values

Whenever a length is specified for a rule on the Common Matching Rules Form

(GORCMRL), the comparison is made using the rule length of the fields. For example,

using the last name, the comparison would be between the rule lengths of the last name

on the external source to the rule length of the last name in Banner. If the rule length is

five, then the first five characters of the external source last name are compared to the first

five characters of the Banner last name.

A negative length may be entered for the ID and SSN/SIN/TFN to reverse the order from

last to first. For example, if

-5 is entered for the length of the SSN/SIN/TIN, the last five

characters of the external source SSN will be compared to the last five characters of the

Banner SSN/SIN/TIN.

For example, for the rule below:

Last Name length = 4

First Name length = 3

SSN/SIN/TFN length = -4

Patricia Longnecker, SSN/SIN/TFN #555116789

The results would be:

The first four characters of the last name would be used: LONG

The first three characters of the first name would be used: PAT

The last four characters of the SSN/SIN/TFN would be used: 6789

Note: For performance reasons, it is recommended that you not use

negative lengths for SSN/SIN/TIN.

Primary Matching Logic

The primary matching process uses Last Name/Non-Person name

(

SPRIDEN_SEARCH_LAST_NAME), which is a required data element for Common

Matching. If First Name (

SPRIDEN_SEARCH_FIRST_NAME) or Middle Name

(

SPRIDEN_SEARCH_MI) are specified data elements in a rule, these will also be used

as part of the primary match for the name. In addition, if ID (

SPRIDEN_ID) and/or SSN/

369

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

SIN/TFN (SPBPERS_SSN) are specified data elements in a rule, they will be used as part

of the primary match.

The Common Matching process will use the Match Type (Indicator) setting that has been

established for the matching source on the Common Matching Source Code Rules Form

(GORCMSC) to determine which records are to be selected in Banner.

• When the Match Type (Indicator) is set to Person, person records will be selected.

When

GORCMSC_ENTITY_CDE is set to P, records will be selected from SPRIDEN

where

SPRIDEN_ENTITY_IND is set to P.

• When the Match Type (Indicator) is set to Non-Person, non-person records will be

selected. When

GORCMSC_ENTITY_CDE is set to C, records will be selected from

SPRIDEN where

SPRIDEN_ENTITY_IND is set to C.

• When the Match Type (Indicator) is set to Both, person and non-person records will

be selected. When

GORCMSC_ENTITY_CDE is set to B, records will be selected from

SPRIDEN where

SPRIDEN_ENTITY_IND is set to P or C.

The following steps are used in the primary matching process:

Either Step 1 or Step 2 below must be true for a record to pass the primary match. If the

external record fails the primary match, then the match status will be marked as new.

1. If the SSN/SIN/TFN is defined for the matching source and rule priority number,

retrieve all records from Banner with a matching SSN/SIN/TFN.

The SSN/SIN/TFN data element is defined as part of the rule, and the

SPBPERS_SSN is equal to the external source SSN/SIN/TFN.

2. If First Name and/or Middle Name are defined for the matching source and rule priority

number, combine them with the Last Name criteria, and retrieve all records from

Banner with a matching name.

Note: When matching non-person records, the First and Middle Names

should not be included as part of the rule.

2.1. The following must be true:

SPRIDEN_SEARCH_LAST_NAME must equal the last name on the external

source for the specified length.

Note: If the matching source is defined to match non-person records, and

SPRIDEN_SEARCH_LAST_NAME is not like the non-person name from

the external Source, the matching algorithm will check to see if a

matching record exists on the GORNPNM alias table.

2.2. One of the following must be true:

First Name data element is not defined.

First Name data element is defined for the rule, and

SPRIDEN_SEARCH_FIRST_NAME is equal to the external source first name

for the specified length.

370

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

Note: If the SPRIDEN_SEARCH_FIRST_NAME is not like the first name

from the external source, the matching algorithm will check to see if a

matching record exists on the GORNAME alias table (if the matching

source is defined to match person records).

2.3. One of the following must be true:

Middle Name data element is not defined.

Middle Name data element is defined for the rule, and

SPRIDEN_SEARCH_MI

is equal to the external source middle name for the specified length.

Note: If the SPRIDEN_SEARCH_MI is not like the middle name from the

external source, the matching algorithm will check to see if a matching

record exists on the GORNAME alias table (if the matching source is

defined to match person records).

3. If ID is defined for the matching source and rule priority number, retrieve all records

from Banner with a

SPRIDEN_ID that is equal to the external source ID.

Secondary Matching Logic

The secondary matching process compares the data elements defined for the matching

source and rule priority number for all records returned by the primary matching process.

The goal of the secondary match is to find an exact match between the external source

record and a Banner record.

When comparing a data field that has the Data Required (Indicator) set to

Exists, a

Null value may exist either in Banner or the external source. If a Null value exists either in

Banner or the external source for the data element, the data element is considered to be

matched.

When the Data Required (Indicator) is set to

Required, if a Null value exists either in

Banner or the external source for the data element, the data element is considered to be

not matched.

This step is repeated for each of the data elements for the rule, and one condition must be

true for each for an external source record to be considered to be a match.

• Data element is not defined.

• Data element Data Required (Indicator) is set to Exists or Required, and the

Banner value is equal to the external source value for the specified length.

• Data element Data Required (Indicator) is set to Exists, and the Banner value is

Null.

371

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

• Data element Data Required (Indicator) is set to Exists, and the external source

value is

Null.

When the data being matched is part of a logical unit (such as an address), the logical unit

is matched separately and completely. For example, when matching on city and ZIP code,

the city and ZIP code must be associated with one address.

Note: There is an exception to be aware of. For an external source record

to be considered as new when the record has already passed the primary

match, all non-name data elements must be determined as not being a

match, and none of the non-name elements may be Null.

Examples of Matching Algorithm Process and Results

Here are some examples of how the matching algorithm works.

Example 1:

If all required data elements are missing, the record will be suspended.

Last Name = Required

First Name = Required

Date of Birth Day = Required

Date of Birth Month = Required

Date of Birth Year = Required

City = Required

Banner values: Mildred Jones, Date of Birth = 08/17/1957, City = Topeka

External values: Mildred Jones

The external record will pass the primary match, because the first and last names match.

However, since all other data elements are missing (i.e, Null) from the external source (not

matched but are Null), the record will be suspended.

Example 2:

The external record passes the primary match as the first and last name matches against

two Banner records. These two records are then used in the secondary match.

Rule 1 Rule 2

Last Name = R Last Name = R

First Name = Y First Name = Y

SSN = Y Date of Birth = Y

Date of Birth = Y City = Y

372

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

Banner values:

Record 1 - Alberta Rockville, 330229101, Largesse, 06259, 05/01/1985

Record 2 - Alberta Rockville, no SSN, Pomfret, 19355, no Date of Birth

External values: Alberta Rockville, 330229101, Largesse, 06259, no Date of Birth

The external record will pass the primary match, because the first and last names match

at least one Banner record with the same first and last names.

• Using Rule 1 and the matching algorithm, the external record will be matched against

Banner record 1. It will be suspended against Banner record 2.

• Using Rule 2, the external record would be matched against Banner record 1, since the

Date of Birth is missing and the City and ZIP match.

Example 3:

The external record passes the primary match, which usually means that the match status

will be

Suspense at a minimum. However, in this case, because none of the non-name/

SSN fields match, the external record has a match status of

New.

Banner values: Tomasso Dalimonte, SSN = Null, Date of Birth = 06/02/78, City =

Marikesh, ZIP = 11233

External values: Tomasso Dalimonte, SSN = Null, Date of Birth = 09/07/59, City =

Woodstock, ZIP = 06281

The external record will pass the primary match, because the first and last names match.

Normally, this would mean that the record would be suspended at a minimum. However,

because the Date of Birth, City, and ZIP Code fields specifically do not match (i.e., none of

City = Y ZIP Code = Y

ZIP Code = Y

The value R stands for Required. The value Y stands for Exists.

Rule 1 Rule 2

Last Name = R Last Name = R

First Name = R First Name = R

SSN = Y Date of Birth = Y

Date of Birth = Y City = Y

City = Y ZIP Code = Y

ZIP Code = Y

The value R stands for Required. The value Y stands for Exists.

Rule 1 Rule 2

373

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

them are Null), then the record's match status is set to New. This is the only exception to

the basic matching algorithm.

Forms Used with Matching Process

The following Banner forms are used with the matching process.

Common Matching Entry Form (GOAMTCH)

Use this form to prevent the creation of multiple PIDMs for a single person or non-person

in Banner. It is used with SPAIDEN and other forms in Banner Student to enter information

for a new ID and then execute the matching process before a new PIDM is created in

Banner.

If Common Matching is turned on (on GUAINST), and the user is not excluded from

Common Matching on GORCMUS, GOAMTCH is called automatically from the Key Block

of SPAIDEN, SRAQUIK, SAAQUIK when an ID is generated or entered, and the ID does

not already exist in Banner. Whether or not Common Matching is turned on, the user will

access GOAMTCH from SRIPREL, SAAEAPS, and SHAEDIS as part of the matching

process for data loads.

You can enter information for name, address, telephone, date of birth, SSN, etc., in the

Data Entry block. The data entered can be used to assist with matching if the matching

rule contains the field being entered. Regardless, the data entered in the Data Entry block

will be stored in Banner if the person is found to be new.

The matching process is called when you perform a Next Block from the Data Entry block

or select the Duplicate Check button. Use the Duplicate Check button to execute the

matching process at any time during the entry of person information. Only those data

elements in this form can be used for online matching rules.

Note: If GOAMTCH is called from another form where you can create

identification records, the GENERATE ID button does not appear in the

Key Block.

Wildcards and Special Characters

You can use this form to search for identification records, and you do not need to use

wildcard characters (%). You can enter partial information without using a wildcard

character.

The programming logic treats searching and creating data differently:

• If you enter % in the First Name field, for example, and create a new record, % will be

stored as the person's first name.

• If you use a wildcard to search for a record, the Common Matching process will strip it

out. The process removes special characters and forces the data to be uppercase.

For example, if you search for

Jon%s, the Common Matching process will search for

JONS, and Jones will not be considered a match.

374

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

First name is required for all searches for person records. If you want to search on last

name only, you can enter the last name, and enter a special character for the first name.

Button Detail

The following buttons are used on GOAMTCH:

• Duplicate Check

Select this button to trigger the Common Matching process without performing a Next

Block function.

• Select ID

Select this button if Common Matching has found an existing record that is a match for

the one you are entering. This populates the form on which you were entering data with

the existing Banner data for that person or non-person. You are automatically taken

back to the original form, and a new PIDM is not added to the database.

• Details

Select this button if Common Matching has found potential matches and you need to do

additional research to see if any of them match the record you are adding. A list of forms

will appear, from which you can select the form you wish to access.

Note: The list of research forms displayed by selecting the Details button

is determined by how the matching source code is set up on the Common

Matching Source Code Rules Form (GORCMSC). If you do not set up any

forms to be called, the Details button will be disabled.

• Update ID

Select this button if Common Matching has found a record that matches the one you're

entering, and you have entered information in GOAMTCH that should be added to the

existing record. Only Null fields on the existing Banner record will be updated. The

record is changed, but a new PIDM is not added to the database.

For example, if Common Matching finds the person's record but there is no billing

address, and you have added the billing address in the Data Entry block, selecting this

button will add a billing address record to the existing address records.

• View Comments

Select this button to view non-technical details about the matching source and related

rule sets from GTVCMSC to better understand the type of data that should be entered in

GOAMTCH and the matching results that are produced.

• Create New

Select this button if the Common Matching process does not return a record that

matches the one you are entering, or if none of the potential matches that were returned

match the record you are entering. This creates a new PIDM in Banner. If biographical

data, email address, telephone number, or complete address information has been

entered in the Data Entry block, the corresponding records will created in Banner.

375

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

You can restrict whether a new ID is created or not if any APIs fail due to missing or

incomplete information, and an error message is generated. When the Create New

button is used, the system checks to see if any APIs have failed. If the new Prevent ID

Creation on API Failure checkbox on GORCMSC is checked, the appropriate error

message will be displayed, and you will be prompted to enter the missing or incomplete

information to complete the creation of the new ID. (The default value is unchecked on

GORCMSC).

Note: This functionality can only be used online. It is not available in

batch processing.

The following results will occur when the Duplicate Check button is used:

1. The record is new. No match has been found in the database. The record can be

created without any additional processing, and Banner will assign a new PIDM to it.

2. A match is found for the record. Common Matching has found one, and only one,

Banner record that matches the record based on the rules. The Common Matching

Entry Form (GOAMTCH) appears with the Match tab highlighted. The user must

review the displayed data to see if the matched Banner record is the same as the one

they are trying to enter.

2.1. If the record found in the database is the same as the one being entered, you

can select the person or non-person as a match, or update the record with

additional information, but Banner will not assign a new PIDM.

Note: You can only update fields on an existing Banner record if they are

Null in the Banner database. If data already exists for those fields, it will

not be overwritten.

2.2. If the record found in the database is not the same as the one being entered,

you can create a new record. Banner will assign a new PIDM to the record when

it is saved.

3. A potential match is found. Common Matching has found at least one record where

some of the fields identified in the rule match the record being entered, but not all.

For example, the first name and last name are the same, and the mailing address is

the same, but the date of birth is different. GOAMTCH then appears with the Potential

Matches tab highlighted. You can review each potential match to determine if one is,

in fact, a match. If multiple records meet the matching criteria, they are all displayed in

the Potential Matches block.

3.1. If one of the potential matches is the same as the one being entered, you can

select the record as a match, or update it with additional information. Banner will

not assign a new PIDM. If the record is updated, existing data will not be

overwritten.

3.2. If none of the potential matches is the same as the one being entered, you can

create a new record. Banner will assign a new PIDM to the record.

376

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

Key Block

Use this block to enter the ID to be matched and the matching source code for the match

rules to be used in the search.

Two buttons are used in this block.

• The Generate ID button is used to generate a new one-up Banner ID.

• The View Comments button is used to view matching source and rule details.

Data Entry Block

Use this block to enter the information for the person or non-person, unless it has been

populated automatically from the original form where you were working (i.e., SRIPREL).

You can enter either the SSN or the last name/non-person name for matching. The last

name is not required. (You should only use the SSN without last name in matching rules

sets for online matching. It should not be used in batch processing.) The Common

Matching algorithm will use the rules for the matching source to see if an identification

record already exists in the database for that person or non-person.

You have the option of displaying potential matches using the data entered on

GOAMTCH, even if the number of characters entered is less than the length specified in

the matching rule on GORCMRL. Use the Allow Length Override checkbox on

GORCMSC to capture any matches up to and including the specified length on for the

rule. For example, if you enter a last name with four characters, and the Length field on

GORCMRL has been set to 5 for the rule, the system would display any records where the

last name begins with the four characters entered on GOAMTCH.

Records are held in suspense, as partially matched, and you can use the following buttons

to continue processing.

• The Duplicate Check button is used to execute the match algorithm from the Data

Entry block and run it as needed until the match is satisfactory.

• The Select ID button is used to match the ID in the Data Entry block to the ID in the

Match block.

• The Details button is used to display a list of forms for additional match research.

• The Update ID button is used to match the ID in the Data Entry block to the ID in the

Match block and insert data into Null fields in the SPBPERS, SPRADDR, and/or

GOREMAL tables.

• The View Comments button is used to view matching source and rule set details.

• The Create New button is used to reject all matches and create the record as new.

Match Block

The Match block is automatically displayed after the matching process is completed if a

match is found. This block is accessed using Next Block or the Match tab. The data

entered remains in the Data Entry block. You can choose to clear the match information

using the Clear and Return to Data Entry button. You will then be returned to the Data

Entry block where you can add or change the data for the match. The address information

377

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

in the Match block displays the address type and address data, if the address was

matched as part of the matching algorithm.

If the record found by the matching process is a match for the record being entered, use

the Select ID button to bring the information back to the form on which you were entering

data, or use the Update ID button if you have added information to the Data Entry block

that does not exist in the database record. If you have a large number of potential

matches, you may want to select the Clear button to erase the information in this block

and enter more restrictive criteria in the Data Entry block.

You can enter additional information to reduce the number of potential matches found by

the Common Matching process. To see the new list of potential matches, you must

execute the process again by performing a Next Block function or selecting the Duplicate

Check button.

Note: The Common Matching process uses the rules defined for the

Matching Source in the Key Block to determine if the identification

record being entered already exists on the Banner database. If you do not

receive the results you expect after the Common Matching process has

been executed, review the rules for the Matching Source on GORCMRL.

Potential Matches Block

The Potential Matches block displays the potential matches (formerly known as suspense

records) found during the search. The number of PIDM records found is displayed in

parentheses in the tab, i.e., “Potential Matches (42)”. You can scroll through the potential

match records to see the information in each that potentially matches the information in

the Data Entry block. Only one row per record is displayed in this block. You can choose to

clear the match information using the Clear and Return to Data Entry button. This clears

the data in the Potential Matches block so you can add or change the data for the potential

match.

Logical sort order processing can be used to sort the matching results dynamically by ID

or name in ascending or descending order using the Sort up and down arrow buttons for

the ID and Name fields. The default sort order is by ID and priority (in descending order).

When you click on the Sort up arrow, the sort organizes the results in alpha order (A - Z).

When you click on the Sort down arrow, the sort organizes the results in reverse alpha

order (Z - A). Once you have clicked on an up or down arrow, you can mouse over the

arrow to see the tool switch hint message, click on the arrow again, reverse its direction,

and perform a new sort. For example, after you have sorted on ID or name in A - Z order

(using the Sort up arrow), you can then click on the arrow again to change it to a Sort

down arrow, and resort the data in Z - A order.

If any address fields are included in the matching rules being used, and a match exists on

the address of a potential match, then that address will be displayed for that record. To

see all address records for a selected potential match, select the All Addresses pulldown

list.

Note: If you use GOAMTCH by itself to match a person to an existing

person in Banner, and the existing person in Banner has an address of

the same address type (where the addresses themselves do not match),

the existing Banner address will be inactivated, and the address that was

378

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

entered on GOAMTCH will be inserted.

If you use SAAEAPS or SRIPREL to match a person via GOAMTCH and

the same scenario exists, SRIPREL and SAAEAPS will put an end date

on the existing Banner address and then insert the new address.

If the matching rule contains a row for telephone number and/or email address, and a

match exists on the telephone number or email address of a potential match, then the

phone number and/or email address will be displayed. The date of birth and gender will be

displayed for any potential match if they exist in Banner for the potentially matched record,

regardless of whether date of birth or gender are used in the matching rule.

You can define a hierarchy for the display of addresses, telephone numbers, and email

addresses. This hierarchy will be used for two conditions: 1) when no address fields are

used in the rule set, and/or 2) when address rules are used in the rule set, but the potential

match record does not have an address that matches.

• If address information has been included in a matching source rule set, and the potential

match record has an address which matches, that address will be displayed in the

Potential Matches block.

• If address information has been included in a matching source rule set, and the potential

match record has no address which matches, and a hierarchy has been established for

the matching source, and the potential match record has an address type listed in the

hierarchy, that address will be displayed in the Potential Matches block.

• If address has been included in a matching source rule set, and the potential match

record has no address which matches, and a display hierarchy has been established for

the matching source, and the potential match record has no address types listed on the

hierarchy, the message No Matching or Hierarchy Found will be displayed in the

Matching or Hierarchical Address field.

• This same logic is true for the telephone and email address information. If there is no

match or hierarchical type associated with the record, the message No Matches will be

displayed in the Telephone and E-mail fields. (This message is shorter, as these field

lengths are smaller.)

• The address source code data is passed from GOAMTCH to the GOTCMME table. The

value in the

GOTCMME_ASRC_CODE column is loaded to the SPRADDR_ASRC_CODE

column in GOAMTCH using the

gb_address API.

The Matching Rule Sets field displays the result of the matching algorithm for each field

included in the matching rule. This allows a user to know what data elements the matching

rule was using, even if they do not have access to the Common Matching Rules Form

(GORCMRL).

For example, you could view how the data for specific fields is displayed for all potential

matches, even though those fields do not exist in the matching rules. You could also view

the fields included in the matching rule, such as:

Name Match, Address Match,

Email Match. In addition, you could view all the Banner addresses for the selected

potential match using the All Addresses field pulldown list. A record could show an email

match, even though none exists. That occurs if the matching rule on GORCMRL has the

Element field set to

Email and the Data Required field set to Exists. A Null email

address on either the Banner record or the incoming record is still considered to be a

match.

379

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

To find more information about a record, select it and then select the Details button in the

Data Entry block. A list of forms will be displayed, and you can select the form you wish to

access.

General Person Identification Form (SPAIDEN)

You can access the Common Matching Entry Form (GOAMTCH) from SPAIDEN. To do

this, turn on Common Matching for the institution using the Online Matching Process

Enabled (Indicator) on GUAINST. In addition, the user attempting to access GOAMTCH

must not have been excluded from using it on GORCMUS. However, even if a user has

been excluded from Common Matching on GORCMUS, they can still access GOAMTCH

through the Banner General Common Matching Menu (*GENMATCH) or through the

Options Menu.

To open GOAMTCH from SPAIDEN: type

GENERATED in the ID field, select the

Generate ID button, or enter an ID in the ID field that does not exist in Banner. The

GOAMTCH form will automatically appear. If a person record is created using only the

GOAMTCH form, the Origin field (on SPAIDEN and SPRIDEN) will be set to

GOAMTCH. If

the person record is created using SRRSRIN or SRIPREL, then the Origin field will be set

SRKPREL.

Quick Recruit Form (SRAQUIK)

GOAMTCH will be called automatically from SRAQUIK if Common Matching has been

turned on in GUAINST and if the user has not been excluded from Common Matching on

GORCMUS. To open GOAMTCH from SRAQUIK: enter

GENERATED in the ID field,

select the Generate ID button, or enter an ID in the ID field that does not exist in Banner.

If the user has been excluded from Common Matching, and they enter

GENERATED in the

ID field, select the Generate ID button, or enter an ID in the ID field that does not exist in

Banner, the Current Identification window will be displayed, allowing the user to enter a

new person's first, middle, and last name.

Quick Entry Form (SAAQUIK)

GOAMTCH will be called automatically from SAAQUIK if Common Matching has been

turned on in GUAINST and if the user has not been excluded from Common Matching on

GORCMUS. To open GOAMTCH from SAAQUIK: enter

GENERATED in the ID field,

select the Generate ID button, or enter an ID in the ID field that does not exist in Banner.

If the user has been excluded from Common Matching, and they enter

GENERATED in the

ID field, select the Generate ID button, or enter an ID in the ID field that does not exist in

Banner, the Current Identification window will be displayed, allowing the user to enter a

new person's first, middle, and last name.

380

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

Data Loads Used with Matching Process

The following processes are used to load data for matching.

Electronic Prospect Inquiry Form (SRIPREL)

SRIPREL uses the GOAMTCH form and the Common Matching algorithm for data load

processing to determine if the incoming record matches an existing Banner record.

Use the following steps to resolve suspended records or to match and load new records

from SRIPREL.

1. Query for prospect records (where the Match Status is

S for “suspended”), or by

other parameters.

2. If you want to view details about the selected record, choose the Details (SRAPREL)

item from the Options Menu. If you want to use the matching algorithm against the

selected record, then choose the Match (GOAMTCH) item from the Options Menu.

3. Before you can access GOAMTCH, you will be asked to assign an ID to the new user,

either a generated ID or the person's SSN. When the data is saved, you will be taken

to GOAMTCH.

4. When you enter GOAMTCH, the ID field will contain either the word

GENERATED or

the selected record’s SSN. The Matching Source field will contain the matching

source code that has been assigned to the interface code, which is also assigned to

the electronic prospect code of the selected record on STVPREL.

If no matching source code has been assigned to the interface code, then the

Matching Source field will contain the default matching source code that has been

assigned to the user ID on GORCMUS. If no default source code has been assigned

on GORCMUS, then you will be able to select any matching source code from the List

of Values.

5. Perform a Next Block to populate the Data Entry block with all of the data for the

incoming prospect record that is present in the temporary tables.

6. You can update or adjust the data in the Data Entry block if it does not meet your

institution’s data standards. These updates will be copied back to the temporary tables

and used when the prospect's record is created.

7. Perform a Next Block to run the matching algorithm. The algorithm will determine if the

incoming record is new, matched, or a potential match.

8. Determine if the record is to be new or matched, and select the appropriate button.

9. The user will be automatically returned to SRIPREL. The match status will always be

Matched, as the person has now been created in Banner via GOAMTCH. Continue

with regular SRIPREL load processing.

Electronic Prospect Match (SRRSRIN) and Migrate Electronic Prospects

Process (SRRPREL)

Users should review how Common Matching works with electronic prospect processing

when using SRRSRIN and SRRPREL.

381

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

SRRSRIN will not load recruits to Banner when the Auto Load (Skip Dup Chk) parameter

is set to

Y and data does not conform to API restrictions. When records with a matched (M)

or new (

N) status are flagged, the records will not be loaded to Banner when the Auto

Load (Skip Dup Chk) parameter is set to

Y if information required to create the record

(such as an address) is incomplete.

SRRSRIN will flag records with incomplete addresses or other incomplete information as

having a status of suspense (

S), and these suspended records will need to be fixed

manually on SRIPREL and/or GOAMTCH. It is very important to fix the incorrect and/or

missing information at this point, prior to continuing with the matching process. If the

incomplete data is not corrected, SRRSRIN will fail.

Note: SRRSRIN is the only process that generates records with a match

status of

N. All records that are processed manually on SRIPREL using

GOAMTCH will have a match status of

M, even when you choose to

create a new record. This is due to the fact that when you return to

SRIPREL, the person’s record will have been created in Banner by

GOAMTCH.

Here is an example of SRRSRIN output when incomplete addresses are found after the

process is run with the Auto Load (Skip Dup Chk) parameter set to

When SRRSRIN is run with the Auto Load (Skip Dup Chk) parameter set to

N, there is no

address check, so records will be flagged as matched (

M) or new (N), whether they have

complete address information or not.

Since records with incomplete data such as incomplete addresses will not be loaded to

Banner, SRRPREL works so that records that were flagged

N or M and also have

incomplete data will have the match status changed to

S. Again, these suspended records

will need to be fixed manually on SRIPREL and/or GOAMTCH. It is very important to fix

the incorrect and/or missing information at this point, prior to continuing the matching

process. If the incomplete data is not corrected, SRRSRIN will fail.

Here is an example of SRRPREL output when incomplete addresses are found after

SRRSRIN is run with the Auto Load (Skip Dup Chk) parameter set to

ID Name Status Term Level Major

High

School Result

P00002378 Adams, Adam S 199510 UG ARTS UNKNHS Prospect not loaded

A00024505 Adams, Alison M 199510 UG ARTS UNKNHS Loaded 29-NOV-

2004

P00002429 Adebowale, Morayo S 199510 UG ARTS UNKNHS Prospect not loaded

A00027348 Albert, Dawn M 199510 UG ARTS UNKNHS Loaded 29-NOV-

2004

382

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

When using SRIPREL, if an attempt is made to load a matched (M) or new (N) record (the

Create Recruit item is selected from the Options Menu), and data is incomplete, an error is

displayed in the autohint: Error: Data Error. Prospect has been put into suspense. At this

point the match status for the record is changed back to

S. You can then navigate to

GOAMTCH to update the incomplete data (such as missing address information) and

match the record appropriately.

When records are matched through batch processing, SRTLOAD loads the address

source from the temporary tables to the SPRADDR table. SRRSRIN then calls SRKPREL

to push the address data, and therefore loads the

SRTADDR_ASRC_CODE value to the

SPRADDR_ASRC_CODE field.

When matching is performed manually using SRIPREL and GOAMTCH, SRIPREL saves

the prospect’s address to the GOTCMME table. GOAMTCH then creates the address for

the new person record from the GOTCMME table, including the

ASCR_CODE data.

Electronic Application Process Form (SAAEAPS)

SAAEAPS uses the GOAMTCH form and Common Matching algorithm to assist in

matching incoming Web and EDI application records to existing Banner records.

Use the following steps to resolve suspended records or to match and load new records

from SAAEAPS.

1. Query for the admissions records that have been suspended (where the Application

Status is

U for “suspended”), or by any of the other fields.

2. Set the Accepted Indicator to

Y if it is still set to U.

3. Select the Verification Steps tab or the Manual Verification Steps option from the

Options Menu to access the Verification Steps window.

4. Mark any of the person or application steps complete, except for the

IDVR step, and

then save the changes.

5. Select the

IDVR step, and then choose the Associate Person with ID item from the

Options Menu.

6. This opens the Associate Person with ID window, where you can choose which type of

Banner ID to assign to the selected record.

7. After choosing the appropriate ID type, either save the changes or select the

Associate Person with an ID button. This will display GOAMTCH.

ID Name Status Term Level Major

High

School Result

A00023291 Abrams, Anthony S 199510 UG ARTS UNKNHS Prospect not loaded

A00024505 Adams, Alison M 199510 UG ARTS UNKNHS Loaded 30-NOV-

2004

A00027662 Martinez, Robert S 199510 UG ARTS UNKNHS Prospect not loaded

383

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

8. The ID displayed on GOAMTCH should match the option chosen in the Associate

Person with ID window. The Matching Source field should contain the source code

that has been assigned to the interface code on SAAWADF for the application type of

the selected Web application. This source code can be changed if desired.

If no interface code has been specified for the application type on SAAWADF, then the

Matching Source field will contain the default source code assigned to the user ID on

GORCMUS. If no default source code has been assigned on GORCMUS, you will be

able to select a source code from the List of Values.

Perform a Next Block to populate the Data Entry block with all of the data for the

incoming electronic applicant record that is present in the temporary tables.

9. You can update or adjust the data in the Data Entry block if it does not meet your

institution’s data standards. These updates will be copied back to the temporary tables

and used when the applicant's record is created.

10. Once the data has been “cleaned up”, use a Next Block function to call the matching

algorithm, or select the Duplicate Check button.

11. The incoming electronic application can be a match, a potential match, or a new

record:

11.1. If the incoming electronic application is found to be a match to someone in

Banner, the Banner record will be displayed in the Match block.

11.2. If the incoming electronic application is found to be a potential match against

more than one existing Banner record, then all of the possible matches will be

displayed in the Potential Matches window.

11.3. If the electronic application is found to be a new record, an Alert Box will be

displayed with a message asking if you want to create the new person.

12. If the person is found to be an exact match, you can do one of three things:

12.1. Match the incoming record to the Banner record but not update any Null fields

that exist for the person in Banner by selecting the Select ID button.

12.2. Match the incoming record to the Banner record and choose to update any Null

fields that exist for the person in Banner with data on the incoming record by

selecting the Update ID button.

12.3. Choose to ignore the matched status, and create the person as new by

selecting the Create New button.

13. After selecting one of the options above, the user will be returned to the Verification

Steps window, and the

IDVR step will be marked as complete. Continue processing

the electronic applicant as needed.

Online Transcripts Activity List Form (SHAEDIS)

SHAEDIS uses the GOAMTCH form and the Common Matching algorithm to assist in

matching incoming records to existing Banner records. In addition, you can create a new

person record from GOAMTCH for the person on SHAEDIS.

Use the following steps to determine if a person on SHAEDIS matches an existing Banner

record or if the person can be created as a new record.

384

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

1. Query for those records where the Status is VERF and the Pending or Complete

radio group is set to

Pending.

2. Select the record to be matched. Perform either a Next Block function, or select Verify

ID from the Options Menu to call GOAMTCH.

3. The form will display the ID of the record from SHAEDIS. If this ID already exists in

Banner, then you must replace the ID with the word

GENERATED. This will allow

GOAMTCH to use a generated ID if the person selected on SHAEDIS is new to

Banner.

4. The value in the Matching Source field will be defaulted from the Online Matching

Source field on GORCMUS for the user ID. If the user ID is allowed to use other

matching source codes (based on the setting of the Allow Other Matching Sources

checkbox on GORCMUS), then you can change the value on the Matching Source

field on GOAMTCH.

5. Use a Next Block to populate the Data Entry block with all of the data for the incoming

transcript record that is present in the temporary tables.

6. You can update or adjust the data in the Data Entry block if it does not meet your

institution’s data standards. These updates will be copied back to the temporary tables

and used when the prospect's record is created.

7. The incoming person’s transcript record can be a match, a potential match, or a new

record:

7.1. If the incoming transcript is found to be a match to someone in Banner, the

Banner record will be displayed in the Match block.

7.2. If the incoming transcript is found to be a possible match against more than one

existing Banner record, then all of the possible matches will be displayed in the

Potential Matches window.

7.3. If the transcript is found to be a new record, an Alert Box will be displayed with a

message asking if you want to create the new person.

8. If the person is found to be an exact match, you can do one of three things:

8.1. Match the incoming record to the Banner record but not update any Null fields

that exist for the person in Banner by selecting the Select ID button.

8.2. Match the incoming record to the Banner record and choose to update any Null

fields that exist for the person in Banner with data on the incoming record by

selecting the Update ID button.

8.3. Choose to ignore the matched status, and create the person as new by

selecting the Create New button.

9. After selecting one of the options above, the user will be returned to SHAEDIS where

they can continue processing the record. The asterisk (*) that had appeared in the

unlabeled field to the left of the Last Name field to indicate the person had not been

verified will no longer be displayed.

385

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

Maintaining Multiple Telephone Numbers

Since a person may have more than one telephone number associated with an address,

multiple types of phone numbers may be maintained on the General Person Telephone

Form (SPATELE). This form may be accessed directly from any form where a phone type

and number are entered or maintained, such as the General Person Identification Form

(SPAIDEN). Only one phone number associated with an address type and address

sequence number may be flagged as primary, and it is this primary phone number which

will be displayed with the address on various forms in Banner Student. If no primary

number exists, then no phone number is displayed with an address. Phone numbers may

also be inactivated via the Inactivate (Indicator).

To associate a phone number with an address, you must enter an address type and

sequence number. The Address Summary Form (SOADDRQ) may be queried to view all

of the addresses which exist for a person.

When an address is inactivated, all phone numbers associated with that address type and

sequence number are also inactivated. Inactivating phone numbers will uncheck the

Primary (Indicator), if present. Phone numbers can be reactivated on an individual basis

and are automatically reactivated if the associated address if reactivated.

A telephone type can be associated with an address type. For example, address types of

BI, BU, MA, and PA exist on the Address Type Code Validation Form (STVATYP). Phone

types of BI, BU, MA, and PA could then exist on the Telephone Type Validation Form

(STVTELE), and STVATYP would then contain with these phone types. The following

shows how the Address Type Code and Telephone Type Validation Forms could be

organized.

STVATYP

STVTELE

Address Type Description Telephone Type Description

BI Billing BI Billing

BU Business BU Business

MA Mailing MA Mailing

PA Parents PA Parents

Telephone Type Description

BI Billing

BU Business

MA Mailing

PA Parents

386

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

Enter Biographic Information

After a person is established on the database, the General Person Form (SPAPERS) is

used to enter biographic information about a person. It captures information such as birth

date, sex, and marital status.

Maintain Comments

After a person is established on the database, any comments relating to the person are

entered using the Person Comment Form (SPACMNT).

Enter Emergency Contacts

Emergency contact information including name, address, phone number, and relationship

can be entered on the Emergency Contact Information Form (SPAEMRG) after a person

has been added to the database.

Enter Medical Information

The Medical Information Form (GOAMEDI) is used to capture medical data necessary to

accommodate any special needs a person may require or disabilities a person may have

that affect their enrollment at the institution.

Maintain International Information

The International Information Form (GOAINTL) is used to add and update international

and visa information, including nation of citizenship and I-20 information.

Add/Remove Holds

The Hold Information Form (SOAHOLD) is used to assign, track, and remove holds for a

person on the system. Holds may prevent registration, graduation, or the production of

enrollment verification documents, transcripts and grade mailers. If a person has a hold, a

message is displayed in the appropriate area.

Schedule Appointments/Track Contacts

The Person Appointments/Contacts Form (SOAAPPT) is used to schedule appointments

for a person and to track any contact with the person.

387

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

Support Services Processing

After a person has been established on the database, they may begin to have information

associated with their goals and needs requirements, as well as any services which are

provided to them and are maintained. Examples of goals may be a two year degree, a

word processing certificate, or a reading certificate. Examples of needs may be academic

assistance or child care. Examples of services may be counseling, day care, and tutoring.

The Support Services information may be maintained for any person existing on the

system. The person does not need to be a student.

Goals, needs, and services may be maintained separately or may be grouped together to

create a service group. A service group is a combination of goals, needs, and services

which may be assigned together. A person may also be associated with a service group or

with multiple service groups. These service groups consist of a specified set of goals,

needs, and services. The service groups may then be assigned to persons existing on the

database either online or via population selection and a batch load process.

An example of a service group may be an Adult Literacy Program where all of the

participants have the same goal, a reading certificate; the same needs, remedial reading

and academic monitoring; and the same services are provided, tutoring, counseling, and

skills assessment.

This service group example would be defined on the Service Group Rules Form

(SEASSGP). Individuals in the Adult Literacy Program could then be assigned to the

service group via the Service Group Assignment Form (SEAASGN). Service groups may

also be assigned in batch using a user-defined population selection and the Support

Services Load Process (SERLOAD). The detail information about each individual's

progress can be reviewed or modified on the Support Services Detail Form (SEADETL)

for those persons who may have additional goals, needs, and services. The Support

Services Query Form (SEAQGNS) may be used to see which people have any

combination of goals, needs, and services.

The Support Services Load Process (SERLOAD) may be used to create the data for the

Service Group Assignment Form (SEAASGN) and the Support Service Detail Form

(SEADETL).

Once a goal, need, or service has been assigned to a person, they may be further

enhanced by creating information in the form of attributes or comments about the goal,

need, or service. These attributes or comments specific to a goal for a person may be

defined using the Goal Attributes and Comment Form (SEAGDTL). Attributes and

comments specific to a need for a person may be maintained on the Need Attributes and

Comment Form (SEANDTL). Attributes and comments specific to a s

ervice for a person

may be maintained on the Service Attributes and Comment Form (SEASDTL).

Three methods may be used to add support service data for an individual. They are as

follows:

1. When large volume processing is required, create a set of individuals via population

selection, then run the Support Services Load Process (SERLOAD) which assigns

that set of goals, needs, and services associated with the service group.

2. When working with individuals, use the Service Group Assignment Form (SEASSGP)

to create goals, needs and services based on service groups, then go to the Support

Service Detail Form (SEADETL) to view and modify the details.

388

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

3. Go directly to the Support Service Detail Form (SEADETL) to enter any combination

of goals, needs, and services. These may be associated with a service group or may

be independent of a service group.

Service groups are optional. A person may be associated with a single service such as

Study Skills Service or Matriculation Service without having a service group. Goals,

needs, and services are all independent of each other. A person may have a goal without

a need, or have a need without a goal, or have a service without a need or a goal. The

successful completion of goals and needs met, and the provision of services can be

tracked.

Produce List of Persons

The Person Directory (SPRPDIR) provides a list of persons, addresses, and phone

numbers in the system by type of person: recruit, applicant, student, and faculty.

Purge Process

The following purge process may be used to purge information in the General Person

Module.

Address Purge (GPPADDR)

This process will purge address information for a person. The user may choose either of

two options:

1. Address expiration date (date must exist to be purged)

2. Inactive address (regardless of date)

Please see the Banner General User Guide for further information.

Banner Student Interface to Banner Human Resources

Please refer to the "Interfaces" chapter for information on the interface between General

Person data and Banner Human Resources.

General Person Reports

The following reports and processes are run through the General Person module:

Person Directory (SPRPDIR)

389

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

Please refer to the Banner Student Reports and Processes Handbook for report

descriptions, instructions, parameter definitions, and output samples.

Creating a Population Selection

To perform population selection, the application you will be working with must first be

defined on the Application Definition Rules Form (GLRAPPL).

The second step is to enter the Population Selection Definition Rules Form (GLRSLCT),

enter the Application (Code), and create a Selection ID (Identifier) with a description.

In the Selection Definition section, define the Select and From portions of the SQL

statement that the selection represents.

Example:

Next, enter the Selection Rules for the population of records you would like to see.

Example:

Save your data and exit. Your population selection rules will be compiled. If any errors are

issued during the compilation process, resolve the errors before continuing. If you do not

resolve all errors given during the compile process, you will not be able to use the

population selection rules to extract a population.

You are now ready to extract the population of people. The Population Selection Extract

(GLBDATA) is run from the Process Submission Control Form (GJAPCTL). At minimum,

you will need to supply the parameters for Selection Identifier 1, Application, and Creator

ID, which are the values that were in the Key Information of the Population Selection

Definition Rules Form (GLRSLCT).

After extracting the population, you can use the Population Selection Extract Data Form

(GLAEXTR) to view and/or modify the people in the population. You can add or delete

people from the population using this form. The keys to the form are Application,

Selection ID, and Creator ID. (User ID is also displayed in the Key Information.) You will

be able to add or delete people only from populations that you selected.

Support Services Load Process (SERLOAD)

Select:

SARADAP_PIDM

From:

SARADAP

SARADAP_TERM_CODE_ENTRY

'200010'

AND

SARADAP_LEVL_CODE

'UG'

390

Banner Student User Guide | General Person

After extracting the population, and modifying the people in it if necessary, you can use the

population for a variety of purposes. Letters can be produced using Letter Generation,

based upon a population, and many Banner reports and processes also can accept a

population for processing.

For additional details on population selection, refer to the Banner General User Guide.

391

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

Faculty Load

This chapter discusses processing and procedure information for Faculty Load.

Faculty Load Procedures

Here are tasks you can perform in this module.

Faculty Workload Rules Creation

The Faculty Load Term Control Form (SIATERM) must be established for each term for

which faculty assignments are created. The FTE (full time equivalency) factor is used as

the denominator to calculate the term FTE. For example, the faculty members workload

for the term is 12.00. To reach the full time equivalent the FTE factor of 15 is specified on

SIATERM, hence the faculty members term FTE is:

The Faculty Workload Contract FTE Form (SIACFTE) must then be used to establish the

contract FTE factor. The keys to this form are Contract (Type Code) and (Effective)

Term. The contract FTE factor may be maintained and will be used when performing

contract term analysis (contract term FTE) or contract analysis (contract FTE) on the

Faculty Contract Analysis Form (SIACONA).

All assignments with a like contract type are grouped together, and a contract term FTE

and contract FTE are calculated as follows:

A contract term FTE is calculated as:

Workload Term FTE

Term FTE factor

12 = .80

Term Workload for the Contract = Contract Term FTE

Contract FTE factor

392

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

A contract FTE is calculated as:

The Faculty Contract Rules Form (SIAFCTR) is used to specify the terms included in a

contract type for an effective term. Contract types are established on the Faculty Contract

Type Code Validation Form (STVFCNT). For example, a Fall/Spring contract effective in

199901, Fall of 1999 can include the terms:

A Summer One/Summer Two contract effective in 199203 will include the terms:

Note: Contract types may be defined for either semester or quarter term

structures. These rules must be created prior to performing contract

analysis either online or in batch.

The Faculty Workload Term Rules Form (SIAFLRT) is used to create the workload rules to

be used when performing term analysis. Workload rules may be inactivated by unchecking

the Active (Workload Status) checkbox. Multiple rules may be created for a workload

rule code. When multiples exist all term rules will be used in the analysis. Each workload

rule can specify credit hour ranges, contact hour ranges, workload ranges, and a FTE

range. For example, a workload rule code for a full time professor in the college of Arts

and Science is created as follows:

Workload Rule Code: FTPR01 Full Time College 01

This rule specifies that the instructor should be teaching between 12 to 15 credit hours per

term with 12 instructional workload units, 3 to 5 non-instructional workload units for a total

workload of between 15 to 18. His overall FTE should also be in the 0.8 to 1.0 range.

Sum of all Term Workload associated with the Contract = Contract FTE

Contract FTE factor

199901 Fall 1999

199902 Spring 2000

199903 Summer One 2000

199904 Summer Two 2000

Credit Hour Range Contact Hour Range Workload Range

Total: 12 to 15 Weekly: Inst: 12.00

Generated: Total: Non-Inst: 3.00 5.00

Total: 15.00 18.00

FTE Range: 80 1.00

393

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

Term rules may be rolled forward to a future term via the Default Term field in the Key

Information of the Faculty Workload Term Rules Form (SIAFLRT).

The Faculty Contract Term Rules Form (SIAFLCT) is used to create the rules which are to

be used when performing a contract analysis on a term-by-term basis.

The Faculty Workload Contract Rules Form (SIAFLRC) is used to create the workload

rules to be used when performing the contract analysis. This form works in the same

fashion as the Faculty Workload Term Rules Form (SIAFLRT) except that these rules are

effective term oriented.

In summary, there are three methods of faculty load analysis:

1. Faculty Workload Analysis

Performed on the Faculty Assignment Form (SIAASGN) using the rules established

on the Faculty Workload Term Rules Form (SIAFLRT).

2. Faculty Contract Term Analysis

Performed on the Faculty Contract Analysis Form (SIACONA) using the rules created

on the Faculty Contract Rules Form (SIAFLCT), the Faculty Workload Contract FTE

Form (SIACFTR), and the Faculty Load Term Control Form (SIATERM).

3. Faculty Contract Analysis

Performed on the Faculty Contract Analysis Form (SIACONA) using the rules created

on the Faculty Workload Contract Rules Form (SIAFLRC) and the Faculty Workload

Contract FTE Form (SIACFTE).

The batch Faculty Load Contract Analysis Report (SIRCTAL) handles multiple faculty

contract types and performs contract term analysis.

Faculty Information

The Faculty Load Module contains three different forms for maintaining faculty

information. They are:

1. The Faculty Personnel Form (SIAFPER) is used to maintain the tenure and sabbatical

information, as well as AAUP membership and years of teaching experience. This

form contains no required data elements and is not essential to processing.

Note: The information entered on this form is shared with the Banner®

Human Resources System. If your institution has the Banner Human

Resources System, then information is maintained on the Faculty Action

Tracking Form (PEAFACT) in that system.

Note: The Tenure Code Rule Form (PTRTENR) must be established prior

to entering or maintaining any tenure information on a faculty member.

This is a Banner Human Resources System form which will be delivered

with the Banner

Student System for those institutions which do not have

the Banner

Human Resources System.

394

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

2. The Faculty/Advisor Information Form (SIAINST) must be created for faculty members

prior to them being available to teach a section or be assigned as an advisor. This

form is effective term oriented to maintain the information as it changes over time.

The Faculty Data information maintains the faculty status information (inactive faculty

members may not be assigned to sections), which indicates whether the persons are

faculty members or advisors as well as their category and staff time. The Workload

Rule (Code) maintained on this form is important in the term analysis process. This

code will determine the set of rules to be used to analyze the faculty members term

assignments.

The Faculty Contract information allows for an instructor or advisor to be associated

with multiple contracts and contract rules. One contract should be designated as the

default contract via the Default Indicator. The user-specified default contract will be

automatically placed on assignments when the instructor is assigned to the CRN on

the Faculty Assignment Form (SIAASGN) or the Schedule Form (SSASECT). If no

contract type is specified, then no contract analysis may be performed.

The Faculty College and Department information is used to specify the faculty

member's home administrative college and department. It may also be used to specify

the percentage breakdown if the faculty member is assigned to multiple departments

and/or colleges.

The Faculty Attributes information may be used to specify certain criteria about faculty

members, such as whether they have been certified to teach specific courses.

The Faculty Comments information may be used to record any additional information

about the faculty members.

3. The Faculty Degree Information Form (SIAFDEG) is used to maintain the degree

information associated with the faculty member. This form is not essential to

processing. Multiple degrees may be associated with a single prior college and each

degree may have major, minor, and concentration information associated with it. The

dates the transcript was received and reviewed are also available on this form.

Note: Information entered on the Prior College Form (SOAPCOL) or on

the General Information Form (PPAGENL) in the Banner Human

Resources System will be displayed on this form.

Faculty Assignments

Prior to assigning faculty members to classes, you should establish the instructional

workload. This process is done via the Basic Course Information Form (SCACRSE). The

Schedule Type information on SCACRSE allows the instructional workload to be assigned

for each schedule type. For example, the schedule type of lecture for BIOL 101 may have

a workload value of 3.00, the lab for BIOL 101 may have a workload value of 1.00.

Adjusted workload may also be established in the Schedule Type information. Adjusted

workload is based on over-enrollment of a section. For example, if more than 32 students

enroll for the lecture section of BIOL 101, then the instructor receives a workload of 3.25

instead of 3.00. This adjustment will occur automatically based on the section enrollment.

If workloads are not maintained at the catalog, then they may be entered when each

instructional assignment is entered.

395

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

Instructional assignments may be entered on either the Schedule Form (SSASECT) or the

Faculty Assignment Form (SIAASGN). Assignments entered on the Schedule Form are

made in the Instructor information.

Faculty members may be assigned to sessions of a section or to the overall section. Here

are examples of how assignments can be made:

• One faculty member to one section which has multiple sessions

• One faculty member to one session

• Multiple faculty members to one section with multiple sessions

• Multiple faculty members to one session

When assigning instructors on the Schedule Form (SSASECT), the only fields which may

be modified are the Percent Responsibility and the Percent of Session. Updates to the

instruction workload must be performed on the Faculty Assignment Form (SIAASGN).

If an instructor's assignment conflicts with another assignment for the term, a message is

generated, and the conflict override must be entered to permit the time conflict in

assignments.

Inactive instructors may not be assigned to instructional or non-instructional assignments.

If an instructor has been inactivated on the Faculty/Advisor Information Form (SIAINST),

then the message Instructor is not active for this term is displayed when the instructor ID is

entered in the Key Information of SIAASGN.

The user will not be able to change the instructor's status to "inactive" on the Faculty/

Advisor Information Form (SIAINST), if assignments exist for the term being updated.

The Available Faculty Query Form (SIAFAVL), which may be used to find a faculty

member with the right attributes to teach the section, is accessed from the Instructor

window on the Schedule Form (SSASECT) using a Help function. The Faculty Schedule

Query Form (SIAASGQ) which may be used to view the faculty member's schedule for the

term comes from the same window, using a Count Query Hits function. This is a query

only form. Assignments entered on SSASECT will be displayed on the Faculty

Assignment Form (SIAASGN). The Faculty Course Query Form (SIQSECM), used to

display course section information associated with an instructor's existing schedule, is

query only and is accessed from SIAASGN.

The instructional and non-instructional assignments are entered and maintained on the

Faculty Assignment Form (SIAASGN). Instructional assignments entered here can have

the instructional workload adjusted. For example, if a full Professor has been required to

teach a remedial English course but will be given additional workload credit for doing so,

then the Override Workload field would be used. All instructional and non-instructional

assignments may be associated with a contract so that contract analysis may include only

the appropriate assignments for the contract.

The following are the definitions of some of the calculations performed in the Faculty Load

module. The legend below explains the examples for the calculations.

396

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

Calculated Workload—This is calculated as follows:

Workload or Adjusted Workload * % of Responsibility

3.00 * 50% = 1.5 Calculated Workload

Instructor Credit—This is calculated as follows:

Session Credits * % of Responsibility

4.00 * 50% = 2.0 Instructor Credits

Weekly Contact Hours—This is the weekly contact hours associated with the session.

This calculation uses the duration factor and percentage of session assigned to the faculty

member. The following is an example of weekly contact hours:

Hours Per Meeting Per Week * % Responsibility * % of Session

3 * 50% * 100 = 1.5 Weekly Contact Hours

Total Contact Hours—This is the total contact hours for the session for the term. This

calculation uses the percentage of responsibility and percentage of session.

Letter Definition

A Total meeting period days for the term

B Excluded meeting days from Schedule Exclusion Rules Form (SSAEXCL)

C Number of minutes in a meeting period

D Duration factor from Faculty Load Term Control Form (SIATERM)

E% RES

F % SES

Hours Per Meeting Per Week

A - B * C

Total Contact Hours

A - B * C

D * F * E

Total Contact Hours = (# of Meetings * Hours Per Meeting) *%

Responsibility * % Session

397

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

The total contact hour calculation on the Faculty Assignment Form (SIAASGN) uses the

override value, should one exist, for contact hours per week from the Schedule Form

(SSASECT).

If a section has multiple day and time combinations, the total contact hours are calculated

by determining the contact hours for each combination, and then calculating the sum of

these values, which will be the total contact hours.

Meeting Combination 1:

Meeting Combination 2:

Total Contact Hours:

An example is as follows:

For 199901, Anthropology 101, CRN 10030, meets with the following day and time

combinations:

Meeting 1:

Meeting 2:

Note: In this example, the hours/week values are overridden, but this

calculation will work the same should you leave the default values in

place.

Contact Hours

for Meeting 1

= Hours/Week from SSASECT

Number of Meeting Days/Week

x Total Meeting Days

Contact Hours

for Meeting 2

= Hours/Week from SSASECT

Number of Meeting Days/Week

x Total Meeting Days

= Contact Hours for Meeting

Combination 1

+ Contact Hours for

Meeting

Combination 2

29-AUG-1999 to 13-DEC-1999 M, W, F 8:00 - 8:50 3 hours/week

29-AUG-1999 to 13-DEC-1999 R 12:00 -

1:50

2 hours/week

398

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

Meeting 1:

Meeting 2:

Total Contact Hours = 78.00

Generated Credit Hours (GCH)—This calculation uses the percentage of responsibility

and session credit hour value.

GCH = # Credits Per Session * % Responsibility * # students in section

Assignment FTE—A full time equivalent will be calculated for each assignment. This value

is calculated using the adjusted instructional workload and the term FTE factor from the

Faculty Load Term Control Form (SIATERM). The following example uses a Term FTE

factor of 15.

The non-instructional assignments are maintained in the Faculty Non-Instructional

Assignment information on SIAASGN. The workload may be entered here or it can default

from the information on the Faculty Non-Instructional Type Code Validation Form

(STVNIST). Non-Instructional assignments may also be associated with a college,

department and a TOPS code (Taxonomy of Programs and Services). An assignment FTE

similar to the one calculated for instructional assignments is also included for each non-

instructional assignment.

A position number may be entered for further integration with the Banner Human

Resources System.

The Faculty Workload Summary window on the Faculty Assignment Form contains the

Faculty Workload Summary information and the Faculty Workload Rules and Analysis

information. The Summary information displays the summary results for the term including

credit hours, generated credit hours, weekly contact hours, term contact hours,

instructional workload, non-instructional workload, total workload, and term FTE.

= Hours/week from SSASECT = 3 x Total Meeting Days = 46

Number of Meetings/Week = 3

=1 x 46

=46

= Hours/week from SSASECT = 2 x Total Meeting Days = 16

Number of Meetings/Week = 1

=2 x 16

=32

3 = .20 FTE

399

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

A Next Block function from the Summary information performs the term analysis for the

faculty member. If no workload rules rule code has been established or no workload rules

are created, then no analysis can be performed. The term analysis will display the rule

associated with the workload rule code and indicate whether the faculty member is in an

underload or overload situation. A

U is displayed next to the workload rule code value for

underloads, an

O is displayed for overloads.

For example, a faculty member with workload rule code 000001 should teach between 12

and 15 credits. The faculty member is only assigned to 10 for the term so the form would

display as follows:

A message is displayed on the bottom of the form to indicate that the workload rules have

not been satisfied by the instructor.

Faculty Contract Analysis

The Faculty Contract Analysis Form (SIACONA) is used to perform the contract analysis

for the faculty member on a term basis and on an overall contract basis. This process

works in the same fashion as the term analysis which is performed on the Faculty

Assignment Form (SIAASGN). Contract analysis will summarize the terms associated with

the contract in the first section on the form. For example, if Fall and Spring are both

included in the contract, then the instructional workload for both Fall and Spring will be

summarized into one total. The Contract Term Analysis information will perform the

analysis and display an overload or underload indicator for those rules which are not

satisfied by the instructor's assignments. Only those assignments associated with a

contract will be used in the contract analysis.

Multiple Contracts

An instructor may be assigned to multiple contracts via the Faculty Contract information

on the Faculty/Advisor Information Form (SIAINST). This allows for an instructor to be

associated with an unlimited number of contracts within the effective terms specified. An

example where this may be useful is for a full-time professor who also has a secondary

contract to teach an evening course in the Continuing Education Division, which should

not impact his full-time contract. Each assignment, either instructional or non-instructional,

can now be associated with a specific contract code.

The Default Indicator must be specified when creating contract information. This default

contract code will be used when assignments are created on either the Schedule Form

(SSASECT) or on the Faculty Assignment Form (SIAASGN).

Faculty load analysis examines only the assignments associated with a contract when

performing contract analysis.

Low High

Credit

Hours

12.00 15.00U

400

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

Two methods of contract analysis exist, contract term analysis and contract analysis.

Contract term analysis is supported using the Faculty Contract Term Rules Form

(SIAFLCT). This rules form allows for rules to be established by term and contract type.

There are two sections on the Faculty Contract Analysis Form (SIACONA), Contract Term

Workload and Contract Term Analysis, which display the contract term and workload rules,

and perform the contract term analysis.

An example where contract term analysis might be used is when a faculty member's

contract spans two terms, and the Dean needs analysis on the instructor's workload for a

single term within the contract.

Automatic PIN Creation

PINS can be added to Banner manually for an individual, by batch process using a

population selection, or automatically by database trigger.

You have the option to automatically create PINs when a general student record or faculty

record is inserted. Triggers on the SGBSTDN and SIBINST tables will create PINs when a

student or faculty record is inserted into either table, if the triggers are set up to do so. This

automatic creation allows the PIN to be available for use as soon as the person becomes

eligible to access the self-service processing. The triggers will fire when the record is

inserted, based upon the institution’s PIN preferences and table selections on the PIN

Preference Form (GUAPPRF).

Please note that performance issues may arise when the PIN triggers are used. You may

need to turn this functionality off if batch processing is involved. Student and faculty

records are generally processed individually and should not be affected. However, if you

assign decisions which create student records using the using the Admit Decision Calc

Report (SARBDSN), you may want to disable automatic PIN creation during batch

decision runs.

Please refer to the Banner General User Guide for more information on PIN functionality

and the PIN Preference Form (GUAPPRF).

Automated Faculty Load and Compensation Processing

This processing automatically calculates faculty load payroll compensation in Banner

Human Resources, based on faculty course load data from Banner Student. The matching

faculty assignment is then automatically created in Banner Human Resources in the

Faculty Load and Compensation module.

Please refer to the Banner Human Resources User Guide for more information.

Overview

Forms and reports in Banner Human Resources allow a faculty member’s assigned

workload (course assignments and non-instructional assignments in Banner Student) to

be used to automatically generate a compensation/job assignment record in Banner

Human Resources.

401

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

• The Faculty/Advisor Information Form (SIAINST) and the Faculty Assignment Form

(SIAASGN) provide the necessary data. SIAASGN uses the position and suffix numbers

for the faculty assignment.

• The Faculty Non-Instructional Type Validation Form (STVNIST) is used to maintain

faculty non-instructional type codes.

• The Course Labor Distribution Form (SCACLBD and the Schedule Labor Distribution

Form (SSACLBD) are used to maintain labor distribution data for adjunct faculty

assignments.

You can calculate faculty compensation based on institution-specific rules. The calculation

results populate the employee's job record, and payment is made during the payroll

process. Banner Human Resources provides the rules and security controls needed to

compile the core compensation records. Data is also used in the Faculty Compensation

area of Employee Self-Service.

Note: The Banner Human Resources Faculty Load and Compensation

module does not affect the Banner Student Faculty Load module and is

not dependent on the Banner Student faculty workload rules.

Building Job Labor Distribution Data for Courses

The Course Labor Distribution Form (SCACLBD is used to build and maintain job labor

distribution data at the course catalog level for adjunct faculty assignments. This

information can be used for scheduling as well on the Schedule Labor Distribution Form

(SSACLBD). (Labor distribution data is entered in Banner Human Resources.) The use of

labor distribution information is optional. If this information is not entered on SCACLBD,

the FOAPAL (fund, organization, account, program, activity, location) distribution for the

associated position is used. The data on SCACLBD is used to override the budget factors

associated with the funding of a specific position in Banner Human Resources that has

been assigned to the employee on SIAASGN.

The form displays one of two windows, one if Banner Finance is installed and the other if

Banner Finance is not installed. When Banner Finance is installed, FOAPAL data is

validated by part-of-term or the effective term end date on STVTERM if no part-of-term

exists. This ensures that the FOAPAL elements are valid until that date. If Banner Finance

is not installed, the External Account Code field must be entered, and no validation takes

place. You can use the Maintenance button to copy and end the labor distribution

information by term.

Note: Banner Finance requires a timestamp. A midnight timestamp will

be associated with the end date when the date is submitted for validation.

You can use the Options Menu to access SIAASGN and view faculty assignments, to

access SSASECT and view term section details, and to access SSACLBD and view

schedule labor distribution information.

402

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

Building Job Labor Distribution Data for Sections

The Schedule Labor Distribution Form (SSACLBD) is used to build and maintain job labor

distribution data at the section level (CRN) for adjunct faculty assignments. (Labor

distribution data is entered in Banner Human Resources.) The use of labor distribution

information is optional. If this information is not entered on SSACLBD, the FOAPAL (fund,

organization, account, program, activity, location) distribution for the associated position is

used. The data on SSACLBD is used to override the budget factors associated with the

funding of a specific position in Banner Human Resources that has been assigned to the

employee on SIAASGN.

Note: The class section must first have been created using the Schedule

Form (SSASECT), before using the Schedule Labor Distribution Form

(SSACLBD).

Schedule labor distribution data defaults into the Class Schedule module (SSACLBD)

based on the course labor distribution information defined in the Course Catalog module

(SCACLBD). The defaulted information can be overridden to create section specific labor

distribution records. Overrides take place when FOAPAL information exists on SSACLBD,

and the Use Schedule Labor Distributions checkbox is checked on the Faculty Load

Contract Type Control Rules Form (PTRFLCT) in Banner Human Resources. When this

checkbox is checked to use overrides with course-based faculty, a unit method is used to

determine the appropriate FOAPAL distribution. However, unit method processing is not

advised for job labor distribution overrides. FOAPAL overrides do not apply to non-

instructional assignments.

Processing takes place as follows:

When the Use Schedule Labor Distributions checkbox is checked (

Y), the Faculty Load

Extract Process (PEPFLAC) uses the FOAPAL on SSACLBD for the CRN if it exists.

• If the FOAPAL for the CRN does not exist, the process uses the FOAPAL from the job.

• If the FOAPAL from the job does not exist, the process uses the FOAPAL from the

position.

• Values are defaulted to the process.

When the Use Schedule Labor Distributions checkbox is unchecked (N), the Faculty

Load Extract Process (PEPFLAC) uses the FOAPAL from the job.

• If the FOAPAL from the job does not exist, the process uses the FOAPAL from the

position.

• Values are defaulted to the process.

When Banner Finance is not installed, the positions are funded through external account

codes.

The form displays one of two windows, one if Banner Finance is installed and the other if

Banner Finance is not installed. When Banner Finance is installed, FOAPAL data is

validated by part-of-term or the effective term end date on STVTERM if no part-of-term

exists. This ensures that the FOAPAL elements are valid until that date. If Banner Finance

is not installed, the External Account Code field must be entered, and no validation takes

place.

403

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

Note: Banner Finance requires a timestamp. A midnight timestamp will

be associated with the end date when the date is submitted for validation.

You can use the Options Menu to access SIAASGN and view faculty assignments, to

access SSASECT and view term section details, and to access SSACLBD and view

course labor distribution information.

Tracking Compensation for Faculty Assignment Records

Instructional and non-instructional data elements on the Faculty Assignment Form

(SIAASGN) are used with the Banner Human Resources processing to build the faculty

assignment record and track compensation based on term start and end dates.

Note: Faculty members are created on the Faculty Advisor Information

Form (SIAINST) and must have the Status set to

AC (Active) and the

Faculty (Indicator) checked to be associated with assignments on

SIAASGN.

The instructional elements used by the automated faculty load and compensation

processing are: CRN, Subject, Course, Section, Session Credit, Workload, Override

Workload, Calculated Workload, Weekly Contact, Contract Type, Position Number,

and Position Number Suffix.

The non-instructional elements used are: (Non-Instructional) Type, Workload, Weekly

Contact, College, Department, Contract (Type), Position Number, and Position

Suffix.

The Position Number field is used to enter a position number for the faculty assignment.

It is used to tie the faculty member's assignment to a position defined in the Banner

Human Resources system. This is used when Position Control is installed.

• Use a List function to access the Position List Form (NBQPOSN) and view a list of all

positions for the organization in position number order. You can query to narrow the

results.

• Use a Count Query Hits function to access the Employee Job Inquiry Form (NBIJLST)

and view all jobs that are in effect as of the query date in the Key Block. You can query

to narrow the results.

When Position Control is not installed, the Count Query Hits and List functions are not

available.

The Position Number Suffix field is used to display a position number suffix from Banner

Human Resources. This is used when Position Control is installed.

Note: Banner Student users will need access to the NBQPOSN and

NBIJLST forms in Position Control to use the position number data.

These forms do not invoke Banner Human Resources Security. You can

evaluate who at your institution should be able to access these forms.

404

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

The Compensation Extracted checkbox is enabled when the assignment has been

extracted into the Faculty Compensation module or has been applied to Banner Human

Resources from that module. This field cannot be changed. This checkbox is dynamically

set when Banner Human Resources is installed, where the faculty assignment exists in

the PERFASG table (instructional assignment) and the PERFNIS table (non-instructional

assignment).

The Compensation Applied checkbox is enabled when the assignment has been

extracted into the Faculty Compensation module or has been applied to Banner Human

Resources from that module. This field cannot be changed.This checkbox is dynamically

set when Banner Human Resources is installed, where the position and suffix for the

existing, active assignment have been applied to the NBRJOBS table and then mapped

from SIRASGN and SIRNIST to PERFASG and PERFNIS.

Note: When the Compensation Extracted checkbox is checked and the

Compensation Applied checkbox is unchecked, you can continue to

make adjustments to the faculty member's assignment and components.

Records will need to be unlocked in the Faculty Compensation module

before the changes will be apparent in Banner Employee Self-Service.

When the Compensation Applied checkbox is checked, you can

continue to make changes in Banner Student. However, manual

adjustments must be made to the faculty member’s job assignment in

Banner Human Resources to ensure that compensation is correct.

SIAASGN checks if the job assignment exists (NBRJOBS), when Banner Human

Resources is installed. It also checks if the position number is valid and active, when the

job assignment does not exist in Banner Human Resources. This will allow the new job

assignment to be created in Banner Human Resources. Prior invalid data in SIRASGN

displays a message based on the setting of the Position Validation on Faculty

Assignments checkbox on the Installation Rules Form (PTRINST). When the checkbox is

checked (

Y), an error is displayed. When the checkbox is unchecked (N), a warning

message is displayed.

When a position number is entered for a course assignment and the record is saved, the

following validation occurs:

1. The system checks that the position number exists in Position Control.

2. The system checks that the position has an active status.

3. If the position number does not exist, an error message is displayed.

4. If the position is not active, an error message is displayed.

5. If the position and suffix are selected, but the ID is for an employee, a warning

message is displayed.

Note: Use the Position Validation on Faculty Assignments checkbox

on the Installation Rules Form (PTRINST) to allow validation of Position

Control numbers to take place. This indicator must be checked (

Y) before

the validation can occur. If you wish to use the warning message for

invalid position numbers, leave the indicator unchecked (

N).

405

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

Using Position Numbers with Faculty Compensation

Position numbering and suffix numbering assignments for instructional and non-

instructional items are used in the final compensation record that is passed to Banner

Human Resources. Compensation can be for full-time, salaried faculty members and for

part-time, course-based faculty members. Here are some recommended uses of position

numbers and suffixes.

Full-Time Salaried Faculty

Typically, a full-time faculty member has one job assignment and is compensated for a

number of assigned activities. Overload payments can occur when the faculty member is

assigned more than a full load. In this situation, a separate position number is assigned in

the Faculty Compensation module to designate the overload payment. If the same

position number and suffix are used for the overload payment, the overload compensation

is added to the regular assignment pay under one position, potentially making

identification of these payments difficult and also causing benefit costs to be incorrectly

calculated against these additional dollars. It is recommended that one position number

and one suffix be used for the regular contact, and a unique position number and suffix be

used for the overload.

Part-Time Course-Based Faculty

Conditions can exist for part-time faculty members that affect how position numbers and

suffixes are assigned and paid. A faculty member may have some or all of the following

payment conditions:

• a three week course,

• a course that runs for the entire length of the term,

• an online course that is associated with a two month time span,

• a non-instructional assignment that is to charged to another area, or

• a course that runs for a part-of-term.

If these payment conditions exist within Banner Student assignments for a faculty

member, each of these assignments must be associated with a unique position number/

suffix combination. This is because the Faculty Compensation module is creating job

assignments and calculating when they should be paid. In the above list of conditions,

each assignment is paid at a different time and has different start and end dates on the

faculty member’s job assignments.

If a faculty member's assignments are only operating for one condition, such as two

courses running for the entire length of the term that are charged to the same department,

the same position number/suffix combination can be used. This is because the payments

are added together and are paid and charged for the entire length of the term.

Warning! When the same position number and suffix combination is used

for each faculty assignment in Banner Student, it can result in

underpayment or overpayment in the Faculty Compensation module of

Banner Human Resources.

406

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

Rolling Distribution Information

The Roll Labor Distribution parameter in the Term Roll Report (SSRROLL) is used to roll

the labor distribution FOAPAL information from SSACLBD/SSRCLBD for the section/CRN

to the new term. This FOAPAL is validated using the end date of the part-of-term for the

CRN. If no part-of-term exists, the FOAPAL is validated using the end date from

STVTERM, to ensure that the FOAPAL elements are valid until that date.

Note: Banner Finance requires a timestamp. A midnight timestamp will

be associated with the end date when the date is submitted for validation.

If all elements are successfully rolled, the process will display the Section Rolled message

in the output. If any element of the FOAPAL is invalid, an error message will be printed on

the output file, and the entire FOAPAL string will not be rolled. Other details associated

with the CRN, such as instructors, links, fees, attributes, and so on, will still be rolled. If an

error is encountered on a class with split distributions, none of the FOAPAL records will be

rolled, because this could cause an unbalanced labor distribution.

The following errors may be printed on the report output for invalid FOAPAL elements.

Message Cause Action

*ERROR* Chart of Accounts is

inactive. Schedule Job Labor

Distribution not rolled.

The Chart of Accounts Status

Indicator for this Chart of

Accounts code is not active.

Enter an active Chart of Accounts

code on the Schedule Labor

Distribution Form (SSACLBD).

*ERROR* Chart of Accounts code

is terminated. Schedule Job Labor

Distribution not rolled.

The Chart of Accounts is no longer

in effect in Banner Finance.

Enter an active Chart of Accounts

code that has not passed its

termination date on the Chart of

Accounts Code Maintenance Form

(FTMCOAS).

*ERROR* Account Index is

inactive. Schedule Job Labor

Distribution not rolled.

The Account Index Status

Indicator for this account index

code is not active.

Enter an active account index on

the Schedule Labor Distribution

Form (SSACLBD).

*ERROR* Account Index is

terminated. Schedule Job Labor

Distribution not rolled.

This account index is no longer in

effect in Banner Finance.

Enter an account index that has

not passed its termination date on

the Account Index Code

Maintenance Form (FTMACCI).

*ERROR* Fund is inactive.

Schedule Job Labor Distribution

not rolled.

The Fund Status Indicator for

this fund code is not active.

Enter an active fund code on the

Schedule Labor Distribution Form

(SSACLBD).

*ERROR* Fund is terminated.

Schedule Job Labor Distribution

not rolled.

This fund is no longer in effect in

Banner Finance.

Enter a fund that has not passed

its termination date on the Fund

Code Maintenance Form

(FTMFUND).

*ERROR* Fund is not defined as

data entry. Schedule Job Labor

Distribution not rolled.

This fund is not defined to be used

for data entry in Banner Finance.

Enter a fund defined for data entry

in Banner Finance.

407

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

*ERROR* Organization is inactive.

Schedule Job Labor Distribution

not rolled.

The Organization Status

Indicator for this organization

code is not active.

Enter an active organization code

on the Schedule Labor Distribution

Form (SSACLBD).

*ERROR* Organization is

terminated. Schedule Job Labor

Distribution not rolled.

This organization is no longer in

effect in Banner Finance.

Enter an organization that has not

passed its termination date on the

Organization Code Maintenance

Form (FTMORGN).

*ERROR* Organization is not

defined as data entry. Schedule

Job Labor Distribution not rolled.

This organization is not defined to

be used for data entry in Banner

Finance.

Enter an organization defined for

data entry in Banner Finance.

*ERROR* Account is inactive.

Schedule Job Labor Distribution

not rolled.

The Account Status Indicator for

this account code is not active.

Enter an active account code on

the Schedule Labor Distribution

Form (SSACLBD).

*ERROR* Account XXXXXX is not

a labor account. Schedule Job

Labor Distribution not rolled.

The account type is not of a labor

account and/or the Internal

Account Type Code is not set to

60 in Banner Finance.

Enter an account type code with

an Internal Account Type Code

set to

60 in Banner Finance.

*ERROR* Account is terminated.

Schedule Job Labor Distribution

not rolled.

This account is no longer in effect

in Banner Finance.

Enter an account that has not

passed its termination date on the

Account Code Maintenance Form

(FTMACCT).

*ERROR* Account is not defined

as data entry. Schedule Job Labor

Distribution not rolled.

This account is not defined to be

used for data entry in Banner

Finance.

Enter an account defined for data

entry in Banner Finance.

*ERROR* Program is inactive.

Schedule Job Labor Distribution

not rolled.

The Program Status Indicator for

this account code is not active.

Enter an active program code on

the Schedule Labor Distribution

Form (SSACLBD).

*ERROR* Program is terminated.

Schedule Job Labor Distribution

not rolled.

This program is no longer in effect

in Banner Finance.

Enter a program that has not

passed its termination date on the

Program Code Maintenance Form

(FTMPROG).

*ERROR* Program is not defined

as data entry. Schedule Job Labor

Distribution not rolled.

This program is not defined to be

used for data entry in Banner

Finance.

Enter a program defined for data

entry in Banner Finance.

*ERROR* Activity is inactive.

Schedule Job Labor Distribution

not rolled.

The Activity Status Indicator for

this activity code is not active.

Enter an active activity code on the

Schedule Labor Distribution Form

(SSACLBD).

*ERROR* Activity is terminated.

Schedule Job Labor Distribution

not rolled.

This activity is no longer in effect in

Banner Finance.

Enter an activity that has not

passed its termination date of the

Activity Code Maintenance Form

(FTMACTV).

Message Cause Action

408

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

Faculty Security Menu and Term Availability

Faculty members and advisors can be restricted by date/term from accessing information

through the Faculty and Advisor main menu in Self-Service. Date ranges can be set up to

control access to the menu based on the term. Faculty members and advisors who are

restricted from access to the main menu will see a message that access is not allowed.

The terms displayed to faculty members and advisors in the Select a Term pulldown list in

Self-Service can also be restricted by date/term. Date ranges can be set up to control

which terms are displayed in the list. Term information for a faculty member is compared to

the active records on SIAINST. However, the Status Date field on SIAINST is not used in

this processing.

Set Up SOATERM

Use the Faculty and Advisor Access Dates section of the Part of Term and Web

Registration Controls window on SOATERM to set up the date ranges in Self-Service for

main menu access and term display in the pulldown list. The term date rules use start and

end dates. When no faculty member or advisor access dates have been set up for a term,

the current functionality will be used. Rules can be created on a term-by-term basis or for

all terms on SOATERM.

Faculty members and advisors will have access to the Banner Faculty and Advisor Self-

Service main menu when one of two conditions exists: when the current date does not fall

within any date range for any term and the person has an active status for any term on the

Faculty/Advisor Information Form (SIAINST), and/or when the current date does fall within

a date range and the person has an active status for the term on SIAINST.

All terms are displayed in the Self-Service Select a Term pulldown list when no date

ranges have been defined on SOATERM, the person is active on SIAINST for the term,

and the Faculty and Advisor Controls have been set on SOATERM.

*ERROR* Location is inactive.

Schedule Job Labor Distribution

not rolled.

The Location Status Indicator for

this location code is not active.

Enter an active location code on

the Schedule Labor Distribution

Form (SSACLBD).

*ERROR* Location is terminated.

Schedule Job Labor Distribution

not rolled.

This location is no longer in effect

in Banner Finance.

Enter a location that has not

passed its termination date on the

Location Code Maintenance Form

(FTMLOCN).

*ERROR* Invalid Project code.

Schedule Job Labor Distribution

not rolled.

An invalid project code has been

entered in Banner Finance.

Enter a valid project code for this

Chart of Accounts in Banner

Finance.

*ERROR* Invalid Cost Type XX.

Schedule Job Labor Distribution

not rolled.

An invalid cost type code has been

entered in Banner Finance.

Enter a valid cost type code for this

Chart of Accounts in Banner

Finance.

Message Cause Action

409

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

When a date range is set up, the Self-Service main menu for faculty members and

advisors will only be displayed for terms where the current date falls within the defined

date range. A term is displayed in the term selection list when no dates exist for a term,

and the faculty member has an active status. A term will not be displayed when the current

date does not fall into a date range set up for access or when the faculty member is

inactive for the term.

Unique term records can exist, such as:

But date ranges cannot overlap within the term for the menu access or for the term

selection list.

Processing Examples

Here are some examples of how menu access and term selection can be set up on

SOATERM. Faculty member FACMEMBER1 has SIAINST records for the terms shown

below.

Example 1:

SOATERM has dates for:

FACMEMBER1 logs into secure Self-Service on March 31, 2008.

• He has access to the menu, because he is active for term 200443, which is accessible

on that date for term display.

• He sees term 200443 in the term selection list, because the current date falls within the

range.

FACMEMBER1 logs into secure Self-Service on April 30, 2009.

• He does not have access to the menu, because April 30, 2009, falls within the date

range for term 200620, and he is not active in term 200620.

• He does not see term 200443 in the term selection list, because the current date does

not fall within the range for term display.

Terms that are defined as greater than 200443 but less than 200520 will be displayed in

the term selection list, because no dates have been defined for those terms.

Term Start End Menu Term Selection

200443 01-JAN-2008 30-JUN-2008 Checked Unchecked

200443 01-AUG-2008 31-AUG-2008 Unchecked Checked

Term SIAINST Start End Menu Term Selection

200443 Active 01-JAN-2008 30-JUN-2008 Checked Checked

200620 Inactive 01-JAN-2009 30-JUN-2009 Checked Checked

410

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

Example 2:

SOATERM has dates for:

FACMEMBER1 logs into secure Self-Service on March 31, 2008.

• He has access to the menu, because he is active for term 200443, which is accessible

on that date.

• He sees term 200443 in the term selection list, because the current date falls within the

range for term display.

FACMEMBER1 logs into secure Self-Service on April 30, 2009.

• He has access to the menu, because April 30, 2009, does not fall within any date range

for which menu access is checked.

• He does not see term 200443 in the term selection list, because the current date does

not fall within the date range for term 200443.

Note: For a term, if a current date is not defined within any date range

with the Menu checkbox checked, the faculty member will have access to

the main menu, if he/she has an active SIAINST record. If the faculty

member does not have an active SIAINST record, no menu access is

allowed.

Example 3:

SOATERM has dates for:

FACMEMBER1 logs into secure Self-Service on March 31, 2008.

• He has access to the menu, because there are no dates defined for the current date.

• He sees term 200443 in the term selection list, because the current date falls within the

range for term display.

FACMEMBER1 logs into secure Self-Service on April 30, 2009.

• He does not see term 200443 in the term selection list, because the current date does

not fall within the range for term display.

Term SIAINST Start End Menu Term Selection

200443 Active 01-JAN-2008 30-JUN-2008 Checked Checked

200620 Inactive 01-JAN-2009 30-JUN-2009 Unchecked Checked

Term SIAINST Start End Menu Term Selection

200443 Active 01-JAN-2008 30-JUN-2008 Unchecked Checked

411

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

• He has access to the menu, because there are no dates defined for the term.

Example 4:

SOATERM has no dates defined:

FACMEMBER1 logs into secure Self-Service.

• He has access to the menu, because there are no dates defined for the current date in

any term.

• He has access to all active terms in the term selection list, because no restricted dates

have been defined in any term.

Example 5:

SOATERM has dates for:

There is an overlap in the dates.

FACMEMBER1 logs into secure Self-Service on March 31, 2008.

• He has access to the menu, because he is active for term 200443, which is accessible

on that date.

• He sees term 200443 in the term selection list, because the current date falls within the

range for term display.

FACMEMBER1 logs into secure Self-Service on April 30, 2009.

• He has access to the menu, because April 30, 2009, falls within the date range for term

200443, and he is active in term 200443.

• He sees term 200443 and term 200620 in the term selection list, because the current

date falls within the range for term display.

Note: Faculty members who are inactive in term 200620 have access to

the menu, because the current date falls with the menu date ranges for

term 200443, when the faculty members were active. However, they do

not see term 200620 in the term selection list.

Faculty Security Scripts

Three scripts are used to create reports that assist with setup, testing, and

troubleshooting. The scripts are not run from job submission. They are executed from the

command line by developers or advanced functional users.

Term SIAINST Start End Menu Term Selection

200443 Active 01-JAN-2008 30-JUN-2009 Checked Checked

200620 Active 01-JAN-2009 30-JUN-2009 Checked Checked

412

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

srsormenu.sql: Menu Report

This script creates a report for a specific date range and displays faculty members and

advisors who can access the main menu in Banner Faculty and Advisors Self-Service for

that date range.

The script uses two parameters. Enter the start and end dates for the period for which you

want to run the report.

• start_date_dd_mon_yyyy (in format DD-MON-YYYY)

• end_date_dd_mon_yyyy (in format DD-MON-YYYY)

For example:

On August 19 and 20, 2009, only faculty members active in terms 099211 and 100001 will

have access to the Faculty and Advisors menu in Banner Self-Service. (See lines 1 and 2

of the report.)

On August 21 and 22, 2009, any faculty members who are active in any term will have

access to the Faculty and Advisors menu in Banner Self-Service, as no rules have been

set up in SOATERM for these dates.

srsorterm.sql: Term Selection Report

This script creates a report for a specific date range and provides a list of terms that will be

displayed in the Banner Faculty and Advisors Self-Service term selection list for that date

range. If a term is not included in the report, that term will not be available for selection in

Self-Service for that date range.

The script uses two parameters. Enter the start and end dates for the period for which you

want to run the report.

• start_date_dd_mon_yyyy (in format DD-MON-YYYY)

• end_date_dd_mon_yyyy (in format DD-MON-YYYY)

srsorftrm.sql: Summary Report

This script creates a report of the records stored in SORFTRM. These records are ordered

by start date.

The script uses one parameter.

menu_or_term (

M for menu, T for term, B for Both)

Faculty and Advisor Security Dates - Menu Access(SORFTRM) Page 1

Enter value for start_date_dd_mon_yyyy: 19-AUG-2009

Enter value for end_date_dd_mon_yyyy: 31-AUG-2009

Start Date End Date Term

-------------------- -------------------- ----------------------------------------

19-AUG-09 20-AUG-09 099211

19-AUG-09 20-AUG-09 100001

21-AUG-09 22-AUG-09 No Menu Rule for Dates

23-AUG-09 29-AUG-09 200510

30-AUG-09 31-AUG-09 No Menu Rule for Dates

413

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

Enter M to capture all menu records (SORFTRM_MENU_IND is Y). Enter T to capture

term records (

SORFTRM_TERM_IND is Y). Enter B to capture all SORFTRM records.

Faculty Security Process Rules

This section discusses faculty member and advisor process rules used in Banner Faculty

and Advisor Self-Service. Process rules are used to allow faculty member or advisor

access to student information by process or role in Self-Service. The process codes used

for the rules come from the Process Control Code Validation Form (STVPROC). The

Faculty/Advisor Process Rules Form (SOAFACS) is used to set up the process rules for

faculty members and advisors. The rules on STVPROC control access to the following

processes:

• accessing student schedules (DISPLAYSCHEDULE)

• accessing student test scores (DISPLAYTESTS)

• accessing student grades (DISPLAYGRADES)

• entering student grades (ENTERGRADES)

• accessing student holds (DISPLAYHOLDS)

• accessing student transcripts (TRANSCRIPT)

• accessing student compliance information (COMPLIANCE)

This section discusses the following topics:

• Obsolete GTVSDAX Rules

• Conversion from GTVSDAX to SOAFACS

• Modified GTVSDAX Rules and Corresponding Self-Service Pages

• Faculty Member and Advisor Access to Self-Service

• All Access to Self-Service

• Check Order Functionality

• Enforce Check Order Functionality

Obsolete GTVSDAX Rules

Rules on GTVSDAX used with security processing have been made obsolete. The

associated security functionality is maintained on SOAFACS. The affected rules have a

modified description of Obsolete, Use SOAFACS form, or for the

CHECKORDER rule,

Obsolete, Use STVPROC form. A script is delivered to inactivate these rules.

The following rules used with faculty and advisor access to processing in Self-Service are

obsolete. Their descriptions refer to the form used for security processing.

414

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

Modified GTVSDAX Rules

The ALLADVR and ALLFAC rules are no longer used for faculty and advisor security

purposes. The associated security functionality has been moved to SOAFACS. However,

these two rules still drive Self-Service display capabilities, and as such they will not be

made obsolete. The rule descriptions have been updated in GTVSDAX to more accurately

describe their current functionality.

The security functionality associated with the

ADVRTYPE and FACFATT rules has been

moved to SOAFACS. However, the rules are still used on GTVSDAX to determine whether

to use the SOAFAPC rules for attribute/type checking with regard to the display of the

Summary Faculty Wait List, Detail Faculty Wait List, and Detail Class List pages in Self-

Service.

Note: Refer to the “Modified GTVSDAX Rules and Corresponding Self-

Service Pages” topic for current GTVSDAX functionality for the

ADVRTYPE and FACFATT rules with regard to these Self-Service ages.

The security functionality associated with the

PRIMINSTR rule has been moved to

SOAFACS. However, this GTVSDAX rule must exist in order to display the Summary

Faculty Wait List, Detail Faculty Wait List, and Detail Class list pages in Self-Service.

Note: Refer to the “Modified GTVSDAX Rules and Corresponding Self-

Service Pages” topic for current GTVSDAX functionality for the

PRIMINSTR rule with regard to these Self-Service pages.

External

Code Internal Code

Internal

Code Seq

Number

Internal Code

Group Description

Activity

Date

Y, N ADVRPIN N/A FACWEB Old - Is Advisor PIN

Control On?

Updated - Obsolete

8.3, Use SOAFACS

form

Sysdate

A, F CHECKORDER N/A FACWEB Old - Access Order?

Updated - Obsolete

8.3, Use STVPROC

form

Sysdate

Y, N FACPIN N/A FACWEB Old - Is Faculty PIN

Control On?

Updated - Obsolete

8.3, Use SOAFACS

form

Sysdate

415

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

Conversion from GTVSDAX to SOAFACS

Faculty and advisor records that were processed using security rules on the Crosswalk

Validation Form (GTVSDAX) will be processed through the rules in the SOAFACS form

and SORFACS table. During the upgrade to this functionality, the values for these

GTVSDAX rules will be translated from GTVSDAX and populated in SORFACS using a

delivered conversion script.

The rules used on SOAFACS are delivered as system-required. With the exception of

ENTERGRADES, each system-required process code from STVPROC has two associated

rules on SOAFACS, one for faculty and one for advisor. The

ENTERGRADES process is

available for faculty only. The indicators (checkboxes) on the form will be updated based

on existing GTVSDAX rules at your site.

Note: It will be important to review your conversion, test these indicators

when your upgrade has been performed, and confirm that faculty

External

Code Internal Code

Internal

Code Seq

Number

Internal Code

Group Description

Activity

Date

Y, N ADVRTYPE N/A FACWEB Old - Advisor Type

Control On?

Updated - SOAFAPC

Attribute/Type Check

Sysdate

Y, N ALLADVR N/A FACWEB Old - All Access for

Advisors?

Updated - Display

‘All’ in Name Search

Sysdate

Y, N ALLFAC N/A FACWEB Old - All Access for

Faculty?

Updated - Display

‘All’ in Name Search

Sysdate

Y, N FACFATT N/A FACWEB Old - Faculty Attribute

Control On?

Updated - Updated -

SOAFAPC Attribute/

Type Check

Sysdate

Y, N PRIMINSTR N/A FACWEB Old - Primary

Instructor Check On

Updated - Primary

Instructor Checking

Sysdate

416

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

members and/or advisors do not have too much or too little access to

student information.

Here is a list of the rules used on SOAFACS.

Rule/Indicator Description

Process Available on

Self-Service

Checkbox used to indicate whether the process rule is active

for the faculty member or advisor in Self-Service.

When this indicator is checked, and faculty members or

advisors meet the process rule, they have access to the

process.

When this indicator is unchecked, faculty members and

advisors cannot access the process, but they can see the link

to the process. A message is displayed indicating they do not

have access to the process.

All Access Checkbox used to indicate that no security is invoked for the

process, and faculty members and advisors are able to view

all available student information in Self-Service.

Once this indicator has been checked, you cannot activate

the settings for the other indicators except for the Process

Available on Self-Service indicator.

The All Access indicator must be unchecked in order to set

the other indicators to checked or unchecked and activate

those settings for the rule.

PIN Control Checkbox used to indicate whether the student’s PIN needs

to be entered to access the process rule in Self-Service.

When checked, the PIN is required.

The PIN Control checkbox is not available for the

DISPLAYGRADES or ENTERGRADES process rules.

Relationship - Faculty

- or -

Relationship - Advisor

Checkbox used to require that the faculty member or advisor

must have a teaching or advising relationship with the

student, in order to access the process rule in Self-Service.

For example, when a faculty member is teaching a section in

which the student is enrolled, and the Web page is displayed

based on the student’s ID, that faculty member can access

the process.

Or, when a faculty member is assigned to teach a section,

and the Web page is displayed based on the CRN, that

faculty member can access the process.

417

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

Here is a comparison of the GTVSDAX rules and the indicators that perform the same

processing.

Your existing GTVSDAX rules will be converted using the delivered script, which will

evaluate your rule settings and convert them to SOAFACS. You can then set the values

and make them unique to faculty members or advisors for each process.

Here is a crosswalk that outlines each converted GTVSDAX rule, the SOAFACS process

associated with the GTVSDAX rule, and the indicator that will drive access to that

process. Seven unique process rules are available on SOAFACS. With the exception of

ENTERGRADES, which is available for faculty only, each rule can be assigned to faculty

members and/or advisors, which provides a total of 13 system-required rules that can be

used on SOAFACS.

Primary - Faculty

- or -

Primary - Advisor

Checkbox used to require that the faculty member or advisor

must be the primary instructor or primary advisor for the

student in order to access the process rule in Self-Service.

The faculty member must be the primary instructor on

SSASECT to access the process.

The advisor must be the primary advisor on SGAADVR to

access the process.

Attribute Type

Checking - Faculty

- or -

Attribute Type

Checking - Advisor

Checkbox used to require that the faculty attribute type or

advisor type must be checked in order to access the process

rule in Self-Service.

For faculty members, the system checks the attribute on

SIAINST and then cross-references SOAFAPC.

For advisors, the system checks the advisor type on

SGAADVR and then cross-references SOAFAPC.

SOAFACS Indicator GTVSDAX Rule GTVSDAX Rule Status

PIN Control ADVRPIN Obsolete

Attribute Type Checking ADVRTYPE Menu option dependent

Attribute Type Checking FACFATT Menu option dependent

PIN Control FACPIN Obsolete

Primary PRIMINSTR Menu option dependent

All Access ALLFAC Used for display

All Access ALLADVR Used for display

N/A CHECKORDER Moved to STVPROC,

Check Order field

Rule/Indicator Description

418

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

The DISPLAYSCHEDULE rule is delivered with the All Access indicator checked (Y), as

this functionality was provided previously. It is important to test this functionality for faculty

members and advisors to be certain the appropriate access is allowed.

The

CHECKORDER rule on GTVSDAX has been replaced with functionality on STVPROC.

Since the GTVSDAX rule is generic, your setting for this rule at the time of the upgrade will

be converted to all seven system-required processes on STVPROC. Those STVPROC

settings can then be customized based on the process.

GTVSDAX Rule Process SOAFACS Indicator

ALLFAC all seven processes All Access - faculty record

ALLADVR

all except

ENTERGRADES

not

available for advisors

All Access - advisor

record

ADVRPIN

all except

ENTERGRADES,

DISPLAYGRADES,

DISPLAYSCHEDULE

ENTERGRADES

not

available for advisors

PIN Control - advisor

record

FACPIN

all except

ENTERGRADES,

DISPLAYGRADES,

DISPLAYSCHEDULE

PIN Control - faculty

record

ADVRTYPE

all except

ENTERGRADES,

DISPLAYSCHEDULE

ENTERGRADES

not

available for advisors

Attribute Type Checking -

advisor record

FACFATT all except

DISPLAYSCHEDULE

Attribute Type Checking -

faculty record

PRIMINSTR all except

DISPLAYSCHEDULE for

faculty

all except

ENTERGRADES,

DISPLAYSCHEDULE for

advisors

Primary - both faculty and

advisor

419

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

Modified GTVSDAX Rules and Corresponding Self-Service Pages

The ADVRTYPE, FACFATT, and PRIMINSTR rules control the display of Self-Service

menu options and access to the associated pages.

GTVSDAX Rule Process STVPROC

CHECKORDER all seven processes

CHECKORDER for the

ENTERGRADES process is

only available for faculty

No advisor rule is available

for

ENTERGRADES on

SOAFACS

Check Order field

GTVSDAX

Rule Menu Options Driven by Rule

GTVSDAX

Description Functionality

ADVRTYPE Faculty and Advisors Main Menu

Summary Wait List

(

bwlkfcwl.P_FacWaitList

Sum

)

Detail Wait List

(

bwlkfcwl.P_FacWaitList)

Detail Class List

(

bwlkfcwl.P_FacClaList)

These pages call the

F_CheckCRNAccess function

which then calls the

F_CheckCRNProcess function.

This second function checks the

FACFATT and ADVRTYPE rules

to determine whether to use the

SOAFAPC rules for attribute/type

checking.

SOAFAPC Attribute/

Type Check

Rule determines whether to

use SOAFAPC Attribute/

Type.

420

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

Faculty Member and Advisor Access to Self-Service

The processes on STVPROC and their associated rules on SOAFACS determine which

links can be accessed in Banner Faculty and Advisor Self-Service by faculty members and

advisors.

Note: The setting of the PIN Control indicator on SOAFACS is

determined by the setting of the Pin Control Allowed indicator on

STVPROC.

FACFATT Faculty and Advisors Main Menu

Summary Wait List

(

bwlkfcwl.P_FacWaitList

Sum

)

Detail Wait List

(

bwlkfcwl.P_FacWaitList)

Detail Class List

(

bwlkfcwl.P_FacClaList)

These pages call the

F_CheckCRNAccess function

which then calls the

F_CheckCRNProcess function.

This second function checks the

FACFATT and ADVRTYPE rules

to determine whether to use the

SOAFAPC rules for attribute/type

checking.

SOAFAPC Attribute/

Type Check

Rule determines whether to

use SOAFAPC Attribute/

Type.

PRIMINSTR Faculty and Advisors Main Menu

Summary Wait List

(

bwlkfcwl.P_FacWaitList

Sum

)

Detail Wait List

(

bwlkfcwl.P_FacWaitList)

Detail Class List

(

bwlkfcwl.P_FacClaList)

These pages call the

bwlkilib.F_CheckCRNAcce

function which checks the

PRIMINSTR rule.

Primary Instructor

Checking

Rule must exist to display

data on these pages.

GTVSDAX

Rule Menu Options Driven by Rule

GTVSDAX

Description Functionality

421

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

When the Relationship, Primary, or Attribute Type Checking indicators are checked for

the advisor rule on SOAFACS for

DISPLAYGRADES, access to most CRN-based links

will not be permitted. Access to ID-based links will be permitted, including the Advisee

Grade Summary page in Self-Service.

With the exception of the CRN-based Summary Class List page, other

DISPLAYGRADES

CRN-based links will not permit access by advisors when any of these options are

checked, to prevent advisors from directly entering a CRN and thus bypassing security.

While the Summary Class List page may be accessed by CRN, grades will not be

displayed.

The All Access indicator allows advisors to select CRNs directly, because no security is

invoked when the All Access indicator is checked.

Here is a comparison of how the rules affect access to Self-Service.

Process

PIN Control

Allowed?

Associated Self-Service Menu

Options

COMPLIANCE Yes Faculty and Advisors Main Menu

Student Information Menu

Degree Evaluation

(

bwlkfcap.P_FacDispCurrent)

DISPLAYGRADES No Faculty and Advisors Main Menu

Midterm Grades

(

bwlkfmgd.P_FacMidGrd)

Final Grades

(

bwlkffgd.P_FacFinGrd)

Summary Class List

(

bwlkfcwl.P_FacClaListSum)

Faculty and Advisors Main Menu

Electronic Gradebook by Component

(

bwlkegrb.P_FacGrade

Components

)

422

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

Student Information Menu

Electronic Gradebook for a Student

(

bwlkegrb.P_FacIDShrmrksProc)

Registration History

(

bwlkhreg.p_fac_reg_hist)

Faculty and Advisors Main Menu

Advisee Grade Summary

(

bwlkgrde.P_advfingrd)

Faculty Grade Summary

(

bwlkgrde.P_FacFinGrd)

Incomplete Grades Summary

(

bwlkincg.P_FacIncmpGrdSum)

When the Relationship, Primary, or Attribute Type Checking indicators are checked

for the advisor rule on SOAFACS for

DISPLAYGRADES, access to most CRN-based

links will not be permitted. Access to ID-based links will be permitted, including the

Advisee Grade Summary page in Self-Service.

With the exception of the CRN-based Summary Class List page, other

DISPLAYGRADES CRN-based links will not permit access by advisors when any of

these options are checked, to prevent advisors from directly entering a CRN and thus

bypassing security. While the Summary Class List page may be accessed by CRN,

grades will not be displayed.

The All Access indicator allows advisors to select CRNs directly, because no security

is invoked when the All Access indicator is checked.

DISPLAYHOLDS Yes Faculty and Advisors Main Menu

Student Information Menu

View Holds

(

bwlkgstu.P_ViewHold)

DISPLAYSCHEDULE Yes Faculty and Advisors Main Menu

Student Information Menu

View Student Schedule

(

bwlkfstu.P_FacStuSchd)

Student Week at a Glance

(

bwlkfshd.P_FacStuCrseSchd)

Concise Student Schedule

(

bwlkcrse.P_FacStuSchd)

Process

PIN Control

Allowed?

Associated Self-Service Menu

Options

423

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

The DISPLAYSCHEDULE rule is delivered with the All Access indicator checked (Y),

as all access to these links was provided previously. Security can be invoked for these

links.

DISPLAYTESTS Yes Faculty and Advisors Main Menu

Student Information Menu

Test Scores

(

bwlktest.P_FacDispTest)

ENTERGRADES

This process is not

available for advisors.

No Faculty and Advisors Main Menu

Midterm Grades

(

bwlkfmgd.P_FacMidGrd)

Final Grades

(

bwlkffgd.P_FacFinGrd)

Faculty and Advisors Main Menu

Electronic Gradebook by Component

(

bwlkegrb.P_FacGrade

Components

)

Student Information Menu

Electronic Gradebook for a Student

(

bwlkegrb.P_FacIDShrmrks

Pro

Faculty and Advisors Main Menu

Incomplete Grades Summary

(

bwlkincg.P_FacIncmpGrdSum)

Summary Class List

(

bwlkfcwl.P_FacClaListSum)

TRANSCRIPT Yes Faculty and Advisors Main Menu

Student Information Menu

Academic Transcript Options

(

bwlkftrn.P_FacDispTran)

Process

PIN Control

Allowed?

Associated Self-Service Menu

Options

424

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

Notes for the Advisee Grade Summary page (bwlkgrde.P_advfingrd):

• The security options on SOAFACS for DISPLAYGRADES include access to the

Advisee Grade Summary page.

• When All Access is checked for DISPLAYGRADES on SOAFACS, the Advisee Grade

Summary page displays only advisees, not all students.

• While the DISPLAYGRADES process on SOAFACS does apply to the Advisee Grade

Summary page, there is no PIN control allowed for grades, and the advisor must have a

relationship with the student in order for the advisee records to be displayed.

• The setting of Relationship checkbox will not influence access to the Advisee Grade

Summary page, as an advisee/student relationship must always exist. Therefore, the

Primary and Attribute Type Checking indicators are the security options that are

applicable to Advisee Grade Summary page.

All Access to Self-Service

The All Access checkbox on SOAFACS is used to indicate that no security is invoked for

the process rule in Self-Service.

• When the All Access indicator is checked (set to Y), no other indicators may be

checked for the rule.

CHECKORDER

Check Order field on

STVPROC can be set

Faculty,

Advisor, or Both

N/A Access to Self-Service menu options

depends on how the rule is set up on

SOAFACS, but which rule is selected can

require the Check Order field.

• When Check Order is set to

Faculty,

the faculty rule on SOAFACS is used for

the process, if it is available.

• When Check Order is set to

Advisor,

the advisor rule on SOAFACS is used for

the process, if it is available.

• When Check Order is set to

Both, both

faculty and advisor rules are evaluated,

and the more permissive rule is used.

Faculty and Advisor

Security Information

(

bwlksecr.P_

FacAdvrSecurity

)

There is no STVPROC

process associated

with this Web page.

However, the page

reflects the use of the

SOAFACS rules.

N/A Faculty and Advisors Main Menu

Faculty and Advisor Security Information

(

bwlksecr.P_FacAdvrSecurity)

Reflects SOAFACS rules for review by

faculty member or advisor

Process

PIN Control

Allowed?

Associated Self-Service Menu

Options

425

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

• Once the All Access indicator has been checked, you cannot change the settings of the

other indicators except for the Process Available on Self-Service indicator.

• With the exception of the Process Available on Self-Service indicator, the All Access

indicator must be unchecked in order to set the other indicators to checked and have

those settings invoked for the rule.

Check Order Functionality

The CHECKORDER rule used on GTVSDAX is obsolete. Check order processing is

controlled by the Check Order field on STVPROC. The indicator on STVPROC allows the

choice of

Faculty, Advisor, or Both.

An exception to this processing exists for the

ENTERGRADES rule. Since the

ENTERGRADES process is not allowed for advisors on SOAFACS, the only option used

with the Check Order field for the

ENTERGRADES rule is the Faculty option. While the

field displays the values for

Faculty, Advisor, or Both, only the value of Faculty

can be saved for the

ENTERGRADES rule.

When both the Faculty and Advisor checkboxes on SIAINST are checked for an ID, the

check order processing may need to determine which SOAFACS rule to use.

1. The faculty member or advisor has a relationship with the student. Check order

processing is not used.

When the faculty member or advisor advises the student but does not teach the

student, the advisor rule is selected.

When the faculty member or advisor teaches the student, the faculty rule is selected.

For example, when the ID is both a faculty member and advisor:

• The faculty member teaches Student A.

• The advisor advises Student B.

When the ID is requesting information for Student A, the faculty rule is selected.

Check order processing is not used.

When the ID is requesting information for Student/Advisee B, the advisor rule is

selected. Check order processing is not used.

2. The faculty member and advisor have relationships with the student. Check order

processing is used.

When the faculty member or advisor teaches and advises the same student, check

order processing is used.

For example, when the ID is both a faculty member and an advisor:

• The faculty member teaches Student A.

• The advisor advises Student A.

When the ID is requesting information for Student A, check order processing is used.

When the ID is requesting information for Student/Advisee A, check order processing

is used.

426

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

3. The faculty member or advisor does not have a relationship with the student. Check

order processing is used.

For example, when the ID is both a faculty member and an advisor:

• The faculty member does not teach Student C.

• The advisor does not advise Student C.

When the ID is requesting information for Student C, check order processing is used.

When the ID is requesting information for Student/Advisee C, check order processing

is used.

Enforce Use of Check Order

Check order processing is used only when a relation between the faculty and advisor

record on SIAINST and a student and/or advisee cannot be established. However, in

some unique situations, it may be necessary to force the use of the check order process,

even when a relation is clear. You can force the use of check order processing based on

the setting of the Enforce Check Order checkbox on STVPROC. This option can be tied

to a specific process on STVPROC, such as transcripts or compliance.

You can also use the Override Process Rule Security checkbox on SIAINST to override

security for an individual ID. When this indicator is checked (

Y), any ID will have access to

student information on any Self-Service page that is available and is controlled by the

rules on SOAFACS. The exception is the

ENTERGRADES rule.

Process Order

1. Security processing takes place.

2. STVPROC establishes the rule to be activated from SOAFACS.

2.1. If the rule provides access, the process stops.

2.2. If the rule does not provide access, SIAINST is checked for the setting of the

Override Process Rule Security indicator.

– When the Override Process Rule Security indicator is checked, the process

provides all access for the SOAFACS rule that was executed for the

STVPROC process and the associated SOAFACS process Self-Service link

or links.

– When the Override Process Rule Security indicator is unchecked, the

process stops, and access is not allowed.

3. Since the process checks the setting of the Override Process Rule Security

indicator last, all faculty security processing is executed, and an SOAFACS rule is

established.

427

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

Check Order on STVPROC

The setting of the Enforce Check Order indicator on STVPROC is checked (Y) when the

following is true:

• An ID is identified as both a faculty member and advisor on SIAINST, and both the

student and advisee are related to that ID. The Enforce Check Order indicator is not

needed, since the setting of the Check Order field would be used regardless.

• The setting of the Check Order field is checked by the process when an ID is identified

as both a faculty member and advisor on SIAINST, and both the student and advisee

are not related to that ID. The Enforce Check Order indicator is not needed, since the

setting of the Check Order field would be used regardless.

• The setting of the Check Order field may optionally be checked by the process when an

ID is identified as both a faculty member and advisor on SIAINST, and there is a relation

to the student, either as faculty member or advisor.

Regardless of that relation, when the Enforce Check Order indicator is checked, the

appropriate rule from SOAFACS is activated. This functionality accommodates schools

that use open advising or similar processes. Even when the faculty member (who is

flagged as both a faculty member and advisor on SIAINST) has a relation to the student,

you can force the advisor rule or faculty rule. This can be done using the Enforce

Check Order checkbox.

The setting of the Check Order field is not normally checked in this case, because there

is a clear relation to the student, and the process can tell which SOAFACS rule to

activate. However, the option to force the use of check order through the Enforce

Check Order indicator can be selected.

Note: The Check Order field cannot be used with the ENTERGRADES

rule, since that process is available for faculty only. The Enforce Check

Order indicator also cannot be used with the

ENTERGRADES rule.

Faculty or

Advisor

Is there a relation to

the student?

Relation check to select

SOAFACS rule

Will Check

Order be

used?

Can Enforce

Check Order be

used?

Faculty Yes Faculty rule No No

Faculty No Faculty rule No No

Advisor Yes Advisor rule No No

Advisor No Advisor rule No No

Faculty and

advisor

Teaching only Clear relation - faculty rule No Yes

428

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

Note: In the table above and in the following examples, consider the

following:

“Teaching/teaches student” indicates the faculty member is

assigned to a course for a term on SSASECT, and the student is

registered for that course in that term.

“Advising/advises student” indicates the advisee is assigned

to the advisor using multiple advisors SGAADVR.

Usage Examples

The ID must be flagged as both a faculty member and advisor on SIAINST in order for the

consideration of the check order process, whether enforced or not. When an ID is flagged

as both a faculty member and advisor, the process needs to determine how the ID is

related to the student.

Example 1

Faculty or Advisor Relation - Relation is clear, so check order is not necessary. The option

to use the Enforce Check Order indicator is available.

• When the advisor has a relation to the student (SGVADVR), and the faculty member

does not have an assignment for that student (SSASECT), then the SOAFACS

Advisor rule for the process is selected.

• When the faculty member has a relation to the student (SSASECT), and the advisor

does not have an assignment for that student (SGAADVR), then the SOAFACS

Faculty rule for the process will be selected.

Such as:

• The ID is both a faculty member and an advisor.

• The faculty member teaches student A.

• The advisor advises student B.

When the SIAINST ID requests information for student A, the

Faculty rule is used.

The setting of the Check Order field is not used.

Faculty and

advisor

Advising only Clear relation - advisor rule No Yes

Faculty and

advisor

Not teaching

Not advising

No clear relation - requires

check order

Yes N/A

Faculty and

advisor

Teaching and advising No clear relation - requires

check order

Yes N/A

Faculty or

Advisor

Is there a relation to

the student?

Relation check to select

SOAFACS rule

Will Check

Order be

used?

Can Enforce

Check Order be

used?

429

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

When the SIAINST ID requests information for student B, the Advisor rule is used.

The setting of the Check Order field is not used.

Example 2

Both Relations, Faculty and Advisor - The relation is not clear, so check order processing

is necessary. The use of the Enforce Check Order indicator is irrelevant, since the

process checks anyway.

When the SIAINST ID is both an advisor for the student (SGVADVR) and a faculty

member for the student (SSASECT), then the setting of the Check Order field on

STVPROC determines whether the

Faculty rule or the Advisor rule on

SOAFACS is used.

Such as:

• The ID is both a faculty member and an advisor.

• The faculty member teaches student A.

• The advisor advises student A.

When the SIAINST ID requests information for student A, the setting of the Check

Order field is used.

When the SIAINST ID requests information for advisee A, the setting of the Check

Order field is used.

Example 3

No Relation - Faculty or advisor relation is not clear, so the check order process is

necessary. The use of the Enforce Check Order indicator is irrelevant, since the process

checks anyway.

When the SIAINST ID is not related to the student in any way, then the setting of the

Check Order field on STVPROC determines whether the

Faculty rule or the

Advisor rule on SOAFACS is used.

Such as:

• The ID is both a faculty member and an advisor.

• The faculty member does not teach student C.

• The advisor does not advise student C.

When the SIAINST ID requests information for student C, the setting of the Check

Order field is used.

The Enforce Check Order option is available for Example 1. The SIAINST ID is flagged

as both a faculty member and an advisor, and the ID has a clear relation to the student.

The Check Order field is not needed, because a relation is clear. However, the option to

Enforce Check Order can be used under certain situations.

For instance, if the advisor has a relation to the student (SGVADVR), and faculty

member does not have an assignment for the student (SSASECT), the SOAFACS

Advisor rule for the process would be selected.

430

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

When Enforce Check Order is checked, and the Check Order field is set to Faculty,

the SOAFACS

Faculty rule would be forced.

Also, if the faculty member has a relation to the student (SSASECT), and the student is

registered for the course, and the advisor does not have an assignment for that student

(SGAADVR), then the SOAFACS

Faculty rule for the process would be selected.

When Enforce Check Order is checked and the Check Order field is set to

Advisor, the SOAFACS Advisor rule would be forced.

Such as:

• The ID is both a faculty member and an advisor.

• The faculty member teaches student A.

• The advisor advises student B.

When the ID requests information for student A, the

Faculty rule is used. Check

order is not necessary. However, if the Enforce Check Order indicator is checked,

the process disregards the relation and uses the check order rule.

When the ID requests information for student B, the

Advisor rule is used. Check

order is not necessary. However, if the Enforce Check Order indicator is checked,

the process disregards the relation and uses the check order rule.

Note: The STVPROC Check Order field determines which SOAFACS

rule is activated for the Self-Service URL. Whether or not the ID actually

is presented with the student information is driven by the rules on

SOAFACS.

Use of the DISPLAYGRADES Rule

The DISPLAYGRADES rule links perform differently than other processes with regard to

the SOAFACS

Advisor or Faculty rules. When an ID is defined as both a faculty

member and an advisor on SIAINST, and the relation is not clear, the check order process

is used. However, the

DISPLAYGRADES rule contains a combination of ID and CRN-

based links. The CRN-based links cannot be accessed by the advisor rules. The selection

of the SOAFACS rule can depend on:

• whether or not the link is a CRN-based link (faculty) verses an ID-based link (faculty or

advisor).

• whether or not the faculty member is associated with the CRN, and/or if the advisor is

associated with the ID.

For the

DISPLAYGRADES rule, when an ID is both a faculty member and an advisor,

depending on whether the link is CRN or ID-based, and whether the ID has a course

assigned and has an advisee, the Enforce Check Order indicator can be used.

Override Process Rule Security for an ID

You can override process rule security for an ID on SIAINST. The Override Process Rule

Security indicator is optional and can only be checked when either the Faculty and/or

Advisor indicators are checked. When this security option is checked, the user can

431

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

access student information on Banner Student Self-Service Web pages associated with

the process rules on SOAFACS. The security display rules on SOAFACS are overridden,

except for the

ENTERGRADES rule. When the Override Process Rule Security indicator

is unchecked, standard security processing is invoked.

Once the Override Process Rule Security indicator is checked, Override User ID and

Override Activity Date fields are populated. The Override User ID and Override

Activity Date values change as the Override Process Rule Security checkbox is

checked or unchecked. There is no audit process associated with the Override User ID or

Override Process Rule Security activity date information.

The Override User ID value, Override Activity Date value, and existing values for the

Override Process Rule Security indicator are added to the new term when a new record

is created using the Maintenance button. The value for the Override Process Rule

Security indicator can be changed in the new term.

When the Override Process Rule Security indicator is checked, but the faculty member

or advisor does not have access to the Self-Service link based on existing security

settings on SOAFACS, the SIAINST override allows the instructor to access the link,

regardless of the existing settings.

Warning! The Override Process Rule Security indicator always

provides Self-Service access for the ID when checked (Y), even when the

SOAFACS process is not available on Self-Service or when the

SOAFACS process has no access.

When the links are available in Self-Service and the indicator is checked

for the instructor, access to the link and associated student information is

allowed.

It is suggested that this option be used for a very limited population at

your institution and only be used when faculty security rules on

STVPROC and SOAFACS do not accommodate specific individual faculty

or advising responsibilities.

The Override Process Rule Security indicator is not valid for the

ENTERGRADES rule.

Access is not allowed for anyone other than the faculty members who are authorized to

enter grades. The override option can be used with the

DISPLAYGRADES rule. When the

Override Process Rule Security indicator is checked, the instructor may be able to view

grades by overriding the access for the

DISPLAYGRADES rule. However, the rule may

not allow the display of grades to IDs on SIAINST who are set up as faculty only and who

attempt to access ID-specific links. When there are no associated student assignments on

SGAADVR, the instructor does not have an advisee ID. The ID-specific link in this case

requires the student advisee ID.

432

Banner Student User Guide | Faculty Load

Purge Process

The following purge process may be used to purge information in the Faculty Load

Module.

Instructor Term Rule Purge (SIPASGN)

This process will purge, by user-defined parameters, the instructional assignments, the

non-instructional assignments, and the workload term rules for the term specified.

Banner Student Interface to Banner Human Resources

Please refer to the "Interfaces" chapter for information on the interface between Faculty

Load data and Banner Human Resources.

Faculty Load Reports

The following reports are run through the Faculty Load module:

Please refer to the Banner Student Reports and Processes Handbook for report

descriptions, instructions, parameter definitions, and output samples.

Instructor Schedule Report (SIRASGQ)

Faculty Load Contract Analysis Report (SIRCTAL)

Faculty Load Term Analysis Report (SIRTRAL)

Instructional Assignment Purge (SIPASGN)

433

Banner Student User Guide | Location Management

Location Management

This chapter discusses processing and procedure information for Location Management.

Location Management Procedures

Here are tasks you can perform in this module.

Housing Room Assignment Using Building and Room

Genders

This topic discusses gender specific buildings and non-gender specific buildings.

Gender Specific Buildings

If a building is specified as either a male building or a female building on the Building

Definition Form (SLABLDG), only persons matching that building's specific gender are

permitted to be assigned to the building.

If a gender is entered on (SLABLDG), it defaults to each room in the building on the Room

Definition Form (SLARDEF). The default value cannot be changed to the opposite sex;

however, the system does permit the removal of the original gender specification, which

was the default value from SLARDEF. Yet, even if the gender is removed (

Not

Available

) from the Gender field on the Room Definition Form (SLARDEF), the

system only permits the assignment of those persons matching the gender that was

specified to the room at the building level. There are no overrides provided to allow a

person of an unknown or opposite gender to be assigned to the rooms in a gender specific

building. These rules are used in batch and online processing of housing assignments.

Gender Non-Specific Buildings

If the gender of a building is not specified on the Building Definition Form (SLABLDG),

then the Gender field is

Null or Not Available, and persons of all genders, male,

female, and unknown, may be assigned to the building. Assignment will be made

according to the following, online, room specific gender rules:

• If the gender of the building is Not Available on the Building Definition Form

(SLABLDG), and the gender of the room is designated as

Male on the Room Definition

Form (SLARDEF), only persons of male gender may be assigned to this room.

• If the gender of the building is Not Available on the Building Definition Form

(SLABLDG), and the gender of the room is designated as

Female on the Room

434

Banner Student User Guide | Location Management

Definition Form (SLARDEF), only persons of female gender may be assigned to this

room.

• If the gender of the building is Not Available on the Building Definition Form

(SLABLDG), and the gender of the room is

Not Available on the Room Definition

Form (SLARDEF), male, female, and unknown genders may be assigned to this room.

This allows for married housing and co-ed rooms to be processed.

When performing the Batch Scheduling of Housing Assignments, the following rules are

used:

• If the gender of the building is Not Available on the Building Definition Form

(SLABLDG), and the gender of the room is designated as

Male on the Room Definition

Form (SLARDEF), only persons of male gender may be assigned to this room.

• If the gender of the building is Not Available on the Building Definition Form

(SLABLDG), and the gender of the room is designated as

Female on the Room

Definition Form (SLARDEF), only persons of female gender may be assigned to this

room.

• If the gender of the building is Not Available on the Building Definition Form

(SLABLDG), and the gender of the room is

Not Available on the Room Definition

Form (SLARDEF), male, female, and unknown genders may be assigned to this room.

However, the first applicant scheduled into the room defines the room gender for the

Batch Scheduling process. (Note: The Gender field remains

Not Available on

SLARDEF.) If the first applicant assigned to the room has not designated a gender on

the Dorm Room and Meal Application Form (SLARMAP), then no one else is scheduled

in batch into the room, because the gender of the room remains unknown.

Housing Module Deposits

The total amount of housing deposits which the applicant has paid for the term is

displayed in the Key Information of the Room Assignment Form (SLARASG). The total

amount of meal deposits for the term is displayed on the Meal Assignment Form

(SLAMASG), and the total amount of phone deposits for the term is displayed on the

Phone Assignment Form (SLAPASG).

These deposit amounts are summarized by a deposit type which exists on the Deposit

Detail Control Form (TGADEPC). These deposit types are validated against the Deposit

Type Validation Form (TTVDTYP). The deposit type for Housing Deposits must be

HOU,

MEA for meal deposits, and PHO for phone deposits.

Deposits maintained on the Student Payment Form (TSASPAY) or Billing Mass Date Entry

Form (TSAMASS) or Account Detail Form (TSADETL) for the term which have not expired

are summarized by deposit type, and the total amount for the term displays on the

appropriate assignment form.

435

Banner Student User Guide | Location Management

Housing Module Assessment

The assessment of dormitory rooms, meal plans, and phone charges is user-defined

based on the rules established on the Room/Meal/Phone Rate Code Rules Form

(SLALMFE). Assessment rules are established by term to allow for different assessment

rules for each term. The user can create assessment rules based on either a daily rate, a

monthly rate, or a term rate. This gives the institution the ability to charge a daily rate for

dormitory rooms, a term rate for meal plans, and a monthly charge for phone usage.

The Room/Meal/Phone Rate Code Rules Form has three sections for creating

assessment rules: one for housing rates, one for meal rates, and the other for phone

rates. Each section functions in the same manner. Prior to building these assessment

rules, the user must establish the valid rate codes on the Room Rate Code Validation

Form (STVRRCD), Meal Rate Code Validation Form (STVMRCD), and Phone Rate Code

Validation Form (STVPRCD). Detail codes must also be created for each different charge

that will be assessed. These are created on the Detail Code Control Form (TSADETC).

The detail code must be established with the following category codes:

The Refundable checkbox must be checked for these detail codes in order to process

refunds.

After the validation tables and the detail codes have been created, the assessment rules

can be built on Room/Meal/Phone Rate Code Rules Form (SLALMFE). Each rate code

and how it will be assessed (daily, monthly, or term) is entered.

A detail code is then entered for the rate code followed by the base rate to be assessed.

This base rate should be the daily rate if the assessment type is

D, the monthly rate if the

assessment type is

M, or the term rate if the assessment type is T. The base rate will be

multiplied by the calculated number of days, months, or terms, for the housing, meal or

phone assignment. The base rate and the minimum charge must be less than or equal to

the maximum charge. The days, months, and term associated with a dorm room, meal, or

phone assignment are calculated on the Room Assignment Form (SLARASG), Meal

Assignment Form (SLAMASG), or the Phone Assignment Form (SLAPASG) respectively.

The user can then specify a minimum and maximum assessment amount. If the calculated

assessment amount is less than the minimum, the minimum amount is assessed. If the

calculated assessment amount is greater than the maximum amount specified, the

maximum amount is assessed.

When the assignments are created on the Room Assignment Form (SLARASG), Meal

Assignment Form (SLAMASG), and the Phone Assignment Form (SLAPASG), the user

has the ability to review assessments by checking the Review Assessments checkbox in

the Assessment Information window of each form. This calculates the assessment based

on the rates on the Room/Meal/Phone Rate Code Rules Form (SLALMFE) and the

number of days, months, and terms associated with the assignment's beginning and

ending date, but does not update the student's account in the Accounts Receivable

module. For example, the beginning and ending dates used by the Housing Module for

term 199001 were established as 27-AUG-1990 and 16-DEC-1990 on the Term Code

HOU - Housing assessments

MEA - Meal plan assessments

PHO - Phone assessments

436

Banner Student User Guide | Location Management

Validation Form (STVTERM). This calculates out to 112 days, 3.64516 months, and 1

term. These values are multiplied by the base rate amount on SLALMFE to calculate the

assessment amount. If a daily base rate of $10.00 a day has been established then the

applicant is assessed $1120.00 (112 days * $10.00). If a monthly base rate of $25.00 has

also been established, then the applicant is assessed $91.13 (3.64516 months * $25.00).

The minimums and maximums are then applied.

To review an assessment, you may perform a Next Block to access the Assessment

Information window.

When monthly charges are to be created, they will be assessed in monthly increments for

as many months as specified or calculated on the assignment forms. This facilitates the

ability to charge apartment rentals on a monthly basis. In the previous example the

following monthly charges would be assessed:

There is a 12 month limit on monthly assessments.

Reviewing assessments does not update Accounts Receivable with the charges. The

Review Assessments checkbox is used to test the assessment process for a sampling of

students to insure that the assessment rules are established correctly.

There are two methods for assessing the housing, meal and phone assignments and

updating the person's account in the Accounts Receivable module.

• The first method is to individually assess each person online by checking the Process

Assessments box on the Dorm Room Assignment Form (SLARASG), Meal

Assignment Form (SLAMASG), and the Phone Assignment Form (SLAPASG).

• The second method is to run the Batch Fee Assessment Process (SLRFASM) to assess

all persons with housing, meal, and phone assignments for the term. The charges

assessed may then be viewed on the Student Payment Form (TSASPAY), the Account

Detail Form (TSADETL), or the Account Detail Review Form (TSAAREV). The source

types associated with these charges are: DORM = B, MEAL = V, PHONE = U.

The refunding of assessments may be processed in two methods.

• The first method is to apply a refund percentage to the appropriate assignment status

code. The status codes must be created on the Room Assignment Status Code

Validation Form (STVASCD), Meal Assignment Status Code Validation Form

(STVMSCD), and Phone Assignment Status Code Validation Form (STVPSCD). The

status code effective dates and refund percentages are established on the Room

Assignment Status Form (SLAASCD), Meal Assignment Status Form (SLAMSCD), and

Phone Assignment Status Form (SLAPSCD).

• The second method is to adjust the assignment dates and recalculate the day and/or

months on the Room Assignment Form (SLARASG), Meal Assignment Form

27 Aug 1991 25.00

27 Sept 1991 25.00

27 Oct 1991 25.00

27 Nov 1991 16.13 (.64512 x 25.00)

437

Banner Student User Guide | Location Management

(SLAMASG), and the Phone Assignment Form (SLAPASG). Method two is only

appropriate when using daily and monthly rates.

When the assessment is processed for the assignment, an adjustment will be written to

the student's account detail for the difference between the original assessment and the

new assessment.

Remember, the Refundable checkbox on TSADETC must be checked for the detail code

in order to process refunds.

Batch Scheduling of Housing Assignments

Batch scheduling of housing assignments is a process used to schedule housing

applicants into the available dormitory rooms for a user-requested term.

There are two steps in the batch scheduling process.

1. Run the Batch Housing Schedules Report (SLRSCHE)

This process can be run through job submission. This is a COBOL program which

extracts the building, room, and application data from the database, and creates a

temporary assignment file based on the applicant's preferences, priorities, and

attributes. The only parameter selection needed is the processing term. The Term

Code parameter, as well as username and password, must be updated in the exact

positions in

slrsche.prm.

2. Run the Batch Scheduler Report (SLRSCHD).

In update mode this step can update the database with the assignment information

from the previous step. If the assignment information is not in its final form, then the

step can be run in audit mode which will not update the database. A report is also

produced in this step. This report gives the complete scheduling information about

each applicant's preferences, priorities, gender, and attributes, and the room which is

assigned. Applicants who could not be scheduled are also listed on the report.

These steps can be run multiple times in audit mode until the best utilization of applicants

to available dorm rooms is achieved.

The user can select one of three sort options for the Batch Scheduler Report (SLRSCHD):

Applicant name, Applicant ID, or Applicant priority number. The report lists those

applicants who were scheduled, followed by the applicants who could not be scheduled.

When running in Update mode the following selection options must be specified:

Room Rate Code - This is the rate code which is used if no rate code exists on the Room

Definition Form (SLARDEF) for the room being assigned. This rate code must exist on the

Room Rate Code Validation Form (STVRRCD).

Room Assignment Status - This is the dorm room status code used for the assignment.

This updates the Status field on SLARASG. This status must exist on the Room

Assignment Status Code Validation Form (STVASCD).

438

Banner Student User Guide | Location Management

Room Assignment Status Date - This is the date associated with the room assignment

status. This date must fall within the range established on the Room Assignment Status

Form (SLAASCD).

The scheduling is done using a variety of institution and student specified elements. The

batch scheduler methodology is listed below:

Room Type - Only rooms designated as dormitory rooms as "Dormitory" in the Room

Type radio group on the Room Definition Form (SLARDEF) are loaded into the scheduler.

Room Priorities - Each room can be defined with a room priority. This is done on the Room

Definition Form (SLARDEF). This room priority is used when loading the available

dormitory rooms into the batch scheduler. The lower the number - the higher the priority.

For example, rooms with a priority of "1" are scheduled first. All rooms with the same

priority are then sorted by building code and ascending sequence room number. If an

institution wishes to use all of its single rooms first then these rooms should be given a

priority of

If not entered, the room priority on SLADREF defaults to

99999999. The following is an

example of how rooms would be loaded into scheduler:

Room Capacity - Rooms where the capacity equals zero are not loaded into the scheduler.

Beds Remaining - The applicants which have already been assigned to the dormitory

room are checked prior to each room being loaded into the scheduler. For example, if a

group of applicants has already been manually assigned to dormitory rooms before the

scheduler is run, then these beds are not available to be scheduled via the batch

scheduler. Dorm room South 101 has a capacity of four. Two applicants have already

been assigned to the room. When South 101 is loaded into the scheduler it is loaded with

only two beds available. This prevents rooms from being over-allocated by the scheduler.

Inactive Rooms - Rooms which have been marked inactive are not loaded into scheduler.

There are two different methods used to inactivate a room.

1. The Status field on the Room Definition Form (SLARDEF), which is validated against

the Room Status Code Validation Form (STVRMST), can be used to flag the room as

inactive.

Priority Building Code Room Number

1 Adams 202

1 Burns 101

1 Burns 102

1 North 101

99999999 Adams 101

99999999 Adams 102

99999999 Adams 104

99999999 Burns 102

439

Banner Student User Guide | Location Management

2. The room can also be inactivated for a period of time via the Room Inactivation

information on the Room Definition Form. If the room is inactive for any day during the

term being scheduled, then the room is not available for scheduling.

Room Gender - Each room can be specified with a gender designation. Rooms

designated as

Male rooms can only be assigned to male applicants and Female gender

rooms to female applicants. If the room gender designation is

Not Available, then

the first applicant scheduled into the room defines the room gender for the scheduling

process. (Note: The gender designation remains

Not Available on SLARDEF.) If the

first applicant into the room has not designated a gender on the Housing and Meal

Application Form (SLARMAP), then no one else is scheduled into the room because the

gender of the room is unknown.

Housing Applicants - The batch scheduler loads those applicants for the user selected

term who have requested a room assignment. This selection is done using the

Application Type field on the Housing and Meal Application Form (SLARMAP) and the

Room and Meal Application Type Validation Form (STVARTP). The following applicants

are not processed by the batch scheduler:

1. Applicants who have requested only a meal assignment.

2. Applicants who have already received a dorm room assignment for the term.

3. Applicants whose application has been inactivated via the Application Status on

SLARMAP and the Housing Application Status Code Validation Form (STVHAPS).

Room Attributes - The user may define attributes associated with each building via the

Building Definition Form (SLABLDG). These attributes then default to the Room Definition

Form (SLARDEF) for each room in the building. The building attributes can be deleted on

SLARDEF or new room-specific attributes can be added. These attributes are then used

to locate the best fit of applicants to available dorm rooms. Attributes can also be

designated as "must match" attributes. These must match attributes are given special

processing considerations in the scheduler. An applicant must have the same attribute

specified on his Housing and Meal Application Form (SLARMAP) to be assigned to a

room with a must match attribute. The attribute does not have to be designated as a must

match attribute on the application; it must just exist.

The following example outlines this process:

Scores by Applicants

Room Capacity Attributes 1 2 3

North 101 2 Smok-checked 1 0 0

North 102 1 Coax 0 0 1

Nsmk

North 103 2 Coax 0 0 0

Smok-checked

440

Banner Student User Guide | Location Management

Note: None of the applicants has specified a preferred building, category,

or room number.

Applicant Number 1 has requested a smoking room, and the Must Match (Indicator) in

the Special Attributes window of SLARMAP is checked. This means that only rooms with a

smoking attribute are available for scheduling this applicant. This applicant also requested

a single room (Sngl) with a Coax cable (Coax). Neither of these attributes have been

designated as "must match" so the scheduler will look for an available room with these as

"best fit" attributes.

Hand-checked

North 104 1 Smok 3 N/A † N/A †

Coax

Sngl

Hand

North 105 1 Coax 0 2 0

Sngl-checked

Hand

†

N/A - Not Available - due to full capacity

Applicants Attributes

(1) 111-11-1111 Smok-checked

Sngl

Coax

(2) 222-22-2222 Sngl-checked

Hand-checked

(3) 333-33-3333 Nsmk-checked

Sngl

Scores by Applicants

Room Capacity Attributes 1 2 3

441

Banner Student User Guide | Location Management

Keeping the applicant's attributes in mind, each available room will be examined and

scored until the best fit of room attributes to applicant attributes can be accomplished.

North 101 is a smoking room, so it is available to the applicant, but it has no attributes for

single room and Coax, so it receives a score of 1. North 102 is not specified as a smoking

room, so it is not available for this applicant. It receives a score of zero. North 103 is a

smoking room, but it has a "must match" attribute of handicap (Hand-checked), which

means that only an applicant with a handicap attribute can be scheduled in the room.

Hence, the room is not available for this applicant; it receives a score of zero. North 104

has a smoking attribute. It also has single room and Coax attributes, hence it receives a

score of 3. North 105 has a no smoking attribute, so it receives a score of 0.

The room with the highest score is then used to schedule the applicant. Applicant number

1 is scheduled into North 104.

Under the same method of best fit scheduling, applicant Number 2 will be assigned to

North 105 because of its score of two - single and handicap attributes available, and

applicant number 3 will be scheduled into room North 102.

Assignment Priorities - Applicants are assigned to rooms in the user defined priority

sequence. These priorities can be entered online on the Housing and Meal Application

Form (SLARMAP), or they can be loaded via a user created SQL*Plus loader program. As

with the room priorities, the lowest priority is scheduled first. These priorities can be used

to assign all of your freshman first or all the athletes first, whatever your institutional policy

states. If no priority is entered it defaults to

99999999. The application add date and time

is also used to further sort the applicants with the same priority code. If an applicant has

no priority, they will be processed in application date order after the applicants with

priorities. The following example outlines the priority processing for the applicants listed:

Example:

Campus Request - If the applicant requests a room assignment on a specific campus,

then only the rooms on that campus are used. If no campus is specified on the Housing

and Meal Application Form (SLARMAP), then any room regardless of its campus

designation can be used for assignments.

Room Preference - The applicant may further specify building and category preference by

adding a specific room preference. The scheduler then tries to schedule the applicant into

the building and room requested. If the room is not available or the attributes cannot be

matched, then the applicant is scheduled into the next available room within the building

and category (if specified) if possible. A message is generated on the scheduler report

which informs the user that the room requested was not available.

Applicant Priority Date

111-11-1111 1 01-MAR-1990

222-22-2222 1 03-MAR-1990

333-33-3333 1 03-MAR-1990

112-22-3322 2 02-MAR-1990

223-00-9099 to 99999999 01-MAR-1990

442

Banner Student User Guide | Location Management

Category Preference - The applicant may further specify building preference by adding a

building category preference. Categories can be used to further define buildings, for

example, first floor, freshman floor, suites, wings. The scheduler then tries to schedule the

applicant into the building and category which was requested. If no room is available or

the attributes cannot be matched for the category requested, the applicant is scheduled

into the next available room within the building if possible. A message is generated on the

scheduler report which informs the user that a room in the requested category and

building could not be located. Categories are only used within the buildings specified; they

do not cross buildings. If the applicant specifies the first floor of North Hall building on the

application and no rooms are available in North Hall, then the first floor category code is

no longer used in scheduling.

Building Preference - The applicant may request a room in a specific building. The

scheduler then tries to schedule the applicant into a room in the building which was

requested. If no rooms exist in the building which meet the applicant's attributes, the

applicant is scheduled into the next available building and room. A message is generated

on the scheduler report which informs the user that a room in the preferred building could

not be located.

Roommate Preference - The applicant can also specify preferred roommates on the

Roommate Application Form (SLARMAT). An unlimited number of preferred roommates

may be specified.

Once a roommate application has been completed, all roommates whose Acceptance

checkbox is checked on SLARMAT are scheduled together as a group into the best fit

available room.

The highest priority of the group is used as the priority and the gender of highest priority

applicant is used to designate the room gender being requested.

Note: The gender and priorities of each roommate in the group do not

have to match for scheduling.

The Roommates Room Preference information and Roommate Room Attribute

information on SLARMAT are used to locate the best fit room for the group of roommates.

These preferences and attributes are used in the same manner as an individual applicant

preferences and attributes.

If no room with enough capacity or with the required attributes is available for the group of

roommates, then each applicant is scheduled as an individual using his/her own

preferences and attributes specified on their Dorm Room and Meal Application Form

(SLARMAP).

The Scheduler Report lists the roommates scheduled and the roommate preferences and

attributes used to perform the scheduling.

Note: The scheduler has a limit of 10,000 applicants and 5,000 rooms for

processing. There is also a limit of 10 attributes per applicant and per

room for batch scheduler processing.

443

Banner Student User Guide | Location Management

Assignment Roll Process

Room Assignment, as well as meal and phone assignments can be rolled forward from

one term to the next. The user, via parameter option, specifies the from and to term to be

used in the roll process. The assignments will not be rolled forward unless the from and to

terms are both within the same dorm room and meal application. For example, the

applicant's application term range on SLARMAP is from 199001 to 199002. The user

requests the assignment roll to be run to roll 199001 to 199002. The applicant will be

processed. If another applicant's application is for a single term of 199001, then the

assignment will not be created for the future term. This process does not roll a meal,

phone, or room assignment if one already exists for the term to which assignments are

being rolled. Only the time period associated with the rate code is calculated in the room

assignment process.

Note: The roll process checks room capacity based on the start and end

dates of the housing terms, so these dates should not overlap between

consecutive terms.

The user can also prevent an applicant from being rolled by checking the Prevent Roll

checkbox on the assignment forms (SLARASG, SLAMASG, SLAPASG). Both meal and

phone assignments may be prevented from being rolled by the status codes associated

with these assignments. The Meal Assignment Status Code Validation Form (STVMSCD),

the Phone Assignment Status Code Validation Form (STVPSCD), the Meal Assignment

Status Query Form (SLQMSCD), the Phone Assignment Status Query Form (SLQPSCD),

the Meal Assignment Status Form (SLAMSCD), and the Phone Assignment Status Form

(SLAPSCD) allow the user to specify if assignments with a certain status may be rolled.

The roll process can be run in either audit or update mode. The Assignment Roll Process

(SLRROLL) lists the assignments which will be rolled.

Housing Letter Generation and Population Selection

The following variables should be used for creating housing letters.

The variables listed below are specific to information that would be printed about a

roommate in a housing assignment letter.

Variable Description

*ROOMMATE

Roommate Name

*RM_PHONE

Roommate Phone Number

*RM_ADDRESS_STR1

Roommate Address Street Line 1

*RM_ADDRESS_STR2

Roommate Address Street Line 2

*RM_ADDRESS_STR3

Roommate Address Street Line 3

*RM_ADDRESS_CITY

Roommate Address City

444

Banner Student User Guide | Location Management

The variables listed below are specific to information that would be printed about the

person receiving a housing assignment letter.

The variables listed below are used to support logic in the Housing sample letter, but do

not print.

*RM_ADDRESS STATE

Roommate Address State

*RM_ADDRESS_CNTY

Roommate Address County Code

*RM_ADDRESS_NATN

Roommate Address Nation Code

*RM_ADDRESS_ZIPC

Roommate Address Zip Code

Variable Description

*FNAME

First Name

*LNAME

Last Name

*MNAME

Middle Name

*PHONE

Telephone Number

*STR1

Address Street Line 1

*STR2

Address Street Line 2

*STR3

Address Street Line 3

*CITY

Address City

*STATE

Address State Code

*NATN

Address Nation Description

*ZIPC

Address Zip Code

*TDATE

Today in Month dd, yyyy Format

*BUILDING_NAME

Housing Building Description

*ROOM_NUMBER

Housing Room Number

Variable Description

*ALWAYS_NULL

Always Null

*COUNT_OCCUPANCY

Count Room Occupancy of 1

*COUNT_ROOMMATES

Count Number of Roommates

*NO_ROOMMATES

No Roommates in Room

Variable Description

445

Banner Student User Guide | Location Management

The variables listed below are specific to information that would be printed about a

roommate in a housing assignment letter.

Dynamic Parameter

A dynamic parameter for term code (&Term_Code) must be entered when processing

many of the Housing variables. The prompt is spelled consistently as

&Term_Code so

that a valid term only needs to be entered once during processing, and all variables with

the same prompt will automatically use the same value for the term code.

Housing Population Selection

The Housing population selection consists of:

The population selection rules include a dynamic parameter for term code

(

&Term_Code). This population selection will return all persons with an active housing

assignment for the term code that is entered.

*ONE_ROOMMATE

One Roommate in Room

*TOTAL_IN_ROOM

Count Total Room Occupancy

Variable Description

*RM_FIRST_NAME

Roommate First Name

*RM_ADDRESS_CNTYDESC

Roommate Address County Desc

*RM_ADDRESS_NATNDESC

Roommate Address Nation Desc

*RM_ADDRESS_SUBZIPC

Roommate Address 5 Digit Zip

*RM_ADDRESS_FULL

Roommate Complete Address

*RM_ADDRESS_CSZ

Roommate Addr City, State, Zip

Parameter Value

Application: HOUSING

Selection ID: HOUSING_ASSIGNMENTS

Creator ID: SAISUSR

Variable Description

446

Banner Student User Guide | Location Management

Purge Process

The following purge process is part of the Location Management and Housing module.

Housing Purge (SLPHOUS)

This process will purge the housing applications, housing, meal plan, and phone

assignments for the user specified terms and activity dates. These assignment

assessments must have been processed and accepted in the Accounts Receivable

module.

Location Management Reports

The following reports are run through the Location Management and Housing module:

Please refer to the Banner Student Reports and Processes Handbook for report

descriptions, instructions, parameter definitions, and output samples.

Creating a Population Selection

To perform population selection, the application you will be working with must first be

defined on the Application Definition Rules Form (GLRAPPL).

The second step is to enter the Population Selection Definition Rules Form (GLRSLCT),

enter the Application (Code), and create a Selection ID (Identifier) with a description.

In the Selection Definition section, define the Select and From portions of the SQL

statement that the selection represents.

Dormitory Address Creation Report (SLRDADD)

Active Housing Assignments Report (SLRHLST)

Batch Room/Meal/Phone Assess Report (SLRFASM)

Assignment Roll Process (SLRROLL)

Batch Scheduler (SLRSCHD)

Housing Purge (SLPHOUS)

ACS Housing Interface (SLRBACS)

447

Banner Student User Guide | Location Management

Example:

Next, enter the Selection Rules for the population of records you would like to see.

Example:

Save your data and exit. Your population selection rules will be compiled. If any errors are

issued during the compilation process, resolve the errors before continuing. If you do not

resolve all errors given during the compile process, you will not be able to use the

population selection rules to extract a population.

You are now ready to extract the population of people. The Population Selection Extract

(GLBDATA) is run from the Process Submission Control Form (GJAPCTL). At minimum,

you will need to supply the parameters for Selection Identifier 1, Application, and Creator

ID, which are the values that were in the Key Information of the Population Selection

Definition Rules Form (GLRSLCT).

After extracting the population, you can use the Population Selection Extract Data Form

(GLAEXTR) to view and/or modify the people in the population. You can add or delete

people from the population using this form. The keys to the form are Application,

Selection ID, and Creator ID. (User ID is also displayed in the Key Information.) You will

be able to add or delete people only from populations that you selected.

After extracting the population, and modifying the people in it if necessary, you can use the

population for a variety of purposes. Letters can be produced using Letter Generation,

based upon a population, and many Banner® reports and processes also can accept a

population for processing.

For additional details on population selection, refer to the Banner General System User

Guide.

Select:

SARADAP_PIDM

From:

SARADAP

SARADAP_TERM_CODE_ENTRY

'200010'

AND

SARADAP_LEVL_CODE

'UG'

448

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

Recruiting

This chapter discusses processing and procedure information for Recruiting.

Recruiting Procedures

Here are tasks you can perform in this module.

Add/Maintain Prospects

To recruit a prospect, after a prospect's identification number and name have been

entered on the General Person Identification Form (SPAIDEN), the Recruit Prospect

Information Form (SRARECR) is used to enter and maintain the information necessary for

all recruitment related activities. This information includes the source of the prospect (high

school, mailings, alumni, etc.), intended degrees and majors, outside interests, contacts,

comments, attributes, and cohort information for student tracking.

The Quick Recruit Form (SRAQUIK) can also be used when entering information about a

recruit or a group of recruits which may have some of the same characteristics. The

Default Options window allows the user to enter default information such as address type,

contact type code, recruiter code, recruitment status code, source code, term code, high

school code, prior college code, level code, degree code, college code, department code,

and major code for all records being processed. This speeds the data entry process when

a batch of recruits from a local high school or all recruits from the same prior college are

being processed together. The default options are in effect only for the current SRAQUIK

session; once the user has exited the form, the options no longer apply.

If a prior college or high school record is entered on this form, the corresponding

admissions checklist request code is updated on the Prior College Form (SOAPCOL) and

High School Information Form (SOAHSCH), if it is defined on Source/Background

Institution Code Validation Form (STVSBGI). If multiple prior colleges or high schools are

added for a single recruit, only the first entered record will be assigned the admissions

checklist request code.

Add/Maintain Test Scores

Once a prospect has been established on the database, the various types of tests

required for recruiting a prospect are entered on the Test Score Information Form

(SOATEST). Test scores for SAT, ACT, GRE, GMAT, and AMCAS tests may also be

loaded onto the system from test score data loads and are recorded on this form.

449

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

Add/Maintain High School Data

The High School Information Form (SOAHSCH) is used to enter information about a

person's high school career. The information includes high school, transcript dates,

graduation date, GPA, and subjects taken in high school.

Add/Maintain Prior College Data

The Prior College Form (SOAPCOL) is used to enter and maintain information about a

person's prior college experience including degree information such as majors, minors,

and areas of concentration, number of hours, GPA, and transcript date.

Review Prospects

The Recruiter's Prospect Form (SRARINF) is used to display all the prospects for which a

recruiter has responsibility. The prospect's name, ID number, and status are displayed.

Assign/Review Recruiter's Appointments and Visits

The Recruiter Appointments/Visits Form (SRARAPT) is used to schedule and record daily

appointments with prospects and to record visits to recruiting sources such as a college

night. Appointments and visits may be viewed for a given day or range of days. If a

recruiter is absent, it provides a quick method to review their schedule.

Establish Source, High School, or College

The Source or Background Institution Base Form (SOASBGI) is used to capture general

information about a source, high school, or college. Information such as address,

contacts, comments, or directions may be used by the recruiter to aid in the recruitment

process.

Build Statistical Information for a Source or Background

Institution

Statistical information about a source, high school, or college may be maintained on a

yearly basis on the Source/Background Institution Year Form (SOABGIY). This

information may be used for statistical data on the institution's recruiting procedures.

450

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

Review Prospects and Visits by Source

The Source Visits/Prospects Form (SRASRCE) displays prospects by the source of the

prospect and also may be used to review and schedule visits to a particular source. This

form may be used by the recruiter to schedule a college night visit at a high school and to

view the prospects from that high school.

Produce System-Generated Letters

Letters (generated) and materials (published) are defined using a variety of validation and

control forms. Paragraph codes are defined on the Paragraph Code Validation Form

(GTVPARA), and their text is defined using the Paragraph Form (GUAPARA). Letter

codes are defined using the Letter Code Validation Form (GTVLETR), and the paragraphs

which make up a letter are defined on the Letter Process Form (GUALETR). Materials and

letters can be scheduled by the system based upon Communications Plans or can be

entered directly on the Student Mail Form (SUAMAIL).

Analyze Recruiting Enrollment

There are two reports you can use to analyze recruiting enrollment, the Recr/Enrl

Analysis-Source/Recr Report (SRRENRL) and the Recr/Enroll Analysis-How Learned

Report (SRRENRH).

The Recr/Enrl Analysis-Source/Recr Report (SRRENRL) analyzes by source, recruiter,

and contact type the number of people who have been recruited, applied, accepted, and

registered for a specified term. The report also collects data based on source and recruiter

codes and prints an optional section for source codes which have no corresponding

recruiting data associated with them. Data is populated from SRRRSRC.

The Recr/Enroll Analysis-How Learned Report (SRRENRH) provides recruiting

information sorted by recruiter code for a given range of term codes. The data collected for

the number of recruits, applications, and accepted and registered students is based first

on the How I Learned About code and then on term. An optional section may be printed for

How I Learned About codes which have no corresponding recruiting data associated with

them. The How I Learned About code is populated when any Web for Prospects user fills

in the appropriate field on the Web for Prospects page. That information is then pushed to

the user’s Banner® recruiting record. (The field can also be populated manually on

SRARECR/SRRLEND.)

This report will assist schools in determining their success rate with various types of

marketing and advertising methods. For instance, if a school is receiving little or no

feedback from an expensive newspaper campaign but is receiving many calls based on a

radio spot, the decision may be made to put more marketing dollars into radio and less

into print ads. This report will help give the school the necessary information to make

those types of decisions.

451

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

Print/Delete Recruits Who Did Not Apply

The Recruits Never Applied to Institution Report Process (SRRINQR) prints, by option, a

report of all prospects who never applied to the institution or deletes all records for those

prospects.

Appointment Scheduling

Appointments may be created and scheduled once a general person record exists. They

are person related, rather than specific to a recruiting record. A recruiting record is not

required to be built on the Recruit Prospect Information Form (SRARECR) in order to set

up an appointment. Appointments are entered and maintained on the Person

Appointments/Contacts Form (SOAAPPT). This form may be accessed from the Recruit

Prospect Information Form (SRARECR).

A person may be scheduled for an appointment with a recruiter via the Recruiter Code or

with an Interviewer. An interviewer is another person in the system and is defined via their

ID.

Multiple appointments, as well as multiple contacts, may be entered for a person on the

Person Appointment/Contacts Form (SOAAPPT). A person may have more than one

appointment at the institution in a single day. Perhaps an applicant would like to schedule

appointments with their Admissions counselor, a Financial Aid counselor, and their

Academic Advisor in a single day. As long as each of these members of your institution is

defined by an ID in your database, these appointments may be scheduled between the

applicant and these parties on the Person Appointments/Contacts Form (SOAAPPT).

Keep the following in mind for scheduling purposes.

• If a person for whom the appointment is being scheduled (the Key Information ID) has

conflicting appointments, the message *WARNING* Appointment already scheduled at

this time for the person is generated to inform the user of such a conflict.

• If the interviewer has conflicting appointments, the message *WARNING* Appointment

already scheduled at this time for the Interviewer is generated.

• And if a conflicting appointment and or visit is created for the recruiter, the message

*WARNING* Appointment/Visit already scheduled at this time for the Recruiter is

generated.

A contact is not a required element when creating an appointment for a person. However,

if a contact is entered, and a result code is entered that is to generate a contact, the

contact will be generated for the person, and may be viewed in the Contact section of the

Person Appointments/Contacts Form (SOAAPPT). Only one contact of the same contact

code may be entered in a day. Multiple contact codes may be entered for a person in a

single day, as long as the contact codes differ.

The Key Block of the Person Appointments/Contacts Form (SOAAPPT) requires an ID

and has an optional Appointment Range Start Date and End Date. If the Appointment

Range Start Date and End Date for appointments and contacts are left Null, then all

appointments and contacts will be queried. Otherwise, only those appointments and

contacts which fall between the Appointment Range Start Date and End Date the user

has specified will be queried.

452

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

The Appointment From Date and To Date fields in the Key Information of the Recruiter

Appointments/Visits Form (SRARAPT) allow the user to enter a range of dates, a single

date, or no dates for all records. The user may specifically query those days of interest for

a recruiter's schedule.

If an appointment is to be scheduled with a recruiter, the end user may also schedule that

appointment on the Recruiter/Appointments/Visits Form (SRARAPT) in the Appointments

section. All appointments entered on the Person Appointments/Contacts Form

(SOAAPPT) and scheduled with a recruiter will also display on this form and vice versa.

The Appointment Purge Process (SOPAPPT) will delete all person-related appointments

for a parameter entered range of dates. This process may first be run in audit mode to

verify the results before it is run in update mode; appointments are purged from the

database.

Communication Plan Processing

This section discusses using communication plans.

Communication Plan Processing Overview

Here is a detailed look at communication plan processing.

Introduction

Communication plan processing permits you to automatically assign a recruit, applicant,

or student (learner) to a communication plan online, according to their campus, level,

degree, college, field of study type, field of study code (major), curricula (primary,

secondary, any), and the rules defined for your institution. You can define rules that will

assign a communication plan based upon any field of study type (i.e., not just major) and/

or elements in the primary curriculum, secondary curricula, or all curriculum records.

Automatic mail generation helps the institution communicate quickly and efficiently with

prospects, applicants, and students. Based on the various “attributes” of a person and

their stage of processing (recruiting, admissions, general student), the system generates

different pieces of mail automatically. In the same manner, you can enter requests for

specific mailings to be produced. All mailings are dated and marked with a material code,

letter code, and communication plan where applicable, so you can keep a full audit trail of

correspondence sent to a person. You develop the actual letters online to send to a

person according to the specific needs of your institution.

How Processing is Called by Module

Communication plan processing is called in a variety of situations, depending on the

module for the curriculum record.

Processing is called from Recruiting when:

• new recruiting and curriculum records are added, and recruiting communication plan

matches are found on SOACOMM,

453

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

• a new curriculum or field of study is added to a recruiting record, and new recruiting

communication plan matches are found on SOACOMM (i.e., the communication plan

did not already exist for the recruit),

• the withdrawal code is added or changed, or a new source/background institution code

is added on SRARECR, and active communication plan records exist for the recruit,

• a curriculum record is deleted, and active communication plan records exist for the

recruit,

• a recruiting record is deleted or inactivated, and active communication plan records

exist for the recruit,

• a recruiting curriculum or field of study record is inactivated, and active communication

plan records exist for the recruit, and

• the recruiting curriculum is changed, and active communication plan records exist for

the recruit.

Processing is called from Admissions when:

• new application and curriculum records are added, and applicant communication plan

matches are found on SOACOMM,

• a new curriculum or field of study is added to an applicant record, and new applicant

communication plan matches are found on SOACOMM,

• the withdrawal code is added or changed, or a new source/background institution code

is added on SAAADMS, and active communication plan records exist for the applicant,

• a curriculum record is deleted, and active communication plan records exist for the

applicant,

• an admissions record is deleted or inactivated, and active communication plan records

exist for the recruit,

• an admissions curriculum or field of study record is inactivated, and active

communication plan records exist for the recruit, and

• the admissions curriculum is changed, and active communication plan records exist for

the recruit.

Processing is called from General Student when:

• a decision is confirmed for an applicant (SAAQUIK and SAADCRV) that results in the

creation of a new learner curriculum or a general student record, and new learner

communication plan matches are found on SOACOMM,

• a general student record is duplicated on SGASTDN, and new communication plan

matches are found on SOACOMM,

• a new curriculum or field of study is added to a general student record, and new learner

communication plan matches are found on SOACOMM,

• the student status on SGASTDN is changed to IS, and active communication plan

records exist for the learner,

454

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

• a curriculum record is deleted, and active communication plan records exist for the

learner,

• a general student record is deleted or inactivated, and active communication plan

records exist for the learner,

• a general student curriculum or field of study record is inactivated, and active

communication plan records exist for the learner, and

• the general student curriculum is changed, and active communication plan records exist

for the learner.

Determining Material Recipients

A communication plan defines standard materials and groups of materials to be sent to a

prospect/applicant/student at pre-defined time intervals. Once a person is assigned to a

communication plan, material is generated on the Student Mail Form (SUAMAIL). Please

note that the person must meet the material rule criteria for each specific material in order

to receive all materials in the plan. Otherwise, only those materials within the plan for

which the person is qualified are generated on the Student Mail Form (SUAMAIL).

In order to be qualified to receive a specific material, the person must meet all the required

criteria as defined on the Material Form (SOAMATL). On this form, the institution defines

the required attributes which a person must have in order to receive the material.

For instance, perhaps your institution has an Institutional Scholarship program called

"Presidential Scholarship for Freshman Minority Students". You would only like those

students that have: (1) received a score of 700 or better on either the Math SAT or the

Verbal SAT, (2) are members of a minority ethnic group, and (3) are new freshman at your

institution. The Material Form (SOAMATL) allows you to establish such requirements,

giving you strong controls over the materials that leave your institution.

If a specific material is part of a person's communication plan, and the individual meets all

the criteria for the material, the material is generated automatically to the Student Mail

Form (SUAMAIL). If a communication plan is added for a person, but the person does not

meet the required criteria to receive the material, no materials are generated. When the

individual does meet the criteria, and the plan is still active, the material is generated for

the person at that time.

For example, a prospect may be in the communication plan defined for undergraduate

students interested in the College of Business. A specific material, such as a College

Night Follow-Up Letter, may be associated with this communication plan. The material

rules for this letter may require that the prospect have a contact defined as "college night".

At the time the plan is assigned, the person did not have a contact of college night.

However, three weeks later, the college night contact is entered. At this time, the College

Night Follow-Up Letter is automatically generated on the Student Mail Form (SUAMAIL).

Defining Materials and Rules

When materials are defined on the Material Form (SOAMATL), the user must first define

specific information regarding the material in the Material information. These specifics

include indicating whether the material is a published work or is generated within the

system using Letter Generation. If the material is generated, a corresponding letter code

must be entered. Initials and the capability of overriding initials are defined here. This

455

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

section is also where the user determines whether a duplicate mailing of this material is

permitted.

There are a set of rules in the Material Rules section which may be used to designate who

receives certain materials. The following criteria may be used in combination to determine

which materials should be created for a person: Department, Major, Contacts, Interests,

Attributes, Gender, State or Province, Ethnicity, Legacy, Citizenship, Recruit Type,

Test Scores, Admission Type, Admission Decision, Student Type, Source,

Application Status, ESP Code, and Region or Division.

If a person meets the criteria defined for a specific material, and it is part of their

communication plan, the system sends the individual the corresponding material.

Automatic mailing of materials is based on a person's characteristics and the status of the

recruiting record, admissions application, or general student record.

Material rules have an OR condition within a rule type, and rules have an AND condition

among rule types. For example, in the Material Rules section, the codes which determine

the rules for each field, such as the Department field, follow the OR condition. The codes

which determine the rules for all the fields in the section, from Department through

Region Or Division, follow the AND condition in relation to each other.

Suppose your institution offers scholarships to new freshmen who have scored well on

either the SAT verbal or SAT mathematics tests. You should set up rules for this

scholarship material or letter that indicate these requirements. To accomplish this task,

you should enter in the test score rules that the person must have an SAT verbal score OR

an SAT math score of 700, AND a student type of B (new freshman) to receive this

material. Only these people with a student type of B, and either an SAT verbal or SAT

math score or 700 or better, will receive this material.

Materials are only generated for departments, majors, and general student admit codes

and student types when a communication plan is added. Materials

for non-majors,

departments, and general student admit codes and student types are generated from the

following forms:

• SAAACKL

• SAAADMS

• SAADCRV

• SAAQUIK

• SGASADD

• SGASTDN

• SLARMAP

• SOAAPPT

• SOACCOL

• SOAPLAN

• SOATEST

• SPACMNT

456

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

• SPAIDEN

• SPAPERS

• SRAQUIK

• SRARECR

Using Material Groups

Once all materials have been defined, and their corresponding rules have been

established, material groups may be used. Using group codes is a shorthand method of

assigning a group of materials to multiple communication plans, rather than assigning

each material individually to each communication plan.

Groups of materials are defined on the Communication Group Form (SOACGRP). Use

this form to specify the material codes which you would like to be part of the

communication group. An example of a group of materials may be Athletic Brochures.

Instead of adding each athletic brochure at your institution to each communication plan,

use group code processing to ease data entry. On the Communication Group Form

(SOACGRP), enter the group code for Athletic Brochures in the Key Block, and add the

material codes for such things as football brochures, baseball brochures, and field hockey

brochures. Adding the group code to your communication plans associates each of the

materials in the group with the plan. Please note that the rules for each material are

checked individually. If a person meets the rules for the football brochure, and no others in

this group, they will only receive the football brochure.

Associating Materials with Plans

After defining your institution's materials, material rules, and communication groups, you

must determine which materials and groups of materials will be part of each of your

institution's communication plans. Materials and communication groups are added to a

plan on the Communication Plan Form (SOACPLN). Use this form to define individual

materials for a plan and their associated wait days and to assign groups of materials to a

communication plan. If a specific material is added for a communication plan, and that

material is also part of a group of materials, the system does not generate the material

twice to the Student Mail Form (SUAMAIL). It checks your plan rules and only generates

one of the materials that is needed.

Using Communication Plans

Communication plans may be automatically generated online in the Recruiting,

Admissions, and General Student Modules and are controlled by the user. If a person

meets the requirements to be assigned to a communication plan as defined on the

Communication Rules Form (SOACOMM), the Communication Plan Change window

appears, and the user is given the option to assign a communication plan, or exit from the

window.

Note: To exit from the window, you must make some change to the record

(such as remove a plan and Save, change a plan and Save) or simply

save the existing/assigned plans. Use the Return button to return to the

main window of the form.

457

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

The following criteria, Campus, Level, College, Degree, Field of Study Type, Field of

Study Code (major), and Curricula (

Primary, Secondary, Any) as defined on the

Communication Rules Form (SOACOMM), and the person's stage of processing, either

recruit, applicant, or student (learner), determine the communication plan in which a

person is placed. You can define rules that will assign a communication plan based upon

any field of study type (i.e., not just major) and/or elements in the primary curriculum,

secondary curricula, or all curricula.

When creating your institution's communication plan rules, be aware that any fields which

are left blank are treated as wildcards. For example, if your institution has two

communication plans, one for undergraduate level and one for graduate level students,

you should create your rules with an undergraduate level code specified for the

undergraduate communication plan. Level would be the only rule defined for the plan, so

any person at that level and indicated processing stage (recruit, applicant, or student) is

placed in that communication plan. The same would be true for the graduate level

students.

Please note that communication plans may be set up at a broad level by using one rule,

such as by level only, or they may be specific for each campus, level, college, and degree

combination. This decision should be made prior to implementing this functionality at your

institution.

Using the Communication Plan Change Window

The Communication Plan Change Window is displayed in the forms listed below, if an

curriculum record is added or updated in the database and this causes a change of

communication plan.

The Communication Plan Change window for the student is automatically displayed on

SAAADMS, SAAQUIK, SRAQUIK, SRARECR, and SGASTDN under the following

conditions:

• A new host record (SRBRECR, SARADAP, SGBSTDN) is added along with its primary

curriculum, and a communication plan matches the curriculum.

• A new curriculum or field of study is added to a host record, and a communication plan

matches the curriculum and does not currently exist for the student's recruiting,

application, or general student record.

Recruit Prospect Information Form (SRARECR)

Quick Recruit Form (SRAQUIK)

Admissions Application/Checklist Summary Form (SAAACKL)

Admissions Application Form (SAAADMS)

Quick Entry Form (SAAQUIK)

Admissions Decision Form (SAADCRV)

General Student Form (SGASTDN)

Communication Plan Collector Form (SOACCOL)

458

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

• A host record is inactivated by a withdrawal or other source/background institution code

(SRBRECR, SARADAP), or the student status on the general student record

(SGBSTDN) is inactive.

• A host record is deleted, and communication plans exist for that record.

• A curriculum or field of study is deleted, and communication plans exist for the host

record.

• A curriculum or field of study is inactivated, and communication plans exist for the host

record.

The Communication Plan Change window is not displayed automatically from SOACCOL

and SAAACKL. The user must select the Communication Plan item from the Options

Menu.

The Communication Plan Change window is displayed automatically from SAADCRV if

the resulting decision is to create a new general student record, or when a new curriculum

is added for the student, and a new communication plan matches the curriculum.

When the Communication Plan Change Window appears in one of these forms, the user

is given the option to delete, inactivate, or ignore the initial communication plan and any

pending materials, and the option to add the new communication plan. This is all done by

setting the checkboxes to

Yes, No, Inactivate, or Delete (by checking or

unchecking them) and then saving the data and acknowledging the change. If no change

in plans is desired, use Save to exit from the window.

Note: To exit from the window, you must make some change to the record

(such as remove a plan and Save, change a plan and Save) or simply

save the existing/assigned plans. Use the Return button to return to the

main window of the form.

For example, when a recruiting record is first added to the database via the Recruit

Prospect Information Form (SRARECR), if the prospect's campus, level, college, and

degree match a communication rule on the Communication Rules Form (SOACOMM), the

Communication Plan Change Window appears. The user may save this communication

plan or exit from the window.

As the prospect becomes an applicant, similar steps must be taken to delete, inactivate, or

continue with recruiting communication plans and the addition of admissions or general

student plans. The Communication Plan Change Window will appear in the Admissions

Application Form (SAAADMS) when a record is added to the database. After the

admissions record is saved to the database, the system determines whether a

communication plan exists, needs to be changed, or should be added for the person.

At the time the Communication Plan Change Window appears in the Admissions

Application Form (SAAADMS), the user is given the option to:

1. Delete, inactivate, or ignore the initial communication plan.

2. Delete or ignore any pending materials from the existing communication plan.

3. Add the new communication plan in this window.

After each of these options are selected, the changes should be saved. When

communication plan changes are saved to the database, the message: Communication

459

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

Plan Update in Process... appears. You must acknowledge this message to continue

processing the communication plan. If no change in plans is desired, exit from the window.

Note: To exit from the window, you must make some change to the record

(such as remove a plan and Save, change a plan and Save) or simply

save the existing/assigned plans. Use the Return button to return to the

main window of the form.

The Communication Plan Change Window appears in three specific circumstances.

1. If a record for a person is added to SAAADMS, SAAQUIK, SRAQUIK, or SRARECR,

and this person fits the criteria combination of a communication plan designated on

the Communication Rules Form (SOACOMM), and the same active plan does not

already exist for that person on the Communication Plan Assignment Form

(SOAPLAN).

2. If the value for the campus, level, college, degree, field of study type, field of study

code (major), or curricula (primary, secondary, any) is changed for the person on one

of the above forms and that change alters the criteria for the communication plan

assigned to them based on the rules designated on the Communication Rules Form

(SOACOMM).

3. If a person's record is deleted and they have an active communication plan, the

communication plan window will open to ask you if you would like to inactivate their

communication plan.

Because of the complex curriculum validation and communication plan processing that

occurs when records are saved on SAAADMS, SAAQUIK, SRAQUIK, or SRARECR, the

creation of multiple records prompts you to save any changes. If you have made unsaved

changes to one record, then perform a Next Record function, the box Do you want to save

the changes you have made? You must save your changes in order to proceed to the next

record. Yes or No is displayed. If you choose

Yes, the changes for the record you are

working on will be saved, and the necessary validation and communication plan

processing will occur. If you answer

No, the above message displays until you either

choose to save or leave the form.

In other words, you will not be permitted to create a new record without saving changes to

the one you are currently working on. This eliminates confusion over the record for which

curriculum checking and communication plan processing are occurring.

Using the Collector File

Similar steps need to be taken when an applicant becomes a student. Please note that

after registration exists, changes in student information that may cause a plan change

(campus, level, college, degree) must be made on the Student Course Registration Form

(SFAREGS), and that the Communication Plan Change Window will not appear in this

form. Instead, a collector file which can be viewed online in the Communication Plan

Collector Form (SOACCOL) is updated with the changes made that cause the

communication plan to change or materials to be sent. Note that any batch process which

may affect a communication plan or materials to be sent to a plan member also updates

this collector file. Batch processes which may cause an update to the collector file include:

460

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

Records added to the Communication Plan Collector Form (SOACCOL) may be updated

individually online by performing a Count Query Hits function or by using the

Communication Plan item from the Options Menu. If a change is being made to a

communication plan, the Communication Plan Change Window appears. If the collector

record is to add materials only, no window appears after performing a Count Query Hits

function; however, the materials are generated. After processing a collector record on this

form, delete the record from the collector file.

The Communication Plan Processing Report (SORCPLN) allows you to process all

collector records in batch. You may clean up the collector file prior to running this batch

process by entering the Communication Plan Collector Form (SOACCOL) and deleting

those records which you do not wish to process.

Assigning Communication Plans

The Communication Plan Assignment Form (SOAPLAN) is used to assign or view

assigned communication plans for a person. The Module Indicator radio group value of

Recruiting, Admissions, or Student, indicates which module the plan is for. A

communication plan follows a person through these modules and may be turned off or on

as processing changes or as the plan changes according to the rules which have been

defined.

A person may have multiple active plans. Multiple plans may exist within a module or

across modules. For example, if your recruiting communication plan rules are set up as

different plans for different campuses, and a student is a prospect for both campuses, that

student may have active recruiting communication plans for both campuses.

Also, if a student is currently enrolled at your institution as an undergraduate student and

has a student communication plan and is also considered a prospect for the graduate

program, the student may also have an active recruiting module communication plan.

A person's communication plans are differentiated by term code and application or

sequence number on the Communication Plan Assignment Form (SOAPLAN). The term

code is associated with recruiting or admissions status, while the application or sequence

number identifies the specific recruiting or admissions application. When the Active

(Indicator) in the Assignment section is checked, the person will receive materials for the

plan code. When the Mail Exists (Indicator) in the Assignment section is checked, the

materials have been automatically posted to the Student Mail Form (SUAMAIL) and have

been sent via Letter Generation, based on the plan code that generated the materials.

Perform a Count Query Hits function from the Plan field in the Assignment section to

create materials for a new communication plan for the person whose ID is in the Key

Information.

Electronic Prospect Load Process (SRTLOAD)

Admissions Decision Calculation Report (SARBDSN)

Student Type Update (SHRTYPE)

461

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

Implementing Communication Plans

The following validation forms, application rule/control forms, and report are used in

Communications Plan Processing:

Validation Forms

Application Rule/Control Forms

Report/Process

Perform the following steps to set up processing.

1. Create a communication plan by defining the materials at your institution that will be

made available to each communication plan. Material codes may be up to four

characters in length and are defined on the Material Code Validation Form

(STVMATL).

2. After you have defined your material codes, define the base information for the

material itself. This includes indicating whether the material is published or generated.

If generated, you must enter the letter code.

In addition, you must define the rules which the recruit/applicant/student must meet to

receive this material. Both of these tasks are performed on the Material Form

(SOAMATL).

Please remember that material rules have an OR condition within a rule type, and

rules have an AND condition among rule types. For example, in the Material Rules

section, the codes which determine the rules for each field, such as the Department

Rules field, follow the OR condition. The codes which determine the rules for all fields

STVMATL Material Code Validation Form

STVCGRP Communication Group Code Validation Form

STVCPLN Communication Plan Code Validation Form

SOAMATL Material Form

SOACGRP Communication Group Form

SOACPLN Communication Plan Form

SOACOMM Communication Rules Form

SOACCOL Communication Plan Collector Form

SOAPLAN Communication Plan Assignment Form

SORCPLN Communication Plan Processing Report

462

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

in the section, from Department through Region or Division, follow the AND

condition in relation to each other.

3. Once all materials have been defined and their corresponding rules have been

established, you may use material groups. Using group codes is a shorthand method

of assigning the code to multiple communication plans, rather than assigning the code

individually to each communication plan. The first task in using material groups is to

define your group codes on the Communication Group Code Validation Form

(STVCGRP).

4. After defining your group codes, you can add standard materials such as an

Institutional Financial Aid Brochure, GSL Brochure, and Payment Options pamphlet to

groups of materials, such as Financial Aid Materials, for communication plans. This is

done using the Communication Group Form (SOACGRP).

Note: Wait days may be assigned to designate when materials should be

sent for a plan. By using this methodology, you need only associate the

group code with your communication plans, and if the members assigned

to the plan meet the criteria for any or each of the materials within the

group, they are automatically sent those materials for which they qualify.

This processing should ease the burden of data entry when

communication plans are created at your institution.

5. You must define the communication plan codes which will be used at your institution

on the Communication Plan Code Validation Form (STVCPLN). These codes define

the communication plans to which recruits/applicants/students may be assigned at

your institution.

6. Once you have defined your communication plan codes, materials, and

communication groups, you need to specify which materials and groups should be

part of each communication plan. This is accomplished on the Communication Plan

Form (SOACPLN). This form is used to assign materials and groups of materials to a

communication plan.

Groups of materials are set up, added to communication plans, and maintained at the

group level. Materials assigned to a plan, which are also included in groups of

materials assigned to a plan, are not duplicated when mailed. Wait days may be

assigned to designate when materials should be sent for a plan.

7. Now that you have fully defined the communication plans to be used at your

institution, you must specify the rules which a recruit/applicant/student must meet in

order to become assigned to a communication plan. You define rules by Campus,

Level, College, Degree, Field of Study Type, Field of Study Code (major), and

Curricula (

Primary, Secondary, Any), on the Communication Rules Form

(SOACOMM). These criteria, as well as the person's stage of processing in the

Recruiting, Admissions, or General Student modules determine which plan a person is

placed in. Any fields which are left blank are treated as wildcards. The form is also

used to calculate the communication plan to which a person is assigned when a

record is added or updated in the database.

Note: If a recruiting level is not defined during the Electronic Prospect

Load Process (SRTLOAD), the default value of level

00 will be assigned

to each of the added recruiting records. If you choose to use this default

level value and intend to use communication plan processing, you need

463

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

to create communication plan rules for the 00 level on the

Communication Plan Rules Form (SOACOMM). Otherwise, your newly

created recruits will not be assigned to a communication plan. It is also

important to note that the default level value of

00 is also used when

initially creating recruiting records on the Recruit Prospect Information

Form (SRARECR) and the Quick Recruit Form (SRAQUIK).

8. Normal processing should now be performed in all modules. Please note that the

Communication Plan Change Window appears during normal processing in the

following forms if a data element (Campus, Level, College, Degree, Field of Study

Type, Field of Study Code (major), and Curricula (

Primary, Secondary, Any))

is added or changed for a person:

For example, when a recruiting record is added online in the Recruit Prospect

Information Form (SRARECR) or the Quick Recruit Form (SRAQUIK), the system

automatically checks to determine if the prospect qualifies for placement in a

communication plan according to their campus, level, degree, college, field of study

type, field of study code (major), curricula (primary, secondary, any, and the rules your

institution has established on the Communication Rules Form (SOACOMM). If the

prospect does qualify for a communication plan, the Communication Plan Change

Window displays.

At this time you will be given the option to (1) delete, inactivate, or exit the initial

communication plan, (2) delete any pending materials from the existing

communication plan or leave them as they are, and (3) add the new communication

plan in this window. If the option selected causes changes in a plan, the changes need

to be saved. When communication plan changes are saved to the database, the

message: Communication Plan Update in Process... appears. You must acknowledge

this message in order to continue processing the communication plan. If no change in

plans is desired, you may exit from this window.

Note: To exit from the window, you must make some change to the record

(such as remove a plan and Save, change a plan and Save) or simply

save the existing/assigned plans. Use the Return button to return to the

main window of the form.

Recruit Prospect Information Form (SRARECR)

Quick Recruit Form (SRAQUIK)

Admissions Application/Checklist Summary Form (SAAACKL)

Admissions Application Form (SAAADMS)

Quick Entry Form (SAAQUIK)

Admissions Decision Form (SAADCRV)

General Student Form (SGASTDN)

Communication Plan Collector Form (SOACCOL)

464

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

As the prospect moves to applicant status, you must take similar steps to delete,

inactivate, or continue with recruiting communication plans, and to add the admissions

plans. The same is true when an applicant becomes a student.

If you perform a Save function from the Communication Plan Change Window, you

are given the message Communication Plan Update in Process... which you must

acknowledge, before the plan is added for the recruit. If you choose the Exit function,

the communication plan window disappears, and no communication plan is assigned.

9. After registration exists, 1) changes in student information that may cause a plan

change (campus, level, college, degree) must be made on the Student Course

Registration Form (SFAREGS), and 2) the Communication Plan Change Window will

not appear in this form. Instead, a collector file which can be viewed and processed

individually online in the Communication Plan Collector Form (SOACCOL) is updated

with the changes made that cause the communication plan change or materials to be

sent. In order to process these changes in batch, the Communication Plan Processing

Report (SORCPLN) must be run to update communication plans according to the

entered parameters.

Note: Any batch process which may affect a communication plan or

materials to be sent to a plan member updates this collector file on

SOACCOL. Those collector records may be updated individually online or

in batch via the Communication Plan Processing Report (SORCPLN).

Communication plan information updates the batch collector file when you run the

Electronic Prospect Load Process (SRTLOAD), the Student Type Update Report

(SHRTYPE), the Admission Decision Calculation Report (SARBDSN), or when you

make changes to the general student information after registration information exists.

Use the Communication Plan Collector Form (SOACCOL) to display the people which

have been added to the collector file for batch processing for communication plans.

The Communication Plan Processing Report (SORCPLN) updates these changes for

communication plans in the collector file. The changes may be updated online by the

performance of a Count Query Hits function from the record you want to update.

10. Use the Communication Plan Assignment Form (SOAPLAN) to assign or view

assigned communication plans for a person. The Module Indicator radio group value

of Recruiting, Admissions, or Student, indicates which module the plan is

associated with. A communication plan follows a person through these modules and

may be turned off or on online as processing changes or as the plan changes,

according to the rules which have been defined. A person may have multiple

communication plans assigned to them which are differentiated by term code and

application or sequence number. The term code is associated with recruiting or

admissions status, while the application or sequence number identifies the specific

recruiting or admissions application.

When the Active (Indicator) in the Assignment section is checked, the person will

receive materials for the plan code. When the Mail Exists (Indicator) in the

Assignment section is checked, the materials have been automatically posted to the

Student Mail Form (SUAMAIL) and have been sent via Letter Generation, based on

the plan code that generated the materials. Materials may be sent manually once a

plan is assigned to a person, materials are created, and the rules for the materials

meet the criteria for addition to SUAMAIL.

465

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

When a Count Query Hits function is performed from the Plan field in the Assignment

section, materials are created for a new communication plan for the person whose ID

is in the Key Information.

Electronic Prospects Processing

This section discusses electronic prospects.

Overview

Electronic Prospects processing provides a Web data entry point into the existing

electronic prospects search and test score data load functionality and allows for recruit

information to be available in the Banner Student Self-Service module called Web for

Prospects.

Please refer to the Banner Student Self-Service User Guide for more information on the

Web for Prospects module. Please refer to the “Search and Test Score Data Load” section

which follows “Electronic Prospects Processing” for more procedural information.

The following forms are used to support the electronic prospects functionality:

• Web Prospect How I Learned About Validation Form (STVLEND)

• Electronic Prospect Validation Form (STVPREL)

• Web Acknowledgment Validation Form (STVWACK)

• Web Prospect Information Selection Validation Form (STVWPIC)

• Electronic Prospects Default Options Form (SRAPRED)

• Electronic Prospect Detail Form (SRAPREL)

• Recruit Prospect Information Form (SRARECR)

• Web for Prospects Acknowledgment Letter Form (SRAWACK)

• Web for Prospects Display Rules Form (SRAWPDS)

• Web for Prospects Selection Rules Form (SRAWPRO)

Processing Steps

Use these steps to set up the Web for Prospects Web page entry:

1. Enter your Web prospect type code on the Electronic Prospect Validation Form

(STVPREL). (Required)

2. Identify the data entry sections to be displayed on the Web page on the Web for

Prospects Selection Rules Form (SRAWPRO). (Required)

466

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

Warning! Depending on your locale, it might be illegal to require users to

provide ethnicity and race information. Do not check the Response

Required on Web checkbox on SRAWPRO for the ETHNICITY

(Prospect Ethnicity/Race) Web prospect selection code if requiring users

to provide ethnicity and race information is prohibited.

If such a regulation applies to your institution, you must also review your

existing Web selection definitions and uncheck this checkbox for any

selections for which it is currently checked.

3. Enter default recruiting data on the Electronic Prospects Default Options Form

(SRAPRED). (Optional)

4. Select Banner validation items to appear in the Web lists on the Web for Prospects

Display Rules Form (SRAWPDS). (Optional)

5. Write your acknowledgment letter on the Web for Prospects Acknowledgment Letter

Form (SRAWACK). The letter is constructed dynamically and appears at the end of

the Web data entry. (Optional)

Web Prospect How I Learned About Validation Form (STVLEND)

This form is used to build Web for Prospects How I Learned About codes to designate how

the prospect learned about the school. These codes are entered by prospects on the Web

for Prospects Web entry forms. The data is migrated to the Banner production Recruiting

module and is available on the Recruit Prospect Information Form (SRARECR).

Electronic Prospect Validation Form (STVPREL)

This form is used to enter the electronic prospect type codes. The Enter on WEB and

WEB Page ID fields are used to support Web for Prospects.

The prospect codes that do not have the Enter on WEB checkbox checked cannot be

entered on the Web. The WEB Page ID field is used for grouping prospects on a Web

page. For example, if your institution has several undergraduate programs, you may have

different default values and require that different data be entered. Therefore, you would

create separate prospect codes. You can key the selection of your undergraduate

programs off one site by constructing a link using the WEB Page ID value.

Web Acknowledgment Validation Form (STVWACK)

This form is used to build Web for Prospects Acknowledgment codes for data elements

from the Electronic Prospect System. The values delivered with Web for Prospects are

system-required. These codes are used on the Web for Prospects Acknowledgment Letter

Form (SRAWACK) for placing Electronic Prospect data elements on the Web

acknowledgment letter. The acknowledgment letter appears on the Web after the prospect

presses the Submit button.

467

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

Web Prospect Information Selection Validation Form (STVWPIC)

This form is used to build Web for Prospects Information Selection codes for Web data

entry sections. The values delivered with Web for Prospects are system-required. These

codes are entered on the Web for Prospects Selection Rules Form (SRAWPRO) to control

order and data entry requirements for the Web for Prospects Web entry forms.

Warning! Depending on your locale, it might be illegal to require users to

provide ethnicity and race information. Do not check the Response

Required on Web checkbox on SRAWPRO for the ETHNICITY

(Prospect Ethnicity/Race) Web prospect selection code if requiring users

to provide ethnicity and race information is prohibited.

If such a regulation applies to your institution, you must also review your

existing Web selection definitions and uncheck this checkbox for any

selections for which it is currently checked.

Electronic Prospects Default Options Form (SRAPRED)

This form is used to enter the default recruit values for Web-entered data.

Enter a code from STVPREL in the Electronic Prospect Code field in the key, and use

Next Block to see the default values for the prospect code. The prospect codes on

STVPREL must have the Enter on WEB checkbox checked in order to be displayed in the

list of values for the Electronic Prospect Code field on SRAPRED.

The Clear Defaults button is used to remove the existing values so new ones can be

entered for the code in the key.

This form is optional for use in Web for Prospects processing. The Level, Recruiting

Term, Degree, and Major are required in the Recruiting module. If those values are not

entered here, and this data is not entered on the Web, the Banner system-required values

will default into the recruiting records.

If you do enter data on this form, the Level field is required.

Web for Prospects Acknowledgment Letter Form (SRAWACK)

This form allows you to customize the acknowledgment letter. The acknowledgment letter

will appear on the Web page after the student presses the Submit button.

Enter a code from STVPREL in the Web Electronic Prospect Code field in the key, and

use Next Block to see the sequence numbers and variables for the letter. The prospect

codes on STVPREL must have the Enter on WEB checkbox checked in order to be

displayed in the list of values for the Web Electronic Prospect Code field on SRAWACK.

The Sequence field determines the order of the rows in the letter. When you first type in

your letter, you can leave the sequence number blank, and the sequence will

automatically fill in when you save the letter. Or, you can type in a sequence number

incrementing each line by five, just in case you need to add new lines at a later time.

468

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

The Formatting field is a pulldown list where you can select an HTML command. The

values for the field are blank, New Paragraph, New Line, or Horizontal Rule. The only time

the formatting is ignored is when the Text and the Prospect Data fields are blank. This

prevents blank lines from appearing in the middle of your letter.

The Prospect Data field is used for data elements from the Electronic Prospect System.

These variables are stored on the Web Acknowledgment Validation Form (STVWACK).

The Text field is a free format field where you can include HTML commands in the text for

additional formatting. Use the Comments button to display the Editor window and enter

your text.

Web for Prospects Display Rules Form (SRAWPDS)

This form allows you to reduce the number of choices the student can select from or to

change the descriptions that will display on the Web.

This is accomplished by customizing the pulldown lists with specific values from Banner

validation tables. All list boxes in the Web for Prospects Web pages are populated from

Banner validation tables.

Enter a code from STVPREL in the Web Electronic Prospect Code field in the key, and

use Next Block to see the table names and rules used with the prospect code. The

prospect codes on STVPREL must have the Enter on WEB checkbox checked in order to

be displayed in the list of values for the Web Electronic Prospect Code field on

SRAWPDS.

You may enter the last four characters of a validation table name in the Validation Table

Name field in the key to see only the rules for that validation table and the prospect code,

or leave the Validation Table Name blank to view all the rules for the prospect code. For

example, enter

TERM for STVTERM, CITZ for STVCITZ, and RESD for STVRESD.

Enter the validation code value in the Code Value field. The description from the

validation table will default, but you can type over the description in order to customize it.

The student will never see codes on the Web for Prospects Web page. They will only see

descriptions. If you do not enter data on this form, all entries in the Banner 2000 validation

table will be listed.

High School and Prior College Lists

The Web for Prospects Web page allows you to search for a high school or prior college.

The search process will first prompt the student to select the state, province, or nation

from pulldown lists. The student is next prompted to select the name of the city where the

school is located. The last selection is for the school itself.

The requirement for this search is that address data be present for the schools included in

the search. School addresses are maintained on the Source or Background Institution

Base Form (SOASBGI).

The High School entry section has an alternative checkbox where the student can indicate

he or she was home schooled. The STVSBGI value for the Home School must be stored

on the SAAERUL rule for

HOMESCHOOL.

469

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

If the student cannot find his or her school in the selection, yet he or she enters the name

of the school, or any of the self reported data (including GPA, graduation date, rank, or

class size), the school code will default in the value on the SAAERUL rule for

UNKNOWNHSCH. If the student enters a school code that is not included in your STVSBGI

table, that value will still be stored in the SRTHSCH or SRTPCOL table in the

SBGI_CODE_INVALID

column.

Web for Prospects Selection Rules Form (SRAWPRO)

This form is used to identify the selections for display on the Web and the order in which

they display.

Enter a code from STVPREL in the Web Electronic Prospect Code field in the key, and

use Next Block to see the selection codes used with the prospect code. The prospect

codes on STVPREL must have the Enter on WEB checkbox checked in order to be

displayed in the list of values for the Web Electronic Prospect Code field on SRAWPRO.

The values in the Selection Code field are created on the Web Prospect Information

Selection Validation Form (STVWPIC) and are system-required. Each selection is equated

to data elements in the Web for Prospects module of the Banner Student Self-Service

product.

Use the Address Code and EMAIL (Code) fields to enter the values to be used. These

values are required for the selection codes

ADDRESS1, ADDRESS2, and EMAIL.

The Display Order on Web field is used to designate the order of the modules on the

Web page that fits your requirements.

The Response Required on Web checkbox, when checked, is used to force the prospect

to enter data on the Web page.

Warning! Depending on your locale, it might be illegal to require users to

provide ethnicity and race information. Do not check the Response

Required on Web checkbox on SRAWPRO for the ETHNICITY

(Prospect Ethnicity/Race) Web prospect selection code if requiring users

to provide ethnicity and race information is prohibited.

If such a regulation applies to your institution, you must also review your

existing Web selection definitions and uncheck this checkbox for any

selections for which it is currently checked.

When you first enter this form with a new prospect code from STVPREL, the selection

codes for

NAME and ADDRESS1 will automatically default.

If you have not entered any selection codes on this form for a prospect code from

STVPREL, the prospect code will not be available on any Web page in Web for Prospects.

Electronic Prospect Detail Form (SRAPREL)

This form is used to view biographical and search or test score data for a person that has

been loaded to the temporary tables. The form allows you to view all search data load

470

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

records for this ID which are present in the Search Tape View (SRVPREL). This form is

accessed independently or from the Electronic Prospect Inquiry Form (SRIPREL) using

the Detail item in the Options Menu.

Test Scores/Interests/Learned Window

Use this window to view test score and interest information for the record, as well as how

the person learned about the school. Use the Test Scores/Interests item in the Options

Menu of the main window to access this window.

The (Learned About Institution) Code in the (How I) Learned block is used by Web for

Prospects to capture how the person learned about the school. The data is initially stored

in Web for Prospects and is viewable from SRAPREL. After the prospect has been

migrated to Banner Production, the data is available on SRARECR.

The How I Learned data is migrated to the recruit record based on the rule value

CREATELEARNED, which is stored on SAAERUL under the group PREL. If the

CREATELEARNED rule is Y, the prospect How I Learned data is migrated to the recruit

How I Learned data.

The (Learned About Institution) Code is validated on the Web Prospect How I Learned

About Validation Form (STVLEND).

Requested Materials Window

The Requested Materials window is used to compliment the collection of that data for

prospects in the Web for Prospects module of Banner Student Self-Service. This window

is used to list the materials requested by the student. The SRTMATL table is used to store

the materials collected on the Web.

The SRKPREL package is used to migrate SRTMATL data to GURMAIL in Banner

production. The materials will not be migrated to GURMAIL if they fail the duplicate

checking rules. A material is a duplicate if an existing GURMAIL row exists for the same

material and has a blank print date, or the GURMAIL row exists for the same material with

a non-blank print date, but the Allow Duplicate Entry rule on SOAMATL is not checked.

Use the rule on the Electronic Admissions Application Rules Form (SAAERUL) where the

Group (Code) is

PREL and the Label is CREATEMATERIALS.

Recruit Prospect Information Form (SRARECR)

This form provides the information necessary for all recruitment-related activities, captures

and validates information on prospective applicants, and in the Comments/Learned

window contains information for electronic prospect processing on how the person learned

about the school.

Comments/Learned Window

Use this window to enter comments about the prospect and to view information on how

the person learned about the school. This window is accessed using the Comments,

Learned item in the Options Menu.

471

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

The (How I) Learned (About Institution Code) in the (How I) Learned block is used by

Web for Prospects to capture how the person learned about the school. The data is initially

stored in Web for Prospects and is viewable from SRAPREL. After the prospect has been

migrated to Banner Production, the data is available on SRARECR.

The How I Learned data is migrated to the recruit record based on the rule value

CREATELEARNED, which is stored on SAAERUL under the group PREL. If the

CREATELEARNED rule is Y, the prospect How I Learned data is migrated to the recruit

How I Learned data.

The (How I) Learned (About Institution Code) is validated on the Web Prospect How I

Learned About Validation Form (STVLEND).

Electronic Admissions Application Rules Form (SAAERUL)

This form is used to define the rules which are used when processing electronic

applications, electronic prospects, and data loads. Rows for this table are not intended to

be added locally. Rules which will be used in system processing will be delivered, and

users will only need to update the (Rule) Value to reflect local processing options if it

contains

UPDATE ME.

Rules fall into three major categories:

• Rules which control processing within Web admissions, Web prospects, or data load

processing.

For example, there is a rule which specifies the number of outside interest slots which

will display in Web applications.

• Rules which specify default values for various data elements. These kinds of rules can

apply to both Web and EDI applications.

• Rules which govern how data will be loaded into the permanent Banner tables.

For example, there is a set of rules which specifies whether application records will be

created if one already exists for the person, term, level, major, or overall curriculum

chosen.

Three general types of values may be required in the (Rule) Value field, and the Rule

Description field will usually indicate the type of value expected.

• Simple descriptive answers, like true, false, or a number to indicate the number of

values which will be available.

• A valid Banner validation table code, like an address type code.

• An EDI value which is valid within the TS189 transaction set. A complete, current listing

of all codes used in the TS189 transaction set is available online.

For a complete current set of EDI values, you can consult the Postsecondary Electronic

Standards Council (PESC) Website (

www.pesc.org) and use the link to the EDI

Implementation Guides.

472

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

(When a valid EDI value is expected, the EDI Indicator for the rule will be checked or

Y).

Use the Copy PREL Group button to copy existing electronic prospect rules to a new

group code. Once the values have been copied, the System Required Indicator defaults

N or unchecked, so you can customize the group settings. This allows users to

customize the electronic prospect rules based on each electronic prospect code used,

instead of the same set of values applying to all electronic prospect codes.

For example, if an electronic prospect code of

SAT exists and you want it to be processed

differently based on the rules for a group code of

PREL on SAAERUL, then do the

following.

1. Define a new group code on the EDI Rule Group Validation Form (STVEGRP) for

SAT. (The new group code must match the electronic prospect code).

2. Enter

SAT in the Group field on SAAERUL.

3. Select the Copy PREL Group button. All of the rules that exist for the

PREL group

code will be copied to your new

SAT group code.

4. You can customize those values, and they will be applied only when the electronic

prospect code used on SRTLOAD, SRRSRIN, or SRRPREL is

SAT.

Rules on SAAERUL

The rules on the Electronic Admissions Application Rules Form (SAAERUL) with the

Group (Code)

PREL allow you to set up default values for such things as an unknown

high school and to control the migration of the data.

New Recruit Data

Rules are used for determining under what circumstances recruiting records, addresses,

and phone numbers will be loaded. For the rule label

CREATENEWRECR (no recruit

exists, create new recruit), the possible values are

Y or N. When an incoming record is

being loaded and matched to an existing Banner person, the code will check if a recruiting

record already exists for the person. If none does, then the code will check the

CREATENEWRECR rule. If the rule value is Y, then the incoming data will be used to create

a recruiting record. If the rule value is

N, then no recruiting record will be created.

The two other rules used for creating a recruiting record are

MCREATENEWRECR

(matching recruit exists, create new recruit) and

NMCREATENEWRECR (non-matching

recruit exists, create new recruit).

• The possible values for MCREATENEWRECR are Y, N, or U (Update). If an incoming

record is being loaded, the program will determine if a matching recruiting record

already exists. An existing recruiting record matches if it has the same term, level, and

optionally campus.

• If the incoming record matches the existing recruiting record, and the

MCREATENEWRECR rule value is Y, then a new recruiting record will be created.

• If the

MCREATENEWRECR rule value is U, then no new recruiting record will be

created, and instead, the existing recruiting record will be updated. If a matching

473

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

recruiting record exists, and the incoming contact, source, and/or interests are

different, those values are updated.

• If the

MCREATENEWRECR rule value is N, then no recruiting record will be added,

and the existing recruit record will not be updated.

• The possible values for NMCREATENEWRECR are Y or N. If an incoming record is being

loaded, and it does not match to an existing recruiting record (based on term, level, and

optionally campus), then the code will check the

NMCREATENEWRECR rule to

determine whether or not to create a new recruiting record.

New Address Data

The rule label NEWADDRESS (no address exists, create one) is used when no address

currently exists for the person in Banner. The possible values are

Y or N. If the rule value

is set to

Y and no address currently exists for the person, the incoming address will be

loaded.

The two other rules used for creating an address record are

ADDRDIFFTYPE (address

exists with different address type, add address) and

ADDRSAMETYPE (address exists

with same address type, add address). The possible values for these rules are

Y or N.

• If an address already exists in Banner, and the incoming address record has the same

address type, the address record will be inserted if the

ADDRSAMETYPE rule value is Y.

• If the incoming address record has an address type that differs from the existing Banner

address record, and the

ADDRDIFFTYPE rule value is Y, then the incoming address

record will be loaded. If the

ADDRDIFFTYPE rule value is N, it will not be loaded.

New Phone Data

The rule label NEWPHONE (no phone exists, create one) is used when no phone number

currently exists for the person in Banner. The possible values are

Y or N, where Y creates

a new phone number, and

N does not create a new phone number.

The two other rules used for creating a phone record are

PHONDIFFTYPE (phone

number exists with different phone type, add phone) and

PHONSAMETYPE (phone

number exists with same phone type, add phone). The possible values for these rules are

Y or N.

• If a telephone record already exists in Banner, and the incoming telephone record has

the same phone type, the phone number will be inserted if the

PHONSAMETYPE rule

value is

• If the incoming phone record has a phone type that differs from the existing Banner

phone type, and the

PHONDIFFTYPE rule value is Y, then the incoming phone number

will be loaded. If the value is

N, it will not be loaded.

Web for Prospects Phone and Address Data

Web for Prospects allows users to enter extra phone numbers in Banner Student Self-

Service that are not associated with a specific address. If extra phone numbers are

474

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

entered by prospects on the Web, they will be processed in conjunction with address/

phone data as follows:

1. The primary address (Address 1) is loaded to Banner along with its associated phone

number using the electronic prospect rules identified above.

2. The secondary address (Address 2), if it exists, is loaded to Banner along with its

associated phone number using the electronic prospect rules identified above.

3. The extra phone numbers entered are processed one at a time, based on the

alphabetical order of the telephone type, using the electronic prospect rules identified

above.

For example:

• NEWPHONE = Y

• NEWADDRESS =Y

• PHONSAMETYPE = N

• PHONDIFFTYPE = Y

The person being loaded is new to Banner and has entered a mailing address and phone

number. In addition, they have entered a separate “mailing” phone number and a

“business” phone number. When the record is processed, the mailing address and phone

number will be loaded, because the

NEWADDRESS and NEWPHONE rules are both set to

Next, the business phone number will be processed, because it falls first alphabetically

based on the phone type. The business phone number will be loaded, because it is a

different type than the already processed mailing phone number, and the

PHONDIFFTYPE rule is set to Y. The mailing phone number will then be processed. It will

also be loaded to Banner, because it is a different type than one of the existing Banner

phone numbers (the business phone that was just processed), and the

PHONDIFFTYPE

rule is set to

SAAERUL Rules

The rules on the Electronic Admissions Application Rules Form (SAAERUL) with the

Group (Code) of

PREL allow you to control how the incoming data is processed. Please

see the table of rules that follows.

Note: Rows for this table are not intended to be added locally. Rules

which will be used in system processing will be delivered, and users will

only need to update the (Rule) Value on SAAERUL to reflect local

processing options.

Please refer to the “Loading Packages/Procedures from Temporary to Production Tables

(SRKPREL) Process Flows” section of the “Process Flows” chapter to review process

flows describing how recruiting data is loaded and updated.

475

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

Group Label Description EDI Instructions

DISP WEBPTESTDISP # of Prospects Test

Rows

N Determines the number of test score

rows that will display on the Web for

Prospects Web page.

PREL ACTADMR Default ADMR code for

ACT

N Identifies the checklist summary

request default ADMR code value to

be updated in the Application Detail

block of the Admissions Application

Form (SAAADMS), if it exists for the

record. This value will also be used to

populate the Admission Request

field on the Test Score Information

Form (SOATEST).

This default is only used for ACT data

loads and when the ADMR value is

not populated on the Test Code

Validation Form (STVTESC) for ACT

test code record types.

PREL ADDRDIFFTYPE Create address if

different type

N Determines if an address should be

created, if one with a different address

type already exists. If set to

Y, an

address record will be created. If set

N, no address record will be

created.

PREL ADDRSAMETYPE Create address if same

type

N Determines if an address should be

created, if one with the same address

type already exists. If set to

Y, a new

address record will be created. If set

N, no address record will be

created.

PREL COMMPLAN Create commplan

collector entry

If set to

Y, a record will be inserted

into the Communication Plan

Collector Table (SORCCOL) which is

visible on the Communication Plan

Collector Form (SOACCOL).

476

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

PREL CREATECONT Create new contact if

recruit or app.

If set to

Y, the contact code entered as

a parameter on the SRTLOAD

process for data load or the contact

code listed on the Electronic

Prospects Default Options Form

(SRAPRED) for electronic prospects

will be inserted into the SORCONT

table viewable on the Recruit

Prospect Information Form

(SRARECR) if a recruit record exists

and the Admissions Application Form

(SAAADMS) if an application record

exists.

If no contact code was loaded via

SRTLOAD, and this parameter is

the system will insert the contact code

for the appropriate interface code

from the Interface Code Validation

Form (STVINFC). The appropriate

contact code will be loaded each time

the recruit is loaded to Banner.

If set to

N, a contact code will not be

created for new recruit records.

PREL CREATELEARNED Create learned: Enter Y

or N

Y is entered, and if the prospect is

new to Banner, or if the prospect is

matched to a recruit, and the recruit

term, level, and campus are different,

then the How I Learned data is

created. The learned information will

always be created if the prospect is

matched to an applicant and the

UPDATEIIFAPP is Y, or if the

prospect is matched to a recruit with

same term, level, and campus. The

learned data is entered only on the

Web.

PREL CREATEMATERIALS Create Materials: Enter

Y or N

Y is entered, and if the prospect is

new to Banner, or if the prospect is

matched to a recruit, and the recruit

term, level, and campus are different,

then the materials data are created.

The materials will always be created if

the prospect is matched to an

applicant and the

UPDATEIIFAPP is

Y, or if the prospect is matched to a

recruit with same term, level, and

campus.

Group Label Description EDI Instructions

477

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

PREL CREATENEWAPPL Create New Application N Allows schools to indicate that they

want an application record created at

the same time a recruit record is

created by SRRPREL.

When this rule is

Y, a new application

will only be created when the term,

level, college, degree, department,

and/or major do not match an existing

application.

PREL CREATENEWRECR Create new recruit Y

If set to

Y and no recruit record exists,

a new recruit record will be created. If

set to

N and no recruit record already

exists, then a new recruit record will

not be created.

PREL CREATESRCE Create new source Y

If set to

Y, the source code entered as

a parameter on the SRTLOAD

process for data load or the source

ode listed on the Electronic Prospects

Default Options Form (SRAPRED) for

electronic prospects will be inserted

into the SRRRSRC table viewable on

the Recruit Prospect Information

Form (SRARECR). If no source code

was loaded via SRTLOAD, and this

parameter is

Y, the system will insert

the source code for this from the

Interface Code Validation Form

(STVINFC).

PREL GMATADMR Default ADMR code for

GMAT

N Identifies the checklist summary

request default ADMR code value to

be updated in the Application Detail

block of the Admissions Application

Form (SAAADMS), if it exists for the

record. This value will also be used to

populate the Admission Request

field on the Test Score Information

Form (SOATEST).

This default is only used for GMAT

data loads and when the ADMR value

is not populated on the Test Code

Validation Form (STVTESC) for

GMAT test code record types.

Group Label Description EDI Instructions

478

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

PREL GREADMR Default ADMR code for

GRE

N Identifies the checklist summary

request default ADMR code value to

be updated in the Application Detail

block of the Admissions Application

Form (SAAADMS), if it exists for the

record. This value will also be used to

populate the Admission Request

field on the Test Score Information

Form (SOATEST).

This default is only used for GRE data

loads and when the ADMR value is

not populated on the Test Code

Validation Form (STVTESC) for GRE

test code record types.

PREL HOMESCHOOL SBGI code, if the

prospect checks the

Home School checkbox

on Web for Prospects

Web page

N This applies only to the Web. The

value entered on SAAERUL for this

must be a valid high school on

STVSBGI.

PREL HSCHADMR Default High School

Checklist

N This value will be used to populate the

Admissions Request field on the

High School Information Form

(SOAHSCH). This default is only used

when the Admissions Request value

is not populated on the Source/

Background Institution Code

Validation Form (STVSBGI).

PREL HSCHSELFREPORT Update self-reported

items

If set to

Y, then the student self-

reported items, such as GPA, class

rank, etc., will be loaded to the

appropriate tables.

PREL INTERESTMAX Maximum interest to

load

1 Indicates the number of interests to

be loaded from a search data load to

the SORINTS table if the

LOADINTEREST group label is set to

PREL LOADALTID Load Same Alt ID Type/

Diff ID

If set to

N, do not load an incoming

additional ID for the same additional

ID type.

If set to

Y, load an incoming additional

ID for the same additional ID type, as

long as the additional ID is different.

Group Label Description EDI Instructions

479

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

PREL LOADINTEREST Load interests N

If set to

Y, interests provided will be

loaded to the SORINTS table. All

interest codes must have Banner

conversion values defined on the

Tape Code Conversion Form

(SOTCNVT) for the Validation Table

Name of

INTS.

PREL LOADMAJOR Use provided major N

If set to

Y, majors provided will be

loaded to a field of study row with a

Type of

MAJOR and a Priority of 1

(backfilled to the Major 1 field on

SRBRECR) and to a field of study row

with a Type of

MAJOR and a Priority

2 (backfilled to the Major 2 field on

SRBRECR). All major codes must

have Banner conversion values

defined on the Tape Code Conversion

Form (SOTCNVT) for the Validation

Table Name of

MAJR.

PREL LOADOLDTESTS Load older test scores N

If set to

Y, test score records with test

dates older than the current record’s

scores will also be loaded.

PREL MAJOR2INTEREST Load major to interests N

If set to

Y, and LOADINTEREST is

set to

Y, major codes provided will be

converted and loaded to the

SORINTS table. All major codes for

which interests are to be loaded must

have Banner conversion values set

appropriately on the Tape Code

Conversion Form (SOTCNVT) for the

Validation Table Name of

INTS.

Group Label Description EDI Instructions

480

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

PREL MCREATENEWRECR Matching create new

recruit

If set to

Y, and the incoming record

matches an existing recruiting record,

then a new recruiting record is

created.

If set to

U, and the incoming record

matches an existing recruiting record,

then no recruiting record is created,

and the existing record is updated. If a

matching recruiting record exists, and

the incoming contact, source, and/or

interests are different, those values

are updated.

If set to

N, and the incoming record

matches an existing recruiting record,

then no recruiting record is created,

and no records are updated.

A match exists if the incoming record

has the same term, level, and

optionally campus as the existing

recruiting record.

PREL NEWADDRESS Create address Y

If set to

Y, and no address record

exists for the person in Banner, an

address record will be created. If set

N, and no address record exists, no

record will be created.

PREL NEWPHONE Create phone Y

If set to

Y, and no phone record exists

for the person in Banner, a phone

record will be created. If set to

N, and

no phone record exists, no record will

be created.

PREL NMCREATENEWRECR Non-match create new

recruit

If set to

Y, and the incoming record

does not match an existing recruit

record, a new recruiting record is

created. If set to

N, no recruiting

record is created.

A match exists if the incoming record

has the same term, level, and

optionally campus as the existing

recruiting record.

Group Label Description EDI Instructions

481

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

PREL PCOLADMR Default Prior College

Checklist

N This value will be used to populate the

Admissions Request field on the

Prior College Form (SOAPCOL). This

default is only used when the

Admissions Request value is not

populated on the Source/Background

Institution Code Validation Form

(STVSBGI).

PREL PHONDIFFTYPE Create phone if different

type exists

N Determines if a phone record should

be created, if one with a different

phone type already exists. If set to

a phone record will be created. If set

N, no phone record will be created.

PREL PHONSAMETYPE Create phone if same

type exists

N Determines if a phone record should

be created, if one with the same

phone type already exists. If set to

a new phone record will be created. If

set to N, no phone record will be

created.

PREL PRIMESRCE Create source as

primary

If set to

Y, and CREATESRCE is set to

Y, then the source code loaded to the

SRRRSRC table will be set as the

primary source. Only one source will

be flagged as primary for each recruit

term and sequence number upon

loading to Banner.

Group Label Description EDI Instructions

482

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

PREL PSATMAJOR Obsolete Sept 2013

SSS_SEARCH

Formerly, Load the

PSAT Major First

This rule is obsolete as

of September 2013 and

is no longer used with

the SSS_SEARCH data

load.

N Loads the PSAT major if it exists. This

rule is only used for SSS_SEARCH

data load processing.

When

LOADMAJOR is set to Y and

PSATMAJOR is set to Y, and the

PSAT exists, the PSAT major will be

loaded to a field of study row with a

Type of

MAJOR and a Priority of 1

(backfilled to the Major 1 field on

SRBRECR). The first SAT major code

listed on the file will then be loaded to

a field of study row with a Type of

MAJOR and a Priority of 2 (backfilled

to the Major 2 field on SRBRECR) if it

exists.

When

LOADMAJOR is set to Y and

PSATMAJOR is set to N, the PSAT

major will not load at all, and the first

two SAT major codes on the file will

be loaded to a field of study row with a

Type of

MAJOR and a Priority of 1

(backfilled to the Major 1 field on

SRBRECR) and a field of study row

with a Type of

MAJOR and a Priority

2 (backfilled to the Major 2 field on

SRBRECR), if they exist.

Note: Whatever your settings are in

SAAERUL, if the second major to be

loaded translates to 0000

(undeclared), the second major will

not be loaded.

PREL SATHADMR Default ADMR code for

SAT

N Identifies the checklist summary

request default ADMR code value to

be updated in the Application Detail

block of the Admissions Application

Form (SAAADMS), if it exists for the

record. This value will also be used to

populate the Admission Request

field on the Test Score Information

Form (SOATEST).

This default is only used for SAT data

loads and when the ADMR value is

not populated on the Test Code

Validation Form (STVTESC) for SAT

test code record types.

Group Label Description EDI Instructions

483

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

PREL UNKNOWNHSCH SBGI code, if the student

enters an invalid SBGI

code on the Web

N This source/background institution

(SBGI) code will fill in the

SRTHSCH_SBGI_CODE, and the

code the student entered will fill into

SRTHSCH_SBGI_CODE_INVALID.

This code is also used if student

leaves the SBGI code blank but

enters a name of the institution or any

of the self-reported data. This rule is

for the Web only. The value entered

on SAAERUL for this must be a valid

high school on STVSBGI.

PREL UNKNOWNPCOL SBGI code, if the student

enters an invalid SBGI

code on the Web

N This source/background institution

(SBGI) code will fill in the

SRTPCOL_SBGI_CODE, and the

code the student entered will fill into

SRTPCOL_SBGI_CODE_INVALID.

This code is also used if student

leaves the SBGI code blank but

enters a name of the institution or any

of the self-reported data. This rule is

for the Web only. The value entered

on SAAERUL for this must be a valid

college on STVSBGI.

PREL UPDATEIFAPP Update recruit record if

application exists

If set to

Y, then the settings of the

previous rules will be followed, even if

a recruit record already exists for this

person for the same term, level, and

campus. If set to

N, and a matching

recruit record already exists, then

based on your SAAERUL settings,

the process will:

• Insert new test score records on the

Test Score Information Form

(SOATEST).

• Insert new high school records on

the High School Information Form

(SOAHSCH).

• Insert new college records on the

Prior College Form (SOAPCOL).

• Insert the contact code into the

SORCONT table.

• Insert the source code into the

SRRRSRC table if a matching

recruit record exists or insert the

source code into the SARRSRC

table if a matching application

record exists.

• Update Null values on the General

Person Form (SPAPERS).

Group Label Description EDI Instructions

484

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

Data Load and Match Processing

This section discuses data load and match processing for recruiting.

Overview of Banner Student External Load and Match Process

The following steps include technical details of the data load process for the student test

score data loads, search data loads, electronic prospects, and electronic applicants. This

discussion is intended to provide information on how the process works from a technical

perspective.

For additional information on Common Matching, please refer to the Banner General User

Guide and the “Common Matching Processing” procedures in the “General Person”

chapter of this user guide.

External Load Processes

External data is loaded into various sets of temporary tables depending on the source of

the external data. Test score data such as SATs, GREs, AMCAS, etc., is loaded into

temporary tables beginning with SRT, as is search file data and Banner Student Self-

Service prospect data. If you are using the Electronic Prospect Match Process

(SRRSRIN), the test score data is loaded into temporary tables beginning with SOR or

SRT, which can be viewed on the Electronic Prospect Inquiry Form (SRIPREL) and the

Electronic Prospect Detail Form (SRAPREL). Self-service admissions data is loaded into

temporary tables beginning with SARXXXX. Data loaded into the SARXXXX temporary

tables can be viewed on the Electronic Application Submitted Form (SAAETBL).

Once external data has been loaded into its respective temporary tables, it can be

matched manually (using SRIPREL or SAAEAPS) or in batch (using SRRSRIN or

SARETMT). The manual match process uses the Common Matching Entry Form

PREL VTYPADMR Default ADMR Code for

the Visa

Y Identifies the Checklist Summary

Request Code for the Visa Code

value to be inserted on the

Admissions Application Detail block of

the Admissions Application Form

(SAAADMS) when loading a record

from the Banner Student Self-Service

Prospects (Recruiting) or Admissions

modules. This rule is only used by the

Web interface.

PREL WEBGENID For Web only, use

generated ID, or use

entered SSN for ID

Enter

G to always use the generated

ID which uses SOBSEQN functions.

Enter

S to use the SSN entered on

the Web. If neither is entered, use a

generated ID.

Group Label Description EDI Instructions

485

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

(GOAMTCH) and the Common Matching algorithm to match incoming records to existing

Banner records.

Setting up Rule Restrictions on GORCMRL

The rules that define how the Common Matching algorithm searches for duplicates are

defined on the Common Matching Rules Form (GORCMRL). There are certain restrictions

on these rules:

• The algorithm requires that the last name or non-person name

(

SPRIDEN_SEARCH_LAST_NAME) be included in all your rules.

• For data elements where you can change the number of characters to use in matching

from what exists in the data dictionary, you cannot change the length to zero.

• If you enter a negative length for the number of characters to compare for the field, the

algorithm will start checking the specified number of characters with the last character in

the string.

Note: It is recommended that you not use a negative length for SSN/SIN/

TIN. It could create performance issues.

Different pieces of data are required depending on whether you are adding a person or

non-person record:

• For a person record, data in Last Name and First Name must exist. No other data is

required to initiate the Common Matching process. If data is entered in the Last Name

field, the

GOTCMME_ENTITY_IND must equal P for matching a person.

• For a non-person record, data in the Non-Person Name only must exist. No other data is

required to initiate the Common Matching process. If data is entered in the Non-person

Name field, the

GOTCMME_ENTITY_IND must equal C for matching a non-person.

Using the Common Matching Algorithm

The Common Matching algorithm uses the rules you create to evaluate new identification

records that are being added to the Banner database to see if they already exist. The

algorithm will return:

• New if no matching records or potential matches are found, based on the rules defined

for the matching source.

• Match if only one record is found that matches all the criteria of the rules. In this case,

the algorithm will return the PIDM.

• Potential Match (Suspense) if multiple records are found that match the

criteria, or if records are found that match only some of the criteria. In this case, the

algorithm returns the PIDMs of all possible matches. The data is stored in a temporary

table until the user finishes investigating them.

486

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

Note: When the algorithm is matching on non-code fields such as name,

the

gokcmpr.f_compress_name function will remove spaces,

special characters, and force the text to be upper case.

For a match or a potential match, the conditions met and unmet will also be returned, for

example:

Name Match, Date of Birth Year Match, Address No Match

How the Matching Process Works in Banner Student

When you enter an ID on SPAIDEN that does not exist in Banner and then execute the

matching process, you can receive a match status of “New”, “Match”, or “Potential Match”.

New Records

Records are matched with a status of “New” if no records match, based on the rules that

have been set up. When a record is identified as being new, the General Person APIs are

used to insert the data into SPRIDEN, SPRADDR, SPRTELE, SPBPERS, and/or

GOREMAL. Once the record is made new, you are returned to SPAIDEN.

Matched Records

Records are matched with a status of “Match” if one, and only one, record in Banner

matches the incoming person based on the rules that have been set up.

Data for the matched PIDM is displayed for review by the user. You can select the

matched record and return to the main window of SPAIDEN, or you can update the

matched person with data entered in the Data Entry block on GOAMTCH before returning

to SPAIDEN.

Potentially Matched Records

Records are matched with a status of “Potential Match” (or “Suspense”) if some, but not

all, fields match someone in Banner based on the rules that have been set up. For

example, the first and last names for the record match, but the date of birth does not

match.

You can create the person as “New”, or you can select one of the potentially matched

records as the “Match”.

Rule Examples

Here is one set of rules that can be used in Banner Student.

487

Banner Student User Guide | Recruiting

Matching Algorithm - Primary and Secondary Matches